Manual - ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 - 100373-010 Rev AR0

GE Transportation Systems
Global Signaling
ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5

System Operation and Maintenance
100373-010 AR0
VOLUME ONE
© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. The information contained in this publication is the
property of GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC ("GETS") and is disclosed in confidence. This publication is intended for
use by GETS customers solely for purposes of operating, training and performing routine maintenance of purchased or licensed GETS
products, and it shall not be reproduced, redistributed, retransmitted, translated, abridged, adapted, condensed, revised or otherwise
modified, in any form, in whole or in part, or used for any other purpose or disclosed to others, without the express written consent of
GETS. However, if a GETS customer (“Customer”) requires additional copies of this document or portions thereof for internal use, GETS
hereby grants to Customer a limited right to reproduce this publication, in whole or in part, and Customer agrees to use such authorized
copies (“Copies”) solely for its intended purposes. Any Copies made under this limited reproduction right shall contain this notice and
any other legal notices appearing in this publication. The Customer shall be responsible for complying with U.S. export control laws with
respect of distribution of all Copies.
GETS and Customer agree that the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in GETS products
or to provide for every possible contingency with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should
particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the user’s purposes, the matter should be referred to GETS. Any applicable
Federal, State or local regulations or company safety or operating rules must take precedence over any information or instructions given
in the Technical Documentation. GETS has no obligation to keep the material up to date after the original publication.
GE TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS GLOBAL SIGNALING, LLC EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS PUBLICATION AND USE THEREOF.
Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement
The information contained in this Technical Manual (the “Document”) is the property of GE Transportation Global
Signaling (“GETSGS”) and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. Any unauthorized use or
reproduction of this Document without the prior written consent of GETSGS, whether in hard copy or in an
electronic form, is strictly prohibited [except as otherwise set forth below]. Notwithstanding the foregoing, GETSGS
hereby grants to the purchaser of the GETSGS equipment, or licensee of the GETSGS software (such purchaser
of licensee referred to herein as “You”), to which the Document pertains, the following limited reproduction rights.
By reproducing any portion of the Document, You expressly agree to the following terms and conditions. You may
make additional copies of the Document solely for use in connection with the GETSGS equipment or GETSGS
software to which it pertains, provided that each copy is a complete copy and does not alter the content or meaning
of the Document in any way, and provided further that each such copy preserves unaltered all trademark, copyright,
patent designations and proprietary or confidentiality notices contained therein, including this Reproduction and
Use Restrictions Agreement. Any other use or reproduction of any portion of the Document without the prior written
authorization of GETSGS is expressly prohibited.
Without limiting any other rights or remedies of GETSGS, in the event that You or any of Your employees, agents
or contractors copies any portion of the Document in violation of this Reproduction and Use Restrictions
Agreement, You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless GETSGS from and against any and all claims,
damages, losses, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorney’s fees) that may be incurred or awarded
by reason thereof.
Revision History
This document supersedes all previously issued versions, providing new or revised information. The most
recent publication can be determined by comparing the last three characters at the end of the part number
and the date issued.
Part Number: 100373-010 AR0
Revision Date
Level Issued General Description of Changes
AA0 02/28/03 Initial Release
AB0 02/01/05 Re-brand manual revise track circuit transmit and receive procedure.
AC0 02/01/06 Added new modules (VLD-R16S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S)
AD0 01/16/07 Minor typographical errors fixed
Updated ElectrologIXS CIO key Pins to remove when CIO-2A and CIO-MDA are
AE0 07/02/07 installed in the system and also updated as per the markup’s.
AF0 12/03/07 Incorporated VPM-3 module, CI-2 module and Web GUI information.
AG0 04/16/08 Added CI-2 Flash Memory application download.
AH0 06/16/08 Incorporated 4-Slot Chassis.
AI0 09/08/08 Added BCS Protocol and description of CIO-2AB module.

AJ0 12/03/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 1-Slot Chassis.
AK0 12/15/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 4-Slot Chassis.
AL0 06/01/09 Update for EDVP release of ElectroLogIXS.
AM0 08/26/09 Update for EDVP 2 release of ElectroLogIXS.

AN0 03/08/10 Added DHCP Server Details.
AO0 05/19/10 Added EC5 Details.
AP0 09/07/10 Add PTC Functionality.
AQ0 07/01/11 Added PTC2, 100373-U001, 100373-U002, and 100373-U003 Updates.
AR0 11/05/12 Added PTC3 Updates.
© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.
All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page.
, UCI-3
UCI-3

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page.
Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method) Connect to Web GUI diagnostic interface
1. Connect to VPM3 with RJ45 cable (Crossover or Straight)
The Update (Boot) Mode GUI is the recommended 2. Open 'Local Area Network Properties',
method for updating software on the VPM-3. Executive 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click 'Properties'. Enter IP address of
Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files and PTC 192.168.1.100 and a SubNet Mask of 255.255.255.0 if using default ELX
Mapping Files can all be updated from the Update (Boot) port address.
Mode GUI. For directions in using the Update (Boot) 4. Open a Browser and Enter 192.168.1.12 for Port 2 or 192.168.0.11 for Port
Mode GUI, please see the Update (Boot) Mode Web GUI 1 access.
instructions below. 5. Default user name is 'ADMIN', Default password is 'ADMIN'
Web GUI * VPM3 GE Connect Software tool automates this. P/N: 203630-000
Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode
GUI
1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive

Software, ensure the values for all configurable
parameters are available from the site documentation
or have been recorded from the values shown on the
CDU or Web GUI.
2. Place the VPM-3 in Update (Boot) Mode as follows:

a. Turn off the power switch on the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5
b. Press and hold the PROG button on the
VPM-3
c. Turn on the power switch on the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5
d. Release the PROG button
3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of

the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an Ethernet
cable.
Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are

192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45
port and 192.168.1.12 for the ENET2
(lower) RJ45 port. These default IP address
values are the typical values used in Update
(Boot) Mode. Changing the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses from the
CDU or Web GUI during normal operation
does not change the IP addresses used in
Update Mode. If values other than the
default IP address values must be set / used
in Update (Boot) mode, they may be
changed using the Update Mode command
line. However, the IP address used in
Update (Boot) mode is not visible on the
CDU, so use of the default values whenever
possible is recommended.
4. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit.

All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
UCI-3
UCI-3

SO F T W A R E
A C TI V A TI O N
Software Activation -- Activate Executive and PTC Mapping files

*(76*6+20(0(18 6<67(0
/$036 75$&.6
&21) , * 85$7 , 21
65[!7[
/$030$,17(1$1&( /,*+728767$786 /$03'5,9(567$786 75$&. 75$&. SNMP Traps
7[5[
67,&. )
)/$6+67$786 $/7)/$6+67$786 9,7$/672367$786 75$&.75$160,77(5 75$&.5(&(,9(5 7(6702'( $/7(51$7,1*&2'(
)
775$&.&85,17 ;0,79 9 , $ 5(&(,9(, $ 75$160,77(6702'( $/7(51$7,1*&2'(

6/27 75$&.5(6 2+0 5()(5(1&( 7;7(6702'( 2)) &2'( 121$/7
6&$%2))
&$%&$%B5
/$03$63(&766
)))))))))))))))) SNMP Traps - Enable/Disable Traps
/$03'(7(&7,216
))))))))))))))))
69,7,1
7)
6&2'(6(/(&7
69,7287
7))7
6'(&2'(52876
0
$33,'


Important Information
Conventions
Safety Alert Symbols
The symbol indicates that important personal safety information follows. Carefully read this text for
the warnings information it contains. The signal word next to each safety alert symbol is defined as:
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury. This signal word may also be used
to identify unsafe practices.
Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions
The and symbols indicate important handling guidelines established by the AREMA (American
Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association) for proper handling of electronic equipment
modules and sensitive components for the prevention of potential damage that could be caused by ESD
(electrostatic discharge) during routine maintenance, handling and transportation.
Module To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

ESD modules, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use protective measures could result in permanent
Notice equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling
modules.
Component To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

ESD components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result
Notice in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when
handling components.
Important/Notable Information
Important: Indicates an operating procedure, practice, or condition which, if not strictly followed, may
cause equipment damage.
Note: Indicates additional information or emphasizes a topic related to the subject being discussed.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. iii
General Safety Instructions

WARNING No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad’s
operating rules. If there is a difference in instructions between this
manual and the railroad’s operating rules, follow the most restrictive
instruction.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment. To
ensure the highest degree of safety, all personnel are required to
become thoroughly familiar with all personal safety instructions
contained in this manual. Successful and safe operation of this
equipment is dependent upon correct handling, operation,
maintenance, repair, and application of associated railroad equipment.
Deliberate misuse or abuse of electronic equipment and components
may result in death or serious injury
Do not use this equipment until you are sure the application logic is
properly programmed and functionally tested. Test it according to
United States DOT (Department of Transportation) FRA (Federal
Railroad Administration) Code of Federal Regulation, Title 49
procedures, or other equivalent tests, as deemed necessary by other
appropriate regulatory agencies.
Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units are configured with the proper revisions of
modules and firmware (application, PTC, and executive) and that
updates are completed in a timely manner when made available by
GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with incorrect
firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as
without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j).
Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the
proper values are set for each vital timer, vital configuration
setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability setting, PTC debounce
time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in their
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death or
serious injury.
Updating or modifying modules, firmware, and values (both application
and executive) must be performed by qualified personnel that are
physically present at the site being updated.
Track circuit troubleshooting interferes with signal system operation.
Always obtain proper authorization prior to performing track circuit
troubleshooting.
If any failure of the equipment is detected, it is the railroads responsibility
to ensure the failure is reported in a timely manner. Once the failure is
reported the appropriate steps must be taken to ensure the equipment is
repaired or replaced promptly. Failure to report and repair unit/module in a
timely fashion may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined
as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j).
Follow your railroad's operating rules while moving a locomotive with
inoperative equipment or during irregular operating situations.
Failure to follow your railroad’s operating rules may result in death
or serious injury.

iv All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequence energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
CAUTION Modifications or changes not expressly approved by GE

Transportation Systems Global Signaling could affect the compliance
of the equipment with the FCC Rules and void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Foreword
There are no electronic components or modules in the ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system that can be
repaired by the customer. Defective or damaged modules should be sent to GE Transportation Global
Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600.
Technical Support
GE Transportation Global Signaling will accept telephone calls between 7:30 AM and 5:30 PM CST. Call
TOLL FREE (800) 825-7090 regarding installation, maintenance, calibration, adjustment, or repair of any
components.
Scope
GE Transportation Global Signaling, Technical Information Department under the direction of the
designated equipment Product Manager, issues this document. The manual introduces you to the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 by providing specific information related to Installation, Maintenance,
Troubleshooting, CDU Program, Web Graphical User Interface, Terminal Program, Retest Guide,
Specifications and Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines. Please read carefully and thoroughly
understand the instructions and processes before making any adjustments or modifications to the
equipment. Carelessness may result in loss of life or property damage.
How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing
Additional copies of this document may be ordered by directing all correspondence to GE Transportation
Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600
or calling (800) 825-7090 or by FAX (816) 650-9501.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. v

vi All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Contents
Volume One
Chapter 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2 – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 3 – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chapter 5 – CDU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Volume Two
Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Chapter 7 – Terminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Chapter 8 – Secure Shell Program (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chapter 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Chapter 10 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1
Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. vii

viii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
ElectroLogIXS Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

ElectroLogIXS Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
EC5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
EC5 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ElectroLogIXS General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
EC5 General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Track Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Train Control Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Event 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Event 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Event 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Event 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Event 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Track Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Freight Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vital Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Alternating Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Non-Alternating Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Standard (Short) Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Long Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Smart Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Code M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Vital Remote Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Positive Train Control EMP Class D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
VPM-2/VPM-2+ Vital Peripheral Master Module P/N: 251395-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
CPU A and CPU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
CPU C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
I/O Module Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
CI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-i
CDU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

CIO Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Recorder Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Memory Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
VPM-3 Vital Peripheral Master Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

CPU A and CPU B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
CPU C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
I/O Module Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
CI Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
CDU Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
CIO Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Recorder Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
CPS-1 Central Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Surge Protection and Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Undervoltage Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
CI-1 Chassis Information Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34

Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
CI-2 Chassis Information Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
UCl-3 Universal Chassis Information Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
CDU-1 Control Display Unit P/N: 251124-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
RS232 Interface Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
1-ii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
GFD-1 Ground Fault Detector-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40

Battery Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Battery Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Communications Input/Output Module - 1/1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42

Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Communications Input/Output Module - 2/2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46

Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48
Communications Input/Output Module - MD/MDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49

Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
RS485 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Vital Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
CIO-2AB Communications Input/Output P/N: 251467-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52

Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54
CIO-3 Communications Input/Output Module-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55

Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-56

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-iii
Data Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57

CIO-3 Connector Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58
Communications Input/Output Module - CLA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59

Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
CLA Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
LCP Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Communications Input/Output Module - PCA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-63

Block Diagram Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Optocouplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Protocol Converter CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
RS232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Isolated Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Data Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
CIO-PCA Specific ElectroLogIXS Platform Configuration ............................. 1-68
CIO-PCA First Time Installation ................................................ 1-69
VTI-2S Vital Track Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74

Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Digital Signal Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Cab Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
TIP-2 Track Inductor Panel P/N: 800-096000-011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76

Inductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
TSS-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Cab Signal Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
VLD-C6S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N: 251125-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78

Filament Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Feedback Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Lamp Output Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Non-Vital Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
VLD-R16S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N 251381-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81

Lamp Power Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

1-iv All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction
Lamp Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82

VSSR Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Monitor Circuitry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Filament Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Feedback Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84
VIO-1010S Track Code Select Input / Track Code Decoder Output Module P/N: 251132-000 . . . . 1-85
Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Track Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Output Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Track Code Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
VIO-44S Vital Input/Output Module P/N: 251134-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88

Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-88
Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-89
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-90
VIO-44R Vital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91

Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Slow Release/Slow Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
VIO-86S Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251380-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93

Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Isolated DC/DC Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Vital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Signature Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Signature Decoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Slow Release/Slow Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
Vital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-93
CAB-16S Cab Enable Output Module P/N: 251334-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95

Cab Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-95
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
ElectroLogIXS Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97

CI, Power Switch, and Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-v
VTI-2S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100

VTI-2S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
Track Interface Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-101
VLD-C6S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102

VLD-C6S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
Lamp Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-103
VLD-R16S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104

VLD-R16S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105
VIO-44S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106

VIO-44S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
Vital Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
Vital Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107
VIO-44R Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108

VIO-44R Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
Vital Input Connector -J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
Vital Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
VIO-86S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

VIO-86S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Vital Input Connector -J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Vital Input/Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Vital Output Connector - J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
VIO-1010S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

VIO-1010S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Code Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Code Input Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
CAB-16S Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

CAB-16S Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-116
EC5 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117

Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
General Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
Chassis ID Dip shunt pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
EEPROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
Backplane (BP-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
BP-1 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
I/O Slot 1 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
Backplane (BP-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-124
BP-2 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125

1-vi All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction


100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-vii

1-viii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Introduction
This manual contains information describing the components of an ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system.
Included in this manual are introduction (including theory of operation), installation, module description,
and specification information for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. For information regarding system software setup,
refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program or Volume Two, Chapter 6 - Web Graphical User Interface. The ElectroLogIXS
XP4 used for railroad crossing applications is covered in its own manual part number 100323-010.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 General Description

The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 product family is compatible with EC4 (Electro Code 4), and Electro Code 4-Plus
train control systems. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is modular in design and can be configured to support a
wide range of applications. Capabilities of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 include: ground fault detection, train
detection, broken rail detection, light out protection, approach lighting control, AC (Alternating Current)
power off detection, cab signal output control, vital two-wire inputs for track switch controller protection,
and HR relay drives for release of electric locked switches.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at each end of a control block send and receive coded pulses through the tracks. DC
track circuits are used to inject and extract coded pulses on and off the tracks. Using the tracks as
conductors, makes it possible to detect trains (tracks shunted), provide broken rail protection, and eliminate
the need for external line wires. The coded pulses are used to establish a hand shaking protocol between
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and allow synchronization between ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems to alternately send
and receive data in both directions. Both hardware protection and software detection schemes are employed
to ensure fail-safe communications and system signaling. Adjacent control blocks are powered with reverse
polarity current, to prevent code detection from an adjacent block. Synchronizing and decoding coded
pulses, provides the vital information required to operate the system signal. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5
determines train presence by detecting the absence of track codes (tracks shunted), and maintains space
between trains so that adequate stopping distance is ensured and conflicting traffic routes are positively
avoided.
Train control is achieved primarily through sequential control and illumination of track-side aspects.
Positive train control can be achieved by adding cab signal capability to the system, or a messaging
interface that complies with the Interoperable Train Control (ITC) Wayside Interface Unit (WIU)
Requirements. Inputs to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 include coded signals from track circuits, inputs from
relay contacts or other solid-state devices with digital outputs. The inputs are read in a fail-safe manner,
and are processed by multiple microprocessors in a vital manner to provide fail-safe control outputs. The
outputs consist of track codes, lamp driver signals, cab signal enables, and vital DC device drive voltages.
Ethernet ports and serial I/O ports allow the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to communicate with other Positive
Train Control ITC compliant nodes, ElectroLogIXS, EC5, or VHLC systems.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has a built in recorder that logs time-stamped vital and non-vital events as well as
state changes and failures. All recorded events are user printable both track-side and in the office. A set of
resident diagnostic programs provide the tools necessary to perform system trouble analysis and repair. The
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has provisions for expansion to add radio signaling capabilities, and to operate
remotely via a serial data port and either of two Ethernet ports.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 consists of a chassis, motherboard, plug in modules, a CDU-1 (Control Display
Unit) and Personality modules with terminal blocks for hard wiring the system to external relays, hazard
detectors, and signal aspects. All modules have front panel indicators that display module health status, and
function indicators for monitoring active I/O signals. Parameter setup and modification can be performed
via the VPM-3 Web Graphical User Interface (Web GUI) or via the CDU-1. The Web GUI is operated by a
separate computer / PDA device running an Internet Explorer (or compatible) web browser.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 1-1
ElectroLogIXS Physical Description

The ElectroLogIXS may be received as a separate assembly or as part of a pre-assembled rack. It is
designed for mounting in a standard 19-inch rack, wall mounting, or installation on a shelf. Operating
power is supplied from a standard 12 volt battery. The battery terminals are conveniently located in the
upper right corner of the 9-Slot ElectroLogIXS chassis, and are labeled N (negative) and B (battery positive).
The battery terminals are located in the upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Shot Chassis.
The ElectroLogIXS is available in 9-slot, 4-slot or 1-slot configurations, providing flexibility and scalability
depending on the application. Each configurations support the same number of system modules, but have
the capability for nine (9) I/O modules (9-slot), four (4) I/O modules (4-Slot), one (1) I/O module (1-Slot)
respectively. When using a VPM-2+ processor with the ElectroLogIXS 4-slot chassis, it must be hardware
revision DAO or later.
An ElectroLogIXS system consists of a chassis assembly with plug-in modules. The system (small) card
slots are dedicated for the Central Power Supply (CPS-2 or CPS-3), Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+ or
VPM-3) Module, GFD-1 (Ground Fault Detector), CIO-1A (Communication Input/Out) Module and
the CIO-CLA Module. Two additional slots are available and each will accommodate a CIO-2A, CIO-2AB,
CIO-MDA or CIO-PCA module. The Chassis Information Module (CI-1, CI-2 or UCI-3) is located in the
lower right section of the 9-Slot Chassis and the upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Slot Chassis.
The larger I/O module slots may have the following modules installed: VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver),
VLD-R16S (Vital Lamp Driver), VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface), VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input
/Track Code Decoder Output), VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output), VIO-44R, VIO-86S or CAB-16S (Cab
Enable Output). Personality modules are installed in the upper portion of the I/O slots. The personality
module installed in a slot will depend on the I/O modules installed in the chassis.
ElectroLogIXS Chassis
The open-frame ElectroLogIXS chassis allows easy access to all modules and plug in connections.
Mounted in the back of the chassis is a one
piece backplane that provides interconnections
to all the modules of the ElectroLogIXS system.
Personality modules (Figure 1-3) attach to the
backplane and connect the modules to the field
wiring. Quick disconnect clips secure
modules to the chassis and all personality
module connectors are keyed to insure that
modules are placed into the correct slot. In
addition, the personality module field wiring
connectors are keyed.
I/O module slots can include:

• XTI-1S modules
• VIO-44S modules
• VIO-44R modules
• IXC-20S modules
• VTI-1S modules
• VIO-1010S modules
• VIO-86S modules
• VLD-C6S modules
• VLD-R16S modules
• CAB-16S modules
Figure 1-1, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-Slot with Modules.
System module slots can include:

1-2 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Introduction
System module slots can include:
• CPS-2 or CPS-3 module

• NSM-1 module
• VPM-2+ or VPM-3 module
• GFD-1 module
• CIO-1A module, CIO-CLA module
• CIO-2A module, CIO-2AB module
• CIO-MDA module
• CIO-PCA module
323-PH01a
Figure 1-1b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-Slot.
Figure 1-1a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-Slot.
Figure 1-2, Lower Row of Modules with CDU-1

Detached Figure 1-3, Installed Personality Module
or UCI-3
CIO-2A OR CIO-2A OR
GFD-1 CIO-1A OR CIO-PCA OR CIO-PCA OR
SLOT CIO-CLA CIO-MDA SLOT CIO-MDA SLOT
Figure 1-3a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-slot chassis (P/N 300752-000)
CI or UCI-3 ON/OFF
MODULE SWITCH
CHASSIS
CPS
SLOT PERSONALITY
MODULES
(MAXIMUM OF 4)
NSM-1
SLOT
SLOT 4
VPM
SLOT BACKPLANE
GFD-1
SLOT
CIO-1A or CIO-CLA CIO-2A OR CIO-2A OR SLOT 1

SLOT CIO-PCA OR CIO-PCA OR
CIO-MDA SLOT CIO-MDA SLOT
Figure 1-3b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-slot chassis (P/N 251464-000)

Introduction
ON/OFF
SWITCH
CI or UCI-3
MODULE
CHASSIS
CIO-1A PERSONALITY
or CIO-CLA MODULES
SLOT
CIO-2A OR
CIO-PCA OR
CIO-MDA SLOT
CIO-2A OR
CIO-PCA OR
CIO-MDA SLOT
BACKPLANE
SLOT 1
VPM SLOT CPS-3 GFD-1
Figure 1-3c, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-slot chassis (P/N 251473-000)
EC5 Physical Description
The EC5 may be received as a separate assembly or as part of preassembled rack. It is designed for
mounting in a standard 19-inch rack, wall mounting, or installation on a shelf. Operating power is supplied
from a standard 12 volt battery. The battery terminals are conveniently located in the upper left corner of
the EC5 motherboard, and are labeled N (negative) and B (battery positive).
The EC5 consists of a chassis assembly and several plug-in modules. The left side of the chassis contains
four card slots that are dedicated for the Central Power Supply (CPS-1), Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+
or VPM-3) Module, Chassis Information (CI-1, CI-2 or UCI-3) Module, and the Communication Input/Out
(CIO-1 or CIO-CLA) Module. One additional slot is available and it will accommodate a CIO-2, CIO-3,
CIO-MDA module.
The right side of the chassis has four module I/O slots. The following modules may be installed in the I/O
slots: VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver), VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface), VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input
/Track Code Decoder Output), or VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output). Up to two slots may be used for VLD-C6S
or VIO-1010S Modules, depending on the application.

EC5 Chassis
Figure 1-3d, EC5 Chassis
The open-frame EC5 chassis allows easy access to all of the modules and plug in connections. Mounted in the
back of the chassis is a one-piece backplane that provides interconnections to all of the modules of the EC5
system. Quick disconnect clips secure modules to the chassis and all connectors are keyed to insure that
modules are placed into the correct slot.
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 1-3e, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1)

Introduction
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 1-3f, EC5 Endbox Backplane (BP-2)

ElectroLogIXS General Block Diagram

The ElectroLogIXS System Block Diagram in Figure 1-4 shows how the ElectroLogIXS modules
interconnect, and the main inputs and outputs. Notice how all the modules are connected to and controlled
by the VPM. Brief descriptions of the modules are provided later in this chapter. Dashed lines indicate
optional modules whose use is dependent upon ElectroLogIXS system configuration.
Note: Optional modules are denoted by dashed lines.
Figure 1-4, ElectroLogIXS System Block Diagram

Introduction
EC5 General Block Diagram

The EC5 System Block Diagram in Figure 1-4a shows how the EC5 modules interconnect, and the main
inputs and outputs. Notice how all the modules are connected to and controlled by the VPM. Brief
descriptions of the modules follow. Refer to the individual module descriptions, in this section, for more
detailed information of the modules.
Display
CDU-1
Key Pad
VPM
CI-1/CI-2/UCI-3 Application Equations
CPS-1 Battery
CIO-1/CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port

SLOT 1 Office Port
(LCP Port for CIO-CLA)
CIO-PCA Office Port
CIO-2
CIO
CIO-3
SLOT 2 CIO-MD
I/O SLOT 1 TIP-2 Track I/O

VT1-2S
Battery Monitor Vital two-wire Inputs
Cab Outputs
VLD-C6S
I/O SLOT 2
VIO-1010S
I/O SLOT 3 VLD-C6S

VIO-1010S
I/O SLOT 4 VIO-44S
Figure 1-4a, EC5 System Block Diagram

Theory of Operation
The Electro Code is a DC track circuit coded at each end to control block signals. It is similar to a coded
relay track circuit with bi-directional coding synchronized to work in both directions continuously. It
operates without line wires, using fail-safe electronic circuits and microprocessor logic to send and receive
track code pulses.
Secure operation is obtained through the use of codes and polarity of the track currents. Synchronizing and
decoding code pulses applied to the rails provides vital track information required to operate the signal
system. Codes are transmitted through the rails between signals, making it possible to detect a train and
provide broken rail protection. Electro Code uses a synchronizing technique to effect two-way control of
signals. The receiver responds to DC currents like a code following track relay. The polarity and level of
current must be correct before the receiver will respond.
Triple microprocessors are the heart of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 signaling system. Input signals from track 1
and track 2 are interpreted by microprocessors on the VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module. The VPM
controls all bi-directional system logic functions.
The VPM controls the track code transmitted on the rails, the lamp drive voltages, and vital outputs.
DC/DC converters provide isolated drive voltages for the signal lamps and auxiliary devices.
Track Circuit Theory

A track circuit is a section of rails used to detect the local presence of a train and also a broken rail. An
electric signal is placed on the rails at one end of the track circuit, passes through the rails as the physical
conductor, and is detected at the other end of the track circuit. A train on the track shorts out the conductors
(rails) indicating train presence. Similarly, the track circuit detects a broken rail if the conductor is broken
between the ends of the circuit.
Track circuits are separated from each other by insulated joints, which insulate the adjacent sections of
rails. The length of each track circuit is typically determined by the braking distance of the heaviest train
that could possibly travel on the track, when it is moving at its highest possible speed. The detection of
occupancy in sequential track circuits provide control information for trains moving on these sections.
When the signal is not received through the rails, the track circuit is considered occupied. Occupied track
circuit sections send signals to adjacent track circuits to prevent train movement into them and provide a
slow approach to them by an oncoming train.

Introduction
Train Control Example
We will now go through an example of how the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is used to control trains that follow
one another between control points. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 allows the fastest safe train speed while it
maintains safe following distances between trains. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 (with associated wayside
equipment) forms an integrated train control and signal system. DC Track codes are transmitted through the
tracks. They send and receive status information and aspect control signals (track codes). Status information
includes train presence and location, track circuit integrity (broken rail detection), block occupancy, and
maintenance information, such as a light out.
With respect to railroad signaling:

• aspect = what the signal displays (red, yellow, green).
• indication = what the aspect means (its definition).
• name = what you call the aspect.
For our example, Table 1-1 defines the aspects:
Table 1-1 Aspect Definitions
Indication Aspect Name

Proceed at maximum authorized speed Green Proceed (Clear)
Proceed, prepared to stop at next signal Yellow Approach
Proceed, prepared to stop at the second signal ahead Flashing Yellow Advance Approach
Stop Red Stop
Figure 1-5 shows an example with four rail blocks and two trains.
Figure 1-5, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Train Control Example.
This example shows how the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is used to close the distance between the trains to a
minimum safe distance of two blocks. This increases traffic flow and corridor capacity. The
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at all locations are synchronized and there is a constant hand-shake protocol through
the rails using electro code track codes.
The example below follows Train 1 and Train 2 through different “conditions” and shows how the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 controls the trains. The system will always maintain a safety distance behind the train.
This safety distance is a one block with a yellow aspect, followed by a one block with a red aspect.

Event 1
• Train 2 is stopped in Block 4.

• Train 1 approaches Block 1 at the corridor’s maximum safe speed.
• There are no trains in Blocks 1 through 3.
• The aspect at Block 1 is green.
• The aspects at Blocks 2, 3, and 4 are flashing yellow, yellow, and red, respectively.
Event 2
• Train 1 enters Block 1.

• The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 1 sets the aspect behind Train 1 to red.
Event 3
• Train 1 enters Block 2 at a speed prepared to stop at the second signal ahead.
• The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 2 sets the aspect at Block 2 to red.
• The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at Block 1 sets the aspect to yellow.
Event 4
• Train 1 enters Block 3 at a speed prepared to stop at the next signal.

• The aspect at Block 3 is set to red.
• The aspect at Block 2 is set to yellow.
• The aspect at Block 1 is set to flashing yellow.
Event 5
• Train 1 arrives at Block 4.

• Train 1 stops before passing the red aspect.
Note: If Train 2 were not stopped, but was traveling at maximum authorized speed, the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 behind Train 2 would maintain a safe distance behind Train 2 of three blocks,
one flashing yellow aspect block, one yellow aspect block and one red aspect block.

Introduction
Timing
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system uses a synchronizing technique for two-way communications. Transmitted
code pulses are approximately 112 ms (milliseconds) long and are repeated every 2.8 seconds (for freight).
In a typical track circuit, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 transmission cycle at one end is offset 1.4 seconds from
the transmit cycle at the opposite end. One transmit/receive cycle is completed every 2.8 seconds.
Figure 1-6, Control Timing Diagram.
Figure 1-7, Alternating Control Code Timing Diagram

Track Codes
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 signaling system employs a DC transmitter and receiver at each end of a railroad
block to transmit and receive track code pulses. Electro Code uses time division multiplexing in order to
send track codes bi-directionally on the rails between two locations. This scheme has the advantage of
operating without the need for line wires between track joints that other systems have historically used.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 code rates are directly track compatible with the same code rates of Electro Code II,
III, 4, Electro Logic 1, and VHLC (Vital Harmon Logic Controller) products.
The track codes contain vital and non-vital data used by the signaling system to control and monitor for
train presence, track circuit integrity (broken rail), and aspect setting and status of distant signals. Loss of
track codes indicate train presence, broken rails, and convey vital aspect data used to activate wayside
signal equipment. Non-vital track codes convey non-vital information such as failed AC power, track
occupancy information, and other conditions that require maintenance action. Tracks codes have inherent
timing characteristics that represent vital and non-vital functions. The reverse polarity employed at
insulated joints prevents adjacent blocks from inadvertently detecting codes on adjacent rails in the event of
insulated joint failure.
Each track code performs a specific task in the signal control system. Ten track code rates are used to send
information between Electro Code signal locations.
Freight Code Rates

Most freight code pulses are approximately 112 ms wide with the following exceptions:
Code 5 refer to Code 5 in this chapter

Code 6 600 ms pulse width
Vital Code Rates
Vital codes are defined by a two pulse transmission in a transmit cycle window. The vital code rate is
calculated from the leading edge of the first pulse to the leading edge of the second pulse.
WARNING Certain track equipment may create waveforms that can mimic single
pulse track codes (e.g. code 1 or code 5). Single pulse track code
receive statuses MUST NOT be used for vital functions (where the
track code receive status allows a permissive action or condition).

Introduction
*Inclusion of code 1 in this diagram

does not indicate it is a vital code
but is shown for timing reference.
Figure 1-8, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Vital Code Examples.
Code 1
Code 1 is used as the first pulse or the synchronizing pulse of the Electro Code, and it is typically used for
three functions:
1. The leading edge of Code 1 is used to synchronize the turn on time of the return code pulses from
the opposite end of the track circuit.
2. Timing of control code values is measured from the leading edge of the first pulse (Code 1) to the
leading edge of the second pulse (Codes 7, 4, 3, 2, 9, or 8) as shown in Figure 1-8.
3. The first pulse is called Code 1 and can be used to provide non-vital track circuit status or in
conjunction with another vital code (e.g. Code 1 + Code 8) to provide block occupancy status.
Width: 115 ms
Rides on: 1 pulse per code cycle
Code 5
Code 5 is typically used for non-vital block indication in all applications. There are two types of code 5
available: alternating code 5, and non-alternating code 5.

Alternating Code 5
Alternating code 5 is recommended for new EC4, EC5, and ElectroLogIXS applications. It is suitable for
long or short track circuits and all track conditions. Code 5 is transmitted with every other transmit cycle.
Alternating code 5 has the following specifications:
Width 225 ms
Rides on 1 pulse per code cycle - every other code cycle
Non-Alternating Code 5
Non-Alternating code 5 is used to be compatible with older Electro Code applications; Electro Code II and
III. Non-Alternating code 5 is compatible with the following older code 5 rates: Standard (Short) code 5,
Long code 5, and Smart code 5. Non-alternating code 5 in ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is somewhat similar to EC4
and EC5's smart code 5. Non-alternating code 5 is adaptive to decode standard and long code 5 sent by
other Electro Code transmitters. Non-alternating code 5 transmits a 350 ms pulse with every code cycle.
Standard (Short) Code 5
Standard code 5 is typically used with Electro Code II and III applications. Standard code 5 has the
following specifications:
Width 225 ms
Rides on 1 pulse per code cycle
Long Code 5
Long code 5 is used for Electro Code 4 applications and is more robust than short code 5. Long code 5 has
the following specifications:
Width 350 ms
Smart Code 5
Smart code 5 is used with a mixture of Electro Code II, III, and Electro Code 4 applications. The purpose of
smart code 5 is to interface applications using both standard and long code 5.
Smart code 5 will receive either standard or long code 5, but only transmits long code 5. Smart code 5 has
the following specifications:
Width 350 ms
Code M
Code M is a maintenance code similar in nature to the alternating code 5. Its purpose is to convey non-vital
maintenance data over track circuits to head block locations. Code M, like alternating code 5, is transmitted
every other cycle
Width Code 1 + Code M 350 ms

Code 1 + Code 5 + Code M 304 ms
Rides on 1 pulse per code cycle - every other code cycle

Introduction
Figure 1-9, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Standard Code 5 Timing Diagram

Figure 1-10, Long Code 5 Timing Diagram

Introduction
Figure 1-11, Alternating Code 5 Timing Diagram

Vital Remote Protocols
WARNING Serial to Ethernet converters allow for messages to be buffered. This

buffering could allow messages to be transmitted out of sequence and
incorrectly received if the Vital Remote protocol is set to "RP2000 w/
RP1992 Fallback". Therefore, it is necessary that the Vital Remote
protocol be set to "RP2000 Only" or "RP2009" for an application
whose vital communications employ serial to Ethernet conversion.
RP2000
In this mode the controller will communicate with the remote unit using RP2000. RP2000 messages are
sent continually whether or not the message contents have changed. RP2000 can be used on serial
point-to-point connections, serial multi-drop connections, serial-to-Ethernet connections, direct Ethernet
connections, and Radio links.
RP2000 with RP1992 Fallback

In this mode the controller will start remote communications using the RP2000 protocol. If it detects that
the remote unit is communicating using the RP1992 protocol, the controller will switch to the RP1992
protocol to enable it to communicate with the remote unit. RP1992 can only be used over hard-wired point
to point networks where it is impossible for remote messages to be received out of order.
RP2009
In this mode the controller will communicate with the remote unit using RP2009. When using RP2009,
messages are not sent continually. Rather, messages are only sent when:
1) the message contents changes,

2) a Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI) time has elapsed since the last message was sent, or
3) in acknowledgement of receiving a message from a remote device.
RP2009 can be used on serial connections, serial-to-Ethernet connections, direct Ethernet connections, and
Radio links. RP2009 does not support serial multi-drop connections.
Positive Train Control EMP Class D

In this mode the controller will communicate with other PTC enabled nodes to receive Locomotive Request
messages and send PTC mapped Wayside Interface Unit (WIU) statuses.
VPM-2/VPM-2+ Vital Peripheral Master Module

VPM-2: P/N: 251135-000
VPM-2+: P/N: 251395-000
The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is a microprocessor-based module comprised of three CPUs (A, B, and C) that
control the operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ contains
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 executive software that is common to all VPM-2/VPM-2+ based ElectroLogIXS/EC5
products. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is responsible for downloading the application EPROM and running the
application vitally along with maintaining system safety checks and providing diagnostic features.

Introduction
Block Diagram Theory
CI or UCI-3
(CI) or UCI-3
INTERFACE
Figure1-12, VPM-2/VPM-2+ Block Diagram.
CPU A and CPU B
CPU A and CPU B are responsible for the system’s vital application logic processing, communication, and
control of the installed ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules, and the continual performance of the system
safety checks.
User supplied configuration information such as track and lamp settings, vital configuration settings, etc.
are used by CPU A and CPU B during application program execution and are vitally stored in non-volatile
memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. All modules, with the exception of the CI and backplane
modules may be replaced without loss of the system configuration information.
CPU C
CPU C is the processor primarily responsible for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system diagnostics and user
interface. CPU C provides the communication control interface for the CDU-1, CI or UCI-3, and CIOModules.
CPU C also maintains system wide, non-volatile diagnostic logging in the Error, Recorder, Communication, and
Configuration logs. The non-vital configuration settings, such as baud rates, port settings, etc. are
maintained by CPU C and are stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane.
I/O Module Interface
The VPM-2/VPM-2+ contains an interface by which the CPU A and CPU B can communicate with all of
the I/O modules. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ acts as a master while all of the I/O modules in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 product family act as slave modules.
CI or UCI-3 Interface
The CI or UCI-3 Interface is the means by which the VPM-2/VPM-2+ ret rieves the applicatio n program from
the CI or UCI-3 module.

CDU Interface
The CDU-1 connector on the front of the VPM-2/VPM-2+ (see Figure 1-13) provides the communication
path between the CPU C and the CDU-1.
CIO Interface
ElectroLogIXS/EC5
The CIO Interface is used for communication between CPU C and the CIO Modules (CIO-1/CIO-1A,
CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA) that are present in the
system. The CIO Interface shown on the VPM provides a generic connection to the CIO Modules, where
the specific CIO Module converts the signals into a specific electrical interface such as RS-232, RS-485,
RS-422 and current loop.
Note: Not all modules are available for various configurations of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Error Log
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Error Log captures error / system event information when a detected error / event
occurs. The Error Log entries indicate the date and time of the event, the processor that declared the error /
event and a description of the error / event. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ is capable of storing up to 1,000 Error
Log entries.
Recorder Log
The Recorder Log captures the state / state change of application statuses as indicated in the application
program defined by the application design engineer. To have the values of a particular status recorded in
the Recorder Log, the application engineer must, while programming the application in the GETS-GS ACE:
• Give a name to the status to be recorded.
• Indicate that the named status is to be recorded, and
• Use the status in an equation.
A named status that is indicated in the application program as a recorded status has its value logged in the
Recorder Log each time the status changes state. The VPM2+ Recorder Log is sized to provide 5,000
entries of up to 440 recorded statuses with a log entry indicating name of the status, the current state of the
status and the time / date that the status was set to the indicated state.
Configuration Log
The Configuration Log captures parameter / configuration setting changes as they are made to the system
configuration information used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. Examples of the configuration
information are track settings, lamp settings, vital configuration settings, and vital timer settings. When
parameters such as these are changed, CPU C captures the change and the date / time of the change in the
Configuration Log. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ Configuration Log is sized to capture the most recent 500
Configuration change events.
Memory Battery
The VPM-2+ has an internal battery for retaining the stored data logs in the absence of power to the VPM-
2/VPM-2+. The VPM-2/VPM-2+ also has a LOW MEMORY BATTERY indicator for denoting when the
internal battery is nearing its end of life. When the battery voltage is low the LED will illuminate.

Introduction
LEDs
The VPM-2/VPM-2+ has three LED indicators for the three different CPUs, A, B, and C. The indicators are
for diagnostic purposes only. There are three possible states for the indicator and their definitions are:
OFF – the CPU is not functioning.

ON – the CPU is initializing (only valid status during startup). If continuously illuminated
during normal operation, the CPU is not functioning.
FLASHING – the CPU is running normally.
A
C
373-PH14
Figure 1-13, VPM-2
A Processor A LED: Is flashing when Processor A is active and functioning normally.

B Processor B LED: Is flashing when Processor B is active and functioning normally.
C Processor C LED: Is flashing when Processor C is active and functioning normally.
D CDU Connector: Modular connector used for CDU interface.
E Low Memory Battery LED: Is lit when the log memory battery is low
F Diagnostic connector: Serial interface connector used for the Diagnostic Terminal
G PROG switch: A switch, when depressed during a power cycle, places the
VPM-2/VPM-2+ in a state to accept a new executive program.
VPM-3 Vital Peripheral Master Module P/N 251432-XXX

The VPM-3 is a microprocessor-based module comprised of three CPUs (A, B, and C) that control the
operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VPM-3 contains ElectroLogIXS/EC5 executive software
that is common to all VPM-3 based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 VLC and EC5 products. The VPM-3 is responsible
for downloading the selected vital and non-vital applications from the CI module and running these
applications along with maintaining system safety checks and providing diagnostic features.
The last 3 digits of the P/N specify the VPM-3 Executive software:
251432-050 No Software Loaded
251432-100 Interlocking
251432-200 Crossing
251432-300 Combine Interlocking & Crossing
The following table lists the modules that operate in each executive type.
XCI-1 XCI-2 CI-1 CI-2 UCI-3 GFD-1 NSM-1 CIO-1/ CIO-2/ CIO-3** CIO-MD/ CIO-2AB CIO-PCA XTI-1S IXC-20S VIO-44R VIO-44S VIO-86S VTI-2S CAB-16S VIO-1010S VLD-C6S VLD-R16S
CIO-1A CIO-CLA CIO-2A CIO-MDA
Interlocking * *
Crossing * *
Combine
Interlocking & * *
Crossing
Note: *If a XTI-1S is used in the application, the UCI-3, XCI-1 or XCI-2 must be used instead of CI-1 or CI-2
**EC-5 Module Only-2.
CI or UCI-3
(CI) or UCI-3
INTERFACE
Figure 1-14, VPM-3 Block Diagram.

Introduction
CPU A and CPU B
CPU A and CPU B are responsible for the system’s vital application logic processing, communication and
control of the installed ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules, and the continual performance of the system
safety checks.
User supplied configuration information are used by CPU A and CPU B during application program
execution and are vitally stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 backplane. All
modules, with the exception of the CI and backplane modules may be replaced without loss of the system
configuration information.
CPU C
CPU C is the processor responsible for the non-vital application logic processing and is the processor
primarily responsible for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system diagnostics and user interfaces. CPU C provides
the communication control interface for the CDU-1, CI, and CIO Modules along with the two Ethernet
interfaces. CPU C also maintains system-wide, non-volatile diagnostic logging in the Error, Recorder,
Communication, and Configuration logs. The non-vital configuration settings, such as baud rates, port
settings, etc. are maintained by CPU C and are stored in non-volatile memory on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
backplane.
I/O Module Interface
The VPM-3 contains an interface by which the CPU A and CPU B communicate with all of the I/O
modules. The VPM-3 directs and controls communication to and from each of the I/O modules in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
CI or UCI-3 Interface
The CI Interface is the means by which the VPM-3 retrieves the vital and non-vital application programs
from the CI or UCI-3 module.
CDU Interface
The CDU-1 connector on the front of the VPM-3 provides the communication path between the CPU C
and the CDU-1.
CIO Interface
ElectroLogIXS/EC5
The CIO Interface is used for communication between CPU C and the CIO Modules (CIO-1/CIO-1A,
CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA) that are present in the
system. The CIO Interface shown on the VPM provides a generic connection to the CIO Modules, where
the specific CIO Module converts the signals into a specific electrical interface such as RS-232, RS-485,
and RS-422 and current loop.
Note: Not all modules are available for various configurations of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Ethernet Interface
The VPM-3 provides two Ethernet connections that can operate at 10 or 100 Mbps. These interfaces
auto-negotiate the speed at which to operate with the connected network device and auto-detect whether the
connecting cable is a ‘cross-over’ cable or is a straight connection.
Note: Ferrites have been provided and must be applied to Ethernet cables in all installations.

Error Log
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Error Log captures error / system event information when a detected error / event
occurs. The Error Log entries indicate the date and time of the event, the processor that declared the error /
event and a description of the error / event. The VPM-3 is capable of storing the most recent 5,000 Error
Logs entries.
Recorder Log
The Recorder Log captures the state / state change of application statuses as indicated in the application
program defined by the application design engineer. To have the values of a particular status recorded in
the Recorder Log, the application must have the named status indicated as a recorded status.
A named status that is indicated in the application program as a recorded status has its value logged in the
Recorder Log each time the status changes state along with the date and time of the change. The VPM-3
Recorder Log is sized to record the most recent 100,000 entries of up to 512 Vital and 512 Non-vital
recorded statuses.
Configuration Log
The Configuration Log captures parameter / configuration setting changes as they are made to the system
configuration information used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. When lamp settings, vital configuration
settings, or other configuration items such as these are changed, CPU C captures the change and the date /
time of the change in the Configuration Log. The VPM-3 Configuration Log is sized to capture the most
recent 1000 Configuration change events.
LEDs
The VPM-3 has three LED indicators for the three different CPUs; A, B, and C. The indicators are for
diagnostic purposes only. There are three possible states for the indicator and their definitions are:
OFF – the CPU is not functioning.

STEADY ON – The CPU is initializing (only valid status during startup). If one or more are
continuously illuminated during normal operation, the CPU is not functioning.
FLASHING – the CPU is running normally.
The VPM-3 indicates that it is operating in update mode (the mode used to update VPM-3 executive
software or application programs) by flashing all three CPU LEDs in an alternating amber / red pattern.

Introduction
A Processor A LED: Is flashing when Processor A is active and functioning normally.
B Processor B LED: Is flashing when Processor B is active and functioning normally.
C Processor C LED: Is flashing when Processor C is active and functioning normally.
D CDU Connector: Modular connector used for CDU interface.
E Ethernet Connectors: Modular connectors used for Ethernet network connections. Each
Ethernet connection has LEDs to indicate connection & activity
(green) and connection speed (amber LED indicates 100Mbs / off
equals 10Mbs)
F Prog Button: Dual-purpose switch: (1) If depressed during a power cycle, causes
the VPM-3 to enter update mode and (2) Used to confirm Local
Presence when so indicated via the Web GUI interface.

CPS-1 Central Power Supply P/N: 251122-000
The CPS-1 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the EC5 that require
a non-isolated 5-volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-volt power have dedicated power
sources. The CPS-1 may be used in applications that require up to 25 Watts of 5VDC power.
Figure 1-16, CPS-1 Block Diagram
Surge Protection and Filtering
The Battery Input from the system battery is applied to the Surge Protection and Filtering circuit. This
circuit prevents the DC/DC Converter from sending switching noise out on the battery input wires. The
filtered battery voltage is sent to the DC/DC Converter Circuit.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC Converter is a step-down DC/DC converter that converts the filtered battery voltage into
regulated +5 VDC. The +5 VDC signal exits the CPS-1 via the backplane connector and is applied to the
rest of the EC5.
Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit
The Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit monitors the filtered battery voltage signal. This circuit
disables the DC/DC Converter until the filtered battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC. When the filtered
battery voltage reaches +7.5 VDC the DC/DC Converter is enabled and allowed to operate. If, for any
reason, the filtered battery voltage drops to below +6.75 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start
Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery. When
the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the DC/DC
Converter.

Introduction
Undervoltage Detector
The Undervoltage Detector monitors the DC/DC Converter output. Under normal conditions (CPS voltage
within tolerance), it sends a CPS OK signal to the 5V PWR indicator on the CDU-1 to give a visual
indication of the status of the CPS. If the output voltage drops below the preset undervoltage threshold, the
Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM-1. This informs the VPM-1 that the CPS-1 output
voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is
out-of-tolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the
out-of tolerance condition.
Figure 1-16a, CPS-1


The CPS-2 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that require a non-isolated 5-Volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-Volt
power have their own power sources. The CPS-2 may be used in applications that require up to 60 Watts of
5VDC power.
Figure 1-17, CPS-2 Block Diagram.
DC/DC Converter
rest of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery.
When the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the
DC/DC Converter.

Introduction
Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM. This informs the VPM that the CPS-2 output
voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is out-of-
tolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the out-of
tolerance condition.
373-PH15
Figure 1-17a, CPS-2.


The CPS-3 (Central Power Supply) Module supplies +5 VDC for all the components in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that require a non-isolated 5-Volt source. Components that require an isolated 5-Volt
power have their own power sources. The CPS-3 may be used in applications that require up to 70 Watts of
5VDC power.
Figure 1-18, CPS-3 Block Diagram.
DC/DC Converter
rest of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Circuit disables the DC/DC Converter. This allows time for the system charger to charge the battery. When
the battery reaches +7.5 VDC, the Converter Run Enable and Soft Start Circuit again enables the DC/DC
Converter.

Introduction
Undervoltage Detector sends a CPS LV signal to the VPM. This informs the VPM that the CPS-3 output
voltage is out-of-tolerance and can no longer be considered reliable. When the output voltage is out-of-
tolerance, the 5V PWR LED on the CDU-1 extinguishes to provide a visual indication of the out-of
tolerance condition.
373-PH15a
Figure 1-19, CPS-3.

CI-1 Chassis Information Module P/N: 251121-000
The CI-1 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a non-volatile
memory device that stores the application equations.
CI-1
373-0062
Figure 1-20, Chassis Information Module
Figure 1-21, CI-1 Block Diagram.
Application EPROM
Application equations are stored in an EPROM that is placed in the 32-pin, DIP socket on the CI module.
Application EPROMs may be 1Mbit (P/N: 003662-000 / 001), 2Mbit (P/N: 003662-005 / 006 / 010) or
4Mbit (P/N: 003662-020) densities.

Introduction
CI-2 Chassis Information Module P/N: 251441-000
The CI-2 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a removable
non-volatile memory device (EPROM) that stores the application equations and has two DIP shunt sockets
for setting the value of the Application ID. In addition, the CI-2 module has 8 MBytes of non-volatile
memory that can be used for application equation storage. If an EPROM with a valid application equation
file is installed on the CI-2, the EPROM equations are used. If no EPROM is installed, the CI-2
non-volatile memory is used for application equations.
CI-2
373-0062a
373-0016a
Figure 1-23, CI-2 Block Diagram.
Application EPROM

UCl-3 Universal Chassis Information Module P/N: 251495-000

The UCI-3 may be used in place of any XCI or CI modules.
The UCI-3 Module provides a non-volatile storage area for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It contains a removable
non-volatile memory device (EPROM) that stores the application equations and has two DIP shunt sockets for
setting the value of the Application ID. In addition, the UCI-3 module has 8 MBytes of non-volatile memory
that can be used for application storage. If an EPROM with a valid application equation file is installed on the
UCI-3, the EPROM equations are used. If no EPROM is installed, the UCI-3 non-volatile memory is used for
application equations.
UCl-3
373-0062a
373-0016a
Figure 1-25, UCl-3 Block Diagram.

Introduction
Application EPROM

CDU-1 Control Display Unit P/N: 251124-000

The CDU-1 provides a user-to-system interface and is the primary interface for VPM based
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems. The CDU has a vacuum fluorescent display of two rows of 20 characters, a
16-button keypad, and two LED indicators for system health and 5V power status (Figure 1-26). The CDU
connects to the VPM via an RJ45 modular connector and uses RS-232 signaling.
CDU-1 modules are able to be removed and installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on.
The CDU-1 menus for interfacing with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system are shown in Section 5.
Figure 1-26, CDU Block Diagram.
RS232 Interface Circuit
System control and diagnostic information from the VPM is sent serially through the RS-232 Interface
Circuit. The RS-232 Interface Circuit converts RS-232 signals from the VPM to digital signals useable by
the CDU-1. In addition, it converts digital signals from the CDU-1 into RS-232 signals for transmission to
the VPM.
CPU
The CPU coordinates activity between the display, keypad, and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system.
Display
The Display is the output for the user interface. This 40-character display contains 2 rows of 20 characters.
Keypad
The keypad allows access to system setup, maintenance, and diagnostic utilities.

Introduction
Controls and Indicators
Figure 1-27, CDU Controls and Indicators.
A Alphanumeric Keys: Used for selecting menu options, entering information, or canceling
operations.
B Arrow Keys: Used for scrolling menu options and navigating from menu to menu.
Simultaneously pressing the Left and Right Arrow Keys returns to the
top-level menu item of the current menu category. Simultaneously
pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys jumps to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Home Menu.
C Health Indicator: LED is illuminated when the system’s CPUs are operating normally. LED
is extinguished during system resets or when a CPU has halted / is not
operating.
D 5V PWR: LED lit when output of Central Power Supply is within acceptable
parameters.

GFD-1 Ground Fault Detector-1 P/N: 251333-000
The optional GFD-1 (Ground Fault Detector-1) Module monitors up to three battery banks for ground
faults. The GFD can detect faults on the plus and minus battery poles. The GFD monitors the battery
connection to the ElectroLogIXS through the backplane and has a front panel field connector to connect up
to two external batteries. The fault threshold and ground-fault time are programmable by the ElectroLogIXS
user via the CDU-1. The GFD can only be installed in the dedicated GFD-1 slot on the backplane.
Important: The earth ground connection to the GFD module must be removed prior to maintenance
testing for grounds. If the earth ground connection is not removed, ground testing will likely
fail.
ElectrologIXS
BATT #1 { BACKPLANE EARTH
GROUND
} BATT #2
VPM
} BATT #3
323-001D
Figure 1-28, GFD-Block Diagram.
Battery Monitor
The GFD will monitor battery faults on both the plus and minus battery poles. The following battery
monitor parameters are adjustable by using the CDU-1.
Monitored Value Range Adjustment Increments
Fault Threshold* 2 kohms to 20 kohms 2 kohm steps
Ground Fault Time 5 to 30 seconds 1 second steps
Low/High Battery Alarm 8V to 16.5V 0.1V steps
*Note: An equivalent leakage current in mA is simultaneously displayed on

the CDU-1.
Surge Protection
The GFD-1 provides surge protection from power surges that may occur at the battery inputs.

Introduction
Indicators
A B
C D
E F
373-PH16
Figure 1-29, GFD-1 Indicators.
A B1+: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #1 plus input.

Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #1 plus input.
LED off indicates no ground fault monitoring on this pole.
B B1-: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #1 return input.
Lit green indicates no fault on Battery #1 return input.
C B2+: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #2 plus input.
D B2-: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #2 return input.
E B3+: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #3 plus input.
F B3-: Lit red indicates a fault on Battery #3 return input.
G Battery Input Connector
Note: Battery “B1" is associated with the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery, Batteries “B2" and “B3"
correspond to additional battery sources input through the module front panel connector G.

Battery Input Connector
The Battery Input Connector has 7 contacts. It is used to connect the GFD-1 to up to two external batteries
and earth ground. The field connector is GETSGS part number 032773-653. The keying pins are part
number 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied with the GFD for field
wiring.
GFD-1 Battery Connector Pin

Assignment
Signal Pin
Battery 2+ 1
Battery 2- 2
Battery 3+ 4
Battery 3- 5
Earth Ground 7
Figure 1-30, Battery

Input Connector.
Communications Input/Output Module - 1/1A

EC5: CIO-1 P/N: 251126-000
ElectroLogIXS: CIO-1A P/N: 251329-000
The CIO-1/CIO-1A provides a non-vital, asynchronous, serial communication interface to/from the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. It has two serial ports:
• a serial port for local interface to the system for diagnostic purposes.
• a serial port that can make a telemetry link between an office and a remote site for remote control of an
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. This port can also interface to a HLC/LCP.
The CIO-1/CIO-1A can provide communication links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the
instrument housing. The CIO-1/CIO-1A can only be installed in the dedicated CIO-1/CIO-1A slot on the
backplane. These modules can be removed and replaced with the power switch ON if the serial Office
Port is not being used.

Introduction
Figure 1-31, CIO-1/CIO-1A Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Diagnostic and Office signals to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 pass through the Optocouplers circuit. These
Optocouplers provide 2000 VAC isolation for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from the Diagnostic and
Office Ports.
RS232 Interface
The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into RS-232 signals. These
are applied to the Diagnostic and Office Ports (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232
signals from the Diagnostic and Office Ports (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are
sent to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the
Diagnostic or Office Ports.
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface portions of the CIO-1/CIO-1A. The CIO-1/CIO-1A has
two Isolated Supplies, one for each port. Each port is isolated from the other and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
system.

Indicators
F B
C
E
373-PH17
373-PH17a
Figure 1-32a, CIO-1A indicators
for ElectroLogIXS.
Figure 1-32, CIO-1
indicators for EC5
A Diagnostic Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port.

B Diagnostic RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data.
C Office RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data.
D Office Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port.
E Office TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data.
F Diagnostic TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Introduction
Diagnostic Port
The Diagnostic Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect a diagnostic terminal or Personal
Computer to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 for to aid in system maintenance and troubleshooting.
Diagnostic Port Pin Assignment

Signal Signal Name Input/Output Pin
CD Carrier Detect Input 1
RX Receive Data Input 2

TX Transmit Data Output 3
DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 4
GND Common Signal Return N/A 5
DSR Data Set Ready Input 6
RTS Request To Send Output 7
CTS Clear To Send Input 8
RI Ring Indicator Input 9
Figure 1-33,
Diagnostic Port
Office Port Connector.
The Office Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used for office connections and can be configured for UCE
(Universal Code Emulation), GENISYS® or SCS-128 protocol.
Office Port Pin Assignment


Figure 1-34, Office

Port Connector.

Communications Input/Output Module - 2/2A

EC5: CIO-2 P/N: 251127-000
ElectroLogIXS: CIO-2A P/N: 251330-000
The optional CIO-2/CIO-2A Module is a communications module that provides a synchronous, or

asynchronous, point-to-point, RS-232 communications interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. It
has one serial port for data communication. The CIO-2/CIO-2A is a serial interface through which the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can communicate with other control equipment.
The CIO-2/CIO-2A can provide communication links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the
instrument housing. The CIO-2 can only be installed in CIO Slot 2 in an EC5 system, and up to two
CIO-2A modules may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in the
CIO-2A/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane.
Figure 1-35, CIO-2/CIO-2A Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This circuit provides
2000 VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the Communication Port.
RS232 Interface
The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers into RS-232 signals. These are then
applied to the Communication Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from
the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system.
Surge Protection
This circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may occur at the
Communications Port.
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface Circuit. This ensures isolation between the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the outside world.

Introduction
Indicators
K B
J C
I D
H E
G F
373-PH18
373-PH18a
Figure 1-36a, CIO-2A

Figure 1-36, CIO-2 Indicators for EC5 Indicators for ElectroLogIXS
A Data: DB-25, RS-232 serial port.

B RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data.
C CTS: Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
D DSR: Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present.
E RXC: Receive Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present.
F CD: Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CD is present.
G ETC: External Transmit Clock from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present.
H TXC: Transmit Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present.
I DTR: Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present.
J RTS: Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
K TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Data Port
The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for communication with RS-232 compatible devices.
Port Pin Assignment

PGND Protective Ground 1

TCLKIN Transmit Clock Input 15
Figure 1-37, Data Port.
RCLK Receive Clock Input 17
TCLKOUT Transmit Clock Output 24

Introduction
Communications Input/Output Module - MD/MDA

EC5: CIO-MD P/N: 251331-000
ElectroLogIXS: CIO-MDA P/N: 251332-000
The optional CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is a communications module that provides a full duplex,

asynchronous or synchronous RS485 communication interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system.
It has one serial communications port. The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is a serial interface through which the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can communicate with other EC5, ElectroLogIXS, or VHLC units. The
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA supports multi-drop communications and can communicate with multiple remote
devices.
The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is capable of providing communication links of up to 4,000 feet that extend
beyond the instrument housing with appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-MD can only be
installed in CIO Slot 2 in an EC5 system, and up to two CIO-MDA modules may be installed in an
ElectroLogIXS system in the CIO-2A/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane.
Figure 1-38, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000
VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the Communications Port.
RS485 Interface
The RS485 Interface converts the digital signals from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system into RS-485 signals.
These are applied to the Communications Port. Also, it converts RS-485 signals from the Communications
Port into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Surge Protection
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the RS-485 Interface circuit. This
ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the outside world.

Indicators
K B
J C
I D
H E
G F
373-PH37a 373-PH19
Figure 1-39, CIO-MD Indicators Figure 1-39a, CIO-MDA

for EC5. Indicators for ElectroLogIXS.
A Data: DB-25, RS-485 serial port.

B RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receiving data.
C CTS: Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
D DSR: Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present.
E RXC: Receive Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present.
F CD: Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CD is present.
G ETC: External Transmit Clock from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present.
H TXC: Transmit Clock to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present.
I DTR: Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present.
J RTS: Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
K TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Introduction
Data Port
The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for communication with RS-422 compatible devices.
Port Pin Assignment

TXD (A) Transmit Data Output 2
RXD (A) Receive Data Input 3
RTS (A) Request To Send Output 4
CTS (A) Clear To Send Input 5
DSR (A) Data Set Ready Input 6
GND Signal Ground N/A 7
DCD (A) Data Carrier Detect Input 8
RXC (B) Receive Clock Input 9
DCD (B) Data Carrier Detect Input 10
ETXC (B) Transmit Clock Output 11
TXC (B) Transmit Clock Input 12
Figure 1-40, Data Port.
CTS (B) Clear To Send Input 13
TXD (B) Transmit Data Output 14
TXC (A) Transmit Clock Input 15
RXD (B) Receive Data Input 16
RXC (A) Receive Clock Input 17
RTS (B) Request To Send Output 19
DTR (A) Data Terminal Ready Output 20
DSR (B) Data Set Ready Input 22
DTR (B) Data Terminal Ready Output 23
ETXC (A) Transmit Clock Output 24
323-0655
Figure 1-41, Backplane key for CIO-MDA for ElectroLogIXS

CIO-2AB Communications Input/Output P/N: 251467-000
The optional CIO-2AB (Communications Input/Output) Module provides a non-vital asynchronous,

point-to-point, RS-232 communications interface to/from the ElectroLogIXS. It has one serial port for data
communication. The CIO-2AB is a serial interface through which the ElectroLogIXS can communicate
with a BCS protocol modem. The CIO-2AB can provide communication links of up to 50 feet (15.2m) that
do not extend beyond the instrument housing. One CIO-2AB module may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS
system in either of the CIO-2AB/CIO-MDA/CIO-PCA slots on the backplane.
Block Diagram
Figure 1-42, CIO-2AB Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC
isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the Communications Port.
RS232 Interface
The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers into RS-232 signals. These are then
applied to the Communication Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from
the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the
ElectroLogIXS system. The DTR signal is controlled by the VPM to connect/disconnect a BCS modem.
Surge Protection
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply powers the RS-232 Interface Circuit. This ensures isolation between the
ElectroLogIXS system and the outside world.

Introduction
Indicators
323-0691
Figure 1-43, CIO-2AB Indicators and Connector
A- DB-25, RS-232 serial port
B- RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data.
C- CTS: Clear to Send to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CTS signal is present
D- DSR: Data Set Ready to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when DSR signal is present
E- CD: Carrier Detect to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CD is present.
F- DTR: Data Terminal Ready from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when DTR is present.
G- RTS: Request to Send from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
H- TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Data Port
The CIO-2AB Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used for a serial port that can make a telemetry
link between an office and a remote site for BCS protocol remote communication with an ElectroLogIXS
location.
Port Pin Assignment

PGND Protective Ground 1

DTR Data Terminal Ready (Modem Output 20
Connect)
Figure 1-44, Data
Port.
323-0655a
Figure 1-45, Backplane key for CIO-2AB

Introduction
CIO-3 Communications Input/Output Module - 3
EC5: CIO-3 P/N: 251128-000
The optional CIO-3 Module is a communications module that provides a synchronous or asynchronous
EIA-530 (RS-422) communication interface to/from the EC5 system. It has one serial communications
port. The CIO-3 is a serial interface through which the EC5 can communicate with other train control
equipment.
The CIO-3 is capable of providing communicate links of up to 4,000 feet that extend beyond the
instrument housing with appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-3 can only be installed in CIO Slot
2.
Figure 1-46, CIO-3 Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the EC5 passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC isolation
between the EC5 system and the Communications Port.
RS422 Interface
The RS422 Interface converts the digital signals from the EC5 system into RS-422 signals. These are
applied to the Communications Port. Also, it converts RS-422 signals from the Communications Port into
digital signals that are sent to the EC5.
Surge Protection
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the RS-422 Interface circuit. This
ensures isolation between the EC5 system and the outside world.

Indicators
Figure 1-47, CIO-3 Indicators for EC5.
A- Data: DB-25, RS-422 serial port.
B- RX: Receive data to EC5. LED is lit when receiving data.
C- CTS: Clear to Send to EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present
D- DSR: Data Set Ready to EC5. LED is lit when DSR signal is present
E- RXC: Receive Clock to EC5. LED is lit when RXC is present.
F- CD: Carrier Detect to EC5. LED is lit when CD is present.
G- ETC: External Transmit Clock from EC5. LED is lit when ETC is present.
H- TXC: Transmit Clock to EC5. LED is lit when TXC signal is present.
I- DTR: Data Terminal Ready from EC5. LED is lit when DTR is present.
J- RTS: Request to Send from EC5. LED is lit when CTS signal is present.
K- TX: Transmit data from EC5. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Introduction
Data Port
The Data Port is a DB-25 male connector. It is used to connect the EC5 to other wayside equipment.
Port Pin Assignment

TXD (A) Transmit Data Output 2
RXD (A) Receive Data Input 3
RTS (A) Request To Send Output 4
CTS (A) Clear To Send Input 5
DSR (A) Data Set Ready Input 6
DCD (A) Data Carrier Detect Input 8
RXC (B) Receive Clock Input 9
DCD (B) Data Carrier Detect Input 10
ETXC (B) Transmit Clock Output 11
TXC (B) Transmit Clock Input 12
CTS (B) Clear To Send Input 13
TXD (B) Transmit Data Output 14
TXC (A) Transmit Clock Input 15
RXD (B) Receive Data Input 16
RXC (A) Receive Clock Input 17
RTS (B) Request To Send Output 19
DTR (A) Data Terminal Ready Output 20
DSR (B) Data Set Ready Input 22
DTR (B) Data Terminal Ready Output 23
ETXC (A) Transmit Clock Output 24
Figure 1-48, Data Port

CIO-3 Connector Keying
The CIO-3 connector is keyed as shown below.
Figure 1-49, CIO-3 Connector Keying

for EC5

Introduction
Communications Input/Output Module - CLA
ElectroLogIXS: CIO-CLA P/N: 251329-100
The CIO-CLA provides a non-vital, asynchronous, serial communication interface to/from the
ElectroLogIXS system. It has two serial ports:
• a serial port for local interface to the system for diagnostic purposes.
• a serial port that can interface to an LCP.
The CIO-CLA is capable of providing communication links that extend beyond the instrument housing with
appropriate primary surge protection. The CIO-CLA can only be installed in the dedicated CIO-1A slot on
the backplane. These modules can be removed and replaced with the power switch ON if the serial LCP
Port is not being used.
ISOLATED SUPPLY
RS232
OPTOCOUPLERS DIAGNOSTICS
INTERFACE SURGE PROTECTION
(DIAGNOSTICS) (DB-9)
(DIAGNOSTICS)
VPM
Current Loop Adapter (CLA)
OPTOCOUPLERS LCP
INTERFACE SURGE PROTECTION
(DIAGNOSTICS) (DB-9)
(LCP)
ISOLATED SUPPLY
Figure 1-50, CIO-CLA Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000 VAC
isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the communications port.
RS232 Interface
The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into RS-232 signals. These
are applied to the Diagnostic Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts RS-232 signals from
the Diagnostic (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that are sent to the ElectroLogIXS
system.
CLA Interface
The CLA Interface converts the digital signals from the Optocouplers circuit into Current Loop Adapter
(CLA) signals. These are applied to the LCP Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts
Current Loop Adapter (CLA) signals from the LCP (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital signals that
are sent to the ElectroLogIXS system.

Surge Protection
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the optocouplers, the RS-232
interface, and the current loop interface. This ensures isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system
and the outside world.

Introduction
Indicators
F B
C
E
LCP
D
CIO-CLA
CIO-CLA
Figure 1-51, CIO-CLA Indicators.
A Diagnostic Port: DB-9, RS-232 serial port.

B Diagnostic RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data.
C LCP RX: Receive data to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when receiving data.
D LCP Port: DB-9, current loop serial port.
E LCP TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data.
F Diagnostic TX: Transmit data from ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when transmitting data.

Data Port
The Diagnostic Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect a diagnostic terminal or Personal
Computer to the ElectroLogIXS to aid in system maintenance and troubleshooting.
Diagnostic Port Pin Assignment

Figure 1-52, DB-9
Connector.
LCP Port
The LCP Port is a DB-9, male connector. It is used to connect to a Local Control Panel (LCP).
LCP Port Pin Assignment

TXD- Transmit Data Output 1
TXD+ Transmit Data Output 2
RXD+ Receive Data Input 4
RXD- Receive Data Input 5

Introduction
Communications Input/Output Module - PCA

ElectroLogIXS: CIO-PCA P/N: 251486-001
The CIO-PCA is a non-vital communications module that provides protocol conversion between an
office system and the VLC system. The CIO-PCA contains a processor based module providing four
external interfaces: one Ethernet and three serial data ports.
The CIO-PCA is configured and managed as a CIO-MDA. The CIO-PCA can provide communication
links of up to 50 feet that do not extend beyond the instrument housing. A single CIO-PCA module
may be installed in an ElectroLogIXS system in any of the CIO-2A/CIO-MDA slots on the backplane.

ISOLATED
SUPPLY
ETHERNET
ETHERNET INTERFACE
(RJ-45)
VPM OPTOCOUPLERS RS232 SURGE DIAG PORT

PROTOCOL INTERFACE PROTECTION (RJ-45)
CONVERTER
CPU RS232 SURGE ASYNC PORT
INTERFACE PROTECTION (RJ-45)
RS232 SURGE SYNC PORT
INTERFACE PROTECTION (RJ-45)
Figure 1-53, CIO-PCA Block Diagram.
Optocouplers
Communication to/from the ElectroLogIXS passes through the Optocouplers. This provides 2000
VAC isolation between the ElectroLogIXS system and the Protocol Converter CPU.
Protocol Converter CPU
The Protocol Converter CPU converts outgoing ElectroLogIXS system ATCS messages to ARES
radio modem compatible messages and reverses the process for messages from the ARES radio
modem to the ElectroLogIXS system. It also creates and terminates control messages for
configuring ARES radios. Finally, the Protocol Converter CPU creates and terminates
administrative traffic for configuring and monitoring the CIO-PCA.
Ethernet
The Ethernet Interface converts the digital signals from the Protocol Converter CPU into Ethernet
signals. These are applied to the Ethernet data port. Also, it converts Ethernet signals from the
Ethernet data port into digital signals that are sent to the Protocol Converter CPU.
RS232 Interface
The RS232 Interface converts the digital signals from the Protocol Converter CPU into RS-232
signals. These are then applied to the Data Port (via the Surge Protection circuit). Also, it converts
RS-232 signals from the Communications Port (via the Surge Protection circuit) into digital
signals that are sent to the Protocol Converter CPU.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection circuit provides secondary surge protection from power surges that may
occur at the Communications Port.

Introduction
Isolated Supply
The Isolated Supply circuit supplies an isolated operating voltage for the optocouplers, the
protocol converter CPU, the Ethernet interface, and the RS-232 interfaces. This ensures isolation
between the ElectroLogIXS system and the outside world.
Indicators
A
G
E H
F I
J
B K
C M
D O
Figure 1-54, CIO-PCA Indicators

A ENET: RJ-45, Ethernet port.
B DIAG: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port.
C ASYNC: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port.
D SYNC: RJ-45, RS-232 serial port.
E BKP: Receive data from ElectroLogIXS (backplane). LED is lit when receiving data.
F ASY: Receive data from Async (radio control) port. LED is lit when a valid frame (good CRC) is received.
G LINK: Physical Ethernet connected to ElectroLogIXS. LED is lit when an active Ethernet is connected and
flashes with link activity.
H 100: Ethernet data rate. LED is lit when connected at 100M and flashes when collisions are detected.
I HLT: CIO-PCA Health. LED flashes approximately once per second when module is functioning properly
J SYN: Receive data from SYNC (radio data) port. LED is lit when a valid frame (good CRC) is received.
K RX: DIAG port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present.

L TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present.
M RX: port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present.
N TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present.
O RX: port receive data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when receive data is present.
P TX: port transmit data activity to ElectroLogIXS/EC5. LED is lit when transmit data is present.
Data Ports
Each Data Port connects through RJ-45 connectors mounted on the front panel.
8 1
Figure 1-55, RJ-45 Data Port
RJ-45 Ethernet Port Pin Assignment

TXD + Transmit Data Output 1
TXD - Transmit Data Output 2
RXD + Receive Data Input 3
RXD - Receive Data Input 6
RJ-45 RS-232 Port Pin Assignment

TXD Transmit Data Output 3
RXD Receive Data Input 6

Introduction
RJ-45 Asynchronous Port Pin Assignment

DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8
RJ-45 Synchronous Port Pin Assignment

TXC Transmit Clock Input 2
RXC Receive Clock Input 7
Figure 1-56, DB-25 Data Port Adapter
DB-25 Synchronous Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075111-000) Pin Assignments

TXC Transmit Clock Input 15
RXC Receive Clock Input 17

DB-25 Asynchronous Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075111-001) Pin Assignments

DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 8
Figure 1-57, DB-9 Data Port Adapter
DB-9 Diagnostic Port Adapter Cable (P/N 075064-000) Port Pin Assignments
CIO-PCA Specific ElectroLogIXS Platform Configuration
Configure the port on the ElectroLogIXS platform as normal with the following restriction:
the port BAUD rate must be set to 9600 or less.

Introduction
CIO-PCA First Time Installation
FIRST TIME INSTALL
If you are starting with a new CIO-PCA module that has never had any firmware loaded onto it, you will
need to use a Rabbit 3000 serial programming cable and the FlashIt utility. If you do not have the serial
programming cable, you may purchase one here:
http://www.rabbit.com/products/1_27_mm_rab_prog_cable/
The following are step-by-step instructions for loading firmware using the FlashIt utility.
1. Connect the serial programming cable to your PC.
2. Connect the “Prog” connector of the serial programming cable to the header on the Rabbit RCM3319
module. Take care to align the red stripe on the programming cable with pin 1 of the header.

3. Start the FlashIt utility.
4. Under “Options, Serial”, select the desired COM port and speed. Choose the fastest baud rate your PC
will support, but do not exceed 230400 bps. Make sure “Disable STATUS signal bootstrap check”
checkbox is checked.

Introduction
5. FlashIt will detect the RCM3319 and display information about it. Verify that the status bar at the
bottom of the utility says “Rabbit connected on Com1 at 230400” or similar.

6. Click the yellow folder icon to select the binary file. The binary file selected will be displayed in the
lower right of the status bar. The middle icon, used to program the device, will enable.
7. Click the middle icon to program the device. You will see a status bar. The status bar may hang for a
few seconds. Wait for the programming to finish.

Introduction
8. You will see a success message when the programming is complete.
9. To program another module, click the far right icon to reset the connection for the next module.

VTI-2S Vital Track Interface P/N: 251123-000

The VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface) Module provides a coded DC-track circuit interface for the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5. It has two track circuit transceivers that communicate the Electro Code track circuit
protocols. Also, the VTI-2S has two cab signal control outputs and two auxiliary vital inputs. All
adjustments to track circuits are made using the CDU-1 or a terminal connected to the CIO-1/CIO-1A
or CIO-CLA Module. No mechanical adjustments are required.
Figure 1-60, VTI-2S Block Diagram.
Isolated DC/DC Converter
The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the rail. It
is also used to apply DC coded signals to the rail.
Digital Signal Processors
The incoming track codes are converted into digital data and passed to the Digital Signal Processors, which
attenuate all signals above 20 Hz. This virtually eliminates all induced track circuit noise, including power
line noise, cab signals, audio frequency track circuits, and grade crossing predicator signals; no additional
filtering is necessary.
Vital Input
The Vital Inputs are general purpose, two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. When an input rises
above 8.0 ±0.5 volts, it is considered energized. The Vital Input remains energized until the input voltage
falls below 6.5 ±0.5 volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC.
Cab Output
The VTI-2S Cab Outputs employ closed loop feedback, allowing the VPM to verify that the actual cab
output agrees with the intended cab output.
The Cab Outputs are two wire outputs used to drive cab signal generators with standard one-wire inputs.
Each of the outputs are related to each track interface, i.e. CAB 1 with track 1 and CAB 2 with Track 2.
Note: If the cab generator battery is separate from the battery supply for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the
battery negatives must be referenced to each other.

Introduction
Indicators
Figure 1-61, VTI-2S Indicators.
A TRACK 1 OUT: LED is lit when a code pulse is being transmitted by Track 1 transmitter.
B TRACK 1 IN: LED is lit when Track 1 receives valid pulses.
C CAB OUTPUT: LED is lit when transmitting cab codes.
D HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly.
E VITAL INPUT: LED is lit when the input is energized.
F TRACK 2 IN: LED is lit when Track 2 receives valid pulses.
G TRACK 2 OUT: LED is lit whenever a code pulse is being transmitted by Track 2 transmitter.

Figure 1-62, TIP-2 Block Diagram.
TIP-2 Track Inductor Panel P/N: 800-096000-011

The TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel) provides secondary surge protection that protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
system from power surges and lighting strikes that may occur on the rails. Track connections are made
through the use of AAR terminals. Primary surge protection such as arresters and equalizers are still required.
Inductor
The Inductor passes the received coded track pulses from the tracks. Because of its high impedance, it
reduces all other signals on the tracks (audio, cab, etc.). In addition, the Inductor prevents the VTI-2S from
loading the track circuit while transmitting coded track pulses to the tracks.
TSS-1
The TSS-1 (Track Surge Suppressor - 1) restricts fast power surges and lightning strikes that can occur on
the tracks.

Introduction
Fuses
Fuses provide protection for the chassis in the event that a lightning strike or power surge exceeds the
limiting capability of the TSS-1. Refer to the Fuse Chart below.
TIP Fuse Chart
Fuse Designation Manufacturer Value Quantity GETSGS

Part Number
Cartridge (FLNR9) Littelfuse® 9 Amp (thermal slo-blow) 2 141-005103-032
Automobile Style (257010) Littelfuse® 10 Amp 2 010101-004
Figure 1-63, Track Inductor Panel Component Location Diagram.
The 9 Amp cartridge fuse protects against low voltage, high amp surges such as downed power lines or
welders across the rails.
The 10 Amp automobile-style fuse is the final level of protection against power surges.
Cab Signal Filters
Track Inductor Panels can also be ordered with built-in cab signal filters. The cab signal filters keep
cab signal energy applied to the rail from interfering with the Electro Code track rates.
TIP-2 Cab Signal Filter Chart
Designation GETSGS Frequency

Part Number
TIP-2 W/100 FILTER 800-096000-012 100 Hz
TIP-2W/60HZ 800-096000-013 60 Hz
TIP-2W/40HZ FILTER 800-096000-014 40 Hz
TIP-2W/83.3HZFILTER 800-096000-015 83.3 Hz

VLD-C6S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N: 251125-000

The VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Driver) Module is used to drive signal lamps at an intermediate signal location.
The module has six lamp drive outputs, organized as two banks of three outputs. Only one lamp output per
bank can be energized, and a maximum of two lamp outputs can be energized simultaneously (one lamp
output per bank). Each bank has its own DC/DC Converter. This allows placement of signals at different
distances from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
Each lamp output is capable of driving an 18 to 25 Watt single filament lamp. For color position signaling,
the VLD-C6S is capable of driving two 20 Watt lamps per single position light only; 40 Watts on the upper
head and the lower head is limited to 20 Watts.
Refer to Tables 2-2 through 2-4 for maximum wire lengths.
Also, the VLD-C6S has 4 non-vital input/output ports.
Filament Checks
The VLD-C6S provides circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor and report the filament integrity of all
signal lamp bulbs installed. An open filament on a signal lamp is detectable on both enabled and disabled
signal lamps.
An open filament on a signal lamp that should be on (Hot Filament Detection), is detected by the presence
of two conditions: correct voltage levels on the lamp output, in combination with, low DC/DC converter
output current levels.
An open filament on a signal lamp that should be off (Cold Filament Detection) is detected by the failure to
discharge a test capacitor that is connected to the output for a short period of time. Thus, the VLD-C6S
provides circuitry that allows the detection of the filament integrity without lighting a signal lamp that
should be off.
Upon detection of an open filament, the VPM control will disable the lamp output and indicate an open
filament to the user. If the bulb is replaced, the VPM will allow the signal lamp to be enabled after passing
a minimum of 30 seconds of feedback checks.
Feedback Checks
The VLD-C6S provides feedback circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor and report the integrity of the
lamp output switch operation. The response to a detected hardware failure is a shutdown of all lamp outputs
on the module.
During a module shutdown, the VLD-C6S Module ceases to drive lamps for a minimum of 30 seconds
before the VPM attempts a VLD-C6S Module recovery. If the feedback checks are successful during
recovery, the VLD-C6S will resume driving signal lamps as long as the feedback circuitry continues to
indicate proper lamp output switch operation.

Introduction
As previously mentioned, the VLD-C6S has six lamp drive outputs, organized in two banks of three
outputs. Since the operation of the two banks are identical, only the operation of bank 1 is discussed.
Figure 1-64, VLD-C6S Block Diagram.
The VPM controls the lamp drive voltage level needed to drive the signal lamps. The DC/DC Converter
supplies the proper lamp drive voltage (according to the level specified by the VPM) to the Lamp Output
Switch and isolates the lamp output power from the battery input. Adjustment of the lamp drive voltage is
accomplished using the CDU-1.
Lamp Output Switch
The Lamp Output Switch contains three lamp switches. Only one output per bank can be energized at any
given time. The lamp enable signal from the VPM enables (turns on) the appropriate Lamp Output which,
in turn, drives the signal lamp using the voltage supplied by the DC/DC Converter.
Non-Vital Input/Output
In addition to its lamp driving capability, the VLD-C6S also has four non-vital I/O ports. Each of the four
bidirectional ports can be configured as an input or an output. If used as an output the VPM can energize
the output with 12V. If used as an input, voltages from 5 to 16 can energize the input.
NVIO port 1 can be used for a POR (Power Off Relay) function, with an additional module for the AC
interface, typically the ACP. The non-vital I/O ports can also be used for double track approach lighting and
other non-vital functions implemented by non-vital relays and non-vital devices.

Indicators
Figure 1-65, VLD-C6S Indicators.
A BANK 1 LAMP: Appropriate LED is lit when lamp of bank 1 is active (lit).
B NON-VITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS: Appropriate LED is lit I/O is energized.
C HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly.
D BANK 2 LAMP: Appropriate LED is lit when lamp of bank 2 is active (lit).

Introduction
VLD-R16S Vital Lamp Driver Module P/N 251381-000
WARNING Power for the VLD-R16S lamp outputs via Lamp B/Lamp N must be
supplied through the contacts of an AREMA compatible vital relay that
is controlled by the VSSR driver circuit (VSSR1 and VSSR2 outputs)
on the respective VLD-R16S module.
The VLD-R16S (Vital Lamp Driver) Module is used to drive signal lamps in any signaling application.
The module has sixteen lamp outputs, organized as two banks of eight outputs each, and is capable of
energizing all outputs on both banks simultaneously as long as the total current output remains at or below
20 Amps per bank, 40 Amps for the module.
Each lamp output is capable of driving single filament, incandescent lamps from 18 to 28 Watts or GELcore
Model 92 LED signals, in any combination, as long as the maximum current per bank is not exceeded.
Signals can be driven at varying distances depending upon wire gauge, bulb wattage, use of common
returns, etc. Refer to the tables in Section 2 for more information on specific wire lengths.
VLD-R16S modules are able to be removed and installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on.
Thus, a failed VLD-R16S module may be replaced and returned to normal operation without disrupting
other functions provided by the system.
Figure 1-66, VLD-R16S Block Diagram

The voltage level delivered to the actual signal lamp itself is controlled via the Lamp Power Input voltage
level. The Monitor Circuitry monitors the voltage level of the Lamp Power input and, if too low, disables
the VSSR output and shuts the lamp bank down.
Lamp Power Inputs
Each lamp bank is supplied Lamp Power via a dedicated Lamp Power input. The Lamp Power input is a
two-wire 12 VDC input (nominal) with an operational range 9.5 VDC to 16.5 VDC and a Lamp Power
neutral (return) reference. The Lamp Power inputs are able to withstand application of 20 VDC in either
polarity without damaging the module.
The voltage level delivered to the actual signal lamp itself is controlled via the Lamp Power Input voltage
level. The Monitor Circuitry monitors the voltage level of the Lamp Power input and, if too low, disables
the VSSR output and shuts the lamp bank down.
Lamp Outputs
The Lamp Outputs switch the Lamp Power input of the lamp bank to the appropriate Lamp Output under
control of the VPM. All Lamp Outputs in a bank can be energized simultaneously as long as the total bank
current does not exceed 20 Amps.
Each Lamp Output has short circuit protection (a short will not damage the module) and is able to survive
externally applied voltages of 20 VDC in either polarity. A shorted lamp output or an external voltage that
causes a lamp output to appear to be on when it should be off will cause the Lamp Bank to shut down. The
Lamp Bank will return to normal operation after the short has been corrected or the external, positive
polarity voltage source has been removed and the lamp bank has been down for at least 30 seconds. An
externally applied reverse polarity voltage may cause the protective fuse to blow for the associated lamp
bank. Normal operation returns once the fuse is replaced.
VSSR Outputs
The Vital Signal Stop (VSSR) outputs are two-wire, vital outputs that deliver output voltage in the range of
9.5 VDC to 16.5 VDC into relay loads from 50 Ω to 1150 Ω. The VSSR outputs are designed to allow
independent operation. However, they can be programmed by the user to operate in a combined fashion
should the application require it.
The VSSR Outputs are powered by the ElectroLogIXS equipment power (not the Lamp Power Inputs) and
are able to withstand short circuit, open circuit, or external application of 32 VDC positive polarity for a
period of 24 hours.
Monitor Circuitry
Each lamp bank incorporates Monitor Circuitry that provides the VPM with the voltage and current levels
of the Lamp Outputs, the voltage level of the Lamp Power input, and the voltage level of the internal
module circuitry. If the Monitor Circuitry detects that the internal module circuitry voltage has dropped
below the operational level, it disables the VSSR outputs for both lamp banks without VPM interaction.

Introduction
Filament Checks
The VLD-R16S provides monitor circuitry that allows the VPM to monitor, report, and respond to the
filament integrity of all signal lamps installed. The circuitry allows open filaments to be detected on
energized and de-energized lamps.
An open filament on a signal lamp that should be on is detected by observing low output current while the
energizing output voltage is being applied.
For signal lamps that are off, an open filament is detected by energizing the output for a short (less than 2
milliseconds) time and observing the current on the output. This approach confirms filament integrity
while allowing the signal lamp to remain off.
Upon detection of any open filament, the VPM disables the lamp output and indicates the open filament
condition to the user. When the bulb is replaced, the VPM allows the signal lamp to be energized if the bulb
has been off for a minimum of 30 seconds.
Feedback Checks
The VLD-R16S contains feedback circuitry to allow the VPM to monitor and report on the integrity of the
lamp output circuitry. The response to a detected fault (off when should be on, on when should be off, etc.)
is a de-energizing of all the Lamp Outputs and a disabling of the Vital Signal Stop Relay (VSSR) output
associated with that lamp bank.
After a lamp bank has been shut down, the VPM disables the eight Lamp Outputs and the VSSR output for
the bank for a minimum of 30 seconds. After 30 seconds have passed, the VSSR output is enabled and the
VPM performs a health check of the lamp bank. If the lamp bank passes the health checks, the VLD-R16S
resumes normal operation. Otherwise, if the lamp bank fails one or more health checks, the VSSR output is
disabled and the VPM waits another 30 seconds before retrying.

Indicators
Figure 1-67, VLD-R16S

Indicators
A VSSR LED for Bank 1. LED is lit when Bank 1 VSSR is energized.
B Bank 1 Lamp Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding Lamp Output is energized.
C VSSR LED for Bank 2. LED is lit when Bank 2 VSSR is energized.
D Bank 2 Lamp Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding Lamp Output is energized.
E Bank Health LEDs. LEDs are lit when associated VSSR is energized and all internal self tests
pass for that bank.
F Module health LED. LED is lit when both banks are healthy.

Introduction
VIO-1010S Track Code Select Input / Track Code Decoder Output Module
P/N: 251132-000
The VIO-1010S (Track Code Select Input/Track Code Decoder Output) Module provides an interface
between a relay-based interlocking and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. The VIO-1010S has 10 code select
inputs and 10 decoder outputs to interface with relay-based systems.
Inputs
This module produces an isolated battery voltage (REF+ and REF-) used to energize an input. This battery
voltage used with vital relay contacts accomplish code selection. An open relay contact is defined as a de-
energized input, and a closed relay contact is defined as an energized input. Based on the relay contact
inputs (open/closed), the application equations select the code(s) to be transmitted. The isolated battery
voltage connected to a track code select input will be de-energized when it is below 5.5 VDC and energized
when it is above 7.5 VDC.
Outputs
With a battery supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a track code decoder output connected to a 500 ohm load, a
track code decoder output typically supplies 15 to 16.5 VDC (depending on the number of outputs
energized) with no more than 100 mV peak to peak ripple. Each track code decoder output is capable of
driving a load impedance of 150 ohms or greater. The VIO-1010S is capable of simultaneously energizing
up to five track decoder outputs.
Track Code Select Inputs
The track code select information from the relay-based interlocking system is sent to the Surge Protection
Circuit.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection Circuit protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from voltage surges that may occur
on the track code select inputs. The Surge Protection Circuits prevents damage if voltages exceed 32 VDC
or are applied in reverse polarity, to a track code select input. From the Surge Protection Circuit, the track
code select information is sent to the Signature Decoder Circuit.
Figure 1-68, VIO-1010S Block Diagram.

Signature Generator
The Signature Generator Circuit generates a continuous data string which is sent to the Signature Decoder
Circuit.
Signature Decoder
The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the analog track code select input voltage with a continuous data
string generated by the Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data is a 16-bit word for each input that is
sent to the VPM for processing. Based on these 16-bit words, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application software
determines which inputs are energized and which codes to send on the tracks.
The Isolated DC/DC Converter isolates the track code decoder outputs from battery and supplies the
voltage necessary to drive the outputs.
Output Switches
The Output Switches control which outputs are energized or de-energized. From the Output Switch Circuit,
the track code decoder output voltages are sent to the Surge Protection Circuit.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection Circuit protects the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system from voltage surges that may occur
on the track code decoder outputs. The Surge Protection Circuits prevent damage if voltages do not exceed
32 VDC.
Track Code Decoder Outputs
From the Surge Protection Circuit, the Track Code Decoder Output information is sent to the relay-based
interlocking system. Based on this information, the relay logic in the relay-based system determines which
track codes were received by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.

Introduction
Indicators
Figure 1-69, VIO-1010S Indicators.
A CODE 1 - CODE M SEL: Track Code Select Input LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding input is
active.
B Health Indicator: LED is lit when the module functions properly.
C CODE 1 - CODE M RELAY: Track Code Decoder Output LEDs. LED is lit when corresponding output
is active.

VIO-44S Vital Input/Output Module P/N: 251134-000

The VIO-44S (Vital Input/Output) Module contains four general purpose, two-wire, vital inputs and
outputs. It is used for vital system control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs according
to the application equations. The inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital controls
while the outputs can be used for vital control of switch machines and other equipment.
Figure 1-70, VIO-44S Block Diagram.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection protects the VIO-44S from power surges that may occur at a Vital Input or Vital
Output.
The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the Vital Outputs.
Vital Input
The Vital Inputs are general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. When an input rises
above 8.0 ±0.5 volts, it is considered energized. The Vital Input remains energized until the input voltage
falls below 6.5 ±0.5 volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC.

Introduction
Signature Generator
The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string which is sent to the Signature Decoder for
processing.
Signature Decoder
The Signature Decoder Circuit mixes the input signals with a continuous data string generated by the
Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data that is sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data,
the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 determines the input information.
Vital Output
The Vital Outputs are general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. With a battery supply
voltage of 13.5 VDC and a vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a vital output typically supplies
12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized) with no more than 100mV peak-to-peak of
ripple. Each vital output is capable of driving load impedances of 150 ohms or greater.

Indicators
Figure 1-71, VIO-44S Indicators.
A VITAL INPUT: LED is lit when input is active.
B Health Indicator: LED is lit when the module functions properly.
C VITAL OUT: LED is lit when output is active.

Introduction
VIO-44R Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251379-000

The VIO-44R (Vital Input/Output) Module contains four redundant general purpose, two wire, Vital Inputs
and outputs. It is used for vital system control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs
according to the application equations. The inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital
controls while the outputs can be used for vital control of switch machines and other equipment.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection protects the VIO-44R from power surges that may occur at a Vital Input or Vital
Output.
The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the vital outputs.
Vital Input
The Vital Inputs are redundant general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS. When an input
rises above 8.0 ± 0.5 Volts, it is considered energized. The vital input remains energized until the input
voltage falls below 6.5 ± 0.5 Volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC.
When a vital input fails the module transfers to the redundant vital input. If a failure occurs where the
module loses the vital input redundancy, the IN REDUNDANCY LED will be turned off.
Signature Generator
The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string that is sent to the signature decoder for
processing.
Signature Decoder
signature generator circuit. The resultant data is then sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data,
the ElectroLogIXS determines the input information.
Slow Release/Slow Pick
Each vital input can have a Slow Release and/or Slow Pick time set via the CDU or application logic. The
slow release and slow pick times can be set from 0-30 seconds in 1 second increments. The slow release
and slow pick times have a tolerance of ± 0.5 seconds. If the slow release/pick minimum and maximum are
set at the same number in the application then the time is not selectable through the CDU.
Vital Output
The vital outputs are redundant general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS. With a battery
supply voltage of 13.5 VDC and a two wire vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a two-wire vital
output typically supplies 12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized with no more than
300 mV peak-to-peak of ripple. All the Vital Outputs are capable of driving load impedances of 50 ohms.
When a vital output fails all the vital outputs are shutdown for at least 30 seconds. After 30 seconds the
vital outputs are transferred to the redundant vital outputs and they are set back to their energized or de-
energized state. The vital outputs can be forced to switch to the redundant bank using the CDU. If a failure
occurs where the module loses the vital output redundancy then the OUT REDUNDANCY LED is turned
off.

Figure 1-72, VIO-44R Indicators
A Vital In: LED is lit when an input is energized

B Vital Out: LED is lit when an output is energized
C In Redundancy: LED is lit when health of both the active and redundant inputs are
functioning properly.
D Out Redundancy: LED is lit when health of both the active and redundant outputs are
functioning properly.
E Health: LED is lit when the module is able to function properly.

Introduction
VIO-86S Vital Input/Output Module P/N 251380-000

The VIO-86S (Vital Input/Output) Module contains eight gracefully degrading general purpose, two wire,
vital inputs and six gracefully degrading general purpose, two wire, vital outputs. It is used for vital system
control by monitoring vital inputs and supplying vital outputs according to the application equations. The
inputs can be used for switch status, slide fences, and other vital controls while the outputs can be used for
the vital control of switch machines and other equipment. VIO-86S modules are able to be removed and
installed while the ElectroLogIXS system is powered on. Thus, a failed VIO-86S module may be replaced
and returned to normal operation without disrupting other functions provided by the system.
Surge Protection
The Surge Protection protects the VIO-86S from power surges that may occur at a vital input or vital
output.
The Isolated DC/DC Converter provides isolation between the supply battery and the vital outputs.
Vital Input
The Vital Inputs are general purpose two-wire inputs for the ElectroLogIXS. When an input rises above 8.0
± 0.5 Volts, it is considered energized. The vital input remains energized until the input voltage falls below
6.5 ± 0.5 Volts. Vital inputs will accept voltages up to 32 VDC.
Signature Generator
The Signature Generator generates a continuous data string that is sent to the Signature Decoder for
processing.
Signature Decoder
Signature Generator Circuit. The resultant data is then sent to the VPM for processing. Based on this data,
the ElectroLogIXS determines the input information.
Slow Release/Slow Pick
Each vital input can have a Slow Release and/or Slow Pick time set via the CDU or application logic. The
slow release and slow pick times can be set from 0-30 seconds in 1 second increments. The slow release
and slow pick times have a tolerance of ± 0.5 seconds. If the Slow Release/Pick Minimum and Maximum
are set at the same number in the application, the time is not selectable through the CDU.
Vital Output
The Vital Outputs are gracefully degrading general purpose, two-wire outputs for the ElectroLogIXS. The
vital outputs are grouped into 2 banks of 3 vital outputs. Each group is independent of the other and
therefore can be shut down while not effecting the operation of the other bank. With a battery supply
voltage of 13.5 VDC and a vital output connected to a 500 ohm load, a vital output typically supplies
12 to 13 VDC (depending on the number of outputs energized with no more than 300 mV peak-to-peak of
ripple. All the Vital Outputs are capable of driving load impedances of 50 ohms.
If a vital output fails, only the three vital outputs on the same bank as the failed vital output are shutdown.
The remaining three vital outputs remain functional. When a bank has a vital output failure, the associated
BANK HEALTH LED is turned off.

Figure 1-73, VIO-86S Indicators
A Vital In: LED is lit when an input is energized

B Vital Out: LED is lit when an output is energized
C Bank 1 Health: LED is lit when Bank 1 vital outputs are functioning properly.
D Bank 2 Health: LED is lit when Bank 2 vital outputs are functioning properly.
E Health: LED is lit when the module is able to function properly.
Note: In some installations there is the possibility of radiated interference from nearby equipment. If
engineering determines that a particular installation is susceptible, it is recommended that the provided
ferrites be installed on all Input and Output cabling connected to the personality module. Place the
ferrite around each I/O cable as close to the personality module as possible. If ferrites are placed
in series, ensure they are as close as possible to each other.

Introduction
CAB-16S Cab Enable Output Module P/N: 251334-000

The CAB-16S (Cab Enable Output) Module provides 16 outputs to drive external cab generators.
Figure 1-74, CAB-16S Block Diagram
Cab Output
The Cab Outputs employ closed loop feedback, allowing the VPM to verify that the actual cab output
agrees with the intended cab output.
The Cab Outputs are single-wire outputs used to drive cab signal generators.

Indicators
373-0192
Figure 1-75, CAB-16S Indicators
A CAB OUT: LED is lit when transmitting cab codes.
B HEALTH: LED is lit when module is functioning properly.

Introduction
ElectroLogIXS Chassis
The ElectroLogIXS chassis contains the backplane and personality modules. The backplane is designed to
allow any large module (VTI-2S, VLD-C6S, VLD-R16S, VIO-44S, VIO-44R, VIO-86S, VIO-1010S, and
CAB-16S) to be installed in any of the 9 slots. Personality modules are installed into the upper section of
the chassis and define which large module is installed in a slot for a particular application. The lower slots
are used for the system modules (VPM, CPS, CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA
and GFD-1).
CHASSIS
PERSONALITY
MODULES
(MAXIMUM OF 9)
SLOT 1 SLOT 9
BACKPLANE
CPS-2 FUTURE GFD-1 CIO-2A OR CIO-2A OR RMM-1 CI OR UCI-3

SLOT EXPANSION SLOT CIO-PCA OR CIO-PCA OR (FUTURE) MODULE
VPM CIO-MDA
CIO-1A OR CIO-MDA
SLOT SLOT SLOT
CIO-CLA
SLOT
Figure 1-76, ElectroLogIXS VLC 9-Slot Chassis and Backplane (P/N: 300752-000)

CIO-1A OR CIO-2A OR
CIO-CLA CIO-2A OR CIO-PCA OR
SLOT CIO-PCA OR CIO-MDA
CIO-MDA
SLOT SLOT
Figure 1-76a, ElectroLogIXS VLC 4-Slot Chassis and Backplane

(P/N: 251464-000)
ON/OFF
SWITCH
CI or UCI-3
MODULE
CHASSIS
CIO-1A or CIO-CLA
PERSONALITY
SLOT
MODULE
CIO-2A OR
CIO-PCA OR
CIO-MDA
SLOT
CIO-2A OR
CIO-PCA OR
CIO-MDA
SLOT
BACKPLANE
SLOT 1
VPM SLOT CPS GFD-1
Figure 1-76b, ElectroLogIXS VLC 1-Slot Chassis and Backplane

(P/N: 251473-000)

Introduction
CI or UCI-3, Power Switch, and Fuses
The lower right section of the ElectroLogIXS 9-Slot chassis and upper left section of the 1-Slot and 4-Slot
chassis is where the power switch, CI or UCI-3(chassis information) module and the fuses are located.
The fuses on the ElectroLogIXS backplane are readily available automotive style fuses.
CI-1 or UCI-3 MODULE
Figure 1-77, CI or UCI-3, Power Switch, and Fuses

VTI-2S Personality Module P/N: 227442-000

The VTI-2S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VTI-2S module. It provides the
external field connectors for the VTI-2S module.
Figure 1-78, VTI-2S Personality Module
A - Track Interface Connector - J3
B - Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4
C - 15 amp battery fuse
D - Battery Power LED: Lit to indicate battery power is present
E - VTI-2S module keying pins
F - Backplane connector - J1
G - VTI-2S connector - J2

Introduction
VTI-2S Connectors
Track Interface Connector - J3
The Track Interface Connector J3 is used to connect the VTI track circuits. Pre-wired cable assemblies are
available in either 4-foot lengths (P/N: 814-096000-016) or 8-foot lengths (P/N: 814-096000-017) to
connect the VTI track circuits to the TIP-2 panel.
Track Interface Connector - J3

Signal Description Pin
TK1+ Track 1+ 1
TK1- Track 1- 2
TK2+ Track 2+ 4
TK2- Track 2- 5
Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4
The Cab and Vital input connector is used to connect the VTI Cab outputs and Vital inputs. The field
mating connector is P/N 032773-652 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying
pins installed, is supplied with the Personality module for field wiring.
Cab and Vital Input Connector - J4

CAB1+ Cab Output Enable 1+ 1
CAB1- Cab Output Enable 1- 2
CAB2+ Cab Output Enable 2+ 4
CAB2- Cab Output Enable 2- 5
IN1+ Vital Input #1+ 7
IN1- Vital Input #1- 8


VLD-C6S Personality Module P/N: 227443-000

The VLD-C6S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VLD-C6S module. It provides the
external field connectors for the VLD-C6S module.
Figure 1-79, VLD-C6S Personality

Module
A - Lamp Connector - J3
B - Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4
E - VLD-C6S module keying pins
G - VLD-C6S connector - J2

Introduction
VLD-C6S Connectors
Lamp Connector - J3
The lamp connector is used to connect the VLD lamp output to the lamps. The mating connector is P/N
132338-201 with keying pins P/N 132338-901. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied
with the personality module for field wiring.
Lamp Connector - J3
B1L1 Bank one, Lamp one 1
B1L2 Bank one, Lamp two 2
B1L3 Bank one, Lamp three 3

COM1 Bank one common 4
B2L1 Bank two, Lamp one 6
B2L2 Bank two, Lamp two 7
B2L3 Bank two, Lamp three 8
COM2 Bank two common 9
Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4
The non-vital I/O and battery connector is used to connect the VLD non-vital I/O and battery power. The
mating connector is P/N 032773-653 and keying pins P/N 032773-492. The VLD has a battery power input
separate from the ElectroLogIXS battery power. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is
supplied with the personality module for field wiring.
Non-Vital I/O and Battery Connector - J4
Signal Description PIN
NVIO1 non-vital I/O one 1
NVIO2 non-vital I/O two 2
NVIO3 non-vital I/O three 3
NVIO4 non-vital I/O four 4
B Battery Plus 6
N Battery Return 7

VLD-R16S Personality Module P/N 227539-000
Figure 1-80, VLD-R16S Personality Module
A Lamp Output Connectors J3 (Bank 1) and J4 (Bank 2)

B Lamp Power Input Connections
C VSSR Connections
D Fuses: 2 for Lamp Power, 1 for VSSR Power
E VLD-R16S Keying Pins
F VLD-R16S Connector J2
G Backplane Connector J1
H Module Power LED
The VLD-R16S personality module is installed in slots that require a VLD-R16S module. The personality
module provides the external field connectors for the VLD-R16S as well as the backplane connections,
mechanical keying protection, and module protection fuses. Each Lamp bank has a 30 Amp fuse and the
VSSR connections are protected by a 3 Amp fuse.

Introduction
VLD-R16S Connectors
Lamp, Lamp Power Input, and VSSR Connectors - J3 and J4
Lamp Connector - J3

Lamp 1 Bank 1, Lamp 1 Output 1
N/A Connection Not Used 9
LampB1 Lamp Power Input, Bank 1 10
LampB1 Lamp Power Input , Bank 1 11
LampN1 Lamp Neutral, Bank 1 12
VSSR1+ Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 1, Positive 14
VSSR1- Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 1, Return 15
Lamp Connector - J4

Lamp 3 Bank 2, Lamp 11Output 3
LampB1 Lamp Power Input, Bank 2 10
LampB1 Lamp Power Input , Bank 2 11
LampN1 Lamp Neutral, Bank 2 12
VSSR2+ Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 2, Positive 14
VSSR2- Vital Signal Stop Relay Output Bank 2, Return 15

VIO-44S Personality Module P/N: 227444-000

The VIO-44S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-44S module. It provides the
external field connectors for the VIO-44S module.
Figure 1-81, VIO-44S Personality

Module
A - Vital Output Connector - J3
B - Vital Input Connector - J4
E - VIO-44S module keying pins
G - VIO-44S connector - J2

Introduction
VIO-44S Connectors
Vital Output Connector - J3
The vital output connector is used to connect the VIO-44S vital output. The mating connector is P/N
032773-652 with keyed pins 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with
the VIO-44S module for field wiring.
Out 1+ Vital Output #1+ 1
Out 1- Vital Output #1- 2
Vital Input Connector - J4
The vital input connector is used to connect the VIO-44S vital input. The mating connector is
P/N 032773-652 with keyed pins 032773-492. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied
with the VIO-44S module for field wiring.
Vital Input Connector - J4

VIO-44R Personality Module P/N 227538-000

The VIO-44R personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-44R module. It provides the
external field connectors for the VIO-44R module.
Figure 1-82, VIO-44R Personality Module

A -Vital Input Connector - J3
B -Vital Output Connector - J4
C -3 Amp Battery Fuse
D -Battery Power LED, when lit indicates battery power is present
E -VIO-44R module keying pins
F -VIO-44R connector - J2
G -Backplane connector - J1

Introduction
VIO-44R Connectors
Vital Input Connector -J3
The Vital Input connector is used to connect the VIO-44R Vital Input. The mating connector is P/N
the VIO-44R module for field wiring.
Vital Input Connector – J3

In 1+ Vital Input #1+ 1
In 1- Vital Input #1- 2
The Vital Output connector is used to connect the VIO-44R Vital Output. The mating connector is P/N
the VIO-44R module for field wiring.
Vital Output Connector – J4


VIO-86S Personality Module P/N 227537-000

The VIO-86S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-86S module. It provides the
external field connectors for the VIO-86S module.

Module
A -Vital Output Connector - J4 E -Battery Power LED, when lit indicates battery power is present
B -Vital Input/Output Connector - J5 F -VIO-86S Module Keying Pins
C -Vital Input Connector - J3 G -VIO-86S Connector - J2
D -4 Amp Battery Fuse H -Backplane Connector - J1

Introduction
VIO-86S Connectors
Vital Input Connector -J3
The Vital Input connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Input. The mating connector is P/N 032773-
518 with keyed pins 132773-500. A mating connector, with keying pins installed, is supplied with the VIO-
86S module for field wiring.
Vital Input Connector – J3

In 1+ Vital Input 1+ 1
In 1- Vital Input 1- 2
Vital Input/Output Connector - J4
The Vital Input/output connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Inputs and Vital Output. The mating
connector is P/N 032773-518 with keyed pins 132773-500. A mating connector, with keying pins installed,
is supplied with the VIO-86S module for field wiring.
Vital Input/Output Connector – J4

Out 6+ Vital Output 6+ 17
Out 6- Vital Output 6- 18

The Vital Output connector is used to connect the VIO-86S Vital Output. The mating connector is P/N
the VIO-86S module for field wiring.
Vital Output Connector – J5

Note: In some installations there is the possibility of radiated interference from nearby equipment. If
engineering determines that a particular installation is susceptible, it is recommended that the provided
ferrites be installed on all Input and Output cabling connected to the personality module. Place the
ferrite around each I/O cable as close to the personality module as possible. If ferrites are placed
in series, ensure they are as close as possible to each other.

Introduction
VIO-1010S Personality Module P/N: 227445-000

The VIO-1010S personality module is installed in slots that will require a VIO-1010S module. It provides
the external field connectors for the VIO-1010S module.

Module
A - Code Output Connector - J3
B - Code Input Connector - J4
E - VIO-1010S module keying pins
G - VIO-1010S connector - J2

VIO-1010S Connectors
Code Output Connector - J3
The code output connector is used to connect the VIO-1010 code outputs. The mating connector is P/N
032773-652 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied
Code Output Connector - J3

OCom Output Common 1
C1O Code 1 Out 2
C2O Code 2 Out 3
C3O Code 3 Out 4
C4O Code 4 Out 5
C5O Code 5 Out 6
HRO HR Out 7
C7O Code 7 Out 8
C8O Code 8 Out 9
C9O Code 9 Out 10
CMO Code M Out 11
Code Input Connector - J4
The code input connector is used to connect the VIO-1010 code inputs. The mating connector is P/N
032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is supplied
Code Input Connector - J4

REF - Negative Reference Voltage 1
C1S Code 1 Input 2
C5S Code 5 Input 3
CMS Code M Input 4
C6S Code 6 Input 5
REF + Positive Reference Voltage 7
SCom Input Common 9
C2S Code 2 Input 10
C3S Code 3 Input 11
C4S Code 4 Input 12
C7S Code 7 Input 13
C8S Code 8 Input 14
C9S Code 9 Input 15

Introduction
CAB-16S Personality Module P/N: 227466-000

The CAB-16S personality module is installed in slots that will require a CAB-16S module. It provides the
external field connectors for the CAB-16S module.
Figure 1-85, CAB-16S Personality

Module
A - Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3

B - Cab 9-16 Output Connector - J4
E - CAB-16S module keying pins
G - CAB-16S connector - J2

CAB-16S Connectors
Cab 1-8 Output Connector - J3
The Cab 1-8 output connector is used to connect the CAB-16S Cab 1-8 outputs. The mating connector is
P/N 032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is
CAB1 Cab 1 Output 1
CAB2 Cab 2 Output 3
CAB3 Cab 3 Output 5
CAB4 Cab 4Output 7
CAB5 Cab 5 Output 9
CAB6 Cab 6 Output 11
The Cab 9-16 output connector is used to connect the CAB-16S Cab 9-16 outputs. The mating connector is
P/N 032773-654 with keying pins P/N 032773-492. A mating connector with keying pins installed is

CAB9 Cab 9 Output 1


Introduction
EC5 Chassis
The open-frame EC5 chassis allows easy access to all modules.
Figure 1-86, EC5 Chassis
Backplane
The modules plug into the Backplane. The one-piece Backplane has minimal interconnections, which helps
to make the EC5 more reliable. The plug couplers can address wiring from either side of the Backplane,
depending on the way it is mounted.
There are two types of Backplanes used for the EC5. They are:
• BP-1 is used for Repeater, Colorlight, and Lock systems.
• BP-2 is used for Endbox systems.
General Features
All Backplanes have the general features listed below:
Power
Power components are located in the upper left corner of the Backplane:
• Battery (B) and Negative (N) AAR terminals.
• 5 Vdc ON/OFF switch.
• Automobile-style fuses (protect individual modules).
• Test points for +5 Vdc and COM.
+12 Vdc is supplied to the I/O module slots through the Backplane. Fuses 1, 2, 3, and 4 protect the system
in event of an over-current condition.
Chassis ID DIP Shunt Pack
The Chassis ID DIP Shunt Pack is located on the Backplane under the CI or UCI-3 Module. This is configured
with the same number as the Chassis ID Number in the Application EPROM (that is plugged into the CI or UCI-3
Module).

Figure 1-87, DIP Shunt Pack
EEPROMs
Three Configuration EEPROMs contain FRC (Field Related Configuration) data. The FRC information is
entered by the user via the CDU-1. Data is written/read to/from these EEPROMs by the VPM-1 Module.
This data stored may be as simple as the date and time, or as specific as the track voltage/current settings.
Backplane (BP-1)
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 1-88, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1)

Introduction
BP-1 Connectors
BP-1 Connectors are shown in Figures 1-89 through 1-90. Connector signal names and pinouts are shown
in Tables 1-2 through 1-9.
EC5
ELECTRO CODE 5
GE T ransportation Systems
Global Signaling
COLORLIGHT
Figure 1-89, BP-1 Connectors.

I/O Slot 1 Connection
Table 1-2 J16 Connector Definition

Name Description
CAB1+ Cab 1+ from the VTI-2S Module.
CAB1- Cab 1- from the VTI-2S Module.
IN 1+ Vital Input 1+ to the VTI-2S
Module.
IN 1- Vital Input 1 - to the VTI-2S
Module.
IN 2+ Vital Input 2+ to the VTI-2S
Module.
IN 2- Vital Input 2- to the VTI-2S
Module.
Table 1-3 J17 Connector Definition Figure 1-90, I/O Slot 1 Connectors.
Name Description
TK 1+ Track 1+ to the VTI-2S Module.
TK 1- Track 1- to the VTI-2S Module.

Introduction

Name Description
B1L1 Bank 1 lamp 1 output for the
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
COM1 Bank 1 common for the VLD-
C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
C6S Module.
Figure 1-91, I/O Slot 2 Connectors.

Name Description
NVIO1 NIVO 1 connection to the VLD-
C6S Module.
C6S Module.
C6S Module.
C6S Module.


Name Description
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
VLD-C6S Module.
C6S Module.

Name Description
C6S Module.
C6S Module.
C6S Module.
C6S Module.

Introduction

Name Description
I/O 1+ I/O 1+ for the vital I/O module.
I/O 1- I/O 1- for the vital I/O module.
I/O 2- I/O 2- for the vital I/0 module.

Name Description
I/O 6+ I/O 6+ for the vital I/O module. Figure 1-93, I/O Slot 4 Connectors
(VIO-44S).
Note: When using the VIO-44S Module, connector J46 is used for outputs and connector J47 is used for
inputs.

Backplane (BP-2)
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 1-94, EC5 Endbox Backplane (BP-2).

Introduction
BP-2 Connectors
BP-2 Connectors are shown in Figures 1-95 through 1-99. Connector signal names and pinouts are shown
in Tables 1-10 through 1-19.
AUXILIA RY I/O VIO-1010S

(SLOT 4) (SLOT 3)
VTI-2S VIO-1010S
(SLOT 1) (SLOT 2)
EC5
END BOX GE Transportation Systems
Global Signaling
PS 1 2 3 4
7.5 15 3 3 3
SPAR E
FUSES
Figure 1-95, BP-2 Connectors.

I/O Slot 1 Connection VTI-2S

(S LOT 1 )

Name Description
IN 1+ Vital Input 1+ for the VTI-2S
Module.
IN 1- Vital Input 1 - for the VTI-2S
Module.
IN 2+ Vital Input 2+ for the VTI-2S EC5
Module. ELECTRO CODE 5
IN 2- Vital Input 2- for the VTI-2S
Module.
END BOX GE Transportation Systems
Global Signaling

Name Description

Introduction
VIO-1010S
(S LOT 2 )
Name Description
OCOM Output common.
C1O Code 1 output.
C2O Code 2 output.
C3O Code 3 output.
C4O Code 4 output.
C5O Code 5 output.
HRO Home Relay output.
C7O Code 7 output.
C8O Code 8 output.
C9O Code 9 output. CODE 5
CMO Code M output. OX GE Transportation Systems
Global Signaling

Name Description
REF- Negative reference voltage.
C1I Code 1 input.
C5I Code 5 input.
CMI Code M input.
C6I Code 6 input.
REF+ Positive reference voltage.

Name Description
ICOM Input common.
C2I Code 2 input.
C3I Code 3 input.
C4I Code 4 input.
C7l Code 7 input.
C8I Code 8 input.
C9I Code 9 input.


Name Description
OCOM Output common.
C1O Code 1 output.
C2O Code 2 output.
C3O Code 3 output.
C4O Code 4 output.
C5O Code 5 output.
HRO Home Relay output
C7O Code 7 output.
C8O Code 8 output.
C9O Code 9 output.
CMO Code M output.
Table 1-16 J37 Connector Definition Figure 1-98, I/O Slot 3 Connectors.
Name Description
REF- Negative reference voltage.
C1I Code 1 input.
C5I Code 5 input.
CMI Code M input.
C6I Code 6 input.
REF+ Positive reference voltage.

Name Description
ICOM Input common.
C2I Code 2 input.
C3I Code 3 input.
C4I Code 4 input.
C7l Code 7 input.
C8I Code 8 input.
C9I Code 9 input.

Introduction

Name Description
I/O 4- I/O 4-for the vital I/O module.

Name Description
Figure 1-99, I/O Slot 4 Connectors
I/O 6+ I/O 6+ for the vital I/O module. (VIO-44S).
Note: When using the VIO-44S Module, connector J46 is used for outputs and connector J47 is used for
inputs.


Installation
Chapter 2 – Installation
Contents
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Shipment, Unpacking, and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
ElectroLogIXS Chassis Mounting and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Chassis Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Connecting System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Motion Detectors/Predictors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Transmit Frequency below 156 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Filter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Cab Signal Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
EC5 Chassis Mounting and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Chassis Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Chassis Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Wire Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
EC5 Rack Mounted Installation Using Rear Chassis Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Chassis Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Connecting System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Chassis ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
DIP Number Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
DIP Shunt Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Application ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Application ID / DIP Number Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
DIP Shunt Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
EC5 Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
VPM-3: Update Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-25
Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Application Program Update using Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Uploading and Applying PTC files using Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Applying PTC Files from the "Apply Software" Page of the Update Mode GUI . . . . . . 2-38
Manage VPM-3 Flash via Update Mode GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-41
Update Mode Z-Modem/Telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 2-42

Z-Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 42
Executive Software Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 42
CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 45

Application Program Update using Zmodem over RS-232 . . . Interface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Uploading PTC Files using Zmodem protocol over RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Telnet/TFTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Executive Software Update using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -51
CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -54
Application Program Update using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -55
Uploading PTC Files using TFTP over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 -58
Set VPM-3 Ethernet Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Format Program/Log Flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
TIP-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
I/O Module Cable Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
I/O Module Cable Application Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
EEPROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Rail Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Lamp Wiring-VLD-C6S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
VLD-C6S Battery Cable Supply Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Lamp Wiring - VLD-R16S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
VLD-R16S Battery Cable Supply Lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Track Termination and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 2-69

Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Electro Code Track Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs (VIO-44S Modules) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
Lamp Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Track Code Select Inputs/Track Code Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
Single Break Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
Double Break Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Serial Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Vital Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

Serial Point to Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Serial Multi-Drop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Ethernet Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Non Vital Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80

Serial Point-to-Point Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Serial Multi-Drop Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Ethernet Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2- 83
Powering the System for the First Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
Track Circuit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Recommended Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Setup for ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS or ElectroLogIXS to EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85

Installation
Step 1. Estimating the Track Wire Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85

Step 2. Determine the Total Track Circuit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Step 3. Set the Initial Receive Reference Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
Step 5. Read the Receive Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Setup for ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Steps 1 to 3. Method for Determining total Track Circuit Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Step 4A. Determine and Set the 2R and 7K at the EC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Step 5. Read the Receive Current at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values . . . . . . . . . 2-91
Alternating Code 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Alternating Code 5 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96
Lamp Voltage Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
Automated Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98
Timers Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-99
Vital Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101
Setting Battery Alarm Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-104
Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
Config Daylit Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
DST Strt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
DST End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Request Time Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Sync Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
UCE Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
SCS128 Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
GENISYS® Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
BCS Serial Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
GENISYS® Ethernet Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
HAWK Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
Vital Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Message Authentication Code (MAC) Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-120
Key Vault Update Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Vital General Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Vital Serial Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Vital Ethernet Communication Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122
Ground Fault Detector Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123

Battery Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123
Ground Fault Monitoring Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-123


Installation
Chapter 2 – Installation
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Shipment, Unpacking, and Inspection
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis may be shipped either by itself or installed in a rack assembly with other
items like a TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel), depending on the system ordered.
CAUTION If any shipping damage is detected, do not attempt to install or repair

the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Contact GETSGS (GE Transportation Global
Signaling) for repair or replacement of the damaged equipment.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is shipped with all of the plug-in modules removed from the slots. The modules
and the I/O cables are packed separately. Unpack the chassis assembly, plug-in modules and cables, and
visually inspect each for shipping damage.
WARNING After installation or update of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate

testing must be performed to detect any errors/failures of the application
equations, PTC mapping rules, equipment, or installation. The tests
should be performed before the unit is placed into service and in
accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency
rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter values.
The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have
the knowledge to correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to
adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after installation could
modules and firmware (application, PTC and executive) and that
GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling. Operating with
incorrect firmware may result in death or serious injury. Timely is
defined as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j).

proper values are set for each vital timer, vital Configuration
setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability settings, PTC debounce
serious injury.
WARNING Unauthorized modification of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation may

result in unsafe conditions that could result in death or serious injury.
Responsibility for physically securing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 from
unauthorized access lies with the railway authority.

WARNING When an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 vital remote link is configured for

anything other than point-to-point operation over a hard-wired serial
cable, configuration management must ensure that duplicate Local
Network IDs do not exist on that communications net. Examples of
communications nets include, but are not limited to:
· Multi-drop serial communications

· Local Area Networks (LANs)
· Wide Area Networks (WANs)
· Fiber-Optic backbones
· Radio communications
This includes devices that may belong to other railway agencies (e.g.
on radio links). Failure to ensure that there are no duplicate Local
Network IDs on a communications net could result in death or serious
injury. (See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information)
WARNING An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical

Local/Remote Network ID pairs for different vital remote links, even if
those vital remote links are on different communications nets. If
duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs are used for redundancy,
the application/installation must ensure that only one of the duplicate
pairs is active/operational at a given time. Failure to ensure that there
are no duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs within an
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 or that redundant pairs cannot be active/
operational simultaneously could result in death or serious injury.
(See Volume Two, Appendix B for more detailed information)
When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an

ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application
circuit plans. If this information is not available from the application
circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into service until this is
corrected. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING The VPM-2 Diagnostic Port and the VPM-3 USB Port do not provide
isolation protection against Ground Faults. These ports are intended
for short-term use by on-site personnel who are trained to observe any
operational anomalies. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from
Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment
attached to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port or the VPM-3 USB Port may be
passed through to the powering battery. Undetected Ground Faults to
Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation.
If connections to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port or the VPM-3 USB Port

are left unattended, the connected equipment must provide any
required Ground Fault protection. Ground Fault testing must be
performed after the connection is established, and at FRA mandated
intervals thereafter.

Installation
WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3,

CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, and the VPM-3 Ethernet ports
provide isolation protection against Ground Faults. If the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery,
Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the CIO-1/CIO-1A,
CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA,
or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports combined with a failure of the
isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through
to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected
Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous
rail operation.
If connections to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB,
CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports
are left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the
connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter.
WARNING An ElectroLogIXS unit must be configured with a unique Wayside

Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC)
messaging. Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address
could result in death or serious injury.
When configuring an ElectroLogIXS unit for PTC operation, use only
the WIU address value supplied on the site plans. If the WIU address
value is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation
on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
ElectroLogIXS Chassis Mounting and Setup

The ElectroLogIXS chassis assemblies (9-slot or 4-slot) consist of a rack or shelf mountable cabinet with
integrated card rack for plug-in modules.
The chassis assembly is factory assembled for both individually shipped ElectroLogIXSs and rack mounted
units. If the ElectroLogIXS is received as a rack mounted unit, the following chassis mounting procedure
can be ignored. However, verify that the chassis identification shunts match the Application Circuit Plan
for the chassis. Refer to Chassis ID Setup in this section. For VPM-3 ElectroLogIXS systems that are
using Application Identification shunts refer to Application ID Setup in this section.
Chassis Mounting ,
The chassis may be installed on a standard 19 inch rack, wall mounted, or shelf mounted. If rack mounted
provide at least two inches of space above and below for cooling air flow. Secure the cabinet to the rack
with at least four ½-inch 10-32 machine screws. If wall or shelf mounted, provide at least two inches of
space above the chassis for ventilation.

A
B
C D
373-002G
Figure 2-1, 9-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions.
Installation Dimensions:
Maximum Overall Height A 24 ½" (622mm)
Distance between mounting holes B 7" (178mm)
Depth C 11 1/4" (286mm)
Width D 19 1/16" (484mm)

Installation
Figure 2-1a, 4-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions.
Maximum Overall Height A 18.53" (~18 ½" or 470.7mm)
Distance top mounting hole to middle mounting hole B1 8.05" (~8 1/16" or 204.5mm)
Distance middle mounting hole to bottom mounting hole B2 7.75" (~7 3/4" or 196.6mm)
Depth C 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm)
Width D 16.04" (~16 1/16" or 407.42mm)

Figure 2-1b, 1-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions

Depth C 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm)
Width D 8.25” (~ 8 ¼” or 209.6 mm)
Chassis Grounding
The ElectroLogIXS power is isolated from the ElectroLogIXS chassis assembly. This allows the chassis to
be connected to earth ground for shielding purposes. The ElectroLogIXS chassis must be connected to earth
ground to ensure compliance with FCC requirements.
Connecting System Battery
The ElectroLogIXS requires a 12 VDC power source connected to the B and N terminals. Location of the
B and N terminals are dependent upon the type of chassis used. The amount of power required for the
ElectroLogIXS depends on the installation and the type of modules installed in the system. An ElectroLogIXS
with all possible module slots used will require a charger rated for at least 25 amps. In addition, each VLD
module requires a battery input connection via the VLD personality module for lamp power.

Installation
Filters
A track filter may be required under the following conditions:
Crossings:
! All crossing applications

! When motion detectors or predictors are used in conjunction with an approach
! If the transmit frequency of an audio circuit is below 156 Hz.
Motion Detectors/Predictors
Detectors and motion predictors use changing impedance to detect motion. When the VTI transmitter turns
on there is a change in impedance on the track circuit which can trip a very sensitive motion detector. The
code pulses may be misinterpreted and cause an unplanned crossing start. The filter blocks the frequency
sensed by the detector /predictor so that the code pulses will not be detected or acted on.
Transmit frequency below 156 Hz
The pulse output from the Electro Code is considered a square wave, however some rounding on the
leading edge of the pulse does occur. Since this may cause occasional erratic operation for equipment
operating at low frequencies, we recommend installation of a track filter on all tracks with equipment
operating at frequencies of 156 Hz and below.
Filter Selection
A track filter is a notch filter; it should be selected based on the transmit frequency. Install it in series with
the positive lead of the track circuit. There is no polarity on the track filter.
The number of filters which may be used in a track circuit are limited by the track circuit length and
ballast conditions. The DC resistance of winding in a filter provides about1/10 of an ohm which appears
to the Electro Code as approximately 1000 feet of track. This means that if three track filters are installed,
the track length will be limited by approximately 3,000 feet.
Figure 2-1c is a typical application drawing using two track filters. Table 2-1 lists Track Filters available
from GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling.

J3_TRK+ P1_IN+ TRK+ TF-XX TF-XX To Track +

IXS
VTI-2S TIP-2
J3_TRK- P1_IN- TRK- To Track ‐
Figure 2-1c, Typical Track Filter Installation

Installation
Cab Signal Filters
Cab signal filters are required in ElectroLogIXS applications with cab signaling. The cab signal filters keep
cab signal energy applied to the rail from interfering with the Electro Code track rates. Cab signal filters are
available built into the Track Inductor Panel (TIP-2) or can be installed separately.
Table 2-1. Track Filters
External Track Filters
EPC Part Number Part Description Frequency

800-080055-100 TF-60 60 Hz
800-080055-107 TF-86 86 Hz
800-080055-101 TF-100 100 Hz
800-080055-106 TF-114 114 Hz
800-080055-102 TF-120 120 Hz
800-080055-108 TF-151 151 Hz
800-080055-103 TF-156 156 Hz
800-080055-104 TF-180 180 Hz
800-080055-109 TF-211 211 Hz
800-080055-105 TF-240 240 Hz
800-080055-110 TF-267 267 Hz
TIP-2 Cab Signal Filters

800-096000-012 TIP-2 W/100 Hz Filter 100 Hz
800-096000-013 TIP-2 W/60 Hz Filter 60 Hz
800-096000-014 TIP-2 W/40 Hz Filter 40 Hz
800-096000-015 TIP-2 W/83.3 Hz Filter 83.3 Hz

EC5 Chassis Mounting and Setup

The EC5 chassis assembly consists of a rack mountable cabinet with integrated card rack for 4 plug-in I/O
modules. The chassis assembly is factory assembled for both individually shipped EC5s and rack mounted
units. If the EC5 is received as a rack mounted unit, the following chassis mounting procedure can be
ignored. However, verify that the chassis identification shunts match the Application Circuit Plan for the
chassis. Refer to Chassis ID Setup in this section.
Chassis Mounting
The chassis may be installed on a standard 19 inch rack or shelf mounted. If rack mounted, provide at least
two inches of space above and below for cooling air flow. Secure the cabinet to the rack with at least four
½-inch 10-32 machine screws. If shelf mounted, provide at least two inches of space above the chassis for
ventilation.
Chassis Installation
Figure 2-2, EC5 Chassis Installation

Width A 18.31"
Height B 10.50"
Depth C 7.50"

Installation
Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Installation
Figure 2-3 illustrates a typical rack mounted installation. Your installation may differ depending site
requirements and location.
GETransportation Systems GETransportation Systems

GETransportation Systems GETransportation Systems
Global Signaling Global Signaling Global Signaling Global Signaling
GETransportation Systems
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 2-3, Typical rack mounted installation

Typical EC5 Rack Mounted Wire Routing
Figure 2-4 illustrates the wire routing for a typical installation. The routing of wires for your installation
may differ depending site requirements and location. All wires should be routed to avoid electrical
interference and should be routed to avoid unnecessary stress on the connectors.
GETransportation Systems GETransportation Systems GETransportation Systems GETransportation Systems

Global Signaling Global Signaling Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
GE
Transportation Systems
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Global Signaling
Figure 2-4, Wire routing for a typical

installation

Installation
EC5 Rack Mounted Installation Using Rear Chassis Connector
Figure 2-5 illustrates the wire routing using the rear chassis connectors. The routing of wires for your
installation may differ depending site requirements and location. All wires should be routed to avoid
electrical interference and should be routed to avoid unnecessary stress on the connectors.
Figure 2-5, Wire routing using the rare chassis

connectors
Chassis Grounding
The EC5 power is isolated from the EC5 chassis assembly. This allows the chassis to be connected to earth
ground for shielding purposes, if desired.
Connecting System Battery
The EC5 requires a 12 Vdc power source. For the EC5 with signals, the minimum charger rating required is
15 Amps. For a Repeater, a 10 Amp minimum is required.
The System Battery may be connected any time after the EC5 Chassis has been mounted in its permanent
location.
1. Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position.
AAR1 AAR2
CIO-2
B N
5V
COM
PS 1 2 3 4
7.5
20
20
Figure 2-6,
2. Connect the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal.
3. Connect the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal.

Chassis ID Setup
The chassis must be configured with the Chassis ID value expected for the application loaded on the
Application EPROM. The value of the Chassis ID is set by the DIP shunt located on the backplane
underneath the CI module. The CI module must be removed to gain access to the DIP Shunts. If no DIP
Shunt is installed in the socket, the Chassis ID value is “0.”
If the application program does not have status names defined for the Chassis ID binary values, the Chassis
ID must match the expected value or the VPM will not run the selected application program. If status names
are defined for the Chassis ID values, the VPM will run the application and the application logic is
responsible for determining the proper Chassis ID value.
Figure 2-7, ElectroLogIXS Chassis Identification DIP Figure 2-7a, EC5 Chassis Identification DIP
Shunt Location. Shunt Location
Note: If the DIP Number does not match the Chassis ID Number of the Application EPROM, the CDU-1
will display "Incorrect Chassis ID" and the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not operate.
Figure 2-8, DIP Shunt.

To configure the chassis with the correct Chassis ID Number:
1. Locate the DIP Shunt underneath the CI Module. The DIP Shunt is a rectangular plastic IC package
approximately one inch long that contains eight wire shunts, numbered from 1 thru 8.
Note: If the CI Module is installed, first remove the CI Module. The DIP is located underneath the CI
Module.

Installation
2. Find the Chassis ID Number in the Application Circuit Plan. It is the Chassis ID Number that was
determined when the Application EPROM logic equations were written. It is a number between 0 and
255.
3. Set the DIP Number to the same Chassis ID Number, as explained below:
The shunt wires of the DIP represent binary digits. The binary digit number value of each shunt wire is
shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9, DIP Shunt Binary Digit Value.
Note: The 1-slot chassis has a two sockets for the Chassis ID DIP. Only the rightmost socket (S2) is
used for the Chassis ID.
The DIP Number is the sum of the binary digits of the shunt wires that are not cut. The wire has a value if
it is connected (shorted); the wire is not counted if it is cut (open). For example, if all the shunt wires are
connected, the number is 255; if all the shunt wires are cut, the number is 0 (zero).
DIP Number Setup
1. Write down the Chassis ID Number.

2. Subtract the largest Binary Digit Value available (128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1) that will not give a
negative answer from the Chassis ID. Mark the corresponding shunt wire with a felt pin.
3. Write down the result.
4. Subtract the largest Binary Digit Value available that will not give a negative answer from result.
Mark the corresponding shunt wire with a felt pin.
5. Write down the new result.
6. Repeat the subtraction process until the remainder or result is zero.
7. Add all the Binary Digit Values that were used. The answer should equal the Chassis ID.
8. Leave all the shunt wires marked with the pen and cut all the remaining shunts.
Note: To cut a shunt wire, insert a ball point pen, scribe, or similar pointed instrument.

Example
The Chassis ID Number is 77. Set the DIP Number to 77. Follow the steps above and get the results
below. The shunt wires to leave connected are indicated with a check (/).
Shunts
Chassis ID Number 77
Step 2 64 / Step 2
Step 3 77 - 64 = 13 13
Step 4 8 / Step 4
Step 5 13 - 8 = 5 5
Continue the Process: 4 /
5-4=1 1
1 /
1-1=0 0
64 + 8 + 4 + 1 = 77
Cut the other shunt wires, as indicated by the solid Os in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10, DIP Shunts to be cut.
The DIP above is now set for a Chassis ID Number of 77.
DIP Shunt Ordering
If more Chassis ID Number DIP shunt packs are needed, the P/N is 032625-004.
Application ID Setup
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 systems that have VPM-3 and CI-2 or UCI-3 modules may run application programs
that use the Application ID. The 16-bit Application ID value is set using two, low-profile, 8-bit shunts located
on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module under the EPROM.
The Application ID settings are used as status inputs to the application program. Thus, the application
program is responsible for the correctness of the Application ID settings. ElectroLogIXS/EC5 does not
require a specific value for the Application ID as it may do for Chassis ID.

Installation
Figure 2-11, DIP Shunt.
Application ID / DIP Number Setup
The Application ID value is set in a similar fashion to the Chassis ID value. The difference is that the
Application ID value is a 16-bit value allowing a range of 0 – 65,535. Refer to the Application Circuit Plan
for the value to use for the Application ID.
The binary digit number values of the shunts are shown in Figure 2-12. The process of determining which
shunt wired to cut / leave is the same as described in Chassis ID Setup.
Figure 2-12, DIP Shunt Binary Digit Value.
DIP Shunt Ordering
The Application ID uses two, low profile 8-bit DIP shunt packages. The P/N is 032625-005

EC5 Module Installation

Refer to the Module Location Charts to determine module locations.
Colorlight: Repeater Module Location Chart
Module Part Number Quantity Location

Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) 251135-000 1 VPM Slot
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2+) 251395-000 1 VPM Slot
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) 251432-XXX 1 VPM Slot
Chassis Information (CI-1) 251121-000 1 CI Connector
Chassis Information (UCI-3) 251495-000 1 CI Connector
Central Power Supply (CPS-1) 251122-000 1 CPS Slot
Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) 251123-000 1 I/O Slot 1
Control Display Unit (CDU-1) 251124-000 1 Front of Chassis
Colorlight: Repeater Optional Modules

Communications Input Output (CIO-1) 251126-000 1 CIO Slot 1
Communications Input Output (CIO-MD) 227462-000 1 CIO Slot 2
CIO-CLA Communications Input Output 251329-100 1 CIO Slot 1
CIO-PCA Communications Input Output 251486-001 1 CIO Slot 2
VIO-44S Vital Input Output 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4
Colorlight: 6 Lamp Standard Module Location Chart

Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) 251125-000 1 I/O Slot 2
Colorlight: 6 Lamp Standard Optional Modules

Installation
Colorlight: 12 Lamp Standard Module Location Chart

Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) 251125-000 2 I/O Slot 2, I/O Slot 3
Colorlight: 12 Lamp Standard Optional Modules

Lock: Based on Colorlight Chassis Module Location Chart

Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-44S) 251134-000 1 I/O Slot 4
Lock: Based on Colorlight Chassis Optional Modules


Endbox: Repeater Module Location Chart

Endbox: Repeater Optional Modules
Part
Module Number Quantity Location
Endbox: Single Direction Module Location Chart

Track Code Select Input/Track Code
Decoder Output (VIO-1010S) 251132-000 1 I/O Slot 2
Endbox: Single Direction Optional Modules


Installation
Endbox: Dual Direction Module Location Chart

Track Code Select Input/Track Code I/O Slot 2, I/O
Decoder Output (VIO-1010S) 251132-000 2 Slot 3
Endbox: Dual Direction Optional Modules


VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software Update
This procedure is used to update the VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software. To perform this procedure, a
computer with a serial port interface and a terminal emulation program (e.g. HyperTerminal) is required in
addition to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive software files.
1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-2/VPM-2+ Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable
parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the
values shown on the CDU.
2. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic port via serial cable.
3. Configure the Terminal Emulation program as follows:
Baud Rate: 57600 bps

Parity: None
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
Terminal emulation: VT100 or ANSI BBS
Data Transfer Protocol: ASCII (if a setting is required)
4. Place the VPM-2/VPM-2+ in Update mode as follows:
a. Turn off the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5

b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-2+
c. Turn on the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
5. If the VPM-2/VPM-2+ is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the
VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic terminal, information similar to the following example will be displayed in
the terminal emulation window:
VPM-2/VPM-2+ C Boot Block Program -- Version X.X.
CPU CRC Status

----------------------
C 5678abcd Ok
A 1234feda Ok
B abcd1234 Ok
6. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” and hit “Enter.” The following text will
be displayed on the terminal emulation program:
Help:
? | H - Help.
IC - Query C Executive Software CRC.
IA - Query A Executive Software CRC.
IB - Query B Executive Software CRC.
DC - Download C System image to VPM-2.
DA - Download A System image to VPM-2.
DB - Download B System image to VPM-2.
<Esc> cancels download.
7. To upload the VPM-2/VPM-2+ C processor executive software, type “DC” and hit “Enter.” The
following text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program:
Begin C S-Record File download within 60 seconds...

Installation
8. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send an ASCII text file. In HyperTerminal, the menu
selection is Transfer->Send Text File. In ProComm, the menu selection is Data -> Send File.
9. Navigate to the location of the vpmcepm.out file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of
entering the “DC” command, the “DC” command entry must be repeated.
10. When the file transfer begins, the following will be displayed:
Software Download Started - Please Wait.
...........
11. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. Note that if any keys are depressed while the
file transfer is taking place the transfer may abort.
12. After the file transfer completes, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ will write the new executive software to the
VPM-2/VPM-2+ memory. The following will be displayed:
Writing New Software to Flash - Please Wait.
13. After the executive software has been written to memory, text similar to the following example will be
displayed on the terminal emulation screen. Confirm that the displayed CRC value for CPU C matches
the expected CRC value.
Software Update Complete.
CPU CRC Status

-----------------------------
C 16ba2705 Ok
A 6596e903 Ok
B 57ada17f Ok
14. If the CRC for CPU C matches the expected value, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ C processor executive
software update procedure is complete.
15. To update the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A processor and VPM-2/VPM-2+ B processor, repeat steps 7 through
14 using the “DA” command and file vpmaepm.out for the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A processor and the “DB”
command and file vpmbepm.out for theVPM-2/VPM-2+ B processor. The CRC values for the A and B
processors must be confirmed after the download procedure to confirm the update completed
successfully.
WARNING After updating executive software for the VPM-2/VPM-2+ A and

VPM-2/VPM-2+ B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at
the correct values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation.
Failure to verify the parameter settings after VPM-2/VPM-2+ A and
VPM-2/VPM-2+ B executive software update could cause unsafe
operation resulting in death or serious injury.
VPM-3: Update Mode

The VPM-3 PTC Files can be updated over a CIO-1/CIO-1A Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection
using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet connection using Web GUI interface. Update Mode is used to update
the Executive Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files, and PTC Mapping Files. Update Mode can use
the following 3 methods to update software on the VPM-3.
• Update Mode GUI (Recommended Method)
• Z-Modem
• Telnet/TFTP Server
Note: To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required.

WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that all

Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that

the proper values are set for each vital timer, PTC applicability setting,
PTC debounce time and PTC WIU address in their ElectroLogIXS/EC5
units Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury.
After installation or update of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing

must be performed to detect any errors/failures of the application equations,
PTC mapping rules, equipment, or installation. The tests should be
performed before the unit is placed into service and in accordance with
standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should
include visual inspection of vital parameter values. The tests should be
performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to correctly
correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after installation could result in death or serious
injury.
After updating executive software for the VPM-3 processors, all

vital parameter settings must be at the correct values for the specific
EC4 installation. Failure to verify the parameter settings
after VPM-3 executive software update could cause
unsafe operation resulting in death or serious injury.
Before returning the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to service, verify the PTC

Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer
Values against the Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the PTC
Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and
Timer Values could result in a falsely permissive aspect which could
result in serious injury or death. Always verify the PTC Applicability
Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values
when replacing the PTC mapping rules, the PTC configuration file or
the equations.
A ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit must be configured with a unique Wayside

Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC) messaging.
Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address could result in death
or serious injury.
When configuring a ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit for PTC operation, use only

values is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation
on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury
.

Installation
Update (Boot) Mode GUI (Recommended Method)
The Update (Boot) Mode GUI is the recommended method for updating software on the. VPM-3. Executive
Software, Boot Software, PTC Config Files, and PTC Mapping Files can all be updated from the Update (Boot)
Mode GUI. For directions in using the Update (Boot) Mode GUI, please see the Update (Boot) Mode Web GUI
instructions below.
Web GUI
Executive Software Update using Update (Boot) Mode GUI
1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive Software, ensure the values for all configurable
parameters are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on
the CDU or Web GUI.
2. Place the VPM-3 in Update (Boot) Mode as follows:

b. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3
3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an ethernet
cable.
Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are 192.168.0.11 for the ENET1 (upper) RJ45 port and
192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. These default IP address values are the typical
values used in Update (Boot) Mode. Changing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses from the CDU
or Web GUI during normal operation does not change the IP addresses used in Update (Boot) Mode.
If values other than the default IP address values must be set / used in Update (Boot) mode, they may
be changed using the Update (Boot) Mode command line. However, the IP address used in Update
(Boot) mode is not visible on the CDU, so use of the default values whenever possible is recommended.
4. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit.

5. Select Executive/Boot from the ‘Upload New’ menu displayed on Figure 2-13, then browse and select
the executive software to be uploaded
Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being properly
displayed on the WebGUI. You may need to disable any active browser add-ins to view all the
content on this page.
Figure 2-13, Update Software Screen

Installation
6. If the Executive software is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-14 will be displayed.
Figure 2-14, Executive Software Upload Successful

7. To apply the Executive Software, click on “Apply Executive/Boot”
8. If the application of the executive file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-15 will be displayed.
Figure 2-15, Executive Software Apply Successful

Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being
properly displayed on the WebGUI. You may need to disable any active browser add-ins
to view all the content on this page.
Note: Executive software must be activated before it is used. Activating Exec Software can be
performed i n Update Mode, or go to the “Apply Software” pages (See Volume Two, figures
6-39, 6-40, and 6-41) on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied executive software.
9. To Activate the executive software in Update Mode begin by pressing the “Activate Exec" button
(see figure 2-16). When there are no files applied from Update Mode, the “Activate Exec” button will be
greyed. Activate file by pressing the "Confirm Program Button Pressed", see figure 2-17. The Activation
Status will change to "Execution Activation Succeeded" see figure 2-18.
Installation
Figure 2-16, Ready For Activation

Figure 2-17, Confirm Program Button Pressed
Figure 2-18,, Execution Activation Succeeded

Installation
10. Runtime CRCs of A/B/C Processors must be verified after activating the newly applied executive
software. Go to "Executive Information" page on the main Executive Web GUI to verify the runtime
CRCs of the newly applied executive software.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
General Configuration Diagnostics Status Log Off
General Information [Print]

Vital Application
Non-Vital Application Executive Information
PTC Application
Executive Information PN: INTERNAL
Boot Information
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: A
Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC (C) 2011
CRC: CDC13F88
PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
CRC: B5C16CC5
PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: C
Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC. (C) 2011
CRC: BF28C276
PN: 202550-000
Ver: 2.1
Module: VTI
Processor: D
Ref: U76
PN: 202550-000
Ver: 2.1
Module: VTI
Processor: E
Ref: U86
Figure 2-19, Executive Information

11. To reset the ElectrologIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen.

WARNING After updating and activating executive software for the VPM-3 A and
VPM-3 B processors, all vital parameter settings must be at the correct
values for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installation. Failure to
verify the parameter settings after VPM-3 A and VPM-3 B executive
software update could cause unsafe operation resulting in death or
serious injury.
CI-2 or UCI-3 Application Program Update
WARNING A CI-2 or UCI-3 module may contain an application or PTC mapping /

configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory.
After installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the
ElectroLogIXS is configured with the proper revisions of application
program and PTC mapping / configuration information. Installing
incorrect revisions may result in death or serious injury.
The VPM-3 Application program stored in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory can be updated over a
CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA Serial Interface, over Ethernet connection using a Terminal Interface or Ethernet
connection using Web GUI interface
VPM-3 application files can be uploaded to the CI-2 or UCI-3 module and are identified as follows:
. xxxx.mb1 - Multi-file application file. Contains one or more Vital and/or Non-Vital applications
. xxxxv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Vital application (denoted by final v before .b1)
. xxxxnv.b1 - Single application file. Contains a Non-vital application (denoted by final nv before .b1)
To update via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is
required (uses the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a
computer with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for
the update must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed.
To update via the Web GUI interface, Ethernet Connection to VPM-3 is required.
The CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory stores one application program file or one multi-application program file of any
size up to 8 Mbytes. When this download procedure is performed, the downloaded file overwrites any file
previously stored on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module.
Note: If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will
not read the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM.
To use the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory, remove any EPROM device from the CI-2 or UCI-3.

Installation
Application Program Update using Update Mode GUI
1. Place the VPM-3 in Update mode as follows:

cable.
192.168.1.12 for the ENET2 (lower) RJ45 port. 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port
connected to on the VPM-3. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet.
If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used.
3. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit by entering
http://192.168.0.11 (if connected to the upper RJ45 connector) or http://192.168.1.12 (if connected to
the lower RJ45 connector)
4. Select Application from the ‘Upload New’ Dropdown menu on the "Update Mode" screen as shown in
Figure 2-20 then select the Browse pushbutton. Use the "file open" dialog box that appears to select
the desired Application file.
Figure 2-20, Update Software Screen

5. If the Application Program is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-21 will be displayed.
Figure 2-21, Application Program Upload Successful
6. To apply the Application Program, click on “Apply Application”
7. If the application of the Application file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-22 will be displayed.

Installation
Figure 2-22, Application Program Apply Successful
8. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen.
9. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the
“Application” page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application.
Note: Refer to the “Application” page in Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the
“Application” Web GUI page.
Note: To log in to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed.

Uploading and Applying PTC files using Update Mode GUI

cable.
connected to on the VPM-3. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet.
If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used.
3. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the ElectrologIXS/EC5 unit by entering
http://192.168.0.11 (if connected to the upper RJ45 connector) or http://192.168.1.12 (if connected
to the lower RJ45 connector).
4. Select PTC File from the ‘Upload New’ dropdown menu on the "Update Mode" screen as displayed on
Figure 2-23, then select the Browse pushbutton. Use the "file open" dialog box that appears to select the
desired PTC configuration or mapping file.
Figure 2-23, Update Mode PTC 1

Installation
5. If the PTC file is successfully uploaded, the screen on Figure 2-24 will be displayed.
6. To apply the PTC file, click on “Apply PTC Application File”
Note: When pressed the "Delete PTC Flash" will remove all previous PTC Mapping and PTC Config
files loaded on the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash Memory.
7. If the application of the PTC file is successful, the screen on Figure 2-25 will be displayed.

8. To reset the ElectrologIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen.
Note: To log in to the ElectrologIXS/EC5, the screen must be refreshed.
Note: Another common way to upload PTC files is to the "Upload Software" option on the
Executive Web GUI Configuration page. Refer to the "Upload Software" option in Volume Two,
section 6 of this
. manual If PTC files have been uploaded via the Executive Web GUI "Upload
Software" page and have not been applied, they can be applied as described in the following
section.
Applying PTC Files from the "Apply Software" Page of the Update Mode GUI
1. Select the "Apply Software" option on the "Update Mode" web page.
2. If a PTC file is present, the file’s Header and CRC information is shown as in Figure 2-26.

Installation
Figure 2-26, Apply Software PTC Preload 1
3. Click the “Apply” button next to the PTC file that is being applied.
4. The confirm screen in figure 2-27 will be displayed. If the uploaded Mapping file is the file that is
supposed to be applied, click “OK” to confirm the overwrite.
Figure 2-27, Overwrite Confirmation Screen

5. Once the file has been applied, the uploaded file will no longer show in the list of uploaded software,
the status window will not show any updates occurring, and the “Reset” button will be enabled as
shown in figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28, Apply Software PTC Postload 1
6. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen.
7. If a PTC Mapping file was applied, once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the PTC Mapping File
must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate
the newly applied Mapping File.
Note: 1) Local Presence is required to activate a new mapping file.

2) PTC Config files don’t need to be “activated” after they are applied. Refer to the "Apply
Software" section of this manual for details on the "Apply Software" Web GUI page.
8. Once the Mapping file is activated, the PTC Vital and Non-Vital configuration settings must be set
according to the site plans.
Note: Refer to the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital Configuration” sections in
secion 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and “PTC Vital
Configuration” Web GUI pages
Installation
Manage VPM-3 Flash via Update Mode GUI
The Flash on the VPM-3 can be deleted using the following buttons
1. Delete PTC Files - Deletes PTC mapping and configuration files from CI Flash
2. Erase CI Flash – Deletes PTC Files and SNMP Settings from CI flash
3. Format Program Flash – Deletes any uploaded but unapplied files from the non-volatile file
upload area
4. Format Log Flash – Deletes all logs on the system

Deletes PTC Mapping and

Configuration files from CI-2 Flash
Formats Program Flash -

Deletes the non-volatile file upload area
Formats s Log Flash -

All log files are deleted
Erases CI Flash - PTC, SNMP Configuration

Deletes all parameters and any Application files are deleted.
from backplane

Figure 2-29, Manage Flash

Update Mode Z-Modem/Telnet

If the user wishes to avoid using the recommended Update Mode GUI to update software, they may update
via Terminal interface, a terminal program (e.g. HyperTerminal) that is capable of Telnet is required (uses
the Ethernet connection only) or a Terminal program, CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module, and a computer
with a serial interface is required. In both Terminal interface approaches, the computer used for the update
must have TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) server software installed.
Z-Modem
Executive Software Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface
the CDU or Web GUI.
2. Connect the computer serial port to the VPM-3 diagnostic port on the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA module
via serial cable.
Note: To connect using a Telnet session, connect a network cable from the computer RJ45 port to
one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 port, using an ethernet cable.

Parity: None
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
Data Transfer Protocol: ZModem (if update is done via the serial
interface)
Note: 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP
Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has
had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used.

5. If the VPM-3 is in Update mode and the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 diagnostic
terminal the boot prompt should be displayed on the terminal emulation program (Boot> _).
6. If the VPM-3 is in Update Mode, it can be connected to via a Telnet session.
a. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 port, using an
ethernet cable.
b. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on the
VPM-3.
C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23
Note: 192.168.1.12 is the IP address of the IP port connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default
telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update
Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting changed, the
updated setting should be used.
Installation
c. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be
displayed on the command prompt window.
Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (GE ElectroLogIXS VPM-3)
login:
d. Enter admin and then enter telnetat the password prompt.
password:
Note: admin and telnet are the default telnet settings for the VPM-3 in update mode. The IP Address
can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this
setting changed, the updated setting should be used.
e. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the command
prompt window (Boot> _).
7. To see the list of available update mode commands, type “?” or “help” and hit “Enter.” The following
text will be displayed on the terminal emulation program.
Boot> help
Command Description Syntax

version Version Information version
set Set Config set <option value>
show Show Config show <option>
save Save Parameters to Flash save
cidn Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidn <filename> or <”filename
with spaces”>
cidz Download Z-Modem->CI-2 cidz
ptcdn Download PTC File ptcdn <filename> or
Ethernet->CI-2 <”filename with spaces">
ptcdz Download PTC File ptcdz
Z-Modem->CI-2
format Format Flash File System format <PROG | LOG>
dz Download via Z-Modem dz
dn Download via Ethernet dn <filename>
df Download via Filesystem df
pwreset Password Reset Request pwreset
ethdefault Ethernet Reset Request ethdefault
default Restore default settings default
help Help help <cmd>
Note: cidz and dz options are not provided if connected through the telnet interface.
8. To see the current update mode settings, type “show” and hit “Enter.” A list similar to the following
will be displayed:
Boot> show
baud: 57600
port: 1
server: 192.168.0.12
filename: vpmallepm.bin
gateway: 0.0.0.0
*Port 1*
ip1: 192.168.0.11
netmask1: 255.255.255.0
mac1: 00:09:91:42:4A:DF
dhcP1: Enabled
*Port 2*
ip2: 192.168.1.12
netmask2: 255.255.255.0
mac2: 00:09:91:42:4A:E0
dhcP2: Enabled
*Telnet*
tnport: 23
username: admin
password: telnet
9. Set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200
bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud 115200” and hit “Enter.”
Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set to the value
being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and change the
baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value.
After a setting has been changed, the boot prompt will indicate that the setting has not been saved in
the VPM-3 non-volatile memory at the boot prompt:
Boot (Unsaved Data)>__
The setting is operative (i.e. the baud has been changed) but the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will revert to the
previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting,
type “save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed.
If, however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will
revert to the previous value at reset.
10. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “dz” at the boot prompt. The following will
be displayed on the terminal emulation:
Start Zmodem download. Timeout in 60 seconds..
11. Use the terminal emulation program to select and send the file via the Zmodem protocol. In
HyperTerminal, the menu selection is Transfer-> Send File. In Procomm, the menu selection is Data->
Send File.
12. Navigate to the location of the vpmallepm.bin file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the
“dz” command being entered, the “dz” command will need to be reentered.
13. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed
successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the terminal emulation program:
Download Complete: 3420184 bytes

The following is a list of updates to apply:
VPM A Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 895892 CRC: 7F7AA666
VPM B Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 865572 CRC: 259ADC59
VPM C Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 1658600 CRC: BA314712
Would you like to apply all the updates listed (Yes/No)? n
14. Confirm the version, build and CRC values for each of the processors is the expected value. If so, the
updates may be applied.
15. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply all of the updates to the VPM-3. If an individual processor is to be
updated, enter “N” at the “update all” prompt and “Y” at the desired individual update(s).
16. While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed:
WARNING - DO NOT REMOVE POWER WHILE THESE UPDATES ARE APPLIED !!

Processing: VPM A Exec Image
VPMA Transfer Posted...
Processing: VPM B Exec Image
VPMB Transfer Posted...
Processing: VPM C Exec Image
...........

Installation
17. The update has completed successfully when the following is displayed:
Flash operation on VPM C Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.

Flash operation on VPM B Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.
Flash operation on VPM A Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.
*** All flash operations have completed! ***

*** Reset the system for any changes to take effect. ***
18. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the newly applied executive software must be activated before it
is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied exec.
serious injury.

configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory. After
installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the ElectroLogIXS
is configured with the proper revisions of application program and PTC
mapping / configuration information. Installing incorrect revisions may
Note: If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will not read
the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM.

Application Program Update using Zmodem over RS-232 Interface
via serial cable.

Parity: 1
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
Data Transfer Protocol: ZModem (if update is done via the serial interface)
Note: 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP Address
can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has had this setting
changed, the updated setting should be used.
5. To see a list of available commands type help at the boot prompt:

Boot> help
cidn Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidn <filename> or
<"filename with spaces">
ptcdn Download PTC File
Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn <filename> or
ptcdz Download PTC File
Z-Modem->CI-2 ptcdz
Note: This Zmodem feature is not provided if connected through the telnet interface.

Installation
6. Optionally, you can set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, and 115200 bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud 115200”
and hit “Enter.” Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set
to the value being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and
change the baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value.
previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting, type
“save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed. If,
however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will
7. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “cidz” at the boot prompt. The following
will be displayed on the terminal emulation:
Send File.
9. Use the "Browse" button to navigate to the location of the application program file and press "Send".
If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the “cidz” command being entered, a "Download Failed"
error message is displayed on the terminal and the “cidz” command will need to be reentered.
Figure 2-30, Zmodem Dialog

10. The file transfer may take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed

Application EPT Header:IWP multi-application EPROM VLC_APP created
03/17/08 by ACE Version 4.3.0.2048
Store Application to the CI Flash (Yes/No)?
11. Confirm the name of the application file (the name follows “EPROM” and is “VLC_APP” above)
and the compile date / ACE version are the expected values. If so, the update may be applied.
12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to store the application file in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory.
13. While the VPM-3 is saving the file to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash, the following will be displayed:
Writing Application to CI Flash...

........
14. The VPM-3 has successfully saved the application program to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash when the following is
displayed:
Application File written to the CI Flash
15. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, enter "reset" at the boot prompt or cycle power on the chassis.
16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the “Application”
page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application.

Installation
Uploading PTC Files using Zmodem protocol over RS-232 Interface
1. Prior to downloading the new VPM-3 Mapping File, ensure the values for all configurable parameters
are available from the site documentation or have been recorded from the values shown on the CDU or
Web GUI.
via serial cable.

Baud Rate : 57600 bps
Parity : None
Data Bits : 8
Stop Bits : 1
Flow Control : None
Terminal emulation : VT100 or ANSI BBS
Data Transfer Protocol: ZModem (if update is done via the serial
interface)
Note: 57600 bps is the default setting for the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal in update mode. The IP
Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has
had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used.

6. To see the list of available commands, type help at the boot prompt:
Boot> help

cidn Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidn <filename> or <”filename
with spaces”>
Ethernet->CI-2 <”filename with spaces">
ptcdz Download PTC File ptcdz
Z-Modem->CI-2
Note: This Zmodem feature is not provided if connected through the telnet interface.

7. Optionally, you can set the baud to the desired value. Options are 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,
57600, and 115200 bits per second. For example, to change the baud to 115200, type “set baud
115200” and hit “Enter.”
Note: When the baud is changed, the terminal emulation program will no longer be set to the value
being used by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Disconnect the terminal emulation session and
change the baud setting for the terminal to the new ElectroLogIXS/EC5 value.
previous value when the system is reset. To make the changed setting the new non-volatile setting, type
“save” at the prompt and hit “Enter”. The “Unsaved Data” indication will no longer be displayed. If,
however, the change is only temporary, simply do not use the save command and the settings will
8. When the baud rate has been set to the desired value, type “ptcdz” at the boot prompt. The following
will be displayed on the terminal emulation:
Send File.
10. Navigate to the location of the .ptcbmap file. If the file is not selected within 60 seconds of the “ptcdz”
command being entered, the “ptcdz” command will need to be reentered.
11. The file transfer will take several minutes to complete. After the transfer has been completed
PTC Mapping File Header:PTC Editor Version: <1.0.0.3> Source Filename:

<D:\PTC\Lab\IXS App\officetest3\officetest3.ptcprj> File Compile Date
<Friday, May 28, 2010, 4:11:32 PM>
Store PTC File to the CI Flash (Yes/No)?
12. Confirm filename and compile date are the expected values. If so, the updates may be applied.
13. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply the file to the CI flash.
Writing PTC File to CI Flash...

........
PTC File written to the CI Flash

Installation
16. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, push the reset button on the screen. .
must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to
activate the newly applied Mapping File.
Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and
“PTC Vital Configuration” Web GUI pages
Telnet/TFTP Server
Executive Software Update using TFTP over Ethernet
the CDU or Web GUI.

cable.
4. Login to the VPM-3 using telnet

a. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port on
the VPM-3.
C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23
connected to on the VPM-3. 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in update mode.
The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
has had this setting changed, the updated setting should be used.
b. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 ethernet port, the login prompt should be
login:
c. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt. password:
d. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the
command prompt window(Boot> _).

Boot> help

<”filename with spaces”>
<”filename with spaces">
will be displayed:
Boot> show
baud: 57600
port: 1
server: 192.168.0.12
gateway: 0.0.0.0
*Port 1*
ip1: 192.168.0.11
netmask1: 255.255.255.0
mac1: 00:09:91:42:4A:DF
dhcP1: Enabled
*Port 2*
ip2: 192.168.1.12
netmask2: 255.255.255.0
mac2: 00:09:91:42:4A:E0
dhcP2: Enabled
*Telnet*
tnport: 23
username: admin
password: telnet

Installation
7. Confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP
addresses (IP address's of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 ports) are set to the correct values. If not, update the
settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10"). If a filename
other than “vpmallepm.bin” is to be downloaded, use the set command to change the name of the file.
8. If the file is to be updated across a network (rather than from a directly connected computer), enter the
correct gateway and netmask settings obtained from the network administrator.
9. When these settings are correct, ensure that the TFTP server is running on the computer and has
visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 Executive Software file.
10. Type “dn” and hit “Enter.” Text similar to the following should be displayed:
Ethernet Address is 00:09:91:42:4A:F3

\
Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port,
IP addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to
determine if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network
administrator to confirm.
11 . The file transfer will take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed

The following is a list of updates to apply:
VPM A Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 895892 CRC: 7F7AA666
VPM B Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 865572 CRC: 259ADC59
VPM C Exec Image - Version: 7.03 Bld004C Size: 1658600 CRC: BA314712
Would you like to apply all the updates listed (Yes/No)? n
12 . Confirm the version, build and CRC values for each of the processors is the expected value. If so, the
updates may be applied.
13 . Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply all of the updates to the VPM-3. If an individual processor is to be
updated, enter “N” at the “update all” prompt and “Y” at the desired individual update(s).
14 . While the VPM-3 is saving the files to the on-board memory, the following will be displayed:
WARNING - DO NOT REMOVE POWER WHILE THESE UPDATES ARE APPLIED !!

Processing: VPM A Exec Image
VPMA Transfer Posted...
Processing: VPM B Exec Image
VPMB Transfer Posted...
Processing: VPM C Exec Image
...........

Flash operation on VPM C Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.

Flash operation on VPM B Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.
Flash operation on VPM A Exec Image completed successfully. Please wait.
*** All flash operations have completed! ***

*** Reset the system for any changes to take effect. ***
16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, the newly applied executive software must be activated
before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate the newly applied
exec.
serious injury.

configuration information in the non-volatile CI-2 or UCI-3 memory. After
installing or replacing a CI-2 or UCI-3 module, ensure the ElectroLogIXS
is configured with the proper revisions of application program and PTC
mapping / configuration information. Installing incorrect revisions may
Note: If an EPROM with a valid application file is installed on the CI-2 or UCI-3 module, the VPM-3 will not read
the application from the Flash memory but will use the application loaded on the EPROM.

Installation
Application Program Update using TFTP over Ethernet

cable.

the VPM-3.
C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23
The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
login:
command prompt window (Boot> _).

Boot> help

will be displayed:
Boot> show
baud: 57600
port: 1
server: 192.168.0.12
gateway: 0.0.0.0
*Port 1*
ip1: 192.168.0.11
netmask1: 255.255.255.0
mac1: 00:09:91:42:4A:DF
dhcP1: Enabled
*Port 2*
ip2: 192.168.1.12
netmask2: 255.255.255.0
mac2: 00:09:91:42:4A:E0
dhcP2: Enabled
*Telnet*
tnport: 23
username: admin
password: telnet
6. The VPM-3 defaults to a dhcp server. Ordinarily, no configuration of the host PC is required. If desired,
confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP
settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10").

Installation
visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 application file.
9. Type “cidn filename” and hit “Enter.” If the name of the application file has spaces in the name,
enclose the filename in quotes, e.g. cidn “filename with spaces”. Text similar to the following will be
displayed:

\
Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port, IP
addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to determine
if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network administrator to
confirm.
10. The file transfer may take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed
Application EPT Header:IWP multi-application EPROM VLC_APP created
03/17/08 by ACE Version 4.3.0.2048
Store Application to the CI Flash (Yes/No)?
11. Confirm the name of the application file (the name follows “EPROM” and is “VLC_APP” above) and
the compile date / ACE version are the expected values. If so, the update may be applied.
12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to store the application file in the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash memory.
13. While the VPM-3 is saving the file to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash, the following will be displayed:
Writing Application to CI Flash...

........
14. The VPM-3 has successfully saved the application program to the CI-2 or UCI-3 Flash when the following is
displayed:
Application File written to the CI Flash
15. To reset the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, enter "reset" at the boot prompt or cycle power on the chassis
16. Once the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has reset, it will use the default vital application. Go to the “Application”
page on the main Web GUI to select the newly applied application.

Uploading PTC Files using TFTP over Ethernet

cable.

the VPM-3.
C:\> telnet 192.168.1.12 23
The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet . . If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
login:
Boot> help

Installation
will be displayed:
Boot> show
baud: 57600
port: 1
server: 192.168.0.12
gateway: 0.0.0.0
*Port 1*
ip1: 192.168.0.11
netmask1: 255.255.255.0
mac1: 00:09:91:42:4A:DF
dhcP1: Enabled
*Port 2*
ip2: 192.168.1.12
netmask2: 255.255.255.0
mac2: 00:09:91:42:4A:E0
dhcP2: Enabled
*Telnet*
tnport: 23
username: admin
password: telnet
6. Confirm the Ethernet port (1 or 2), server IP address (IP address of the computer), and client IP
settings to the desired values using the “Set” command (e.g. “set ip1 192.168.0.10").
. When these settings are correct, ensure that the TFTP server is running on the computer and has
8.
visibility to the directory with the VPM-3 PTC files.
9. Type “ptcdn <filename>” and hit “Enter.” Text similar to the following should be displayed:

\
Note: If the above is not seen, use the “show” command to confirm that the correct Ethernet port,
IP addresses, and filename have been entered. If all are correct it may be necessary to
determine if the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network
administrator to confirm.
10. The file transfer will take several seconds to complete. After the transfer has been completed
Tftp from 192.168.0.10 done

PTC Mapping File Header:PTC Editor Version: <1.0.0.3> Source Filename:

<D:\PTC\Lab\IXS App\officetest3\officetest3.ptcprj> File Compile Date
<Friday, May 28, 2010, 4:11:32 PM>
Store PTC File to the CI Flash (Yes/No)?

11. Confirm filename and compile date are the expected values. If so, the updates may be applied.
12. Type “Y” and hit “Enter” to apply the file to the CI flash.
Writing PTC File to CI Flash

...........
PTC File written to the CI Flash
must be activated before it is used. Go to the “Apply Software” page on the main Web GUI to activate
the newly applied Mapping File.
Volume Two, section 6 of this manual for details on the “PTC Non-Vital Configuration” and
“PTC Vital Configuration” Web GUI pages.

Installation
Set VPM-3 Ethernet Defaults

To restore Ethernet connectivity with the VPM-3 in Executive mode and enable the default settings on the
VPM-3 DHCP server enter the following command at the boot prompt,
Boot> ethdefault
An ethernet settings reset request was created

Boot>
When restarting in executive mode, the DHCP server will be restored to its default settings and connectivity
is assured to both VPM-3 Ethernet ports.
Format Program/Log Flash
1. To format program/log flash file system via Telnet Server using the VPM-3 Ethernet connection
ports, perform the following procedures.
2. Connect a network cable from the computer RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports,
using an Ethernet cable.
a. Press and hold the PROG button on the VPM-3

b. Press and release the PTCP reset button on the VPM-3
c. Release the PROG button
4. If the VPM-is in Update Mode, it can be connected to via a Telnet session.
a. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of the VPM-3 Ethernet RJ45 ports, using an
Ethernet cable.
b. On the computer, open a command prompt window, and type telnet to connect to the IP port
on the VPM-3.
C:\> telnet 192.168.0.11 23
Note: The default IP addresses of VPM-3 Ethernet connection ports 1/2 are
192.168.0.11/192.168.1.12, and 23 is the default telnet port setting for the VPM-3 in
update mode. The IP Address can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the VPM-3
c. If the computer is correctly connected to the VPM-3 Ethernet port, the login prompt should
be displayed on the command prompt window.

Welcome to InterNiche Telnet Server 1.0 (Modified by GE)
login:
d. Enter admin and then enter telnet at the password prompt.

password:
can only be changed in the Update Mode using Telnet. If the VPM-3 has had this setting changed,
the updated setting should be used.
e. If valid username and password are entered, the boot prompt should be displayed on the


Boot> help

activateexec Activate the Executive activateexec
cidn Download Ethernet->CI-2 cidn <filename> or <"filename
with spaces">
ptcdn Download PTC File Ethernet->CI-2 ptcdn <filename> or
6. Type "format PROG", and then hit "Enter". The following text will be displayed on the terminal
emulation program.
Boot> format PROG

Format the Program Flash file system (Yes/No)?
7. Type "Y", and then hit "Enter" to format the program flash file system.
8. Type "format LOG", and then hit "Enter". The following text will be displayed on the terminal
emulation program.
Boot> format LOG

*** WARNING - this command will erase ALL of the executive logs ***
Format the Log Flash file system (Yes/No)?
9. Type "Y", and then hit "Enter" to format the log flash file system.

Installation
TIP-2 Installation
Install the TIP-2 as required for your location. Refer to Figure 2-31 for installation dimensions. It is
recommended to locate the TIP-2 as close to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis as possible. This will provide
the best surge protection and track circuit performance.
Figure 2-31, TIP-2 Dimensions.
Dimensions
Height A 5¼" (133mm)
Slot Width B 18½" (470mm)
Slot Height C 2¼" (57mm)
Width D 19" (483mm)
I/O Module Cable Installation
Consult the Application Circuit Plan for the proper I/O slot to attach each cable. Attach each cable to the
proper connector receptacle on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 personality modules. If the cable wires are not
already inserted into the header connectors, strip 3/8-inch ± 1/8-inch of insulation before inserting wires
into the connectors. Write the slot number on each cable's identification tag. The cables must be installed
before the I/O modules.
If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 was received as part of a rack assembly, the I/O module cables may already be
installed and this step may be ignored. However, the Application Circuit Plan should be compared to
verify the position of each I/O module cable.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 2-
2-63
I/O Module Cable Application Connections
See the Application Circuit Plan for the information necessary to wire the non-connector end of each
cable.
If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 was received as part of a rack assembly, some of the I/O module wires will have
been factory wired to terminal strips on the rack. The remaining wires need to be terminated as shown in the
Application Circuit Plan.
EEPROMs
Three Configuration EEPROMs contain FRC (Field Related Configuration) data. The FRC information is
entered by the user via the CDU-1. Data is written/read to/from these EEPROMs by the VPM Module.
This data stored may be as simple as the date and time, or as specific as the track voltage/current settings.
FRC DATA EPROMS 373-PH08
Figure 2-32, ElectroLogIXS Backplane.

Installation
Figure 2-33, EC5 Colorlight Backplane (BP-1)
Figure 2-34, Endbox Backplane (BP-2)

Rail Connections
Ensure that all connections within the track circuit have the minimum possible resistance. This is especially
true with regard to the bond wires which connect the rail ends together at each bolted track joint. For track
circuit lengths over 13,000 feet (3962m), welded rail should be used. For track circuits over 19,000 feet
(5791m) welded rail must be used.
The routing of track wires within the bungalow should be as short and direct as possible, especially for the
longer track circuits. For track circuit lengths over 18,000 feet (5486m) it is essential that 6 gauge wire be
used for all track wires, including the track wires within the bungalow. Alternatively, 10 gauge wire may be
used if the wires are doubled up.
If the operation of the track circuit proves to be unreliable the most likely causes are:
• A poor electrical connection somewhere within the circuit. Possible causes are broken rail repairs and
missing bond wires.
• A leakage path between the two rails at some point within the circuit. Some examples are shorted rail
gage plates and conditions of low ballast.
In both cases a close inspection by walking the track will help to pinpoint the problem.
Lamp Wiring-VLD-C6S
Refer to Tables 2-2 through 2-4 to determine the maximum lamp wiring length for VLD-C6S modules.
Table 2-2 Maximum Wire Length in feet (meters) from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to Signal Lamp (1-way)
10 V Bulb operated at 10 V
Wire
Size 18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs
#6 AWG 799 (243.5m) 719 (219.2m) 575 (175.3m) 360 (109.7m)
Two #6 AWG 1,598 (487.1m) 1,438 (438.3m) 1,150 (350.5m) 719 (219.2m)
#9 AWG 399 (121.6m) 359 (109.4m) 287 (87.5m) 179 (54.6m)
Two #9 AWG 797 (242.9m) 717 (218.5m) 574 (175m) 359 (109.4m)
Three #9 AWG 1,196 (364.5m) 1,076 (328m) 861 (262.4m) 538 (164m)
Wire 10 V Bulb operated at 9.5 V
Size
18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs
#6 AWG 1,148 (349.9m) 1,033 (314.9m) 826 (251.8m) 516 (157.3m)
Two #6 AWG 2,295 (699.5m) 2,066 (629.7m) 1,652 (503.5m) 1,033 (314.9m)
#9 AWG 572 (174.3m) 515 (157m) 412 (125.6m) 258 (78.6m)
Two #9 AWG 1,145 (349m) 1,030 (313.9m) 824 (251.2m) 515 (157m)
Three #9 AWG 1,717 (523.3m) 1,545 (470.9m) 1,236 (376.7m) 773 (235.6m)

Installation
Wire 10 V Bulb operated at 9 V
Size
18 W bulb 20 W bulb 25 W bulb Two 20 W bulbs
#6 AWG 1,516 (462.1m) 1,364 (415.7m) 1,091 (332.5m) 682 (207.9m)

Two #6 AWG 3,032 (924.2m) 2,729 (831.8m) 2,183 (665.4m) 1,364 (415.7m)
#9 AWG 756 (230.4m) 681 (207.6m) 544 (165.8m) 340 (103.6m)
Two #9 AWG 1,512 (460.9m) 1,361 (414.8m) 1,089 (331.9m) 681 (207.6m)
Three #9 AWG 2,268 (691.3m) 2,042 (622.4m) 1,633 (497.7m) 1,021 (311.2m)
VLD-C6S Battery Cable Supply Lengths
Each VLD-C6S module requires its own battery connection, separate from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system
battery connection. Either the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system battery may be wired to each VLD personality
module or a separate lamp battery supply may be used. The VLD personality module will accept 12 AWG
for the battery connections. A maximum cable resistance of 0.0294 ohms is allowed. This is equivalent to 9
feet of dedicated 12 AWG wire between the VLD personality module and the lamp battery supply.

Lamp Wiring - VLD-R16S

Tables 2-5 through 2-7 indicate the maximum lamp wiring length for the conditions noted. The VLD-R16S
personality module accepts 12 AWG wire for the Lamp Output connections. To achieve the distances
noted, a maximum of 25 feet of 12 AWG wire (or a maximum of 0.0405 ohms resistance) may be used
between the personality module and the connection to the wire size indicated.
The distances noted can be achieved with either a dedicated lamp return (one lamp per return) or with a
common, single wire return for two lamps. In all cases, the lamp return is assumed to be the same distance
and wire size. The distances are governed primarily by a maximum of 2.0 VDC being allowed on a disabled
(off) lamp output induced by the other lamp of the pair on a common return.
Table 2-5, Maximum Wire Length from IXS to Signal Lamp (1-way) for VLD-R16S
10 V Bulb operated at 10V
Wire Size 18 W Bulb 20 W Bulb 25 W Bulb 28 W Bulb

Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters Feet Meters
#6 AWG 2560 780.3 2140 652.3 1710 521 1560 475.5
#9 AWG 1280 390 1060 323 850 259 780 237.7
10 V Bulb operated at 9.5 V

#6 AWG 2640 804.7 2200 670.6 1760 536.5 1610 490.7
#9 AWG 1320 402.3 1100 335.3 870 265 800 243.8
10 V Bulb operated at 9 V

#6 AWG 2700 822.9 2250 685.8 1800 548.6 1640 499.9
#9 AWG 1340 408.4 1120 341.4 890 271.3 820 249.9
VLD-R16S Battery Cable Supply Lengths
Each VLD-R16S module requires its own battery connection for lamp power separate from the
ElectroLogIXS battery connection. The VLD-R16S Personality module accepts two, 12 AWG battery
connections along with a neutral reference for each lamp bank.The VLD-R16S allows a battery connection
length of up to 25 feet of 12 AWG wire (a maximum battery connection resistance of 0.0405 ohms).
Attention must be given when using a power bus for distributing lamp power to the individual lamp bank
connections in installations that require a large number of lamps. The large current demand caused by
turning on multiple lamps simultaneously could result in the lamp power input voltage dropping below the
minimum 9.5 VDC ( and the lamp banks shut down) if the power bus is not sized to handle the current
demand.

Installation
Track Termination and Lightning Protection

Chassis
GE Transportation Global Signaling recommends grounding the chassis to ensure compliance with FCC
requirements.
Supply Battery
1. Protect the supply battery by installing an equalizer between positive and negative battery.
2. Refer to Figure 2-35. Install an air-gap arrester from positive and negative battery to earth ground.
Figure 2-35, Air-Gap Arrester Location.
Electro Code Track Circuits
Install an equalizer across the track and an air-gap arrester from each rail to earth ground.
Auxiliary Inputs and Outputs (VIO-44S Modules)
CAUTION If connections to the VIO-44S Module leave the signal case, they must
be protected from lightning and surges by installing lightning arresters
and equalizers. All spare conductors in the cable must also be
protected in the same fashion.
Refer to Figure 2-36. Any wires that go outside the signal cases are susceptible to electrical surges and must
be protected with an air-gap arrester to earth ground.
Figure 2-36, Lightning Arrester Schematic - Vital Input or Output.

Lamp Circuits
Refer to Figure 2-37. Install an air-gap arrester between each lamp output used (including lamp common)
and earth ground.
WARNING Do not use an equalizer between a lamp output and lamp common.
Install surge arresters only between the lamp output and earth ground
and between lamp common and earth ground. The
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may interpret a failed surge arrester as a lamp
filament if the surge arrester is installed incorrectly.
Figure 2-37, Surge Arrester Schematic.
Track Code Select Inputs/Track Code Decoder Outputs
CAUTION If connections to the VIO-1010S Module leave the signal case, they
must be protected from lightning and surges by installing lightning
arresters and equalizers. All spare conductors in the cable must also
be protected in the same fashion.
Refer to Figure 2-38. Any wires that go outside the instrument housing are susceptible to electrical surges
and must be protected with an air-gap arrester to earth ground.
Figure 2-38, Lightning Arrester Schematic - Vital Input or Output.

Installation
Single Break Contacts
In applications where the code select chain does not extend beyond the instrument housing, single break
contacts are used to select all code rates. Under this circumstance, connect REF- to common (ICOM) as
shown in Figure 2-39.
Figure 2-39, Single Break Contacts.

Double Break Contacts
Refer to Figure 2-40. In applications where the code select chain does extend beyond the instrument
housing to an adjacent house or other logic, double break contacts are used to select vital code rates.
Figure 2-40, Double Break Contacts.

Installation
Serial Communication
ElectroLogIXS Serial Communication with VPM 2+/VPM 3
ElectroLogIXS provides up to three general-purpose serial ports for vital and non-vital communications
plus a dedicated serial port for the diagnostic terminal. As shown in table below, the first slot supports
non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-1A,CIO-CLA) while the second and third slots support either
vital or non-vital communications over RS-232 (CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-PCA) or RS-485 (CIO-MDA).
The table below shows the available options for each serial communications port.
Vital Non Vital

Physical Serial Port: Remote RS-232 ATCS HAWK LCP
Office* Office* Recorder
Slot 1 CIO-1A CIO-1A with
external CLA
or CIO-CLA
Slot 2 CIO-2A or CIO-2AB CIO-MDA CIO-MDA CIO-2A with
CIO-MDA CIO-PCA external CLA
Slot 3 CIO-2A or CIO-2AB CIO-MDA CIO-MDA CIO-2A with

CIO-MDA CIO-PCA external CLA
* = Each ElectroLogIXS supports only one office port
EC5 Serial Communication
EC5 provides up to two general-purpose serial ports for vital and non-vital communications plus a
dedicated serial port for the diagnostic terminal. As shown in table below, the first slot supports non-vital
communications over RS-232 (CIO-1/CIO-CLA) while the second slot supports either vital or non-vital
communications over RS-232 (CIO-2, CIO-PCA), RS-422 (CIO-3), or RS-485 (CIO-MDA). The
table below shows the available options for each serial communications port.
Configured with VPM 2+/VPM 3
Vital Non Vital

Slot 1 CIO-1 CIO-1 with
external CLA
or CIO-CLA
Slot 2 CIO-2, CIO- CIO-3, CIO-MD CIO-2 with
3, or CIO- CIO-MD, external CLA
MD or CIO-PCA
* = Each ElectroLogIXS supports only one office port
Configured with VPM 2
Vital Non Vital

Slot 1 CIO-1
Slot 2 CIO-2, CIO-
3, or CIO-
MD

Vital Communications
Serial Point to Point Operation
WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/

CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA,and the VPM-3 Ethernet ports provide isolation
protection against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from
Signal or Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached
to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD
/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports combined with a failure
of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through
to the powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground
Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation.

CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, or the VPM-3 Ethernet ports are
left unattended, Ground Fault testing must be performed after the connection
is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Point to Point vital communications using either the CIO-2/CIO-2A,
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, or CIO-PCA modules. The CIO-2/CIO-2A module uses RS-232 signaling and is
suitable for communication networks that do not extend beyond the equipment housing. The
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module uses RS-485 signaling and is suitable for networks that extend beyond the
equipment housing. When cabling extends outside of the equipment housing, the cable’s ground shield must
be tied to ground and appropriate surge protection should be provided. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 provides two
slots that will each accept either a CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, and CIO-3(EC5 only).
An example of a wiring diagram for a synchronous RS-485 Point to Point network is shown below (Figure 2-
41).
373-0507
Figure 2-41, Synchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection

Installation
An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-485 Point to Point network without hardware flow
control is shown below (Figure 2-42).
373-0508
Figure 2-42, Asynchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection

without Hardware Flow Control
An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-485 Point to Point network with hardware flow
373-0509
Figure 2-43, Asynchronous Full Duplex RS-485 Point to Point Connection

With Hardware Flow Control

An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network without hardware flow
373-0510
Figure 2-44, Asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point Connection

Without Hardware Flow Control
An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network with hardware flow
373-0511


Installation
Serial Multi-Drop Operation

· Multi-drop serial communications

· Local Area Networks (LANs)
· Wide Area Networks (WANs)
· Fiber-Optic backbones
· Radio communications
injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed information)
An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical
When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an

ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application
(See Appendix B for more detailed information)
The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA provides isolation protection against Ground

Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment
battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA combined with a failure of the isolation protection
of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the powering
battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to
Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail operation.
If connections to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA are left unattended, Ground

Fault testing must be performed after the connection is established,
and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Multi-Drop vital communications using the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA
module. Up to two CIO-MD/CIO-MDA modules can be installed in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and either or both
of them can be configured for Multi-Drop operation. In Multi-Drop mode, several devices can share a single
serial connection. One device on the bus must be the master device with all the others configured as slaves. The
master device controls the network and polls each slave in turn to allow them to transmit their data. Each
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Multi-Drop port can be configured to operate as either the master or slave device on a
Multi-Drop network. The Multi-Drop network can be configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation.
An example wiring diagram for a synchronous Serial Multi-Drop network consisting of ElectroLogIXS/EC5,
EC5s and/or VHLCs is shown below. If the synchronous network installation includes VHLCs, each VHLC
must include an RS-422/485 module and be configured for Multi-Drop operation. If the synchronous network
installation includes EC5s, each EC5 must include a CIO-MD module and be configured for Multi-Drop
synchronous operation.
The maximum end-to-end length for a multi-drop network should be less than 4000 feet. If the required length
of the network is greater than 4000 feet, an intermediate device (e.g. modem, repeater, radio, etc.) is required.
The network should only be terminated at the end-points and only if the baud-rate / network length combination
requires it. Terminations are not required if the bit-time used on the network is much greater than three times
the down-and-back propagation delay of the network wiring. Use the following calculation to determine if
termination is required:
1/ baud rate >> 3 x (2 x Cable Length in feet) x 1.01 x 10-9 seconds / foot
For example, to determine if termination is required for a 2000 ft network operating at 9600 baud:
Bit time is: 1/9600 = 104 usecs.

3 x Propagation delay is: 3 x (2 x 2000 ft) x (1.01 x 10-9) = 12.16 usecs.
104 usecs is >> 12.16 usecs; therefore, no termination is needed.
If termination at the network end-point CIO modules is needed, open the plastic cases of the
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA assemblies (using tool P/N 095968-000 to remove the latch if necessary) and place
jumpers (P/N 032384-000) across the connectors (W1, W2, W3, W5, W6, and W14) to activate the
terminations.
Figure 2-46, Synchronous Multi-Drop Network
An example wiring diagram for an asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop network without hardware flow control
consisting of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and/or EC5s is shown below. If the asynchronous network installation
includes EC5s, each EC5 must include a CIO-MD module and be configured for asynchronous Serial Multi-
Drop operation.

Installation
Figure 2-47, Asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop Network Without Hardware Flow Control
Ethernet Operation
WARNING The VPM-3 Ethernet ports provide isolation protection against Ground Faults.
If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or Equipment battery,
Ground Faults in external equipment attached to the VPM-3 Ethernet ports
combined with a failure of the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
may be passed through to the powering battery under certain failure
conditions. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may
result in hazardous rail operation.
If connections to the VPM-3 Ethernet ports are left unattended, Ground Fault
testing must be performed after the connection is established, and at FRA
mandated intervals thereafter.
The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/ VPM-3 supports vital communication over either or both Ethernet connections
using IP / UDP (Internet Protocol / User Datagram Protocol). Vital communications over Ethernet can
occur simultaneously with vital communications on one or more serial interfaces and also simultaneously
with non-vital Ethernet comunications (Office and Web GUI communications). ElectroLogIXS or EC5/
VPM-3 supports 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX communication and auto-negotiates with the connected
device for speed selection.
The two Ethernet connections are available on the VPM-3 via the two, labeled 8P8C (referred to as an
RJ45) connections. Table 2-8 shows the standard, straight-through wiring connections for Ethernet. The
VPM-3 auto-detects straight versus crossover connection types so either cable type may be used.
Table 2-8, Pin Assignments for Ethernet Connection

Pin # Pin # 10BASE-T Signal Wire Color (TIA - Wire Color (TIA
(Straight) (Crossover) 100 BASE-TX Signal 568A) -568B)
1 3 Transmit+ White/Green White / Orange
2 6 Transmit- Green Orange
3 1 Receive+ White/Orange White / Green
4 Unused Blue Blue
5 Unused White/Blue White / Blue
6 2 Receive- Orange Green
7 Unused White/Brown White / Brown
8 Unused Brown Brown
The maximum distance between10 BaseT / 100 BaseTX Ethernet network connections is 100 meters (328 feet).
If greater distances are required, an intermediate device (e.g. switch, modem, etc.) must be used.

Non Vital Communications

Serial Point-to-Point Operation
WARNING The CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3,

CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, provides isolation protection
against Ground Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from
Signal or Equipmentbattery, Ground Faults in external equipment
attached to the CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA, CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB,
CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, combined with a failure of
the isolation protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed
through to the powering battery under certain failure conditions.
Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result
in hazardous rail operation.
CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, CIO-PCA, are left unattended, Ground
and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Point to Point communications using the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA
module. The CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA sits in a dedicated slot and provides separate dedicated RS-232 ports
for office or LCP communications and a local maintenance diagnostic terminal. Both ports utilize RS-232
signaling, which is suitable for communication networks that do not extend beyond the equipment housing.
An example of a wiring diagram for an asynchronous RS-232 Point to Point network with flow control is shown
in Figure 2-48.
373-0510

ATCS Office Ports interface to radios through the synchronous signals shown in Figure 2-38. Both the
connector and pin assignments are radio vendor specific. Please confirm connector / pin assignment details with
the radio equipment supplier.

Installation
Serial Multi-Drop Operation
WARNING The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA provides isolation protection against Ground

Faults. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or
Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to
the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA combined with a failure of the isolation
protection of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may be passed through to the
powering battery under certain failure conditions. Undetected Ground
Faults to Signal or Equipment battery may result in hazardous rail
operation.
If connections to the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA are left unattended, Ground

and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 supports Serial Multi-Drop non vital communications using the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA
module. Up to two CIO-MD/CIO-MDA modules can be installed in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 but only one can
configured for non vital Serial Multi-Drop operation. In Serial Multi-Drop mode, several devices can share a
single serial connection. One device on the bus must be the master device with all the others configured as
slaves. The master device controls the network and polls each slave in turn to allow them to transmit their data.
An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 non-vital Serial Multi-Drop port can operate only as an asynchronous slave device on
a Serial Multi-Drop network.
The CIO-MD/CIO-MDA module uses RS-485 signaling and is suitable for networks that extend beyond the
equipment housing. When cabling extends outside of the equipment housing, the cable’s ground shield must
be tied to ground and appropriate surge protection should be provided. An example of a wiring diagram for
an asynchronous non vital RS-485 Multi-Drop network interfacing to a 3 wire HAWK recorder interface is
shown below (see Figure 2-49).
The maximum end-to-end length for a multi-drop network should be less than 4000 feet. If the required length
of the network is greater than 4000 feet, an intermediate device (e.g. modem, repeater, radio, etc.) is required.
The network should only be terminated at the end-points and only if the baud-rate / network length combination
requires it. Terminations are not required if the bit-time used on the network is much greater than three times
the down-and-back propagation delay of the network wiring. Use the following calculation to determine if
termination is required:
1/ baud rate >> 3 x (2 x Cable Length in feet) x 1.01 x 10-9 seconds / foot
For example, to determine if termination is required for a 2000 ft network operating at 9600 baud:
Bit time is: 1/9600 = 104 usecs.

3 x Propagation delay is: 3 x (2 x 2000 ft) x (1.01 x 10-9) = 12.16 usecs.
104 usecs is >> 12.16 usecs; therefore, no termination is needed.
If termination at the network end-point CIO modules is needed, open the plastic cases of the
CIO-MD/CIO-MDA assemblies (using tool P/N 095968-000 to remove the latch if necessary) and place
jumpers (P/N 032384-000) across the connectors (W1, W2, W3, W5, W6, and W14) to activate the
terminations.

3 pin 25 pin 25 pin Shield 3 pin

Multi-Drop Multi-Drop Multi-Drop Twisted Pair Multi-Drop
Master Slave Slave Slave
+ TXDA
2 2 +
- TXDB
14 14 -
RXDA
3 3
16 RXDB 16
COM 7 GND
7 COM
373-0514
Figure 2-49, Non-Vital Asynchronous Serial Multi-Drop Network without Hardware Flow
Control
Ethernet Operation
The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/ VPM-3 supports non-vital communication over either or both Ethernet
connections. Non-vital office communications use the IP / UDP (Internet Protocol / User Datagram Protocol)
while Web GUI communications use TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol). Non-vital
communications over Ethernet can occur simultaneously with vital Ethernet communications.
The two Ethernet connections are available on the VPM-3 via the two, labeled 8P8C (referred to as an RJ45)
connections. Table 2-9 shows the standard, straight-through wiring connections for Ethernet. The VPM-3
auto-detects straight versus crossover connection types so either cable type may be used.
The maximum distance between10 BaseT / 100 BaseTX Ethernet network connections is 100 meters (328 feet).
If greater distances are required, an intermediate device (e.g. switch, modem, etc.) must be used.
Table 2-9, Pin Assignments for Ethernet Connection

Pin # Pin # 10BASE-T Signal Wire Color (TIA - Wire Color (TIA
(Straight) (Crossover) 100 BASE-TX Signal 568A) -568B)
1 3 Transmit+ White/Green White / Orange
2 6 Transmit- Green Orange
3 1 Receive+ White/Orange White / Green
4 Unused Blue Blue
5 Unused White/Blue White / Blue
6 2 Receive- Orange Green
7 Unused White/Brown White / Brown
8 Unused Brown Brown

Installation
Initial Setup
WARNING After initial setup of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Field Related Configuration

Settings, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors
related to these configuration settings. The tests should be performed
before the unit is placed into service and in accordance with standard
railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This should include
visual inspection of vital parameter values.The tests should
be performed by qualified personnel that have the knowledge to
correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to adequately test the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after the initial setup could result in death or
serious injury.
Powering the System for the First Time
1. Verify all modules are installed and seated properly in the chassis.
2. Verify all electrical connections are made and the battery is properly connected.
3. Place the Power Switch to the ON position.
4. CDU-1 (Control Display Unit) will display:
System Initialization
The System Initialization message is displayed while the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 reads the CI Module, and
performs hardware and software checks. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the VPM Module or
refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting.
Note: VPM LEDs (CPU A, B, and C) will be constantly illuminated during startup. After startup is
complete, VPM LEDs will flash to indicate the CPUs are functioning properly.
5. After the system has been initialized, the CDU-1 will display:
Downloading Application
The Downloading Application message is displayed while the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 reads the
application EPROMs on the Backplane and loads them into system memory. If the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the CI Module or refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting.
Note: If the CDU displays “Incorrect Chassis Id”, the Chassis ID number of the application EPROM
does not match the Chassis ID number set into the Chassis ID DIP pack. Refer to Chassis ID
Setup in this chapter for more information concerning Chassis ID Setup.
6. After the applications have been downloaded, the CDU-1 will display:
Application OK
Please Wait
During this phase of the startup, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is verifying the application equations. If the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets, check the CI Module or refer to Chapter 4 - Troubleshooting.
7. Check the CDU-1 display. If an alarm is detected, the date and time portion of the Home Menu will
alternate with the alarm message(s).

8. Verify the Health LED on each module is illuminated. This process may take up to two minutes, once
the power is switched ON.
9. Using the CDU-1, select the Quick Status Menu. The Quick Status Menu are the items directly below
the GETSGS Home Menu. See Figure 5.3 for an example. The items shown in the Quick Status Menu
are dependent upon the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application.
Track Circuit Setup
Recommended Guidelines
Track circuit adjustments for EC5 and ElectroLogIXS have been simplified to general recommendations.
These recommendations are for typical applications (ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS, ElectroLogIXS to
EC5, or ElectroLogIXS to EC4). In the event that block circumstances are significantly different than a
typical application, contact GETS GS Technical Services for further recommendations.
Transmitter adjustment recommendations have been modified to include losses that can result from track
wire lengths. The following procedure will address the means to make these calculations.
In general, the detection of trains in a block operates best when the Receive Reference value is about 1/3
the actual receive current. This general rule for 1/3 the receive current has some flexibility in setting the
Receive Reference. Setting the Transmit Voltage too high can cause too much receive current at the other
end of the block, which can result in the distortion of vital code.
Tables 2-10 and 2-11 specify the transmitter and receiver adjustments to be used for each track circuit length.
Table 2-10 is used for ElectroLogIXS to EC5 or ElectroLogIXS applications; Table 2-9 is used for track
circuits with an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end and an EC4 at the other. These tables are designed to
provide reliable operation with ballast resistance as low as 3 ohms per one thousand feet of track. Train
presence will be detected when the rail-to-rail shunt resistance is .06 ohms or less. For operation with
ballast resistance less than 3 ohms, for train detection with greater than .06 ohm shunt resistance, or for
installations where track wire length must exceed the limits shown in Table 2-9, contact GETSGS. For
reliable and safe operation the following recommendations should be observed:
• Ensure that all connections within the track circuit have the minimum possible resistance. This is
especially true with regard to the bond wires which connect the rail ends together at each bolted track
joint. For track circuit lengths over 13,000 feet (3962m) it is highly recommended that welded rail be
used. For track circuits over 19,000 feet (5791m) it is imperative that welded rail be used.
• The routing of track wires within the bungalow should be as short and direct as possible, especially for
the longer track circuits. For track circuits over 18,000 feet (5486.4m) it is essential that 6 gauge wire
be used for all track wires, including the track wires within the bungalow. Alternatively, 10 gauge wire
may be used if the wires are doubled up.
• After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency procedures
should be performed to test the shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA
236.56). Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast conditions. If optimum
ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test should be performed to insure proper shunting
sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions. Adjustments to the
track circuit settings are stored in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends
that a log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are made to the track circuit.

Installation
If the operation of the track circuit proves to be unreliable the most likely causes are:
1. A poor electrical connection somewhere within the circuit. Possible causes are broken rail repairs and
missing bond wires.
2. A leakage path between the two rails at some point within the circuit. Some examples are rail gauge
plates and salt in the ballast at grade crossings.
In both cases a close inspection by walking the track will help to pinpoint the problem. If the problem
cannot be resolved by correcting the track condition then the transmitter and receiver settings may be
changed by entering values from the adjustment table for a track circuit which is one thousand or two
thousand feet longer than the actual length. Any adjustment outside of this range may compromise the
ability to detect train presence and broken rail, therefore the user must assume full responsibility for the
safety implications.
Setup for ElectroLogIXS to ElectroLogIXS or ElectroLogIXS to EC5
Step 1. Estimating the Track Wire Length
The impedance of the track wire from each TIP-2 to the rail can affect the performance of the Track Circuit.
The wire length should be converted to an approximate additional block distance and will be needed to
determine the initial track transmitter voltage setting. Use the following procedure to estimate total track
circuit length.
Note: That the track circuit wire run is the total of both ends of the block (based on using No. 6 Copper
wire twisted pair – both wires considered as a single length together).
Measure the track circuit wire run from the instrument housing to the track feed point in feet, then multiply
the resulting total by 10.
Example: If the track wire from the TIP-2 to the connection at the rail is 100 feet (30m) at one end of the
block and 75 feet (23m) at the other end of the block, add 100 (30m) to 75 (23m) to get a total of 175
(53m). Multiply 175 (53m) by 10 to get 1750 feet (533m) as the track wire length. This 1750 feet
(533m)will be added to the actual block length in Step 2 to determine the total circuit length.
Step 2. Determine the Total Track Circuit Length
Add the additional track length to the actual block length to get the total track circuit length.
Example: If additional track wire length is 1750 feet (533m) (as computed in Step 1) and the actual block
length is 7550 feet (2301m), then the total track circuit length is 1750 (533m) + 7550 (2301m) = 9300 feet
(2835m). Always round this value up to the nearest 1000-foot (305m) increment. (9300 ft rounds up to
10,000 ft)
Step 3. Set the Initial Receive Reference Value
As an initial setting, set the VTI-2Ss at each end of the block Receive Reference value to 0.5 A. This will
assure that codes will be transmitted and received during the setup process.
Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage
Set the Initial Transmit Voltage to the value listed in Table 2-10 for the VTI-2Ss at each end of the block.
Remember to use the Total Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2.

Step 5. Read the Receive Current
Read the Receive Current on the CDU. The value should be within the range listed in Expected Receive
Current on Table 2-10.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is lower than the Low Current Reading, review
the installation for any faulty wiring connections or other conditions that can result in the lower reading. If
all connections have been checked and are within the scope of good signaling practices, contact GETS
Global Signaling Field Support for further assistance.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is within the Low and High range, go to Step 6.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is above the High range, reduce the Transmit
Voltage by 0.5 VDC. If the Receive Current is now within the Low and High range proceed to Step 6. If it
is still above the High range value, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support.
Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values
Final adjustments to the track circuit will largely depend on the current state of the ballast leakage
conditions.
If the ballast conditions are currently wetter than normal ballast conditions, go Step 6a.
If the ballast conditions are normal, that is, typical ballast conditions for the area, then go to Step 6b.
If the ballast conditions are currently dry, that is, it is drier than normal ballast conditions, then go to Step
6c.
Step 6a - Wet Ballast Conditions- Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during wetter than
normal ballast conditions
Condition Correction
Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing.
The Receive Current less than 0.9A and track Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting
circuit conditions appear good. end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive
Current does not go above 1.5A.
Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting
end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive
Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A? If yes, reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting
end of the block by 0.5 VDC and repeat step 6a.
Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and less The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set
than or equal to 1.5A? up correctly. Setup is Complete.
If the Receive Current is above 1.5A then set the Contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support
Transmit Voltage back to the previous value.
When ballast conditions return to normal, it is recommended that adjustments be verified in
accordance with Step 6b.

Installation
Step 6b - Normal Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during normal
ballast conditions
Is the Receive Current less than or equal to Yes? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference
1.5A? are set up correctly. Setup is Complete.
Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and If yes, increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A.
less than or equal to 2.0A? Setup is Complete.
Is the Receive Current greater than 2.0A and If yes, then increase the Receive Reference to 0.72A.
Is the Receive Current greater than 2.5A? If yes, then reduce the Track Transmitter at the
transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC.
Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6b
If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and contact
GETS Global Signaling Field Support.
Step 6c - Dry Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during dryer than
Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing
circuit conditions appear good. end of the block by 0.5 VDC and verify that the Receive
Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Repeat the previous step.
Is the Receive Current above 2.5A? Set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value
and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support.
Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and If yes, then Setup is Complete.
less than or equal to 1.5A?
transmitting end of the block by 0.5 VDC.
Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6c.


The Track Circuit Adjustment Table specifies the transmitter and receiver adjustments to be used for each
track circuit length. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to adjust
transmitter voltage and receive reference.
WARNING Improper adjustments or maintenance to track circuits could result in

death or serious injury.
After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other
regulatory agency procedures should be performed to test the
shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA
236.56).
Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast

conditions. If optimum ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test
should be performed to insure proper shunting sensitivity of the track
with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions.
Adjustments to the track circuit settings are stored in the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends that a
log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are
made to the track circuit.
WARNING Proper track circuit adjustment and operation should always be

validated through track circuit shunt testing.
1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 5-5 as a guide, from the Tracks Menu, select the appropriate track
Menu.
2. Select the Track Transmitter Menu.
3. Press the Down Button, the CDU-1 will display the transmitter voltage.
Xmit= 1.0V* I= 0.39A

Track Res: 2.55 Ohm
4. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a message similar to:
Xmit Volt: 1.0V

Enter Value>
5. Using the appropriate table (Table 2-10 or Table 2-11), enter the transmit voltage for track circuit length.
6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the new transmitter voltage and a confirm message:
Xmit Volt: 1.0V

Confirm ***** >
7. To confirm the new transmitter voltage, enter the 1 to 5 digit, number listed in the confirm message and
press the Enter Button. If the new transmitter voltage is not correct, press the Cancel Button.
8. After confirmation, the Xmit Volt: field will blank momentarily as the system recalculates the transmitter
voltage.

Installation
9. From the Tracks Menu, select the appropriate track number.
10. Select the Track Receiver Menu.
11. Press the Down Button, the CDU-1 will display the Receive Reference value.
Receive I = 1.72A
Reference = 0.55*
12. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a message similar to:
Reference: 0.55
Enter Value>
13. Using the appropriate table (Table 2-10 or Table 2-11), enter the receive reference for track circuit length.
Note: When interfacing an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to an Electrified Electro Code, set the Transmitter Voltage
to 4.0 volts and the Receive Reference to 0.5 Amps
.
Table 2-10 ElectroLogIXS to EC5 or ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Track Circuit Adjustment Table
.06 Ohm Shunt Recommended Typical Receive Current, Amps Peak
Track Circuit Length Transmitter Voltage Low High
Feet Meters
1000 304.8 1.0 1.3 1.5
2000 609.6 1.0 1.2 1.5
3000 914.4 1.0 1.1 1.4
4000 1219.2 1.0 1.0 1.4
5000 1524 1.0 1.0 1.4
6000 1828.8 1.0 0.9 1.3
7000 2133.6 1.5 1.2 1.9
8000 2438.4 1.5 1.1 1.9
9000 2743.2 1.5 1.1 1.9
10000 3048 1.5 1.0 1.8
11000 3352.8 1.5 0.9 1.8
12000 3657.6 1.5 0.9 1.8
13000 3962.4 2.0 1.1 2.3
14000 4267.2 2.0 1.0 2.3
15000 4572 2.0 0.9 2.3
16000 4876.8 2.0 0.8 2.2
17000 5181.6 2.0 0.8 2.1
18000 5486.4 2.0 0.7 2.1
19000 5791.2 2.5 0.8 2.6
20000 6096 2.5 0.8 2.5
21000 6400.8 2.5 0.7 2.5
22000 6705.6 2.5 0.7 2.5
23000 7010.4 2.5 0.6 2.4
24000 7315.2 2.5 0.6 2.4

Setup for ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4
Steps 1 to 3. Method for Determining total Track Circuit Length
Use the same method for determining total track circuit length as previously noted for configuring an
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to ElectroLogIXS or EC5.
Step 4. Set the Initial Transmit Voltage at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Using the transmit voltage setting in Table 2-11 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Recommended Settings, look up the initial
transmit voltage to set for Track Circuit Transmitter at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Remember to use the Total
Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2.
Step 4A. Determine and Set the 2R and 7K at the EC4
Using Table 2-11 EC4 Recommended settings, look up the Initial values to set for the VTI transmitter in the
EC4. Remember to use the Total Track Circuit Length value computed in Step 2. Use the standard procedure to
adjust the 7K module as described in the EC4 manual.
Step 5. Read the Receive Current at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Read the Receive Current on the CDU. The value should be within the range listed in Expected Receive
Current on Table 2-11.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is lower than the Low Current Reading, review the
installation for any faulty wiring connections or other conditions that can result in the lower reading. If all
connections have been checked and are within the scope of good signaling practices, contact GETS Global
Signaling Field Support for further assistance.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is within the Low and High range, go to Step 6.
If the value that is read on the CDU for the Receive Current is above the High range, reduce the EC4
Transmit Voltage by moving the tap on the VTI transmitter to the next lower setting (i.e. 3=high, 2=medium,
1=low). If the Receive Current is now within the Low and High range proceed to Step 6. If it is still above
the High range value, contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support.

Installation
Step 6. Refining the Track Transmitter and Receive Reference Values
Final adjustments to the track circuit will largely depend on the current state of the ballast leakage conditions.
If the ballast conditions are currently wetter than normal ballast conditions, go Step 6a.
If the ballast conditions are normal, that is, typical ballast conditions for the area, then go to Step 6b.
If the ballast conditions are currently dry, that is, it is drier than normal ballast conditions, then go to Step 6c.
Step 6a - Wet Ballast Conditions- Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during wetter than
Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing.
circuit conditions appear good. end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher
setting and verify that the Receive Current does not go
above 1.5A.
Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Increase the Track Transmitter value at the transmitting
end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher
above 1.5A.
Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A? If yes, reduce the Track Transmitter at the transmitting
end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher
setting and repeat step 6a.
Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference are set
less than or equal to 1.5A? up correctly. Setup is Complete.
If the Receive Current is above 1.5A then set Contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support
the Transmit Voltage back to the previous
value.
Step 6b - Normal Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during normal
ballast conditions
Is the Receive Current less than or equal to Yes? The Track Transmitter and Receive Reference
1.5A? are set up correctly. Setup is Complete.
Is the Receive Current greater than 1.5A and If yes, increase the Receive Reference to 0.62A.
transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to
the next higher setting.
Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6b
If the Receive Current is below 0.9A then set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value and
contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support.

Step 6c - Dry Ballast Conditions - Refining Track Transmitter and Receive values during dryer than
Is the Receive Current less than 0.9A? Verify all track circuit connections before continuing
circuit conditions appear good. end of the block by moving the 2R tap to the next higher
above 2.0A.
Is the Receive Current still less than 0.9A? Repeat the previous step.
Is the Receive Current above 2.5A? Set the Transmit Voltage back to the previous value
and contact GETS Global Signaling Field Support.
Is the Receive Current greater than 0.9A and If yes, then Setup is Complete.
less than or equal to 1.5A?
transmitting end of the block by moving the 2R tap to
the next lower setting.
Is the Receive Current is greater than 0.9A? Repeat Step 6c.


Installation
Table 2-11 ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to EC4 Track Circuit Adjustment Table

.06 Ohm Shunt EC4 Recommended Settings ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Recommended
Settings
Track Circuit 2R Tap 7K Typ. Receive Transmit Receive Typ. Receive

Length Resistors Current Amps, Voltage Reference Current Amps,
Ohms * Peak Amps Peak
Feet Meters Low High Low High
1000 304.8 Low .22 .91 .97 1.0 .88 1.7 1.9
2000 609.3 Low .22 .83 .96 1.0 .82 1.5 1.9
3000 914.4 Low 0 .95 1.16 1.0 .76 1.4 1.8
4000 1219.2 Low 0 .89 1.14 1.0 .71 1.3 1.8
5000 1524 Low 0 .82 1.12 1.0 .67 1.2 1.8
6000 1828.8 Low .22 .90 1.36 1.5 .63 1.1 1.8
7000 2133.6 Low .22 .83 1.34 1.5 .59 1.0 1.7
8000 2438.4 Low .22 .77 1.32 1.5 .55 .90 1.7
9000 2743.2 Low 0 .90 1.57 1.5 .52 .90 1.7
10000 3048 Medium 0 .83 1.54 1.5 .84 1.4 2.5
11000 3352.8 Medium .22 .82 1.69 2.0 .80 1.3 2.5
12000 3657.6 Medium .22 .76 1.67 2.0 .75 1.2 2.5
13000 3962.4 Medium .22 .70 1.65 2.0 .71 1.1 2.5
14000 4267.2 Medium 0 .82 1.94 2.0 .67 1.0 2.5
15000 4572 Medium 0 .76 1.90 2.0 .64 .90 2.5
* The lower three adjustment screws on the 7K board (S1-S3) should be set to the “in” (shorting) position. The
upper adjustment screw (S4) should be set to the “in” (shorting) position for zero ohms and to the “out” (open)
position for .22 ohms.

Table 2-12 - Total Sum of Track Wire Length*

Track Circuit Single 6 Gauge Double 6 Gauge Quadruple 6 Gauge
1000 305 1200 366 2400 732 4800 1463
2000 610 1200 366 2400 732 4800 1463
3000 914 1200 366 2400 732 4800 1463
4000 1219 1100 335 2200 671 4400 1341
5000 1524 1100 335 2200 671 4400 1341
6000 1829 1000 305 2000 610 4000 1219
7000 2134 1000 305 2000 610 4000 1219
8000 2438 900 274 1800 549 3600 1097
9000 2743 800 244 1600 488 3200 975
10000 3048 700 213 1400 427 2800 853
11000 3353 600 183 1200 366 2400 732
12000 3658 500 152 1000 305 2000 610
13000 3962 400 122 800 244 1600 488
14000 4267 300 91 600 183 1200 366
15000 4572 200 61 400 122 800 244
16000 4877 150 46 300 91 600 183
17000 5182 150 46 300 91 600 183
18000 5486 150 46 300 91 600 183
19000 5791 100 30 200 61 400 122
20000 6096 100 30 200 61 400 122
21000 6401 100 30 200 61 400 122
22000 6706 50 15 100 30 200 61
23000 7010 50 15 100 30 200 61
24000 7315 50 15 100 30 200 61
* = Definition of "Total Sum of Track Wire Length" is shown in Figure 2-50

Installation
Note: This table is based on a nominal .06-ohm shunt sensitivity with minimum 3-ohm ballast
and clean rail. While longer or shorter blocks and/or track circuit wire combinations
may be possible depending on worst-case ballast conditions and/or track wire length,
safe operation for any block length must be verified by placing a calibrated shunt across
the rails at the receiving end of the block during the highest resistance ballast conditions.
Adjustments should be verified following any major changes to ballast and periodically
in accordance with railroad procedures.
Figure 2-50, Total Sum of Track Wire Length

Alternating Code 5 Menu
The Alternating Code 5 Menu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option.
Display< Alternating Code 5
Arrow Key Function Comment

Up Go to Appropriate Track.
Down Go to the Alternating Code 5 Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu. Once the
submenu. menu is enabled, press the Up or Down Arrow Key to
toggle between the ALT and NON-ALT, press the
ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct.
Left Go to Test Mode.
Right Go to Track Transmitter.
Alternating Code 5 Submenu
The Alternating Code 5 submenu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. With Alternating Code 5 in
the display, press the ENTER Button. The Alternating Code 5 Mode may be selected by pressing the Up and
Down Arrow Keys.

Code 5 = ALT/NON=ALT*

Up Go to Alternating Code 5. Press the ENTER Key to change the Code 5 option.
Press the Up or Down Arrow Key to toggle between
ALT and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and verify
the setting is correct.
Down N/A
Left N/A
Right N/A

Installation
Lamp Voltage Setup
There are two methods for setting the VLD-C6S lamp drive voltage; using the Manual Lamp Set-up Mode or
the Automatic Lamp Setup Mode. The Manual Lamp Setup Mode allows the user to adjust the lamp drive
voltages and the Automated Lamp Setup Mode allows the system to automatically calculate the actual output
voltage based on a desired voltage at the lamp. Each setup mode is selected using the CDU-1. Refer to Chapter
5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to set-up the lamps.
The VLD-R16S lamp output voltage is set only by the voltage value of the lamp power input. No adjustment
or set-up is required of the module itself.
Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S)
The Manual Lamp Setup Mode provides the ability to adjust the lamp voltages on a bank of three lamps
residing on a VLD-C6S Module.
The Manual Lamp Setup Menu is selected using the CDU-1. When this mode is entered, the CDU-1 will
display the lamp output voltage, for the specific bank being setup. It should be noted that the bank's output
voltages are measured at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 output, not at the lamp.
When the user inputs the new output voltage the system prompts the user to confirm the new value. After
confirmation, the system stores the new output value and sets the output voltage accordingly. Adjust the lamp
voltages to railroad specified levels.
1. Using the CDU-1 and Figure 5-4 as a guide, select Lamp Maintenance from the LAMPS Menu.
2. Press the Down Arrow Button. Using the Figure 5-22 as a guide, select Setup/Test Slot 1 VLD-C6S .
3. Press the Down Arrow Button to select Lamp Manual Setup.
4. Press the Down Arrow Button. The CDU-1 displays the lamp drive voltage for the selected bank.
5. Using the Right and Left Arrow Buttons, select the desired lamp.
6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 displays the current lamp voltage (for the selected lamp bank) and
prompt for a new voltage.
New Voltage >
7. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new lamp voltage.
8. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message
Confirm ***** >
9. To confirm the new voltage, enter the 1-5 digit, number listed in the confirm message. Press the Enter
Button. The new lamp drive voltage is now placed into system memory.
10. Repeat the process until both bank voltages have been set.
Note: The voltage selected, applies to all 3 lamps in the bank.
11. If more than one VLD-C6S Module is installed in the system, repeat the procedure for each additional
VLD-C6S Module.
12. With the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 turned On, and the lamps lit, check the voltage at the lamp head(s).

Automated Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S)
The Automated Setup Mode allows the system to automatically calculate the actual output voltage of the VLD-
C6S based on a desired voltage at the lamp.
As soon as the user attempts to enter the Automated Setup Mode, the executable software verifies that it has
permission to enter that mode based on Lamp Setup Grant status.
If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing
the user that this mode can not be entered at the present time. This could be because of train position or the fact
that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant status to go True.
If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is granted, the executive software sets the Lamp Normal
Mode status to False and the previously selected lamp voltage, for each of the lamp output driver statuses. The
user selects which lamp output to perform the Automated Setup on. The CDU-1 then prompts the user for a
new lamp voltage.
When the user inputs the new desired lamp voltage at the lamp, the system has the user verify the change to
the lamp voltage. Once verified, the system will start the automated setup procedure. The system will turn off
all the lamps in the bank of the VLD-C6S that was selected for the setup for approximately 30 seconds. The
system will illuminate each lamp in the bank for about 1 second with a 5 second off-time between each lamp.
After the illuminating portion of the setup, the system calculates the voltage drop to the lamp and adjusts the
lamp output voltage for the desired voltage to be present at the lamp. This takes another 30 seconds.
The total setup time is approximately 90 seconds. If during the setup procedure the clear aspect is dropped, the
procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the system will hold the signals in that bank dark for
approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal operation.
In addition, an entry is placed in the user configuration log stating that the lamp voltage was changed. The new
voltage at the lamp is displayed on the CDU-1 and the executable software sets the Lamp Normal Mode status
back to True.
The executable software continuously monitors the Lamp Setup Enable status, to determine if the permission
has been overridden in the middle of the Automated Setup Mode. This will result in the executable software
returning to the previous lamp output voltage and resuming normal lamp operation within 30 seconds. In the
case of the Automatic Setup Mode being cut short the system will display a CDU-1 alarm message informing
the user that the Automated Setup algorithm was cut short due to the application.
Adjust the lamp voltages to railroad specified levels.
1. Using the CDU-1, select Lamp Maintenance from the LAMPS Menu.
2. Press the Down Arrow Button. Using the Figure 5-22 as a guide, select Setup/Test Slot 1VLD-C6S.
3. Press the Down Arrow Button to select Lamp Automated Setup.
Note: If “Access Denied” is displayed on the CDU-1, the Automated Setup Mode cannot be entered at this
time. This could be due to the presence of trains or some other condition defined in the application
equations.
4. Press the Down Arrow Button. The CDU-1 displays the lamp drive voltage for selected output.
5. Using the Right and Left Arrow Buttons, select the desired lamp.

Installation
6. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the lamp voltage and prompt for a new voltage.
New Voltage >
7. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new lamp voltage.
8. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message.
Confirm ***** >
9. To confirm the new voltage, enter the 1 to 5 digit, number listed in the confirm message. Press the Enter
Button. The new lamp drive voltage is now placed into system memory.
Note: The calculated voltage, applies to all 3 lamps in the bank.
10. Repeat the process until all the lamp drive voltages have been set.
11. If more than one VLD-C6S Module is installed in the system, repeat the procedure for each additional
VLD-C6S Module.
12. With the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 turned On, and the lamps lit, check the voltage at the lamp head(s).
If during the setup procedure the Lamp Setup Grant is set to False, i.e., the clear aspect is dropped, the
procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the system will hold the signals in that bank dark for
approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal operation.
Timers Setup
Entered Timer Values are stored in an EEPROM on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Backplane. During normal
operation, these stored values are used instead of the default timer values contained in the Application EPROM
on the CI or UCI-3 Module. If the stored timer values become corrupted, the VPM will use the application
default values and will attempt to re-write these default values to the backplane. This behavior occurs for vital
timers (VPM-2/VPM-2+) and both the vital and non-vital timers (VPM-3).
When a vital application is selected / loaded, the Vital Timer values are set to their application defined defaults
values. The Non-Vital Timers (VPM-3) retain the previous values if the values are within the application
defined range for an individual timer.
Figure 2-51, Timers Menu - VPM-2/VPM-2+

Figure 2-52, VPM-3 Timers menu (Vital and Non-Vital)
1. Using the CDU-1 and Figure 5-4 and 2-52 as a guide, select the TIMERS Menu.
2. Press the Down Button. The CDU-1 will display:
View Timer Statuses
3. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display:
Enter Timer Values (VPM-2) Set Vital Timers (VPM-3)
4. Press the Down Button. The first timer value (in seconds) will be displayed. Display will look similar to:
TMR1 = 542
5. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the timer value and prompt for a new value.
TMR1 = 542
New Time >
6. Use the Alphanumeric Buttons to enter the new timer value.
7. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message:
TMR1 = 520
Confirm *****>
8. To confirm the new value, enter the 1 to 5 digit number listed in the confirm message and press the Enter
Button.

Installation
Note: If an attempt is made to enter a timer value that is too short, the system will not accept the value and
it will not prompt for a valid timer value.
9. The new Timer value is now placed into system memory.
10. Repeat the procedure as necessary to setup the timers for the system.
Vital Configuration Setup
Entered Vital Configuration Settings are stored in an EEPROM on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Backplane. During
normal operation, these values are used instead of the default Vital Configuration Settings stored in Application
EPROM on the CI or UCI-3 Module. If the Vital Configuration Settings stored on the Backplane become
corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the application default values and attempt to re-write the Vital
Configuration Settings to EEPROM on the Backplane. If the Application EPROM is replaced, the Vital
Configuration Setting must be checked against those in the Application Circuit Plan. The Vital Configuration
Settings are set to the application default value when a vital application is selected / loaded.
There are a total of 32 vital configuration settings that can be configured for application specific operations.
Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for instructions on using the CDU-1 to setup the Vital Configuration and
Volume Two, Chapter 6 for the Web GUI.
Figure 2-53, Vital Configuration Menu.

1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 2-53 as a guide, select the VITAL CONFIGURATION Menu.
2. Press the Down Button. The CDU-1 will display:
View Configuration
3. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display:
Enter Configuration
4. Press the Down Button. The status for the first vital configuration setting will be displayed. Display will
look similar to:
VCS_1 = FALSE*
5. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display the current vital configuration setting and prompt for a
new value.
VCS_1 = FALSE
89 to change > FALSE
6. Use the Up or Down Arrow Buttons to toggle to the setting.
7. Press the Enter Button. The CDU-1 will display a confirm message:
VCS_1 = TRUE
Confirm *****>
8. To confirm the new value, enter the 1 to 5 digit number listed in the confirm message and press the Enter
Button.
9. Repeat the procedure as necessary to setup the Vital Configuration Setting for the system.
Setting Battery Alarm Values
The top level Battery Alarm menu is available if one or more VTI-2S modules are installed in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis. The High and Low Battery Alarm Values set alarm limits for the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery. Battery alarm thresholds for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery and
up to two auxiliary batteries can be set in the Ground Fault Detector submenu if a GFD-1 module is installed.
Figure 2-54, Battery Alarms Menu.
1. Using the CDU-1 and Figures 5-4 and 2-54 as a guide, select the BATTERY ALARM Menu.
2. Press the Down Arrow Key. The CDU-1 will display the Low Battery Alarm value.

Installation
3. To change the Low Battery Alarm value, press the ENTER key and enter the new Low Battery Alarm
value.
4. Press the Right Arrow Button. The CDU-1 will display the High Battery Alarm value.
5. To change the High Battery Alarm value, press the Enter Button and enter the new High Battery Alarm
value.
Date/Time
Date/Time
Date/Time * Date/Time * Date/Time * Date/Time Date/Time *

Time= HH:MM:SS Date= MM-DD-YY Time Zone= 6 Config Daylit Saving Request Time Update
Time= HH:MM:SS Date= MM-DD-YY Time Zone= 6 Request Time Update

Set HHMMSS > Set MMDDYY > to change ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO
Date/Time * Config DST * Config DST * Config DST *

Sync= Code Line DST End= mo:MM wk:W DST = Enabled DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W
Sync= Code Line DST End= mo:MM wk:W DST= Enabled DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W
to change to change to change to change
373-0745
Figure 2-55, Date/Time Configuration Menu
The Date/Time Menu allows access to menus for display and modification date and time options.
Display Date/Time
Up Go to System Configuration
Down Go to Date/Time *
Time= HH:MM:SS
Left Go to Log Management
Right Go to Diagnostic Port

Time
The Time Menu provides the ability to display and set the current time.
Display Date/Time *
Time= HH:MM:SS
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time.

Once the Time has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Left Go to Date/Time *
Sync= Code Line
Right Go to Date/Time *
Date= HH:MM:SS
Date
The Date Menu provides the ability to display and set the current date.
Display Date/Time *
Date= HH:MM:SS
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Date.

Once the Date has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Time= HH:MM:SS
Time Zone= 6

Installation
Time Zone
The Time Zone Menu provides the ability to display and set the local time zone reference used for adjusting
incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Time zone
5 represents Eastern Standard Time (EST) and 8 represents Pacific Standard Time (PST)
Display Date/Time *
Time Zone= 6
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time

Zone. Use the UP and DOWN keys to
select the Time Zone. Once the Time
Zone has been set, press the ENTER
key.
Date= HH:MM:SS
Config Daylit Saving

The Config Daylit Saving Menu provides the ability to display and set parameters associated with Daylight
Savings Time (DST). DST is used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT) based ATCS time messages.
Display Date/Time *
Up Go to Date/Time
Down Go to Config DST *

DST = Enabled
Time Zone= 6
Request Time Update

DST
The DST Menu provides the ability to display and set whether Daylight Savings Time is locally enabled.
Display Config DST *

DST = Enabled
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set DST. Use

the UP and DOWN keys to select DST.
Once DST has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Left Go to Config DST *

DST End= mo:MM wk:W
Right Go to Config DST *

DST Strt= mo:MM wk:W
DST Strt
The DST Strt Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST starts. For years prior to 2007, this
is the first week of April. For 2007 and later, this is the second week of March. Any week (first (1), second
(2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the start of DST.

Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the DST

start week. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the DST start week.
Once the DST start week has been set,
press the ENTER key.

DST = Enabled

DST End= mo:MM wk:W

Installation
DST End
The DST End Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST ends. For years prior to 2007, this
is the last week of October. For 2007 and later, this is the first week of November. Any week (first (1), second
(2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the end of DST.

DST End= mo:MM wk:W
Up Go to Date/Time

end week. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the DST end week.
Once the DST end week has been set,


DST = Enabled
Request Time Update

The Request Time Update Menu provides the ability to transmit a time update request message over an ATCS
office port.
Display Date/Time *
Request Time Update
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to transmit an

ATCS request time update message.
Press ENTER key a second time to
confirm the transmission or the
CANCEL key to abort.
Sync= Code Line

Sync
This menu provides the ability to display the current external time reference synchronization option. When this
option is not set to none, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will automatically update its local time whenever the time
reference received on the selected sync source differs from ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ local time by 2 or more
seconds. Available sync sources include Code Line, Vital Remote, and HAWK. The Code Line option uses
time update messages received from the Office Port for the external time reference and requires the selection
of an Office Protocol that supports this feature (e.g.GENISYS® or ATCS). The Vital Remote option receives
its external reference through time update messages received over its vital communication interface. The
HAWK option receives its external reference through message time stamps received from the HAWK recorder.
Display< Date/Time
Sync = none
Up Go to Date/Time
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the external sync
source.
Left Go to Date Menu
Right Go to Time Menu
Sync Set
This menu provides the ability to set the current external time reference synchronization option.
Display< Sync = none

[\ to change
Up Select next Sync option
Down Select next Sync option Press the ENTER key to set the currently
displayed sync source as the external sync
source and return to Sync Menu.
Left Go to Date Menu
Right Go to Time Menu

Installation
Diagnostic Port
Figure 2-56, Diagnostic Port Menu.
Diagnostic port configuration involves the setup of the following communication configuration parameters:
• Connector (this changes the diagnostic’s physical port)

• BAUD rate (19200 default)
• Parity (even default)
• Data bits (8 default)
• Stop bits (1 default)
• Hardware flow control (none default)
While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU
menu shown in Figure 2-56 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this
manual). Available settings for these parameters are:
• Connector: VPM, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA.

• BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200
• Parity: odd, even, none
• Data bits 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits
• Stop bits: 1, 1.5, or 2 data bits
• Hardware flow control: none

Ethernet Port
Figure 2-57, CDU – Ethernet Confg
Ethernet port configuration involves setting the following parameters:
• IP Address for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2

• Subnet Mask settings for Ethernet 1 and Ethernet 2
• Default Gateway address
• HTTP TCP Port Number for Web GUI access
• Trusted Sources Enabled / Disabled
• Trusted Source parameters (Trusted IP Network Address / Netmask)
• Telnet Enable/Disable
• Telnet Username and Password
• Telnet Port Number
• Telnet Trusted Source Parameters (Enable, Trusted IP Network Address / Netmask)
• Routing Table Entries
• Web GUI Inactivity Time-out

Installation
Set Via
Parameter Factory Default CDU GUI
Ethernet 1 IP Address: 192.168.0.11 3 3
Ethernet 1 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 3 3
Ethernet 1 DHCP Server Enabled 3
Ethernet 1 DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.0.12 3
Ethernet 1 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.0.44 3
Ethernet 1 DHCP Server Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 3
Ethernet 2 IP Address: 192.168.1.12 3 3
Ethernet 2 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 3 3
Ethernet 2 DHCP Server Enabled 3
Ethernet 2 DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.1.13 3
Ethernet 2 DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.1.45 3
Ethernet 2 DHCP Server Default Gateway 192.168.1.12 3
Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0 (No Default Gateway) 3 3
Trusted Source / Network 1 Disabled, IP = 0.0.0.0, Netmask = 0.0.0.0 3 3
Trusted Source / Network 2 Disabled, IP = 0.0.0.0, Netmask = 0.0.0.0 3 3
Telnet Port 1 Disabled 3 3
Telnet Port 2 Disabled 3 3
Telnet Username admin 3
Telnet Password telnet 3
Telnet TCP Port 23 3 3
Telnet Trusted Source 1 Disabled, IP=0.0.0.0, Netmask=0.0.0.0 3 3
Telnet Trusted Source 2 Disabled, IP=0.0.0.0, Netmask=0.0.0.0 3 3
Routing Table Entries No Route Entries 3
Web GUI Inactivity Time-out 60 minutes 3

Serial Office Port
Figure 2-58, Serial Office Port Menu.
Serial office port configuration involves the selection of the office protocol, the setup of protocol dependent
communication parameters (e.g., BAUD rate, parity, stop bits), and the setup of protocol dependent
operational parameters. The first step is the selection of the office protocol. The office protocol defaults to
GENISYS® but can also be configured to ATCS, UCE, SCS-128, or BCS through the CDU menu shown
in Figure 2-58. Additional office port configuration parameters are protocol dependent and covered
separately in the following sections.
UCE Office Port
The UCE / SCS-128 office port provides the following communication configuration parameters:

• Parity (even default)
While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the
CDU menu shown in Figure 2-59 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of
this manual). Available settings for these parameters are:
• BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits
Figure 2-59, UCE Menu

Installation
SCS128 Office Port
The UCE / SCS-128 office port provides the following communication configuration parameters:
• BAUD rate (19200 default) Parity (even default)

• Unit Address (1 default)
While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the
CDU menu shown in Figure 2-60 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of
this manual). Available settings for these parameters are:
• BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8 data bits
• Unit Address: 0-127
Figure 2-60, SCS-128 Menu

GENISYS® Serial Office Port
The GENISYS® Serial office port provides the following communication configuration parameters:

• Parity (none default)
• Flow Control (Disabled default)
• Transmit delay (this is the office port’s RTS setup time before start of data transmission and its
default is 50 mS)
• Transmit cutoff (this is the office port’s RTS hold time after CTS goes inactive and its default is 20
mS)
• Unit address (this is ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ network address for the GENISYS® protocol and its default
is 1)
• Msg timeout (this is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure and its default
is 10 seconds)
• Secure poll (this allows or prevents responses to office poll messages sent in non-secure format to be
generated and its default is Allow Non-secure Polls)
• Indication Delay (0 default)
• CTS Timeout (1 default)
While these defaults should be suitable for most applications, other values can be configured through the CDU
menu shown in Figure 2-57 (for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this
manual). Available settings for these parameters are:
• BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled
• Parity: Odd, Even or None
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, or 8
• Stop bits: 1,1.5, or 2
• Flow Control: (Enabled, Disabled)
• Transmit delay: 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds
• Transmit cutoff: 0, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds
• Unit address: 1-255
• Msg timeout: 0-120 seconds
• Secure polls: No Secure Polls, Allow Secure Polls
• Indication Delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments
• CTS Timeout: 0-5 seconds in 0.1 second increments

Installation
The GENISYS® office port provides the following operational configuration parameters:
• Number of indications (this is the number of indication words reported to the office and its default is 4
bytes (32 total indications))
• Control latching (this determines the value for controls submitted to the application logic when they are
omitted in partial control update messages (the default enabled submits the last received value for the
control))
• Constant indication (this determines whether indication messages contain all indications or only those that
have changed since the last indication report. Its default is disabled (changes only))
The values for these operational parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-61
(for more information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). Available settings for
these parameters are:
• Number of indications: 1-125 bytes (8-1000 total indications)

• Control latching: enabled, disabled
• Constant indication: enabled, disabled
Figure 2-61, GENISYS® Serial Office Protocol Configuration Menu (Serial Interface)
BCS Serial Office Port
The BCS Serial office port provides the following communication configuration parameters:

• Parity (Even default)
• Flow Control (Enabled default)
• Unit address (this is ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ network address for the BCS protocol and its default is 1)
• Msg timeout (this is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure and its default
is 10 seconds)
• Indication Delay (0 default)
• CTS Timeout (1 default)

Custom values for an application can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 2-62
Available settings for these parameters are:
• BAUD rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or Disabled

• Parity: Odd, Even or None
• Stop bits: 1,1.5, or 2
• Flow Control: Disabled or Enabled (Enabled is wait for CTS)
• Indications Words 1-16 (8 to 128 indication statuses)
• Unit address: 1- 127
• Msg Timeout: 0-120 seconds
• Indication Delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments
• CTS Timeout: 0-5 seconds in 0.1 second increments
• RxGap Time 1-35 in .5 ms increments
• IndGap Time 1- 35 in .5 ms increments
Figure 2-62, BCS Office Port Configuration Menu

Installation
GENISYS® Ethernet Office
The GENISYS® Ethernet office interface provides the following communication configuration parameters
whose values and meaning are same as for the GENISYS® Serial Office Port:
• Unit Address - The ElectroLogIXS/EC5’ GENISYS® protocol network address.

• Message Timeout – The amount of inactivity allowed before a Link Failure is declared. (0 to120 seconds,
default 10 seconds)
• Secure Poll (Enabled / Disabled, default Disabled)
• Indication Delay (0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments, default 0 seconds)
In addition to the above GENISYS® parameters, the following IP / UDP parameters are provided specific to
the GENISYS® Ethernet Office interface:
• Port # - The UDP Port Number used to identify GENISYS® messages on the Ethernet interface.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses this Port Number for both received and transmitted GENISYS® messages. The
default value is 7169.
• Trusted Source 1 and 2 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 provides up to two Trusted Sources for received
GENISYS® messages. To use one or both Trusted Sources, enable the Trusted Source and provide IP
address and Netmask settings. When enabled, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds to GENISYS®
messages from IP addresses that pass the Trusted Source filter(s). If both Trusted Sources are disabled,
the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to any valid GENISYS® message addressed to the system (IP Address
and Port Number) with the correct GENISYS® address (Unit Address). The default setting is both Trusted
Sources disabled.
The GENISYS® Ethernet office interface provides the following operational configuration parameters whose
values and meaning are same as for the GENISYS® Serial Office Port:
• Number of Indications
• Control Latching
• Constant Indication
Figure 2-63, GENISYS® Ethernet Office

Local Control Panel
To simplify Local Control Panel configuration, the Local Control Panel’s communications settings are pre-
configured for proper operation with all supported Local Control Panels. The Local Control Panel’s only
setup parameter is enabling of the Local Control Panel’s operation. As shown in Figure 2-64, the Local
Control Panel can be enabled or disabled through the CDU (for more information on CDU operation see the
CDU menu section of this manual). By default, the Local Control Panel is enabled.
Figure 2-64, Local Control Configuration Menu

Installation
HAWK Interface
To simplify HAWK Interface configuration, the HAWK Interface’s communications settings are pre-
configured for proper operation with the HAWK recorder. The HAWK Interface’s only setup parameter is
the HAWK Serial Number, which must be configured in both the HAWK recorder and ElectroLogIXS/EC5
before event recording across the HAWK serial interface can occur. This serial number may contain any
combination of up to twenty alphabetic, numeric, and special characters. Entering a space terminates the
serial number. As shown in Figure 2-65, the HAWK Interface can be set through the CDU (for more
information on CDU operation see the CDU menu section of this manual). By default, the HAWK Serial
Number is ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Figure 2-65, HAWK Interface Configuration Menu

Vital Communication Setup
Message Authentication Code (MAC) Keys
The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/VPM-3 supports an optional MAC protection for each communication link. Each
vital remote link has an associated Link Key that is used to generate the MAC for messages going in both
directions on that link. The MAC is a function of the remote Link Key and the vital data within the message.
It provides a high level of assurance that a message has not been corrupted either accidentally or intentionally
and that the message was actually sent by the expected remote system.
The application designer chooses the Link Keys when the application is being created. The complete set of 32
Link Keys is stored in a Key Vault file. This encrypted file is separate from the application EPROM. It is
uploaded through either the system diagnostic port or the Web GUI (Chapter 2, Vital General Communication
Setup), and it is stored in encrypted form in non-volatile memory on the system backplane.
The de-encryption key for the Key Vault file is called the Site Specific Key. The Site Specific Key is stored
in the application EPROM, and is chosen by the application designer when the application is created.
The layering and separation of keys allows for more flexible management of key updates. For instance, if a
Link Key needs to be changed, a new Key Vault can be generated that contains the new Link Key and that is
encrypted with the same Site Specific Key as the old Key Vault File. The new Key Vault can then be uploaded
to the system and put into service without requiring a change to the application. In another example, if a Site
Specific Key needs to be changed, a new application containing the new Site Specific Key and a new Key Vault
file encrypted with the new Site Specific Key but containing the old Link Keys can be generated and installed
on the affected system without requiring changes on any connected remote systems.
The ElectroLogIXS or EC5/VPM-3 supports an in-service Link Key switchover procedure based on allowing
two sets of Link Keys to be used for a short switching period. This allows for coordination of Link Key changes
on each link and the avoidance of taking links down as a result of Link Key changes.

Installation
Key Vault Update Procedure
• Load a new MAC Vault file/keys through either the system diagnostic port or the Web GUI on each
system.
• Activate the new keys by enabling the MAC Key Switchover on each system. This allows the systems
to accept incoming messages containing MACs generated with the Link Keys from either the new or
the pre-existing Key Vault. This also starts the MMST timer.
• In the next phase, each link transitions to sending and accepting received messages that contain MACs
generated only with the new Link Key for that link. A link can be switched to sending messages using
the new Link Key in one of two ways:
• Manually, set the option for MAC ‘Use New Link Key’ to ‘Yes’ via the CDU or Web GUI,
for a given remote link.
• Automatically, when a message is received on that link that contains a MAC generated with
the new Link Key.
Once a message is received on a link that contains a MAC generated with the new Link Key, messages
containing MACs generated with the pre-existing Link Key will no longer be accepted on that link.
• When the MMST expires, received messages on all links will only be accepted if they contain a MAC
generated with the new Link Keys, and all outgoing messages on all links will be sent with MACs
generated with the new Link Keys.
Vital General Communication Setup
The Vital General Communication setup provides for loading the MAC Key Vault file into the ElectroLogIXS
or EC5/VPM-3 system. The MAC Key Vault file is uploaded through either the system diagnostic port (Volume
Two, Chapter 7, Remote Config MAC) or the Web GUI (Volume Two, Figure 6-77, Configuration - General
Remote).
The Vital General Communication setup interface also provides the following configuration parameters, which
can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port Menu - Serial Port, Figure 5-61, Vital
Remote Port Menu - Ethernet Port) or the Web GUI (Volume Two, Figure 6-77, Configuration - General
Remote):
• MAC Switchover Time (MMST or Maximum MAC Switchover Time). This is the maximum amount
of time that messages will be accepted with MACs generated from either the new or the pre-existing
MAC keys once MAC key switchover is enabled. Acceptable values range from 1 second to 2 hours.
• Switchover Enable. Once a new MAC Key Vault is loaded, switchover can be enabled. This starts
the switchover timer that runs for ‘MAC Switchover Time’ period of time. This allows the system
to accept incoming vital remote messages containing MACs generated with the Link Keys from either
the newly loaded or the pre-existing Key Vault.
• Switchover Restart. This restarts the switchover timer. This is provided if switchover has been
enabled.
• Switchover Cancel. This stops the switchover in progress. This is provided if switchover has been
enabled.
• Delete loaded Key Vault. This deletes the Key Vault that was last loaded. This is provided if a new
MAC Key Vault has been loaded and switchover is not enabled.
Vital Serial Communication Setup
The Vital Serial Communication Setup involves setting the following parameters for each serial port:
• Local Address – the vital remote local address. Allowed values range from 0 to 63.
• Mode – the vital remote link mode. Allowed values are point-to-point, multi-drop slave, or multi-drop
master.

• Type – the vital remote port type. Allowed values are asynchronous, synchronous internal clock, or
synchronous external clock.
• Baud Rate – the vital remote port baud rate. Allowed values are 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, or 57600.
• Parity – the vital remote port parity. Allowed values are even parity, odd parity, or none.
• Stop Bits – the vital remote stop bits. Allowed values are 1, 1.5, or 2.
This setup also involves setting the following parameters for each of the attached remote:
• Address – the vital remote device address. Allowed values range from 0 to 63.
• Date Update enable/disable. If enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock
changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours.
• Poll Timeout – the poll timeout value. Allowed values range from 10 to 500mS.
• MAC enable/disable. If enabled, MAC is included in all outgoing vital remote messages.
• MAC Use New Link Key. This setting is provided when switchover is in progress. Allowed values
are ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. If user selects ‘Yes’, the MAC that is included in the outgoing vital remote
messages are based on the newly loaded Vault Keys.
The Vital Serial Communication Setup can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port
Menu - Serial Port) or the Web GUI (Figure 6-91, Configuration - Remote (Serial Port)).
Vital Ethernet Communication Setup
The IP addresses of all attached remotes must be designated for proper communication over the Ethernet port.
If the addresses are contained in the application program, they may be set via the “Set Defaults” menu option.
Otherwise, the IP address of each remote must be entered.
This Vital Ethernet Communication Setup involves setting the following parameters for each of the attached
remote:
• IP Address – IP address of the attached remote.

• IP Port – IP port number of the attached remote.
• Date Update enable/disable. If enabled, a date/time update message is sent when the system clock
changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours.
• MAC enable/disable. If enabled, MAC is included in all outgoing vital remote messages.
• MAC Use New Link Key – This setting is provided when switchover is in progress. Allowed values
are ‘Yes’ or ‘No’. If user selects ‘Yes’, the MAC that is included in the outgoing vital remote
messages are based on the newly loaded Vault Keys.
The Vital Ethernet Communication Setup can be configured through the CDU (Figure 5-61, Vital Remote Port
Menu - Ethernet Port) or the Web GUI (Figure 6-85, Configuration - Remote (Ethernet)).
Note: Ferrites have been provided and must be applied to Ethernet cables in all installations.

Installation
Ground Fault Detector Setup

The Ground Fault Detector function allows the user to specify the requirements for a ground fault alarm on each
battery monitored. Specifically, the user can set:
• ground fault threshold - the leakage resistance value between either battery pole (+ or -) and earth
ground below which is considered a ground fault
• ground fault time - the amount of time that the ground fault condition must be present before alarming
the presence of a ground fault
The ElectroLogIXS system will monitor the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery for ground faults whenever a GFD-1
module is present. The GFD-1 front panel connector provides ElectroLogIXS the ability to monitor two
additional batteries for ground faults, as well as the input for the earth ground reference.
Important: The earth ground connection to the GFD module must be removed prior to maintenance
testing for grounds. If the earth ground connection is not removed, ground testing will likely
fail.
Battery Connections
1. The ElectroLogIXS chassis battery is monitored for ground faults when a GFD-1 module is installed in
ElectroLogIXS slot 10. The earth ground reference should be connected to pin 7 of the GFD-1 front panel
connector (refer to Figures 1-29 and 1-30). Wire size should be between 14 AWG and 18 AWG. The
length of the earth ground wire should be kept as short as practical with a goal of less than 10 feet.
2. Two additional batteries, labeled B2 and B3 on the GFD-1 fault LEDs and input connector, can also be
monitored for ground faults if connected. B2 connections for + and - poles go to GFD-1 connector pins
1 and 2 respectively. B3 + and - connects similarly to pins 4 and 5, respectively. Wire gauge and length
for the B2 and B3 connections to the GFD-1 module should follow the recommendations for the earth
ground wire given above.
Ground Fault Monitoring Setup
1. Refer to the Ground Fault Detector CDU-1 menus in Chapter 5 - CDU Program as a guide through this
setup process. Find the GROUND FAULT DETECT menu on the top level CDU-1 menu structure.
2. Press the Down Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display:
B1: Battery *
3. The default name for the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery is “Battery 1" but may be changed by selecting
the Enter button from this page. If done, this action will produce the display:
Battery 1
Name > __
4. A name consisting of upper and lower case letters, numbers, and spaces may be entered for the battery
using the CDU-1 keypad. The keypad keys, with the exception of numbers 1 and 0, have letters assigned
to them similar to a telephone keypad. The order in which the characters appear on the display when the
key is repeatedly pressed are uppercase letters (in alphabetical order), lowercase letters (in alphabetical
order), and then the number of that key. For example, repeated selection of the “2" key would produce the
following display of characters: A, B, C, a, b, c, 2, A, B, etc. The scroll right key moves to the next
character in the name. The enter the name “Chassis” for battery B1 the following sequence of keystrokes
would be made from the B1 name menu.

Keypad Key Number of Sequence of Displayed Final Displayed

Pressed Times Pressed Characters Character
2 3 A-B-C C
| 1 N/A N/A
4 5 G-H-I-g-h h
| 1 N/A N/A
2 4 A-B-C-a a
| 1 N/A N/A
7 8 P-Q-R-S-p-q-r-s s
| 1 N/A N/A
| 1 N/A N/A
4 6 G-H-I-g-h-i i
| 1 N/A N/A
5. Press the Enter key when the name has been entered as desired. This will return to the B1 menu shown in
step 2 above, with “Battery 1" replaced by the new name just entered. Pressing the Enter key following
the key sequence in the table above would, for example, return to the B1 battery menu showing:
B1: Chassis
Naming the battery sources B1, B2, and B3 is purely optional. If no action is taken to name the batteries,
the default names will be Battery 1, Battery 2, and Battery 3.
6. Press the Down Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display one of three items depending on the status of ground
fault for battery B1. The first possibility is that no ground fault is present for this battery source, for which
the display will read:
B1: No Fault
The presence of a ground fault on battery B1 will display either:

B1+: Ground Fault
Press ENTER to Clear
or
B1-:Ground Fault
Press ENTER to Clear
dependent upon which pole, + or -, the fault was detected. If the fault a alarm is present, press the ENTER
key to clear the fault alarm from the display.
7. Press the Right Arrow key. The CDU-1 will display:
Battery 1 or <User defined name>

Cal. Volts = 12.5 V* Cal. Volts = 12.5 V*

Installation
8. Press the ENTER key if the calibrated voltage shown for Battery is not the nominal voltage for the battery
in question. The CDU-1 menu will display:
B1 Voltage = 12.5 V
New Voltage > .
Use the numeric keypad to enter the nominal battery voltage for this source, and then the ENTER key to
save the new value. The calibrated voltage is used during the Ground Fault Threshold determination menu
to provide the user with an estimate of leakage current corresponding to the selectable values of leakage
resistance.
Grnd Fault Threshold

R = 10 KΩ (1.25 mA)*
10. The ground fault threshold menu allows setting the threshold for fault declaration in terms of leakage
resistance between a battery pole and earth ground. The threshold is selectable in the range of 2 KΩ to 20
KΩ in 2 KΩ steps. Select the ENTER key to scroll through the threshold values and select the desired
settings. The CDU-1 will display:
R = 10 KΩ (1.25 mA)
89 to change
The up and down arrow keys will scroll through the available threshold values in 2 KΩ steps. The estimate
of equivalent leakage current, in milliamps, for the displayed leakage resistance value is shown in
parentheses to the right of the resistance threshold. This estimate of current corresponds to the calibrated
battery voltage divided by the leakage resistance. For example, the calibrated voltage value of 12.5 V and
leakage resistance threshold of 10 KΩ leads to an equivalent leakage current between battery pole and
earth ground of
Ground Fault Leakage Current Estimate (mA) =
Calibrated Source Voltage (V)

Ground Leakage Resistance (KΩ)
12.5 V
10 KΩ
= 1.25 mA
The equivalent leakage current is presented to aid those who desire to set a threshold based on an amount
of current flow to earth ground. Select the ENTER key with the desired threshold is displayed to select
that value. This will return to the Grnd Fault Threshold menu seen in Step 9 above with the threshold
displayed.
Ground Fault Time

Time = 5 sec*

12. The ground fault time is the length of time a ground fault (leakage resistance estimate below the Ground
Fault Threshold) must be continuously present before a ground fault alarm is declared. The user can select
Ground Fault Time in 1-second increments between 5 seconds and 30 seconds. Selecting the ENTER key
from the Ground Fault Time menu will display:
Fault Time = 5 sec

New Time >
Use either the numeric keypad to enter a number between 5 and 30, inclusive, or the up/down arrows to
select the desired Ground Fault Time. Press the ENTER key to same the selected value and return to the
Ground Fault Time menu.
Low Battery Alarm

Voltage = 8.0V*
14. Press the ENTER button to proceed to the menu that allows changing the Low Battery Alarm value, if
desired. The CDU-1 will display:
Low Alarm = 8.0 V

New Voltage >
Use the numeric keypad to enter a new low battery alarm threshold. The minimum allowed value is 8.0
V. Press the ENTER key to save the new threshold and return to the Low Battery Alarm menu.
High Battery Alarm
Voltage - 16.5*
16. Press the ENTER key to proceed to the menu that allows changing the High Battery Alarm value, in
desired. The CDU-1 will display:
High Alarm = 16.5 V
New Voltage >
Use the numeric keypad to enter a new high battery alarm threshold. The maximum allowed value is 16.5
V. Press the ENTER key to save the new threshold and return to the High Battery Alarm menu. Select
the Up Arrow button to return to the B1: Battery 1 menu.
Note: The High and Low battery alarms just presented are for Battery 1, the ElectroLogIXS Chassis
battery, since they are on submenus of the B1: battery 1 menu. High and Low Battery
alarms can be independently set for Battery 2 and Battery 3, the two additional batteries
can be monitored by the GFD-1 module, through their submenus.
17. This concludes the setup of the GFD-1 module for monitoring the ElectroLogIXS chassis battery (B1).
The two external batteries B2 and B3, if connected , are setup in a like manner through their submenus.
18. The B2 and B3 menus are selectable by pressing the Right Arrow key from the B1: Battery 1 menu. All
submenus to B2 and B3 are identical to those of B1 except for the battery name change. The B2 and B3
menus will show “Not Connected” if no voltage is detected on their inputs, i.e., if no external batteries have
been applied to the GFD-1 front panel connector.

Maintenance
Chapter 3 – Maintenance
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Visual Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Maintenance Procedures Using the CDU or Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Track Circuit Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Lamp Voltage Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Setting Battery Alarm Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Selecting Office Port Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Removing Power From ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Backplane Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
ElectroLogIXS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Personality Module Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Supply Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Central Power Supply Output Voltage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
CDU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
CDU-1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
System Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
I/O Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
I/O Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Chassis Information Module Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Chassis Information Module Application EPROM Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Installation* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Removal* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Track Inductor Panel Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Track Inductor Panel Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
EC5 Special Maintenance Activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Backplane Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23


Maintenance
Chapter 3 – Maintenance
Introduction
This chapter contains maintenance procedures for preforming maintenance activities for the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system.
WARNING After performing any maintenance or system enhancements on the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect
any errors related to any adjustments made to the system. The tests
should be performed before the unit is returned to service and in
accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory
agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital parameter
values. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit
after routine or preventive maintenance could result in death or
serious injury.

proper values are set for each vital parameter, vital timer, vital
configuration setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability setting,
PTC debounce time, PTC WIU address, and vital remote parameter in
their ElectroLogIXS/EC5 units. Incorrect settings may result in death
or serious injury.
Visual Inspection
1. Inspect TIP-2 (Track Inductor Panel) for burnt or damaged components. Replace damaged components
as necessary.
2. Inspect TIP-2 wiring for cut, nicked, or bare wires. Repair as necessary.
3. Inspect ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis and modules for burnt or damaged components.
4. Inspect ElectroLogIXS/EC5 wiring for cut nicked, or bare wires. Repair as necessary.

Maintenance Procedures Using the CDU or Web GUI

When entering vital information (track setup parameters, vital configuration settings, etc.) on the CDU-1,
the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 prompts the user for a confirmation number. The confirmation number is a 1 to 5
digit number that is entered to confirm that the new value matches the intended value. If the new value
does not match the intended value, press the CANCEL Button and re-enter the value. If the new value is
correct, press the ENTER Button.
WARNING When entering information on the CDU-1 or the Web GUI that
requires confirmation verify that the new value redisplayed by the
system matches the intended value. Confirmation of a incorrect value
could result in a less restrictive condition which could cause death or
serious injury.
After submitting vital information via the Web GUI, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 prompts the user to confirm
the values entered to ensure that the new value matches the intended value. If the new value does not match
the intended value, select "Cancel" and re-enter the value(s). If the new value is correct, press "Confirm".
Track Circuit Adjustment
Important: To provide reliable operation, GETSGS recommends routine inspection of track circuit
conditions.
Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for complete details on Track Circuit adjustment.
WARNING Improper adjustments or maintenance to track circuits could result in

death or serious injury.
After any track circuit adjustment, standard railroad, FRA, and/or other
regulatory agency procedures should be performed to test the
shunting sensitivity of the track with a 0.06 ohm shunt (see FRA
236.56).
Shunting sensitivity tests should be performed under optimum ballast

conditions. If optimum ballast conditions do not exist, a follow-up test
should be performed to insure proper shunting sensitivity of the track
with a 0.06 ohm shunt during optimum ballast conditions.
Adjustments to the track circuit settings are stored in the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration log. GETSGS recommends that a
log be kept including the condition of the ballast when adjustments are
made to the track circuit.


Maintenance
Lamp Voltage Setup
Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for complete details on Manual and Automatic Lamp Voltage Setup for
the VLD-C6S.
Lamp Test Mode
The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to apply an output to a selected lamp for
troubleshooting purposes. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for details of the Lamp Test Mode.
The user is able to select the Lamp Test Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to enter the
Lamp Test Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp
Setup Grant status.
If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the
user that access is denied. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never
written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant (VLD-C6S) or Lamp Grant Bank 1 (2) (VLD-R16S) status to go
True.
If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is granted and the user confirms entry, the system sets the input
status Lamp Normal Mode to False to indicate that the Lamp Test Mode is entered. The system displays the
lamp outputs by their status names with the current on/off state of each output. The user may select which
lamp output to perform the Lamp Test on.
When the system exits the Lamp Test Mode, it takes about 30 seconds to display valid aspects.
Setting Battery Alarm Values
The Battery Alarm Values are set using the CDU-1 and scrolling through the available menu options. Refer
to Chapter 2 - Installation for setup.
Selecting Office Port Protocol
The Office Port Protocol is set using the CDU-1 and scrolling through the available menu options.
Refer to Chapter 2 - Installation for procedures to set Office Port Protocol.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Procedures

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power ON
1. Verify all modules are securely installed in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis
3. Verify system powers up and starts self test.
Removing Power From ElectroLogIXS/EC5
1. Place the Power Switch to the OFF position.
2. Disconnect the supply battery from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit.

Backplane Fuse Replacement
1. Place Power Switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove blown fuse.
3. Replace fuse with suitable replacement.
4. Place Power Switch to the ON position.
5. Verify proper operation of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system based on the current application.
ElectroLogIXS
The backplane fuses are standard automotive style fuses that can be purchased at any automotive supply
store. Refer to Table 3-6 for fuse value and GETSGS part number.
Table 3-6. Backplane Fuse Chart
Fuse Circuit Protected GETSGS Part Number Value

B Battery Power to Chassis 010164-003 25 Amp
CPS CPS 5V Output 010164-001 15 Amp
NSM/GFD/RMM 5V for NSM/GFD/RMM 010164-000 3 Amp

Modules
EC5
Each fuse location corresponds to an I/O module slot in the chassis. For example, fuse PS is for the CPS-1,
fuse #1 is for I/O slot #1, fuse #2 is for I/O slot #2, etc. The backplane fuses are standard automotive style
fuses that can be purchased at any automotive supply store. Refer to Tables 3-7 or 3-8 for fuse location,
GETSGS Part Number, and fuse value.
Table 3-7. BP-1 Fuse Chart
Fuse Location GETSGS Part Number Value

PS Central Power Supply 010101-003 7.5 Amp
1 I/O Slot 1 010101-005 15 Amp
2 I/O Slot 2 010101-006 20 Amp

3 I/O Slot 3 010101-006 20 Amp
4 I/O Slot 4 010101-000 3 Amp
Table 3-8. BP-2 Fuse Chart
Fuse Location GETSGS Part Number Value

PS Central Power Supply 010101-003 7.5 Amp
1 I/O Slot 1 010101-005 15 Amp
2 I/O Slot 2 010101-000 3 Amp

3 I/O Slot 3 010101-000 3 Amp
4 I/O Slot 4 010101-000 3 Amp

Maintenance
Personality Module Fuse Replacement
The green LED on each personality module indicates the status of the personality module fuse. If the LED
is lit, the fuse is good. The personality module fuses are standard automotive style fuses that can be
purchased at any automotive supply store. Refer to Table 3-9 for the fuse value and GETSGS part number.
Table 3-9. Personality Module Fuse Chart

Personality Module Type Part Number Value
VLD-C6S 010164-002 20 Amp
VTI-2S 010164-001 15 Amp
VIO-44S 010164-000 3 Amp
VIO-1010S 010164-000 3 Amp
CAB-16S 010164-000 3 Amp
VIO-86S 010164-004 4 Amp
VLD-R16S 010164-000 3 Amp
VLD-R16S 010164-005 30 Amp
VIO-44R 010164-000 3 Amp
1. Place Power Switch in the OFF position.
2. Remove blown fuse.
3. Replace fuse with a good fuse of the same value.
4. Return the Power Switch to the ON position.
5. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS system based on the current application.
Supply Battery Replacement
2. Disconnect the Positive (+) Battery lead from the B terminal.
3. Disconnect the Negative (-) Battery lead from the N terminal.
4. Replace supply battery with known good battery.
7. Place Power Switch to the ON position.
8. Verify proper operation of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system based on the current application.
Central Power Supply Output Voltage Check
1. Using a voltmeter, check the voltage between the 5V and COM test points on the backplane.
2. Verify the voltage is between +4.94 and +5.46 VDC. If voltage is not within tolerance, replace the CPS
Module.

CDU Installation
The CDU may be installed with power applied to the system.

Follow the installation illustrations to install the CDU-1.
Note: ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis shown. The 1-Slot and 4-Slot

Chassis use the same principal except the CDU-1 may be
mounted on a bracket.
1. Connect data interface cable to the VPM Module.
2. Hook top of CDU-1 to clip on ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
6. Store the excess cable between the VPM and the CPS Modules.
4. Rotate bottom of CDU-1 toward ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
5. Insure bottom of CDU-1 is secured to the CPS and VPM

latches.
6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as

detailed in Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide.
CDU-1 Removal
The CDU-1 module may be removed with power applied to the

system. Follow the removal illustrations to install the CDU-1.
1. To unfasten the CDU-1, lift the module and pull the bottom out
until free from the CPS and VPM latches; then, lower and
remove the CDU.
2. Slide CDU-1 away from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
3. Disconnect the data interface cable.

Maintenance
System Module Installation
This procedure is used to replace any of the system modules (CPS, VPM, GFD-1, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA,
CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA or CIO-PCA) located in the lower portion of the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due to module or software
upgrades.
CAUTION Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position on the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 when installing a VPM, GFD-1, or CIO module.
Failure to remove power from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage
the module.
2. Carefully slide the module into the correct module slot and verify connectors have securely mated.
Note: System logs (data log, configuration log, error log) are stored in non-volatile memory inside the
VPM Module. Prior to removing a VPM, print or download the system log files.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
373-PH20

3. Close the module latch by pushing it toward the module.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
4. Tighten the quarter-turn fastener by turning the screw in a clockwise direction.
5. Perform CDU Installation procedure as detailed in this section.
6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 -
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide.
ElectroLogIXS EC5

Maintenance
System Module Removal
This procedure is used to replace any of the system modules (CPS, VPM, GFD-1, CIO-1/CIO-1A, CIO-CLA,
CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-2AB, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA, or CIO-PCA) located in the lower portion of the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due to module
or software upgrades.
CAUTION Verify the Power Switch is in the OFF position on the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 when removing a VPM, GFD-1, or CIO module.
Failure to remove power from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage
the module.
1. When replacing a VPM, use the terminal program or the Web GUI to print the Data Logs or save them
to a file. For more information, refer to Print Data Logs in CDU Program chapter.
3. Perform CDU-1 Removal procedure as detailed in this chapter.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
4. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener by turning the screw in a counter clockwise direction.
5. Pull the module latch away from the module.

ElectroLogIXS EC5
6. Remove the System module from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
S
-44
VIO
6S
D-C
VL MP
1
1 LAMP 2
S NK
BANK 1 LAMP 3
D -C6 BA 1 LA
NK
VL
BA
1 1
MP MP
1 LAMP 2 2 LAMP 2
I-2S
NK
BANK 1 LAMP 3 NK
BANK 2 LAMP 3
BA 1 LA BA 2 LA
VT
NK NK
BA BA
1
MP
2 LAMP 2
NK
BANK 2 LAMP 3
BA 2 LA
NK
BA
373-PH21

Maintenance
I/O Module Installation
This procedure is used to replace an I/O module. Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O
modules should be replaced without power applied to the system. Refer to the description of each module
to determine if it can be replaced with power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before
removing or installing ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules that are not hot swappable.
1. Carefully side the module into the proper slot and verify connectors have securely mated.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
6S
D-C
VL K 1 LAAMMPP 12
6S
N
BANK 1 L MP 3
D-C
BA K 1 LA
N
VL K 1 LAMMPP 12
BA
P1
AM
2L P2
S NK AM
N A
BA NK 1 L M P 3
I-2
BANK 2 L MP 3
BA K 1 L A BA K 2 LA
VT
N N
BA BA
S
-44
P1
AM
2L P2
VIO
NK AM
BANK 2 L MP 3
BA K 2 LA
N
BA
373-PH23
2. Close the module latch pushing it toward the module.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
3. Tighten the quarter-turn fastener of the module being installed by turning the screw clockwise.

4. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as detailed in Chapter 8 -

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
I/O Module Removal
This procedure is used to replace a defective I/O module, or to replace an I/O module due to module or
software upgrades. Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O modules should be replaced
without power applied to the system. Refer to the description of each module to determine if it can be
replaced with power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules that are not hot swappable.
1. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before removing or installing ElectroLogIXS/EC5 modules
that are not hot swappable.
2. Loosen the quarter-turn fastener of the module to be removed by turning the screw counter clockwise.
ElectroLogIXS EC5

Maintenance
3. Pull the module latch away from the module.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
4. Remove the module from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis.
ElectroLogIXS EC5
6S
D-C
VL P1
LAMP 2
K1
6S BANK 1 LAMP 3
D-C
BANK 1 LAM
VL
BAN
P1 P1
LAMP 2 LAMP 2
S
K1 K2
TI-2
BANK 1 LAMP 3 BANK 2 LAMP 3
BANK 1 LAM BANK 2 LAM
V
BAN
S
BAN
-44
P1
LAMP 2
VIO
K2
BANK 2 LAMP 3
BANK 2 LAM
BAN
373-PH22

Chassis Information Module Installation and Removal
WARNING Before returning the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to service, verify the Vital

Configuration Settings, Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability
against the Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the Vital
Configuration Settings, Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability
could result in a falsely permissive aspect which could result in serious
injury or death. Always verify the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital
Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce
Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values when replacing the
Chassis Information Module, the PTC mapping rules, the PTC
configuration file or the equations.
CAUTION Verify the power switch is in the OFF position when installing or
removing the Chassis Information Module. Failure to remove power
from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 may damage the Chassis Information
Module.
Installation*
2. Install the CI or UCI-3 Module by matching the module guides with the
slots in the backplane assembly.
3. When the connector on the backplane assembly is seated against the

connector on the CI or UCI-3, the CI or UCI-3 is correctly installed.
4. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS system as detailed in

Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide CI or UCI-3 (Chassis
Information) Module section
Removal*
1. Before powering off and removing the CI or UCI-3 Module confirm all
Vital and Non-Vital PTC settings conform to the site plans. Obtain
the System Configuration settings as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 6
Web Graphical User Interface Configuration Main Menu - System Settings.
3. Locate the CI or UCI-3 Module.
4. Gently squeeze the side tabs on the CI Module.
5. Carefully remove the CI or UCI-3 Module by pulling it away from the

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Chassis.
Note: *EC5 shown, ElectroLogIXS procedures are the same but the
location is slightly different.
Maintenance
Chassis Information Module Application EPROM Installation and Removal
WARNING Anytime the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Application EPROM is replaced with

an Application EPROM containing different equation or configuration
information (i.e., the CRC differs from the previous EPROM),
adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors or failures
before returning the unit to service. Failure to adequately test the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after the Application EPROM has been
replaced could result in death or serious injury.
WARNING When replacing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Application EPROM with an

Application EPROM containing the same equation information (i.e.,
the CRC is the same as the previous EPROM), always check the
Application EPROM CRC using the Terminal Program to insure the
correct EPROM is being installed. Failure to verify that the correct
Application EPROM is being installed could result in death or serious
injury.

ESD components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual Part
11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could
Notice result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent,
when handling components.
Installation
1. Install EPROM inside CI or UCI-3 Module as shown.
Note: To open the CI or UCI-3 Module, press the GE logo on the main body
of the module while swinging the clear plastic cover upwards.
2. Make sure the notch in the EPROM faces the same direction as the
notch in the socket.
3. Make sure each pin lines up with the correct hole before inserting
the EPROM.
Note: Misalignment may cause one or more of the pins to bend and
prevent correct operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
4. If the EPROM has fewer pins than the socket allows, make sure
that EPROM is aligned as shown.
Note: When the system is powered-up, the Data Logs will be erased
by the VPM software as the information stored in the new
EPROM will not be compatible with the information
contained in the Data Logs.

5. With EPROM installed in the Chassis Information Module, close

Chassis Information Module Window and perform Chassis
Information Module Installation procedure as detailed in this
chapter.
6. Verify proper operation of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as

detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Retest Guide.
Perform Chassis Information Module Removal procedure as
detailed in this chapter.

ESD components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual ,
Part 11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could
Notice result in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent,
when handling components.
Removal
1. Using the terminal program, print the Data Logs or save them to a
file. For more information, refer to Print Data Logs in the
CDU Program or Terminal Program chapter.
2. Perform Chassis Information Module Removal procedure as
detailed in this chapter.
3. Locate EPROM inside the CI or UCI-3 Module.
Note: To open the CI or UCI-3 Module, press the GE logo on the main body
of the module while swinging the clear plastic cover upwards.
4. Remove the Chassis Information Module EPROM by lifting it

away from the connector.
VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Battery Replacement
The VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 contains an internal lithium battery for retaining

log information in the event of a power failure. If the CDU-1 displays a Recorder Battery Low Message.
Replace the VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module with a new VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module and return the old
VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3 Module to GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling for battery replacement.
For details on replacing the VPM-2/VPM-2+/VPM-3, refer to the System Module Removal and System
Module Installation procedures, detailed in this chapter.

Maintenance
Track Inductor Panel Component Replacement
Refer to Figure 3-13 for location of components on the TIP-2. Replace damaged components as necessary.
AAR TERMINALS AAR TERMINALS
INDUCTOR TSS-1 TSS-1 INDUCTOR
Figure 3-13, Track Inductor Panel Component Location.
Track Inductor Panel Fuse Replacement
Refer to Figure 3-14 for fuse locations. Refer to Table 3-10 when replacing fuses.
Table 3-10. TIP Fuse Chart
Fuse Designation Manufacturer Value Quantity GETSGS Part

Number
Cartridge (FLNR9) Littelfuse 9 Amp (thermal slo-blow) 2 141-005103-032
Automobile Style (257010) Littelfuse 10 Amp 2 010101-004
Figure 3-14, Track Inductor Panel Component Location Diagram.

EC5 Special Maintenance Activities
Backplane Replacement Procedure
This procedure is used to replace a Backplane that has been found to be defective, or is being replaced due
to system upgrades.
1. Place the Power Switch to the OFF position.
2. Remove the Positive (+) Battery lead to the B terminal. AAR1 AAR2
CIO-2
B N
3. Remove the Negative (-) Battery lead to the N terminal.
5V
4. Remove the CDU-1. Refer to CDU-1 Removal
COM
Procedure in this section, if necessary.
PS 1 2 3 4
7.5
20
20
5. Disconnect all I/O Module connectors.
AUXILIARY I/O VLD-C6S

(SLOT 4) (SLOT 3)
AUX
I/O 1+ I/O 5+ B1L1 NV101
I/O 1- I/O 5- B1L2 NV102
B1L3 NV103
I/O 2+ I/O 6+ NV104
I/O 2- I/O 6- COM1
I/O 3+ I/O 7+ B2L1

I/O 3- I/O 7- B2L2
B2L3
I/O 4+ I/O 8+
I/O 4- I/O 8- COM2
4A 4B 3A
VTI-2S VLD-C6S
(SLOT 1) (SLOT 2)
CAB1+ B1L1 NV101

CAB1- B1L2 NV102
B1L3 NV103
CAB2+ NV104
CAB2- COM1
IN 1+ B2L1
IN 1- B2L2
1B B2L3 2B
IN 2+
IN 2- COM2
1A 2A
EC5
ELECTRO CODE 5
GE T ransportation Systems
Global Signaling
COLORLIGHT
PS 1 2 3 4
7.5 15 20 20 3
SPARE
- 7.5 -
- 15 -
- 20 -
- 20 -
-3-
FUSES

Maintenance
6. Remove all the modules from the EC5 Chassis. Refer

to appropriate module removal procedure in this
section, if necessary.
- 44S
VIO
6S
D-C
VL 1 LAMPP 21
6S NK AM
BANK 1 L MP 3
D-C BA K 1 LA
VL 1 LAMPP 21
N
BA
P1
AM
I-2S
N K AM 2L P2
BANK 1 L MP 3 NK AM
BANK 2 L MP 3
BA K 1 LA
VT
N B A K 2 LA
BA BA
N
P1
AM
2L P2
NK AM
BANK 2 L MP 3
B A K 2 LA
N
BA
7. Remove the cross member from the EC5 chassis by

removing seven screws are as shown.
Note: Record the position of the module connector key plates. They will need to be replaced when the
new Backplane is installed.
8. Remove the 23 screws securing the Backplane to the EC5

Chassis.
9. Remove the Backplane from the EC5 Chassis.
10. Remove the fuses and Chassis ID Pack from the old Backplane.

11. Install module connector keys and new Backplane in

the EC5 chassis and secure with the 23 screws
previously removed.
12. Install the fuses and Chassis ID Pack on the new

Backplane.
13. Replace cross member.
14. Re-install all the modules into the EC5 Chassis. Refer
to appropriate module installation procedure in this
section, if necessary.
15. Reconnect all I/O Module connectors.

S
-44
VIO
16. Install the CDU-1. Refer to CDU-1 Installation

6S
D-C
VL LAMPP 12
6S
1
NK AM
BANK 1 L MP 3
D- C B A K 1 LA
VL MP 1
N
BA
Procedure in this section, if necessary.

A P1
1L P2 AM
I-2S
NK AM 2L P2
BANK 1 L MP 3 NK AM
BANK 2 L MP 3
B A K 1 LA
VT
N BA K 2 LA
BA BA
N
P1
AM
2L P2
NK AM
BANK 2 L MP 3
BA K 2 LA
N
BA

Maintenance
AAR1 AAR2
CIO-2
B N
5V
COM
PS 1 2 3 4
7.5
20
20
20. Verify that all the Health Indicators illuminate and the system operates normally.
21. Verify there are no CDU-1 alarm messages.
WARNING After installing a new EC5 Backplane, verify the Vital Configuration
Settings,Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC
Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values against the
Application Circuit Plan. Failure to verify the Vital Configuration Settings
Vital Remote Parameters, PTC Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce
Times, PTC WIU Address, and Timer Values could result in a falsely
permissive aspect which could result in serious injury or death. Always
verify the Vital Configuration Settings Vital Remote Parameters, PTC
Applicability Settings, PTC Debounce Times, PTC WIU Address, and
Timer Values when replacing the EC5 Backplane.
22. Verify all Timer Values are correct as described in the Timers Setup procedure.
23. Verify the Vital Configuration Settings are correct as described in the Vital Configuration Setup
procedure.
24. Set the Track Transmit Voltage and Receive Reference as described in the Track Circuit
Adjustment procedure.
25. Set the Lamp Voltage as described in the Lamp Voltage Setup procedures.
26. Verify proper operation of the EC5 system as detailed in Volume Two, Chapter 8 - ElectroLogIXS/EC5
Retest Guide.


Maintenance
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Maintenance Record
Signal Location No.
Reason For Call Track Condition Battery Check Track Circuit Measurements Converter Receiver Meter Type Modules Probable Date Initials
Setting Setting Replaced Cause
Voltage Charge Converter Out Receiver In
Current
Routine Trouble Dry Damp Wet Was Is Voltage Current Voltage Current Was Is Was Is
Maintenance Call Peak Peak Peak Peak


Troubleshooting
Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Recommended Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
General Troubleshooting Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Connector Probing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Module Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Supply Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Track Circuit Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Track Circuit Testing Using Transmit Mode Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Track Circuit Troubleshooting Using Transmit and Receive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9


Troubleshooting
Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting
Introduction
This chapter contains information to troubleshoot and repair problems in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system
that has been operational.
WARNING ElectroLogIXS/EC5 troubleshooting and repair must be accomplished

in a timely manner. Proper and timely maintenance is required for the
equipment to provide failsafe operation. Failure to report failures and
repair the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 in a timely manner could allow multiple
failures over time to combine, resulting in an unsafe condition that
could result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined as without
undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j).
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is designed to minimize the effort required for troubleshooting. Most problems
will be immediately detected by the software and displayed in a flashing message on the CDU display. If
you suspect that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has a problem, follow the basic troubleshooting steps listed in
Figure 4-1.
1. POWER 1. Check power to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
2. VISUAL INDICATORS 2. Check the visual indicators on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The

visual indicators represent high-level troubleshooting.
1. HEALTH LEDS
2. CDU ALARM MESSAGES
3. STATUS LEDS/QUICK STATUS
MENU/CDU MENU TREE
3. DETAILED TROUBLESHOOTING 3. Steps 1 and 2 will cover most problems.

CAB SIGNAL TRACK
SIGNAL LAMP AUX IN/OUT
MECHANISM
COMMUNICATIONS
4. Failure History Analysis is useful for troubleshooting intermittent

4. FAILURE HISTORY ANALYSIS or persistent problems. Review the accumulated errors in the
error log.
1. ERROR LOG
TOPLEVEL
Note: This step requires a data terminal or PC to access data.
Figure 4-1, Troubleshooting

Chart
In general, when troubleshooting the ElectroLogIXS/EC5:
1. Start with the CPS (Central Power Supply) Module.
2. Check the VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module, signals, switches, and track circuit.
3. Verify track circuit by isolating the external connections from the ElectroLogIXS/EC5, check for
feedback, shorts, and low battery levels.

WARNING After performing corrective maintenance on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5

unit, adequate testing must be performed to detect any errors/failures
related to the new equipment and /or maintenance. The tests should
be performed before the unit is returned to service and in accordance
with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other regulatory agency rules. This
should include visual inspection of vital parameter values.
The tests should be performed by qualified personnel that have the
knowledge to correctly and safely discharge the tests. Failure to
adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after performing corrective
maintenance could result in death or serious injury.
Documentation
Keep the following reference documents at all ElectroLogIXS/EC5 installations:
1. Complete wiring diagrams showing all input and output terminals including battery supply, and all
other associated wiring.
2. If available, the Program Application Worksheet and Maintenance record may be helpful.
Recommended Equipment
Several ElectroLogIXS/EC5 accessories are referred to in this chapter. These products are recommended
for best operation and simplified troubleshooting. They are available from GETSGS (GE Transportation
Systems Global Signaling).
TS-1019A Peak Reading Track Current Meter

(GETSGS part number 800-098005-001)
TIS-4 Track Input Simulator for Electro Code track and line circuits.
(GETSGS part number 800-087041-001)
Additional Test Equipment
Digital Voltmeter
Multimeter
General Troubleshooting Techniques

TheElectroLogIXS/EC5 has built-in diagnostics which may be used to stream line troubleshooting
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 problems.
1. The green module Health LEDs located on every module.
2. Yellow I/O LEDs for all inputs and outputs to the tracks, lamps, and communication lines.
3. CDU-1 and Web GUI Quick Status Menus for quick access to track, lamp, and I/O status. The Quick
Status Menu are the items directly below the GETSGS Home Menu. See Figure 5.3 for an example.
The items shown in the Quick Status Menu are dependent upon the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application.

Troubleshooting
4. CDU-1 and Web GUI function menus for detailed diagnostics like track resistance, lamp output
voltage, and track transmit current.
Connector Probing
Measure voltages at connectors by inserting test probes into connector test probe points as indicated in
figure 4.2. Do not insert test probes into connector receptacles.
T e st p ro b e p o in t
Figure 4-2, Indication of Test Probe Point
Module Troubleshooting
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses 12 VDC from the supply battery. Certain modules operate on 12 VDC and 5
VDC which is supplied by the CPS Module. Always check the 12 VDC from the supply battery as well as 5
VDC from the CPS Module.
CAUTION Unless specifically stated in the module description, I/O modules

should be replaced without power applied to the system. Refer to the
description of each module to determine if it can be replaced with
power applied. Place the Power Switch in the OFF position before
removing or installing any module that is not hot swappable.
Supply Battery
Low supply battery levels will cause symptoms of many other failures in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Before
troubleshooting any failures, check the 12.0 VDC battery supply voltage.
1. Using Figure 4-3/4-4 as a guide, check the input voltage across the B and N terminals. Verify input
voltages are between 9.5 and 16.5 VDC. If input voltage is not within tolerance, change system battery.
2. Set the meter to read AC voltage.
3. Measure the AC voltage across the voltage across the B and N terminals. Verify the voltage is less than
1 VAC.
4. If the voltage is too high correct it before continuing.
B and N
Terminals
373-PH24
Figure 4-3, Location of B and N Terminals on 9-Slot ElectroLogIXS Unit
B and N
Terminals

Troubleshooting
B and N
Terminals
CI-2
AAR1 AAR2
B N
7.5
20
15
20
1 2 3 4
Figure 4-6, Location of B and N Terminals of EC5

Track Circuit Troubleshooting

The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 contains a Test Mode to aid in troubleshooting track circuits. The Transmit Test
Mode interferes with normal track circuit operation by providing a steady one volt DC output rather than
the normal pulse coded output. The Receive Test Mode disables all outputs forcing the unit to remain in
constant receive mode.
There are two methods for using the Test Mode. Both methods should be considered as supplemental
troubleshooting aids, the primary method being a close visual inspection by walking the track circuit.
Track Circuit Testing Using Transmit Mode Only
Overview
In this method the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit is placed in Transmit Mode, while the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at the other end of the track circuit continues to transmit the normal pulse coded signal.
The equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-5, Track Circuit Setup.
A DC ammeter is connected between the two rails at various points along the track circuit and the current is
measured. As the measurement point passes over the fault condition, the current changes from a steady
reading to a pulsed reading. For example, in Figure 4-5 the current measured at point A would be steady
while the reading at point B would be pulsed. Although the fault condition is depicted as an open circuit in
the figure, this is the same behavior would be observed for a rail-to-rail short.
This method is best suited for locating drastic faults, such as a complete open circuit or a dead short. The
primary advantage of this method is that only one end of the track circuit needs to be placed in Test Mode,
eliminating the need to drive to the other end of the track circuit.
Procedure
1. Check the cartridge fuse on the TIP-2.
2. Check the automotive style fuse on the TIP-2
3. Check the TIP-2 to rail connections.
4. One way to trace an open circuit on an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 track circuit is to walk the track with an
analog voltmeter.

Troubleshooting
5. Use the meter on the track as if the track was a simple track circuit. Observe the correct rail polarity.
Note: The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 track circuit has a transmitter at both ends. This means that there will be
voltage at each side of the open circuit. One transmitter should be isolated from the rails.
6. Isolate the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit by opening the outgoing track terminals
on the TIP-2.
7. Set the meter to a low voltage setting (approximately 3 V full scale deflection).
8. When the voltage is present, the meter will follow the DC pulses. The actual voltage level received is
not important.
9. The pulses will be present from the end that has the transmitter connected. The pulses will disappear
once the break has been passed.
10. Once the open circuit has been located, make the repair.
11. Reconnect the transmitter on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
12. Recheck the receive current.
Track Circuit Troubleshooting Using Transmit and Receive Mode

Overview
In this method the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 at one end of the track circuit is placed in Transmit Test Mode, while
the other end of the track circuit is placed in Receive Test Mode. The equivalent circuit is shown in Figure 4-
6.
Figure 4-6, Track Circuit Setup.
A DC ammeter is connected between the two rails at various points along the track circuit. As the
measurement point passes over the fault condition, the current reading drops suddenly. Figure 4-7 illustrates
how the measured current varies with location along the track circuit.

Figure 4-7, Measured Current Graph.
Although the fault condition has been depicted as a high rail resistance, this same behavior would be
observed for a rail-to-rail leakage path.
Procedure
1. Turn off the track circuit at one end.
2. Set a Simpson 260 (or equivalent meter) to the 500 mA scale. Set a Simpson TS-111 to the 300 mA
scale.
3. Connect track circuit as shown in Figure 4-6.
4. Place a short across the leads to verify that you have full meter deflection.
5. Walk a short distance on the track. Place one meter lead on each rail.
6. Meter should show full scale deflection.
7. Walk further down the track. Place one meter lead on each rail.
8. Meter should read full scale deflection.
9. Continue walking and checking until you do not get a full meter deflection. The broken rail lies
between the last point that you got full scale deflection and the place where you had partial meter
deflection.
10. When you have located the broken rail, make the repair.
11. Turn off the meter.
Note: Reset the meter to the voltage scale.

Troubleshooting
Lamp Test Mode

The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to apply an output to a selected lamp for
troubleshooting purposes. The application grants permission to enter this mode by setting the Lamp Setup
Grant status to True (VLD-C6S) or the Lamp Grant Bank 1, Lamp Grant Bank 2 to True (VLD-R16S). The
application may be written to allow the system to enter the Lamp Test Mode only when no trains are
present. Refer to Chapter 5 - CDU Program for details of the Lamp Test Mode.
The user is able to select the Lamp Test Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to enter the
Lamp Test Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode based on Lamp
Setup Grant/Lamp Grant Bank status.
If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1 informing the
user that access is denied. This could be because of train position or the fact that an equation was never
written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant/Lamp Grant Bank status to go True.
If permission to enter the Lamp Test Mode is granted and the user confirms entry, the system sets the input
status Lamp Normal Mode to False to indicate that the Lamp Test Mode is entered. The system displays the
lamp outputs by their status names with the current on/off state of each output. The user may select which
lamp output to perform the Lamp Test on.
When the system exits the Lamp Test Mode, it may take about 30 seconds to display valid aspects.


CDU Program
Chapter 5 – CDU Program
Contents
Control/Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Numeric Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Arrow Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Using CDU Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Data Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Directional Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Short Cut Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
CDU Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Application Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Application Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Software Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Track Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Transmit Level Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Track Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Receive Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Transmit Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Receive Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Alternating Code 5 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Alternating Code 5 Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Stick Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Cab Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Lamp Quick Status Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Lamp Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Light Out Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Lamp Driver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Flash Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Alternate Flash Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Vital Stop Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Lamp Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Lamp Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Lamp Test Mode (VLD-R16S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Lamp Test Mode (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Lamp Manual Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Lamp Automated Setup (VLD-C6S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
View Timer Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Enter Timer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
View Non-Vital Timer Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Enter Non-Vital Timer Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Vital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Vital Input Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Enter Slow Pick Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Enter Slow Release Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Slot Code Selects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Code Select Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Vital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs Quick Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Track Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Slot Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47

View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Edit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Vital Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Vital Communication, Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
View Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
View Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
View Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
View Receive (RX) Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
View Transmit (TX) Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Selected Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Vital Communication, Edit Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Remote Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Remote Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Local Network ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Remote Network ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Max Send Time Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Max Recv Time Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
HMI Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Update Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Ack Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Office Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60

View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
View Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
View Codeline Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
Local Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62

View Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
View Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
View LCP Health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
Non-Vital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-64
Battery Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65

High Battery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Low Battery Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66

CDU Program
Ground Fault Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
Local User Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-70
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71

Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
System Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Log Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
View Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Erase Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
Print Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Print Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Date/Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Config Daylit Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
DST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
DST Strt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
DST End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Request Time Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-80
Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-81
Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-82
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-84
Ethernet Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Port IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-86
Port Subnet Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-87
Default Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
HTTP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
HTTP TCP Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Trusted Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-89
Trusted Source Network 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-90
Telnet Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Telnet Port 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-91
Telnet Username . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Telnet Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Telnet TCP Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Telnet Trusted Source Network 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-93
Telnet Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Office Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95
UCE Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-96
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-97
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-98
SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-99
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Data Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-100
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101
Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-101

Set Office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-102

GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-103
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-104
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Const Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-107
Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Tx Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Tx Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
CTS Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-109
Secure Poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
BCS Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
BAUD Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-112
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-113
Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-116
CTS Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
RxGap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-117
IndGap Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Set office Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
Unit Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Const Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Msg Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Secure Poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
Trusted Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124
Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-126
ATCS Office Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-128
ATCS Office Protocol Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
BAUD Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-130
Number Ind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Ctrl Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-131
Ind Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
ATCS Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
Message Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-133
CPC Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Address Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-134
Addr Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Railroad Id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-135
Station Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
Station Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-136
MCP Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
MCP Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-137
Office Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138
CDU Program
Office Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-138

CDC Addr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
CDC Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-139
Ind Refresh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Ind Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-140
Log Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Page Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-141
Local Control Panel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
LCP Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-142
HAWK Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
HAWK Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-143
Vital Remote Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Vital Remote Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
Vital Remote Set NV Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-144
MAC Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
MMST (Maximum MAC Switchover Time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Switchover Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145
Switchover Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Switchover Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Delete Old Key Vault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-146
Vital Remote Ports (Serial Ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Vital Remote Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-147
Remote Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-148
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-149
Local Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
Attached Remote(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-150
Remote 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Date Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Poll Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-151
Msg MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Use New Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
MAC Enable / Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-152
Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-153
Vital Remote Ports (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Remote Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-154
Attached Remote(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Remote 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Date Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155
Msg MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
Use New Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-156
MAC Enable / Disable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-157
Port Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-158
EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-159
Executive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
VPM A-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-160
VPM B-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
VPM C-Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
CDU Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-161
Default Maintenance Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-162

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 5-v

5-vi All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
CDU Program
Chapter 5 – CDU Program
Control/Display Unit
The CDU-1 (Control Display Unit) provides an interface between the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system and the user.
The CDU-1 contains a 40 character display, a 16 button keypad, and two system indicators (HEALTH and
5V PWR). The 40 character display provides a visual indication of system status and the keypad allows for
easy access to system setup, maintenance, and diagnostic utilities.
Figure 5-1, The Control Display/Unit.
The CDU-1 status indicators provide a visual indication of system status. The HEALTH LED is illuminated
when the system’s CPUs are communicating and operating normally. The HEALTH LED will be
extinguished during system resets or when a CPU is locked up. The 5V PWR LED illuminates when the
CPS (Central Power Supply Module) output is within tolerance.
Keypad Functions
The Keypad is divided into three groups; 10 alphanumeric keys marked ‘0’ through ‘9' and ‘A’ through ‘Z’,
two keys marked ‘CANCEL’ and ‘ENTER’, and four directional arrow keys marked with ‘Y’, ‘Z’, ‘[’,
and ‘\’.
Numeric Keys
Numeric keys are used for Boolean inputs (e.g., True/False or On/Off), numeric inputs (e.g., to change track
voltage, track current), and character inputs (e.g., alphanumeric serial numbers). For menus expecting
Boolean inputs, the ‘0’ key selects the negative condition (False or Off) and the ‘1’ key selects the positive
condition (True or On). For menus expecting numeric inputs, a key’s numeric value is entered and the
cursor automatically moves left one position after each key press. For menus expecting character inputs,
characters are selected by pressing a multiple times until the desired character is displayed and then
pressing the right arrow key to advance to the next character. The character selection sequence for each key
is shown below.

Key Selected Characters

1 "1”, “=”, “(“, “)”, “?”, “|”, “/”, “<”, “>”, “:”, “,”, “.", space
2 "A”, “B”, “C”, “a”, “b”, “c”, “2", space
3 “D”, “E”, “F”, “d”, “e”, “f”, “3”, space
4 “G”, “H”, “I”, “g”, “h”, “i”, “4”, space
5 “J”, “K”, “L”, “j”, “k”, “l”, “5”, space
6 “M”, “N”, “O”, “m”, “n”, “o”, “6”, space
7 “P”, “Q”, “R”, “S”, “p”, “q”, “r”, “s”, “7”, space
8 “T”, “U”, “V”, “t”, “u”, “v”, “8”, space
9 “W”, “X”, “Y”, “Z”, “w”, “x”, “y”, “z”, “9”, space
0 “0”, “”, “#”, “!”, “@”, “$”, “%”, “&”, “*”, “-”, “+”, space
Arrow Keys
As long as the system is in the Directional Mode the arrow keys can be used to navigate through the menu
tree. Pressing the Right Arrow key displays the next menu item to the right (the menu will loop around to
the first menu of the same level if the last menu is in the display). Pressing the Left Arrow key displays the
next menu to the left. Pressing the Down Arrow key displays the menu of the next lower level menu item
unless the lowest level is currently displayed in which case, the menu will loop to the top of the menu.
Pressing the Up Arrow key displays the menu of the next higher level item. If the highest level menu item
is currently displayed, the Up Arrow key is disabled.
Pressing the Right and Left Arrow keys simultaneously activates the “Local Home” that allows the user to
jump to the Functional Heading for the menu being displayed.
Pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys simultaneously activates the “Global Home” that allows the user to
jump to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu.

CDU Program
Using CDU Menus

The CDU menu system is a “tree” of menu items. Functional Headings are located at the top of the tree and
are arranged in a left to right fashion. Subheadings, data display/select items appear under the Functional
Headings. Data prompts are located under data display/select items.
PUSH BUTTON “A”

(Moves Up in Menu)
Edit Mode
Values and
Values Set-Up
and Parameters
Set-Up Parameters
System Conﬁgura�on System Conﬁgura�on

(Menu Tree) (Menu Tree)
PUSH BUTTON “B” PUSH BUTTON “C”

(Moves Le� in Menu) (Moves Right in Menu)
Direc�onal Mode Direc�onal Mode
Values and
Values Set-Up
and Parameters
Set-Up Parameters
PUSH BUTTON “D”

(Moves Down in Menu)
Edit Mode
Figure 5-2, Push Button Relationship With Figures showing Menu Diagrams.
The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 menus are diagramed on menu maps. A description of how to use menu maps
is given below.

Data Prompt
The data prompt displayed on the CDU-1 depends on the type of data to be entered.
Enter Value> Expects a numeric entry and shifts the cursor to the right with every
numeric key pressed.
Enter Text > Expects an alphanumeric entry. After selections the cursor is moved to
the right manually.
Press \ or [ > These keys are used to increase or decrease a value setting.
SET> Set Date or Time
Erase : Press ‘0’> To erase an error or data logs press 0.
Y/N press 1/0 > For Yes press 1. For No press 0.
Operating Modes
The CDU-1 has two modes of operation; the Directional Mode and the Edit Mode. The Directional Mode is
used to navigate through the menu tree. While in the Directional Mode, the user cannot change any values.
The Edit Mode is used to modify values and setup parameters. While in the Edit Mode, the user cannot
navigate through the menu tree.
Directional Mode
The Directional Mode is used for navigating from one menu item to the next. While in the Directional
Mode, pressing the CANCEL Button once displays the next higher level. It is possible to go back to the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu by holding the CANCEL key down for more than one second or by
pressing the up and down arrow keys simultaneously. Pressing the ENTER key in the Directional Mode is
treated like pressing the Down Arrow key.
Edit Mode
The Edit Mode allows the operator to modify system parameters and setup the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The
ENTER key is used edit/enter functions for items indicated with an “*”. To change a displayed value,
press the ENTER key once. After changing the value and verifying that the value is correct, the new value
is saved when the ENTER key is pressed again. While in the Edit Mode, the CANCEL key is used for
canceling the current entry. If the CANCEL key is pressed, the current entry is canceled and the user is
returned back one menu.
Short Cut Keys

The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 CDU-1 has the following short cut keys:
Local Home: By simultaneously pressing the Right and Left Arrow keys the CDU-1 display jumps to
the Functional Heading of the menu being displayed.
Global Home: By simultaneously pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys the CDU-1 display jumps to
the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu.

CDU Program
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu
Figure 5-3, Typical ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Home Menu.

The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 HOME Menu is displayed when the system is first powered-up. The first line of
the menu displays the menu title. The second line of the Home Menu displays information indicating the
general health of the system. If a system malfunction is registered, it will be flashing in the second row of
the CDU-1. If there is more than one malfunction, the other messages will displayed with every flashing
sequence.
The system's Home Menu may be different than the example shown in Figure 5-3. The actual Home Menu
depends on a particular system configuration.
Display< GETSGS HOME MENU

XX-XX-XX XX:XX:XX
Up N/A
Down Go to Quick Status Menu. The Quick Status Menu is dependant upon
the configuration of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Left or Right Displays another Functional Heading.

CDU Program
CDU Menu
Figure 5-4, Typical CDU Menu Map (VPM-2)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION GETSGS HOME MENU

XX-XX-XX XX:XX:XX
APPLICATION INFO APPLICATION SOFTWARE ACTIVATION

SELECTION
TRACKS CAB SIGNALING LAMPS VITAL TIMERS
NON-VITAL TIMERS VITAL INPUTS CODE SELECT INPUTS VITAL OUTPUTS
TRACK DECODER VITAL CONFIGURATION VITAL COMM OFFICE COMM

OUTPUTS
LOCAL CONTROL PANEL NON-VITAL I/O BATTERY ALARM GROUND FAULT DETECT
LOCAL USER CONFIRM CROSSING CROSSING CROSSING CONTROLLER

MAINTENANCE SETUP SETUP
Figure 5-5, Typical CDU Menu Map (VPM-3)
Figures 5-4 and 5-5 depict typical CDU Menu Maps. The Functional Headings (Application Information,
Application Selection, Tracks, Cab Signaling, etc.) provide access to lower-level menus that are used to set
various parameters, check settings, and perform system diagnostics. The following paragraphs detail use the
Functional Headings.
Note: The actual functional headings displayed depend upon which modules are installed in a specific
system.

Application Information Menu

The Application Information menu lists CRC and Checksum for the application installed in the unit.
Figure 5-6, Application Information Menu (VPM-2)
Figure 5-7, Application Information Menu (VPM-3)

CDU Program
Application Selection
More than one application may be stored in the memory of the CI/UCI-3 module to suit different track
configurations. This menu provides the user with the option to chose the application that meets the
requirements of a particular location.
Note: The Application Selection process causes the Vital Configuration Settings, Vital Timers and VIO
Slow Pick/Slow Release times to be set to the default values defined in the newly selected
application.
Figure 5-8, Application

Selection Menu (VPM-2)

Figure 5-9, Application Selection Menu (VPM-3)
Software Activation
The software activation function is used to activate a new Executive or a PTC Mapping file that has been
previously uploaded to the system. If the files do not exist on the system, the menu will not be displayed.
SOFTWARE ACTIVATION
EXECUTIVE * PTC MAPPING FILE *
ACTIVATE EXECUTIVE ACTIVATE PTC MAP FILE

ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO
Figure 5-10, Activate Software (VPM-3)

CDU Program
Tracks

Figure 5-11, Tracks Menu.

Track Transmitter and Track Receiver parameters entered through the CDU-1 are stored in an EEPROM on
the Backplane. During normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used. If the Track Transmitter
and Track Receiver parameters stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will set
the track parameters to extreme safe values. This will generate a configuration log entry. When the track
parameters are set to the extreme safe values, the tracks may not function and will need to be set again.
Refer to Chapter 3 - Maintenance for information on how to set track parameters.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Extreme Safe Values
Transmitter Voltage .5 Volts
Receive Reference 6.00 Amps
The Tracks Menu is for checking and setting the track circuit parameters.
Display< TRACKS
Up N/A
Down Go to first VTI-2S slot.
Left Display another Functional Heading.
Right Displays another Functional Heading.
Track
This menu provides access to the operating parameters for a track circuit.
Display< Slot n:
Up Go to TRACKS.
Down Go to Track Transmitter.
Left Go to another VTI-2S slot.
Right Go to another VTI-2S slot. n = next slot

CDU Program
Track Transmitter
The Track Transmit Menu provides the ability to view or edit the Transmit Level for Track n.
Display< Track Transmitter
Up Go to Track n. n = previous track
Down Go to Transmit Level Menu. This The Transmit Level Menu displays the XmitV
displays the track circuit transmit (Transmit Voltage), I (Transmit Current), and
parameters. Track Res (Track Resistance) setting.
Left Go to Alternating Code 5.
Right Go to Track Receiver.
Transmit Level Menu
This menu provides the ability to change the track circuit transmit parameters. To edit the transmit level
press the ENTER Key and follow the messages on the CDU-1.
Display< XmitV=n.nnV I=n.nnA

Track Res= n.nn Ohm
Up Track Transmitter.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to edit the Transmit

Voltage. The CDU-1 will prompt for a new
Transmit Voltage. Enter the new Transmit
Voltage, press the ENTER Key and verify the
new Transmit Voltage is correct.
Left or Right N/A
Track Receiver
The Track Receiver Menu provides the ability to view or edit the receive parameters for Track n.
Display< Track Receiver
Up Go to Track n. Tracks top menu
Down Go to Receive Level Menu. This The Receive Level Menu displays the RCV I
displays the track circuit receive (Receive Current), THR (Transmit Current),
parameters. and Ratio: (Receive Ratio) setting.
Left Go to Track transmitter.
Right Go to Test Mode.

Receive Reference
This menu provides the ability to change the track circuit receive reference parameters. To edit the receive
reference, press the ENTER Button and follow the messages on the CDU-1.
Display< Receive I=n.nnA THR=n.nn

Reference: n.nn:n*
Up Go to Track Receiver.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to edit the Receive

Reference. The CDU-1 will prompt for a new
Receive Reference. Enter the new Receive
Reference, press the ENTER Key, and verify
the new Receive Reference is correct.
Left or Right N/A
Transmit Test Mode
This menu provides the ability to turn the Transmit Test Mode On or Off. With Transmit Test Mode in the
display, press the ENTER key. The Transmit Test Mode may be turned On or Off by pressing the Up and
Down Arrow Keys.
When the Transmit Test Mode is entered, the system will prompt the user to confirm the Transmit Test
Mode entry. The Transmit Test Mode provides a steady one volt DC output rather than the normal pulse
coded output.
To exit transmit test mode the user selects the CDU-1 menu similar to the way the test mode was entered.
When the mode is exited the system should set the input status to True and resume normal operation.
Display< Transmit Test Mode
Up Go to Test Mode. Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu.

Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or
Down Arrow Key to toggle the Transmit Test
Mode On or Off, press the ENTER Key and
verify the Transmit Test Mode setting is
correct.
Down N/A
Left Go to Receive Test Mode.
Right Go to Receive Test Mode.

CDU Program
Receive Test Mode
The Receive Test Mode provides the ability to turn the Receive Test Mode On or Off. With Receive Test
Mode in the display, press the ENTER Button. The Receive Test Mode may be turned On or Off by
pressing the Up and Down Arrow Keys.
To enter the Receive Test Mode, the system must verify that there is a user present to select entry into the
receive mode. The Receive Test Mode disables all outputs forcing the unit to remain in constant receive
mode.
To exit the Receive Test Mode, the user selects the CDU-1 menu similar to the way the test mode was
entered. When the mode is exited the system should set the input status to True and resume normal
operation.
Display< Receive Test Mode

Up Go to Test Mode. Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu.
Down Arrow Key to toggle the Receive Test
Mode On or Off, press the ENTER Key and
verify the Receive Test Mode setting is
correct.
Down N/A
Left Go to Transmit Test Mode.
Right Go to Transmit Test Mode.

Figure 5-12, CDU map directing the user to Test Mode
Alternating Code 5 Menu
The Alternating Code 5 Menu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option.
Up Go to Track 1.
Down Go to the Alternating Code 5 Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu.
submenu. Once the menu is enabled, press the Up or
Down Arrow Key to toggle between the ALT
and NON-ALT, press the ENTER Key, and
verify the setting is correct.
Left Go to Test Mode.
Right Go to Track Transmitter.

CDU Program
Alternating Code 5 Submenu
The Alternating Code 5 submenu provides the ability to select the Code 5 option. With Alternating Code 5
in the display, press the ENTER Button. The Alternating Code 5 Mode may be selected by pressing the Up
and Down Arrow Keys.

Code 5 = ALT/NON=ALT*
Up Go to Alternating Code 5. Press the ENTER Key to change the Code 5

option. Press the Up or Down Arrow Key to
toggle between ALT and NON-ALT, press the
ENTER Key, and verify the setting is correct.
Down N/A
Left N/A
Right N/A
Stick Set
The Stick Set Menu provides the ability to view Stick Set status. A stick is set to determine the direction of
train travel. The first line of the display indicates the Stick Set number and the second line of the display
indicates if the stick is set T (True) or F (False).
Display< 1 Stick set 2

T F
Up Go to TRACKS.
Down N/A
Left Go to Transmit/Receive Codes.
Right Go to Track 1.

Cab Signaling
Figure 5-13, Cab Signaling Menu.
The Cab Signaling Menu displays the status of the cab outputs. If no cab output is being transmitted, the
output status will be Off. If a cab output is being transmitted the CDU will display the cab enable status
name of the rate being transmitted. Figure 5-14 is an example of how to decode the display.
Figure 5-14, Cab Signaling Menu Definition.

CDU Program
Lamps
Lamp Quick Status Home Menu
If VLD modules are installed, the Lamp Detection Slot# and Aspect Slot# quick status menus are available.
The Lamp Detection Slot# menu depicts a specific VLD module and shows the status of the lamps that are
defined in the application. A “T” indicates the lamp is functional. An “F” indicates that the lamp is not
functional. A “-“ indicates that the lamp output is not used (no control statuses defined) in the application.
The T/F status of lamps is shown in order, (Light 1 through Light 16) from left to right in groups of four
(VLD-R16S) or Light 1 through Light 6 from left to right in two groups of three (VLD-C6S).
The Aspect Slot # Quick Status menu depicts the current aspects associated with the outputs of a specific
VLD module. A “T” indicates that the lamp aspect is “steady on.” An “F” indicates that the lamp output is
“off.” Flashing and Alternate Flashing aspects are depicted using alternately filled/cleared “0” symbols.
While the duty cycle and flash rate are not accurate on the CLD with respect to the actual lamp output, the
relative states of flashing and Alternate Flashing are indicated. A “-“ indicates that the lamp output is not
used (no control statuses defined) in the application. VLD-R16S aspects are shown in four groups of four;
VLD-C6S aspects in two groups of three.
Figure 5-15, Lamp Quick Status Menu

Lamp Functions
The Lamps Function Menu allows the user to select lamp-specific menus to examine the state of the outputs
(steady on, flashing, or alternate flashing), the state of the lamp filaments, and perform user-controlled
maintenance activities.
Figure 5-16, Lamps Menu.
Display< LAMPS

Up N/A
Down Go to Light Out Status.
Left Displays another Functional Heading.

CDU Program
Light Out Status
The Light Out Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest
(either a R16S or a C6S) by slot number, and then examine the operational condition of the signal lamps.
The Light Out Status menu indicates Slot (S) number and Lamp Output number along with the associated
status name. A value of TRUE indicates that the light is functional. A status of FALSE indicates that the
light is not functional. The status names on the bottom row of the display vary depending on the status
names assigned by the application engineer.
Figure 5-17, Light Out Status Menu.
Display< Light Out Status

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Light Out for first VLD slot. The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
slot containing a VLD module.
Left Go to Alt Flash Status Menu.
Right Go to Lamp Driver Status Menu.
Display< Light Out Slot #

Up Go to Light Out Status.
Down Displays the Light Out Status of Lamp After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
Output 1. left and right arrow keys to select the desired
lamp output.
Left Displays Light Out Slot # for previous
slot.
Right Displays Light Out Slot # for next slot.

Lamp Driver Status
The Lamp Driver Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest
(either a R16S or a C6S) by slot number then examine the lamp driver status for each lamp output on the
module. In the VLD-R16S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “steady on” condition
and a value of FALSE indicates that the lamp output is not “steady on” (could be off, flashing or alternate
flashing). In the VLD-C6S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is “enabled” and will either be
“steady on” or “flashing” while a value of FALSE indicates the lamp output is not enabled.
Figure 5-18, Lamp Driver Status Menu.
Display< Lamp Driver Status

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Lamp Driver Status for the first The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
VLD Slot. slot containing a VLD module.
Left Go to Light Out Status Menu.
Right Go to Flash Status Menu.
Display< Lamp Driver Slot #

Up Go to Lamp Driver Status.
Down Displays the Lamp Driver Status of After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
Lamp Output 1. left and right arrow keys to select the desired
lamp output.
Left Displays Light Out Slot # for previous
slot.
Right Displays Light Out Slot # for next slot.

CDU Program
Flash Status
The Flash Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module of interest (either a
R16S or a C6S) by slot number then examine the flash status for each lamp output on the module. In the
VLD-R16S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “normal flash” condition and a value
of FALSE indicates that the lamp output is not “normal flash” (could be off, steady on or alternate
flashing). In the VLD-C6S, a value of TRUE indicates that the lamp output is flashing and a value of
FALSE indicates the lamp is not flashing.
Figure 5-19, Flash Status Menu.
Display< Flash Status

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Flash Status for the first VLD The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
slot. slot containing a VLD module.
Left Go to Lamp Driver Status Menu.
Right Go to Alt Flash Status Menu.
Display< Flash Status Slot #

Up Go to Flash Status.
Down Go to Flash Status of Lamp Output 1. After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
left and right arrow keys to select the desired
lamp output.
Left Displays Flash Status Slot # for
previous slot.
Right Displays Flash Status Slot # for next
slot.

Alternate Flash Status
The Alt Flash Status menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD-R16S module of interest
by slot number then examine the alternate flash status for each lamp output on the module. A value of
TRUE indicates that the lamp output is in the “alternate flash” condition and a value of FALSE indicates
that the lamp output is not “alternate flash” (could be off, steady on or normal flashing).
Figure 5-20, Alt Flash Status Menu
Display< Alt Flash Status

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Flash Status for the first VLD- The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
R16S slot. slot containing a VLD-R16S module.
Left Go to Flash Status Menu.
Right Go to Stop Vital Status Menu.
Display< Alt Flash Status Slot #

Up Go to Alt Flash Status.
Down Displays the Alt Flash Status of Lamp After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
Output 1. left and right arrow keys to select the desired
lamp output.
Left Displays Alt Flash Status Slot # for
previous slot.
Right Displays Alt Flash Status Slot # for
next slot.

CDU Program
Vital Stop Status
The Vital Stop Status menu allows the user to select an installed VLD-R16S module of interest by slot
number and examine the states (one for each bank) of the Vital Stop statuses.
Figure 5-21, Vital Stop Status Menu
Display< Vital Stop Status

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Flash Status for the first VLD- The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
R16S slot slot containing a VLD-R16S module.
Left Go to Alt Flash Status Menu.
Right Go to Lamp Setup / Test Menu.

Lamp Maintenance
The Lamp Maintenance menu and submenus allow the user to select an installed VLD module (either VLD-
R16S or VLD-C6S) by slot number then perform maintenance functions for that particular module type.
Both VLD module types provide a Lamp Test Mode that enables the user, with application logic enabling,
to control the state of individual lamp outputs. The VLD-C6S has the additional functions of manual and
automated setup to adjust the lamp output voltage. The VLD-R16S Lamp Maintenance menu tree is shown
in Figure 5-22. The VLD-C6S Lamp Maintenance menu tree is shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-22, Lamp Maintenance Menu (VLD-R16S)

CDU Program
Figure 5-23, Lamp Maintenance Menu (VLD-C6S)

Lamp Test Mode
The Lamp Test Mode is a diagnostic mode that allows the user to control a selected lamp output for
troubleshooting purposes. In order to enter the Lamp Test Mode, the user must request access and the
application must have granted access. Otherwise, Lamp Test Mode is not entered. For the VLD-C6S,
Lamp Test Mode is requested / entered on a module-by-module basis. For the VLD-R16S, Lamp Test
Mode is requested on a bank-by-bank basis for a selected module. The menu navigation tree is shown in
Figure 5-19 for the VLD-R16S and Figure 5-20 for the VLD-C6S.
The request to enter Lamp Test Mode is made via the CDU. If the Lamp Setup Grant status (VLD-C6S) or
the Lamp Grant Bank status (VLD-R16S) is enabled, the request is granted and the Lamp Test Mode is
entered and the user is able to control individual lamps via CDU input. If Lamp Test Mode is denied (grant
status is false or no equation for grant status exists), the CDU displays the denial message to the user.
When Lamp Test Mode is entered, the system sets the status of Lamp Normal Mode (VLD-C6S) or Lamp
Bank (1,2) Normal (VLD-R16S) to false. The user may navigate to a specific lamp output via the CDU
which displays the selected lamp output by status name with the current on / off state of the output.
Lamp Test Mode is exited either by the user requesting test mode to be off or by the application setting the
grant status to false. When Test Mode is exited, control of the lamp outputs returns to the application
program.
Lamp Test Mode (VLD-R16S)
Display< Lamp Maintenance

Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Lamp Setup/Test (C6S) or Lamp The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
Test (R16S) for the first VLD slot. slot containing a VLD module.
Left Go to Vital Stop Status Menu.
Right Go to Light Out Status Menu.
Display< Test VLD-R16S Slot #

Up Go to Lamp Maintenance.
Down Go to Lamp Test Mode S# B1. The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
slot containing a VLD module.
Left Displays Test or Setup for previous
slot.
Right Displays Test or Setup for next slot.

CDU Program
Display< Lamp Test Mode S# B#

Up Go to Test VLD-R16S Slot #.
Down Error. Test Mode must be ON. Display “Access Denied”
Left Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for
other bank.
Right Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for
other bank.

Mode = ON
Up Go to Test VLD-R16S Slot #.
Down Turn Lamps ON/OFF for selected After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
module and bank. Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the
desired lamp output.
Left Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for
other bank.
Right Displays Lamp Test Mode S# B# for
other bank.
Lamp Test Mode (VLD-C6S)
Display< Lamp Maintenance
Up Go to LAMPS.
Down Go to Lamp Setup/Test (C6S) or Lamp The ‘first’ VLD slot is the lowest numbered
Test (R16S) for the first VLD slot. slot containing a VLD module.
Left Go to Vital Stop Status.
Right Go to Light Out Status.
Display< Setup/Test Slot n
Down Go to Lamp Manual Setup.
Left Go to previous VLD.
Right Go to next VLD.

Display< Lamp Manual Setup
Up Go to Setup/Test Slot n.
Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages.
Left Go to Lamp Test Mode.
Right Go to Lamp Automated Setup.

Mode = ON
Up Go to Test VLD-C6S Slot #.
Down Turn Lamps ON/OFF for selected After pressing the Down Arrow Key, use the
module. Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the
desired lamp output.
Left Go to Lamp Automated Setup.
Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S)
This menu provides the ability to setup the lamp drive voltage for the VLD-C6S Module installed in the
lowest slot number. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status
Display< Setup/Test Slot #

VLD-C6S
Down Go to Lamp Manual Setup. Press the ENTER Key to enable this menu.
Down Arrow Key to toggle the Lamp Manual
Setup On or Off.
Left Go to Lamp Setup or Lamp Test for the

next VLD.
Right Go to Lamp Setup or Lamp Test for the

next VLD.

CDU Program
Manual Lamp Setup (VLD-C6S)
Figure 5-24, Lamp Manual Setup Menu.
The Manual Lamp Setup Mode allows the user to adjust the lamp voltages on a bank of three lamps
residing on a VLD-C6S Module.
While in this mode, the system will continue to operate with the current voltage output until the user selects
a new one. When a new voltage is selected and stored the lamp output voltage is updated with the new
value.
The user accesses this mode by selecting Manual Lamp Setup Menu. Once the user has entered this mode,
the CDU-1 will display the current output voltage, for the specific bank being setup. It should be noted that
the bank's output voltages are measured at the ElectroLogIXS/EC5’s output, not at the lamp.
When the user inputs the new output voltage the system uses a Vital Data Entry Algorithm to verify that
there is a user present. After the system has confirmed the presence of the user, the software will store the
new output value in the systems memory and then change the output voltage accordingly.
Lamp Manual Setup (VLD-C6S)
Enabling this menu provides the ability to manually setup the lamp drive voltage. With Lamp Manual
Setup in the display, press the ENTER or Down Key
Display< Lamp Manual Setup
Up Go to Setup/Test Slot n
VLD-C6S
Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages. Press the ENTER Key to change the Lamp
Drive Voltage.
Left Go to Lamp Test Mode.

Automated Setup (VLD-C6S)
Figure 5-25, Lamp Automated Setup Menu.
The Automated Setup Mode allows the to system automatically calculate the actual output voltage based on
a desired voltage at the lamp. The application grants permission to enter this mode by setting the Lamp
Setup Grant status to True. The application may be written to allow the system to enter the Automated
Setup Mode only when no trains are present.
The user is able to select the Automated Setup Mode using the CDU-1. As soon as the user attempts to
enter the Automated Setup Mode, the executable software verifies that it has permission to enter that mode
based on Lamp Setup Grant status.
If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is denied, a message is displayed on the CDU-1
informing the user that this mode can not be entered at the present time. This could be because of train
position or the fact that an equation was never written to allow the Lamp Setup Grant status to go True.
If permission to enter the Automated Setup Mode is granted, the executive software sets the Lamp Normal
Mode status to False and the previously selected lamp voltage, for each of the lamp output driver statuses.
The user selects which lamp output to perform the Automated Setup on. The CDU-1 then prompts the user
for a new lamp voltage.
When the user inputs the new desired lamp voltage at the lamp, the system has the user verify the change to
the lamp voltage. Once verified, the system will commence with the automated setup procedure. The
system will turn off all the lamps in the bank of the VLD-C6S that was selected for the setup for
approximately 30 seconds. The system will illuminate each lamp in the bank for about 1 second with a 5
second off-time between each lamp. After the illuminating portion of the setup, the system calculates the
voltage drop to the lamp and adjusts the lamp output voltage for the desired voltage to be present at the
lamp. This takes another 30 seconds.
The total setup time is approximately 90 seconds. If during the setup procedure the Lamp Setup Grant is set
to False, i.e the clear aspect is dropped, the procedure will be cut short. If the procedure is cut short, the
system will hold the signals in that bank dark for approximately 30 seconds before returning to normal
operation.
In addition, an entry is placed in the user configuration log stating that the lamp voltage was changed. The
new voltage at the lamp is displayed on the CDU-1 and the executable software sets the Lamp Normal
Mode status back to True.

CDU Program
The executable software continuously monitors the Lamp Setup Enable status, to determine if the
permission has been overridden in the middle of the Automated Setup Mode. This will result in the
executable software returning to the previous lamp output voltage and resuming normal lamp operation
within 30 seconds. In the case of the Automatic Setup Mode being cut short the system will display a
CDU-1 alarm message informing the user that the Automated Setup algorithm was cut short due to the
application.
Lamp Automated Setup (VLD-C6S)
The Automated Setup menu allows the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to automatically setup the lamp drive voltage for
the VLD-C6S Modules. With Lamp Automated Setup in the display, press the ENTER or Down Key. The
Lamp Automated Setup mode must be enabled by the Lamp Setup Grant Status.
Display< Lamp Automated Setup
Up Go to Setup/Test Slot n
VLD-C6S
Down Displays Lamp Drive Voltages. Press the ENTER Key to change the Lamp
Drive Voltage.
Left Go to Lamp Manual Setup
Right Go to Lamp Test Mode

Timers
WARNING For Vital Timers of 4 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/-
0%.
For Vital Timers of less than 4 seconds, accuracy will be within +0.5
second under worst case timing conditions.
Timer Values entered through the CDU-1 or Web GUI are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During
normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default timer values stored in
Application EPROM on the CI Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Application EPROM default
timer values when an Application Selection occurs via the CDU-1 or Web GUI, or if timer values stored on
the Backplane become corrupted. If the timer values stored on the Backplane become corrupted, the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write the Application EPROM default timer values to EEPROM on
the Backplane.
Figure 5-26, Timers Menu (VPM-2).
Figure 5-27, Vital Timers Menu (VPM-3).

CDU Program
The Timers Menu (VPM-2) or the Vital Timers Menu (VPM-3) provides the ability to view vital timer
statuses or enter vital timer values. There are a maximum of 127 vital timers that may be programmed by
use of the CDU-1 or Web GUI. When entering vital timer values, the user will be prompted to confirm the
value before it is saved to memory. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending
on the status names assigned by the application engineer.
Note: If an attempt is made to enter a Timer Value that is outside the range defined in the Application
EPROM, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not allow the timer value to be changed.
Display< TIMERS (VPM-2) or VITAL TIMERS (VPM-3)
Up N/A
Down Go to View Timer Statuses.
View Timer Statuses
The View Timer Statuses Menu provides the ability to view Timer Statuses and Timer Values. The status
names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application
engineer.
Display< View Timer Statuses
Up Go to TIMERS.
Down Displays Timer Statuses. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the Timer Statuses. Use the
Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer
Statuses.
Left Go to Enter Timer Values.
Right Go to Enter Timer Values.

Enter Timer Values
The Enter Timer Values Menu provides the ability to enter Timer Values. The status names on the bottom
row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer.
Display< Enter Timer Values
Up Go to TIMERS.
Down Displays Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view Timer Values. Use the Left
and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer.
Press the ENTER Key to edit the Timer

Value. To edit a Timer Value, enter the new
Timer Value, press the ENTER Key to accept
the new setting, and verify the new setting is
correct by entering the confirmation number
displayed on the CDU.
Left Go to View Timer Statuses.
Right Go to View Timer Statuses.

CDU Program
Non-Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timer Values entered through the CDU-1 are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During
normal ElectroLogIXS/EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default timer values stored in
Application EPROM on the CI or UCI-3 Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Backplane timer
value unless the timer value is outside the range allowed by the selected application or if the backplane
value becomes corrupted. If the timer values stored on the Backplane become corrupted or if the value is
out of the range allowed by a newly loaded application, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write
the Application EPROM default timer values to EEPROM on the Backplane.
Figure 5-28, Non-Vital Timers Menu.
The Non-Vital Timers Menu provides the ability to view non-vital timer statuses or enter non-vital timer
values. There are a maximum of 1023 non-vital timers that may be programmed by use of the CDU-1 or
Web GUI. When entering non-vital timer values, the user will be prompted to confirm the value before
it is saved to memory. The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status
Note: If an attempt is made to enter a Timer Value that is outside the range defined in the Application
EPROM, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will not allow the timer value to be changed.
Display< NON-VITAL TIMERS
Up N/A
Down Go to View Timer Statuses.

View Non-Vital Timer Statuses
The View Non-Vital Timer Statuses Menu provides the ability to view Timer Statuses and Timer Values.
The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the
application engineer.
Display< View Non-Vital Timer Statuses
Up Go to NON-VITAL TIMERS.
Down Displays Timer Statuses. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the Timer Statuses. Use the
Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer
Statuses.
Left Go to Enter Timer Values.
Right Go to Enter Timer Values.
Enter Non-Vital Timer Values
The Enter Non-Vital Timer Values Menu provides the ability to enter Timer Values. The status names on
the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer.
Display< Enter Non-Vital Timer Values
Up Go to NON-VITAL TIMERS.
Down Displays Timer Values. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view Timer Values. Use the Left
and Right Arrow Keys to select the Timer.
Press the ENTER Key to edit the Timer

Value. To edit a Timer Value, enter the new
Timer Value, press the ENTER Key to accept
the new setting, and verify the new setting is
correct by entering the confirmation number
displayed on the CDU.
Left Go to View Timer Statuses.
Right Go to View Timer Statuses.

CDU Program
Vital Inputs
WARNING For Slow Pick or Release Timers of 9 seconds or more, accuracy

will be within +10%/-0%.
For Slow Pick or Release Timers of less than 9 seconds, accuracy

will be within +1 second under worst case timing conditions.
Figure 5-29, Vital Inputs Menu.
The Vital Inputs Menu allows the user to check the status of the Vital Inputs on the VTI-2S, VIO-44S,
VIO-44R, VIO-86S, and IXC-20S Modules. A status of True indicates the input voltage is High. A status
of False indicates the input voltage is Low. The status names on the bottom row of the display varies
depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer. For the VIO-44R, VIO-86S, and IXC-
20S the user can set Slow Pick Time and Slow Release Times. The Slow Pick Time and Slow Release time
can be set at a value from 0-30 seconds. For the time entered through the CDU to be valid it must also be
between or equal to the Minimum and/or Maximum Slow Pick/Slow Release Time set in the Application
Logic. If the Slow Pick/Slow Release minimum and maximum are set at the same value in the application,
the time is not selectable through the CDU. Note that the Slow Pick/Slow release times are set to the
application defined default values when an application is selected.
Display< VITAL INPUTS

Up N/A
Down Displays the Vital Input module and Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
slot. ability to view the Vital Input modules and
slots they are installed in. Use the Left and
Right Arrow Keys to select the other Vital
Input modules.
Left Displays previous Functional Heading.
Right Displays next Functional Heading.

Display< VITAL INPUT module and slot

Up Go to Vital Input.
Down Displays the Vital Inputs Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the status of the Vital Inputs of
that module.
Left Displays previous Vital Input module Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select
and slot. the other Vital Input modules.
Right Displays next Vital Input module and
slot.
Vital Input Statuses
Display< VITAL INPUT Statuses

Up Displays Vital Input module and slot.
Down Displays the Vital Inputs Status for the Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
module. ability to view the status of the Vital Inputs of
that module.
Left Displays the Enter Slow Release
menu.
Right Displays the Enter Slow Pick menu.
Enter Slow Pick Time
Display< Enter Slow Pick Time

Up Displays Vital Input Module and Slot.
Down Displays Slow Pick Time.
Left Displays Vital Input Statuses.
Right Displays Enter Slow Release Menu.
Display< Slow Pick Time

Up Displays Enter Slow Pick Time.
Down N/A
Left Displays the previous Vital Input Slow
Pick Time.
Right Displays the next Vital Input Slow Pick
Time.
Enter Edit the slow pick time. Select the new time from the keypad and
then press ENTER to accept the new value.

CDU Program
Enter Slow Release Time
Display< Enter Slow Release Time

Up Displays Vital Input Module and Slot.
Down Displays the Slow Release Time.
Left Displays the Enter Slow Pick menu.
Right Displays Vital Input Statuses.
Display< Slow Release Time

Up Displays Enter Slow Release Time.
Down N/A
Left Displays the previous Vital Input Slow
Release Time.
Right Displays the next Vital Input Slow
Release Time.
Enter Edit the Slow Release Time. Select the new time from the keypad and
then press ENTER to accept the new value.

Code Select Inputs
Figure 5-30, Track Code Select Inputs Menu.
The Code Select Inputs Menu provides the ability to check the status of the code select input statuses for
each configured VIO-1010S. A status of True indicates the input is active. A status of False indicates is
not active. There are a total of 10 Code Select Input statuses for each configured slot.
Display< CODE SELECT INPUTS
Up N/A
Down Go to Slot n Code Selects. Go to Slot n Code Selects display.
Slot Code Selects
The Slot n Code Selects Menu is used to select a configured slot for code select input status viewing.
Display< Slot n Code Selects
Up Go to Code Selects Inputs.
Down Displays the status of code select Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
inputs for currently selected slot. ability to view the Code Select statuses for
the current slot. Use the Left and Right
Arrow Keys to select the desired slot.
Left Go to prior slot.
Right Go to next slot.

CDU Program
Code Select Inputs
This menu displays the statuses of Code Select Inputs for the currently selected slot.
Display< Slot n Code Selects

XXXXXX = TRUE
Up Go to Slot n Code Selects.
Down N/A
Left View the status of the prior Code Use the Right and Left Arrow Keys to view
Select Input for the currently selected the statuses of Code Select Inputs 1-10.
slot.
Right View the status of the next Code

Select Input for the currently selected
slot.
Vital Outputs
Figure 5-31, Vital Outputs Menu.
The Vital Outputs Menu allows the user to check the status of the Vital Outputs on the VIO-44S, VIO-44R,
and VIO-86S Modules. A status of True indicates the Vital Output voltage is High and a status of False
indicates the Vital Output voltage is Low. For the VIO-44R Module the user can chose to switch the active
Vital Output Bank to the redundant Vital Output Bank. When the user chooses to change the active bank,
the Vital Outputs are switched from the current active bank to the redundant bank. Bank selection for the
VIO-44R is not available if one or both of the Vital Output Banks are unhealthy.

Display< VITAL OUTPUTS

Up N/A
Down Displays the Vital Outputs Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the status of the Vital Outputs.
Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select
the Vital Output.
Display< VITAL OUTPUT Module and Slot

Up Go to Vital Outputs.
Down Displays the Vital Outputs Status.
Left Displays previous Vital Output Module.
and slot.
Right Displays next Vital Output Module.
and slot.
Display< VITAL OUTPUT Statuses*

Up Go to Vital Output Module and Slot.
Down Go to Displays Vital Output Statuses
for the selected module.
Left Go to Switch Active Bank.
Right Go to Switch Active Bank.
Display< SWITCH ACTIVE BANK*

Up Displays Vital Output Module and Slot.
Down N/A
Left Go to Vital Output Statuses.
Right Go to Vital Output Statuses.
Enter Confirmation page is displayed to If the user confirms (by pressing Enter) or
verify the user wants to switch the declines (by pressing Cancel), the Active
active bank. Bank Switchover menu is displayed. The
only indication the user will get that the Active
Bank Switchover has occurred is that the
Vital Outputs on the Module will be turned off
for 30 seconds.
*These menus are only available for the VIO-44R. These selections are not shown if the module is not a
VIO-44R or if for a health reason the VIO-44R cannot switch banks. In the other cases the display goes
directly from the Vital Output Module, Slot, and Status Menu to the Vital Output Status Menu.

CDU Program
Display VITAL OUTPUT STATUS

Up Displays the Vital Output Statuses.
Down N/A
Left Displays the next Vital Output
Status.
Right Displays the next Vital Output
Status.
Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs Quick Status Menu
The Vital Inputs and Vital Outputs menus can be accessed through the Home Menu and pressing the Down
arrow for the Quick Status menus. These menus give the statuses for each Vital Input and Vital Output in
the system by slot.
Display< VITAL OUTPUT STATUS

Up Displays the previous function heading.
Down Displays the next function heading.

Left Displays the previous module status
information.
Right Displays the next module status
information.

Track Decoder Outputs
Figure 5-33, Track Decoder Outputs Menu.
The Track Decoder Outputs Menu provides the ability to check the status of the track decoder output
statuses for each configured VIO-1010. A status of True indicates the output is active. A status of False
indicates the output is not active.
Display< TRACK DCODER OUTPUTS
Up N/A
Down Go to Slot n Decoder Output. Go to Slot Selection Display.
Slot Decoder Outputs
The Slot n Decoder Out Menu is used to select a configured slot for viewing decoder output statuses.
Display< Slot n Decoder Out

Up Go to TRACK DCODER OUTPUTS.
Down Displays the status of the track Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
decoder outputs for currently selected ability to view the currently selected slot. Use
slot. the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the
desired slot.
Left Go to prior slot.
Right Go to next slot.

CDU Program
Decoder Outputs
This menu displays the statuses of the Decoder Outputs for the currently selected slot.
Display< Slot n Decoder Out

XXXXXX = TRUE
Up Go to Slot n Decoder Out.
Down N/A
Left View the status the prior Decoder Use the Left and Right Arrow Keys to view
Output for the currently selected slot. the status of Decoder Outputs 1-10.
Right View the status the next Decoder

Output for the currently selected slot.
Vital Configuration
Vital Configuration Settings entered through the CDU-1 are stored in a EEPROM on the Backplane. During
normal EC5 operation, these values are used instead of the default Vital Configuration Settings stored in
Application EPROM on the CI Module. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will use the Application EPROM Vital
Configuration Default Settings when an Application Selection occurs via the CDU-1 or if the settings stored
on the Backplane become corrupted. If the Vital Configuration Settings stored on the Backplane become
corrupted, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will attempt to re-write the Vital Configuration Settings to EEPROM on the
Backplane. If the Application EPROM is replaced, the Vital Configuration Setting must be checked against
those in the Application Circuit Plan.
Figure 5-34, Vital Configuration Menu.
The Vital Configuration Menu is used to view and edit vital configuration switch settings. The Vital
Configuration Settings are used as vital switches in the application software for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. They
allow the user to vitally select an application path once the equipment is installed, without having to change
the Application EPROM. For safety reasons, the system will check its non-volatile memory, on the
system’s backplane, to ensure that the values stored there are usable. For example, if the system was new
or never used, the system has no prior settings stored in it, the system would determine that its memory is
empty and store the default settings from the Application EPROM. The default setting for the Vital
Configuration Settings are defined by the application engineer. The application engineer can decide if the
default state is True or False for each Vital Configuration Setting. There are a total of 32 vital configuration
switches that can be configured for application specific operations.

The status names on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the
application engineer.
Display< VITAL CONFIGURATION
Up N/A
Down Go to View Vital Configuration.
View Configuration
The View Configuration Menu provides the ability to view the system's Vital Configuration Settings.
Display< View Configuration
Up Go to VITAL CONFIGURATION.
Down Displays the Vital Configuration Press the Right and Left Arrow Keys to view
Settings. additional Vital Configuration Settings.
Left Go to Edit Configuration.
Right Go to Edit Configuration.
Edit Configuration
The Edit Configuration Menu provides the ability to edit the system's Vital Configuration Settings.
Display< Edit Configuration
Up Go to VITAL CONFIGURATION.
Down Displays the Vital Configuration Press the ENTER Key to edit the Vital
Setting. Configuration Setting. Press the Up or Down
Arrow Keys to toggle the status, press the
ENTER Key to accept the new setting, and
verify the new setting is correct.
Left Go to View Vital Configuration.
Right Go to View Vital Configuration.

CDU Program
Vital Communication
WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that

the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the
serious injury.
WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on

an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the
application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the
application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into
service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in
death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed
information)
Figure 5-35, Vital Communication Menu
This menu provides the ability to read current vital settings and status values and, set the vital parameters to
the application default values, and selectively modify vital parameters associated with vital remote
communication. The specific parameters shown are dependent upon the protocol selection (RP2000 vs.
RP2009).

Display< VITAL COMM
Up N/A
Down Go to Ports.
Ports
Ports is the menu beneath which are the menus for reading and setting the parameters. The menu adjacent to
Ports allows the defaulting of the vital parameters, with the exception of Network IDs associated with vital
communications.
Display< Ports
Up Go To VITAL COMM.
Down Go to Vital Port.
Left Go to Default Vital Remote Defaults Vital Parameters only

Parameters.
Right Go to Default Vital Remote

Parameters.
Vital Ports
The Vital Ports allows the selection of the port of interest from the ports defined for vital communication in
the loaded application.
Display< Vital Ports
Up Go to ports.
Down Go to Vital Remote.
Left Go to Previous Port. Only if more than one port is defined.
Right Go to Next Port. Only if more than one port is defined.
Vital Remote
Vital Remote allows the selection of a specific remote that is associated with the selected vital
communication port. The Vital Remote menu displays the remote number as well as the Network ID value
for that remote.

CDU Program
Display< Vital Remote
Up Go to Vital Port.
Down Go to View Statuses.
Left Go to Previous Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined.
Right Go to Next Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined.

The items under the Vital Remote menu are detailed in Figure 5-36.
Vital Communication, Vital Remote
The menu provides the ability to view protocol statuses, input values, output values, receive and
transmission statistics and the ability to edit the configuration for each vital remote.
Figure 5-36, Vital Remote N
Display< Vital Remote
Up Go to Vital Port.
Down Go to View Statuses.
Left Go to Previous Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined.
Right Go to Next Remote. Only if more than one remote is defined.

View Statuses
The menu allows the values of the protocol statuses (statuses that are not remote inputs or outputs) to be
viewed. Only statuses defined in the application or by the protocol version selected are displayed.
Display< View Statuses
Up Go to Vital Remote.
Down Go to Link Status. Moving left or right from Link Status shows
the other protocol statuses per the diagram.
Left Go to Edit Remote Config.
Right Go to View inputs.
View Inputs
The menu allows the values of the remote input statuses to be viewed.
Display< View Inputs
Down Go to Remote input 1. Moving left or right from the first remote input
status shows the other input statuses.
Left Go to View Statuses.
Right Go to View Outputs.
View Outputs
The menu allows the values of the remote output statuses to be viewed.
Display< View Outputs
Down Go to Remote output 1. Moving left or right from the first remote
output status shows the other output
statuses.
Left Go to View Inputs.
Right Go to View Rx Statistics.

CDU Program
View Receive (RX) Statistics
The menu displays statistics associated with received messages. The number of received Good Messages,
Bad Messages, Unused Messages, the number of times the link has gone down and the number of
Acknowledge timeouts (RP2009) are shown. The counts depicted are the number of items since the last
system reset or parameter value roll over.
Display< View Rx Statistics
Down Go to Good Msgs. Moving left or right from Good Msgs shows
the other statistics
Left Go to View Outputs.
Right Go to View Tx statistics.
View Transmit (TX) Statistics
The menu displays statistics associated with transmitted messages. The number of Sent messages, Unused
Messages, and Update Period timeouts (RP2009) are shown. The counts depicted are the number of items
since the last system reset or parameter value roll over.
Display< View Tx Statistics
Down Go to Sent Msgs. Moving left or right from Sent Msgs shows
the other statistics
Left Go to View Rx statistics.
Right Go to Selected HMI.
Selected Heartbeat Message Interval (HMI)
This menu displays the currently selected HMI (HMI 0 through HMI 3) and the value of the selected HMI
in milliseconds.
Display< Selected HMI
Down N/A
Left Go to Edit Remote Config.
Right Go to View Tx statistics.

Vital Communication, Edit Remote Configuration
The menu and submenus provide the ability to view and update the various vital parameters associated with
the selected remote. Only those parameters associated with the selected protocol will be shown in the menu.
WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that

the proper values are set for each vital remote parameter in the
serious injury.
WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on

an ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the
application circuit plans. If this information is not available from the
application circuit plans, do not put that vital remote link into
service until this is corrected. Failure to comply could result in
death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more detailed
information)
Figure 5-37, Edit Remote Config

CDU Program
Display< Edit Remote Config
Down Go to Remote Enabled / Disabled. The current value (enabled or disabled) is

shown.
Left Go to Selected HMI.
Right Go to View Statuses.
Remote Enable / Disable
The menu allows the remote to be enabled or disabled without changing any of the other parameters. A
disabled remote will not transmit nor respond to any communication traffic.
Display< Remote *
Enable / Disable
Up Go to Edit Remote Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the state of

the remote. Use the up and down arrows to
make the selection. Press the ENTER key to
confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL
to retain the current value.
Left Go to Ack Timeout.
Right Go to Remote Protocol.
Remote Protocol
The remote protocol menu allows selection of the protocol version to use. If the protocol version is fixed
by the application program, the value cannot be changed via the CDU-1.
Display< Remote Protocol *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the protocol

value. Use the up and down arrows to make
the selection. Press the ENTER key to
confirm the selected value. Press CANCEL
Left Go to Remote Enabled / Disabled.
Right Go to Local Network ID.

Local Network ID
The Local Network ID parameter is the vital identification of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to the associated remote
device. This value must be confirmed on the circuit plan for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit.
Display< Local Network ID *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Local

Network ID value. Use the number keys to
enter the correct value. Press the ENTER
key to confirm the selected value. Press
CANCEL to retain the current value.
Left Go to Remote Protocol.
Right Go to Remote Network ID.
Remote Network ID
The Remote Network ID parameter is the vital identification of the remote unit to the associated
ElectroLogIXS/EC5. This value must be confirmed on the circuit plan for the specific remote device attached
to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit.
Display< Remote Network ID *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Remote

Network ID value. Use the number keys to
enter the correct value. Press the ENTER
Left Go to Local Network ID.
Right Go to Max Send Time Diff.

CDU Program
Max Send Time Difference
The Max Send Time Diff parameter sets the allowed difference between two successive valid messages from
a remote unit.
Display< Max Send Time Diff *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Max

Send Time Diff value. Use the number keys
to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER
Left Go to Remote Network ID.
Right Go to Max Recv Time Diff.
Max Recv Time Difference
The Max Recv Time Diff parameter sets the allowed difference between a message sent from the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and a response from the remote unit.
Display< Max Recv Time Diff *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Max

Recv Time Diff value. Use the number keys
to enter the correct value. Press the ENTER
Left Go to Max Send Time Diff.
Right Go to HMI Timers.

HMI Timers
When RP2009 is the selected protocol, up to four Heartbeat Message Interval Timers may be used by the
application. These timers are used to balance network loading and the timeliness of determining link
health.
Display< HMI Timers
Down HMI 0 Moving left or right from HMI0 displays the

value of the other defined HMI timers. For
each HMI timer, Press the ENTER key to
change the timer value using the number
keys. Press Enter to confirm the value or
Left Go to Recv Send Time Diff.
Right Go to Update Period.
Update Period
The Update Period parameter sets the rate at which messages are transmitted (RP2000) or the rate messages
are transmitted while waiting for an acknowledgement (RP2009).
Display< Update Period *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Update

Period value using the number keys. Press
Enter to confirm the value or CANCEL to
retain the current value.
Left Go to HMI Timers.
Right Go to Ack Timeout.

CDU Program
Ack Timeout
The Ack Timeout parameter sets the amount of time the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 waits for a remote
acknowledgement after a message has been sent using RP2009.
Display< Update Period *
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Ack

Timeout value using the number keys.
Press Enter to confirm the value or CANCEL
Left Go to Update Period.
Right Remote Enabled / Disabled.

Office Communication
Figure 5-38, Office Communication Menu.
The Office Comm Menu allows access to menus for viewing Office Controls, indications, and Codeline
Statuses.
Display< Office COMM
Up N/A
Down Go to View Controls.

CDU Program
View Controls
The View Controls Menu provides the ability to view Office Control Statuses. The status names on the
bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer.
Display< View Controls

Up Go to Office Comm.
Down Displays the Office Control Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the Office Control Status. Use
the Left and Right Arrow Keys to select the
desired Office Control Status.
Left Go to View Codeline Status.
Right Go to View Indications.
View Indications
The View Indications Menu provides the ability to view Office Indication Statuses. The status names on
the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status names assigned by the application engineer.
Display< View Indications

Down Displays the Office Indication Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the Office Indication Status.
the desired Office Indication Status.
Left Go to View Controls.
Right Go to View Codeline Status.
View Codeline Status
The View Codeline Status Menu provides the ability to view Codefail and Linkfail Statuses. The status
name on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status name assigned by the application
engineer.
Display< View LCP Health

Down Displays the LCP Health Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the Codeline Statuses.
Left Go to View Indications.
Right Go to View Controls.

Local Control Panel
Local Control Panel
View LCP Health View Controls View Indicators
View LCP Health View Controls View Indicators

LCPHealth = TRUE LCP-1 = TRUE LCPO-1 = TRUE
373-0518
Figure 5-39, Local Control Panel Menu
The LCP Menu allows access to menus for LCP controls, indications and LCP Health Status.
.
Display LOCAL CONTROL PANEL

Up N/A
Down Go to View Controls.
View Controls
The View Controls Menu provides the ability to view Local Control Panel Control Statuses. The status
engineer.
Display View Controls

Up Go to Local Control Panel.
Down Displays the LCP Control Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows

CDU Program
View Indications
The View Indications Menu provides the ability to view Local Control Panel Indication Statuses. The status
engineer.
Display View Indications

Down Displays the LCP Indication Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows
View LCP Health
The View LCP Health Menu provides the ability to view the Local Control Panel Health Status. The status
name on the bottom row of the display will vary depending on the status name assigned by the application
engineer.
Display View LCP Health

Down Displays the LCP Health Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key allows
Left N/A
Right N/A

Non-Vital I/O
Figure 5-40, Non-Vital I/O Menu.
The Non-Vital I/O Menu provides the ability to check the status of the non-vital inputs and outputs. Each
non-vital I/O has the capability to being used as an input and an output. With EC5, the first non-vital I/O is
generally sed for POR (Power Off Relay) indication, if present. Remaining non-vital I/Os are used for
approach lighting detection. A status of True indicates the I/O is active. A status of False indicates the I/O
is inactive.
Note: There are four non-Vital I/O statuses for each VLD-C6S Module installed in the system.
Display< NON-VITAL I/O
Up N/A
Down Displays the Non-Vital Inputs Status. Pressing the Down Arrow Key provides the
ability to view the status of the Non-Vital I/O.
the Non-Vital I/O.

CDU Program
Battery Alarm
Figure 5-41, Battery Alarms Menu.
The Battery Alarm Menu provides the ability to view or set the High and Low Battery Alarm Limits. The
High and Low Battery Alarm Limits define the acceptable voltage range of the system battery. If the
battery voltage exceeds the High Battery Alarm Limit, the system will issue a High Battery Alarm. If the
battery voltage drops below the Low Battery Alarm Limit, the system will issue a Low Battery Alarm.
High and Low Battery Alarms are displayed on the CDU-1.
Display< BATTERY ALARMS
Up N/A
Down Go to High Battery Alarm.
Note: If a Ground Fault Detector module is installed in the system, a High Battery Alarm limit will be
issued when the system battery voltage exceeds the lower of the High Battery Alarm Limits set via
the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus. Similarly, a Low Battery Alarm limit will be
issued when the system battery voltage falls below the higher of the Low Battery Alarm limits set via
the Battery Alarm or Ground Fault Detector menus.

High Battery Alarms
The High Battery Alarms Menu provides the ability to view or set the High Battery Alarm Limit. The
default value for the High Battery Alarm is 16.5 VDC and may be set in 0.1 VDC increments.
Display< High Battery Alarm
Up Go to BATTERY ALARMS.
Down N/A Press the Enter Button to change the High

Battery Alarm value. After the new value has
been entered, press the ENTER Key and
verify the new High Battery Alarm Limit is
correct.
Left Go to Low Battery Alarm.
Right Go to Low Battery Alarm.
Low Battery Alarms
The Low Battery Alarms Menu provides the ability to view or set the Low Battery Alarm Limit. The
default value for the Low Battery Alarm is 8.0 VDC and may be set in 0.1 VDC increments.
Display< Low Battery Alarm
Up Go to BATTERY ALARMS.
Down N/A Press the Enter Button to change the Low

Battery Alarm Limit. After the new value has
been entered, press the ENTER Key and
verify the new Low Battery Alarm Limit is
correct.
Left Go to High Battery Alarm.
Right Go to High Battery Alarm.

CDU Program
Ground Fault Detect
GROUND FAULT DETECT

Note: B2 and B3 will show "Not Connected" if external batteries are
not supplied to the GFD-1 front panel connector.
B1: Battery 1 * B2: Battery 2 * B3: Battery 3 *

Not Connected Not Connected
ENTER Battery 1
Name >
Battery 1 Grnd Fault Threshold Ground Fault Time

B1: No Fault Cal. Volts = 13.4V* R = 10 K W (1.34mA) Time = 5 sec*
OR ENTER ENTER ENTER
B1+: Ground Fault B1 Voltage = 13.4 V R = 10 K W (1.34mA) Fault Time = 5 sec
Press ENTER to Clear New Voltage > . to change New Time >
OR
B1+: Ground Fault
Press ENTER to Clear Low Battery Alarm High Battery Alarm
Voltage = 8.0V* Voltage = 16.5V*
ENTER ENTER
Low Alarm = 8.0 V High Alarm = 16.5 V
New Voltage > . New Voltage > .
373-0175
Ground fault detect menu allows access to menus for viewing/clearing batteries B1, B2, and B3 ground
fault statuses as well as setup information of battery name, Ground Fault Threshold, Ground Fault Time,
Battery Calibration, and High/Low Battery alarm settings.
Display< Ground Fault Detect
Up N/A
Down Go to B1: Battery 1. Battery 1 is the default name for B1. B1 is

always assigned to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
chassis battery. The user can assign the
battery name.
Left Go to BATTERY ALARM.
Right Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.

The B1: Battery 1 menu allows access to menus for viewing/clearing battery B1's ground fault status as
well as setup information of battery name, Ground Fault Threshold, Ground Fault Time, Battery
Calibration, and High/Low Battery alarm settings specific to battery B1.
Display< B1: Battery 1 *

Up Go to GROUND FAULT DETECT.
Down Go to B1 Fault Status. The fault status screen will show either “B1:
No Fault” or “B1x: Ground Fault Press ENTER
to Clear where x is + or - (the battery pole on
which the fault was detected)
Left Go to B3: Battery 3.

Right Go to B2: Battery 2.
ENTER Go to battery name input screen for The user can enter a unique name for battery
B1. 1 if desired via the CDU keys. Once the
name has been selected, press the ENTER
key to save the name and return to the B1:
(Name) menu.
The B1 Fault status menu allows viewing and/or clearing of battery B1's ground fault status.
Display< B1: No Fault or B1x: Ground Fault (x = + or -)

Up Go to B1: Battery 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key from the “B1x: Ground
Fault” menu to clear the Ground Fault
indication.
Left Go to B1 High Battery Alarm.
Right Go to Battery 1 (or user defined name
for B1) Voltage Calibration menu.
The Battery 1 Voltage Calibration menu is used to set the nominal voltage of battery 1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
chassis battery). The nominal, or calibrated, battery voltage is used to estimate an equivalent leakage
current value when setting the Ground Fault Detection threshold.
Display< Grnd Fault Threshold

Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the calibrated
(nominal) voltage for battery B1
(ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery).
Left Go to B1 Fault Status.
Right Go to Grnd Fault Threshold.

CDU Program
The Grnd Fault Threshold menu is used to set the threshold for declaring a ground fault. The user can scroll
through threshold values of 2 KΩ to 20 KΩ of leakage resistance in 2 KΩ steps. An equivalent leakage
current in milliamps associated with each of leakage resistance values is presented to aid in the proper
threshold selection. The leakage current estimate is the calibrated battery voltage divided by the leakage
resistance value.
Display< Grnd Fault Threshold

Down N/A Press the ENTER key from the “ Grnd Fault
Threshold” menu to scroll through available
thresholds. Press the ENTER key while the
desired threshold is displayed to set that
threshold, or CANCEL to return.
Left Go to B1: Battery 1 Voltage
Calibration menu.
Right Go to Ground Fault Time menu.
The Ground Fault Time menu is used to set the time duration in which a ground fault must be present prior
to declaring the ground fault. The user can scroll through Ground Fault Time values of 5 seconds to 30
seconds in 1-second increments.
Display< Ground Fault Time

Down N/A Press the ENTER key from the “ Ground
Fault Time” menu to scroll through available
time selections. Press the ENTER key while
the desired time is displayed to set that time,
or CANCEL to return.
Left Go to Grnd Fault Threshold.
Right Go to Low Battery Alarm.
The Low Battery Alarm submenu of B1: Battery 1 allows the user to set a low battery threshold for battery
1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). Note that if a VTI module(s) is in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
chassis along with a GFD module, two battery alarm menus will be available: the top level battery alarm
menus for batteries B1, B2, and B3 under the Ground Fault Detect top level menu. The VTI module, if installed,
monitors the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery, which is equivalent to GFD battery B1.
Display< Low Battery Alarm

Down N/A Press the ENTER key from the “Low Battery
Alarm” menu to modify the alarm threshold.
Left Go to Ground Fault Time.
Right Go to High Battery Alarm.

The High Battery Alarm submenu of B1: Battery 1 allows the user to set a high battery threshold for battery
1 (the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery). The same note as on Low Battery Alarm applies here, i.e., if
both a VTI-2S and GFD-1 are installed , both will be monitoring the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 chassis battery.
Display< High Battery Alarm

Down N/A Press the ENTER key from the “High Battery
Alarm” menu to modify the alarm threshold.
Left Go to Low Battery Alarm.
Right Go to B1 Fault Status.
Local User Confirmation

Changes from the default setup parameters, within the limits allowed by the application program, for the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit must be made using the CDU or Web GUI. Local User Confirmation is used by the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to ensure that changes to the unit’s parameters are made locally with the CDU.
Figure 5-43, Local User Confirmation Menu

CDU Program
System Configuration
Figure 5-44, System Configuration Menu.
The System Configuration Menu is used to set the time and date, to view and print recorder information,
and to setup office and diagnostic port communications. The first line of the display indicates the menu
title and the second line of the display indicates the system status.
Display< SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

System Status
Up N/A
Down Go to Alarms.

Alarms
After hitting Enter

the alarm is
erased and the
display returns to
the alarm-scroll
window
This menu provides access to the System Alarms Menu.
Display< Alarms
Up Go to SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
Down Press the Down Button to view System

Alarms.
Left Go to Recorder Battery.
Right Go to Log Management.
System Alarms
The System Alarms Menu provides the ability to view and clear system alarms.
Display< Alarm n (of n)

alarm message
Up Go to Alarms.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to erase the system

alarm displayed on the CDU-1.
Left Display additional System Alarms.
Right Display additional System Alarms.

CDU Program
Log Management
This menu allows access to the Error Log, and Data Log Menus.
Display< Log Management
Down Go to Error Log.
Left Go to Alarms.
Right Go to Date/Time.
Error Log
This menu provides the ability to display, erase or print the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.

Display< Error Log
Up Go to Log Management.
Down Go to View Error Logs.
Left Go to Data Log.
Right Go to Train Record Log.
View Error Log
The menu provides the ability to display the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< View Error Logs

Logs = nn
Up Go to Error Log.
Down View Error Logs. While viewing Error Logs, press RIGHT to
view the next oldest entry, LEFT to view the
next newest entry, or down to view all of the
text of the current entry. When viewing the
full text of the entry, the text will automatically
scroll. To stop the automatic scroll and
manually scroll, press either LEFT or RIGHT.
Left Go to Print Error Log.
Right Go to Erase Error Log.
Erase Error Log
The menu provides the ability to erase the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< Erase Error Logs

Logs = nn
Up Go to Error Log.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to erase the Error

Logs.
Left Go to View Error Logs.
Right Go to Print Error Log.

CDU Program
Print Error Log
The menu provides the ability to print the Error Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< Print Error Log
Up Go to Error Log.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to print the Error Logs.
Left Go to Erase Error Logs.
Right Go to View Error Logs.
Data Logs
This menu provides the ability to display or erase the Data Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< Data Log= nnn
Up Go to LOG MANAGEMENT.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to erase the Data

Logs.
Left Go to Print Error Logs.
Right Go to Print Data Logs.
Print Data Logs
This menu provides the ability to print the Data Logs recorded by the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< Print Data Logs
Up Go to LOG MANAGEMENT.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to print the Data Logs
recorded by the EC5.
Left Go to Data Logs.
Right Go to Error Logs.

Date/Time
Figure 5-48, Date/Time Configuration Menu
The Date/Time Menu allows access to menus for display and modification date and time options.
Display Date/Time
Up Go to System Configuration.
Down Go to Date/Time *
Time= HH:MM:SS
Left Go to Log Management.
Right Go to Diagnostic Port.

CDU Program
Time
The Time Menu provides the ability to display and set the current time.
Display Date/Time *
Time= HH:MM:SS
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time.

Once the Time has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Sync= Code Line.
Date= HH:MM:SS
Date
The Date Menu provides the ability to display and set the current date.
Display Date/Time *
Date= HH:MM:SS
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Date.

Once the Date has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Time= HH:MM:SS
Time Zone= 6

Time Zone
The Time Zone Menu provides the ability to display and set the local time zone reference used for adjusting
incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages. Time
zone 5 represents Eastern Standard Time (EST) and 8 represents Pacific Standard Time (PST)
Display Date/Time *
Time Zone= 6
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Time

Zone. Use the UP and DOWN keys to
select the Time Zone. Once the Time
Zone has been set, press the ENTER
key.
Date= HH:MM:SS
Config Daylit Saving.
The Config Daylit Saving Menu provides the ability to display and set parameters associated with Daylight
Savings Time (DST). DST is used for adjusting incoming time references contained in Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT) based ATCS time messages.
Display Date/Time *
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down Go to Config DST *

DST = Enabled
Time Zone= 6
Request Time Update.

CDU Program
DST
The DST Menu provides the ability to display and set whether Daylight Savings Time is locally enabled.

DST = Enabled
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set DST. Use

the UP and DOWN keys to select DST.
Once DST has been set, press the
ENTER key.

DST End= mo:MM wk:W

DST Strt
The DST Strt Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST starts. For years prior to 2007,
this is the first week of April. For 2007 and later, this is the second week of March. Any week (first (1),
second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the start of DST.

Up Go to Date/Time.

start week. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the DST start week.
Once the DST start week has been set,

DST = Enabled

DST End= mo:MM wk:W

DST End
The DST End Menu provides the ability to display and set the week DST ends. For years prior to 2007,
this is the last week of October. For 2007 and later, this is the first week of November. Any week (first
(1), second (2), third (3), fourth (4), and last (5)) of any month can be selected for the end of DST.

DST End= mo:MM wk:W
Up Go to Date/Time.

end week. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the DST end week.
Once the DST end week has been set,


DST = Enabled
Request Time Update
The Request Time Update Menu provides the ability to transmit a time update request message over an
ATCS office port.
Display Date/Time *
Request Time Update
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to transmit an

ATCS request time update message.
confirm the transmission or the
CANCEL key to abort.
Config Daylit Saving.
Sync= Code Line.

CDU Program
Sync
This menu provides the ability to display the current external time reference synchronization option. When
this option is not set to none, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will automatically update its local time whenever the time
reference received on the selected sync source differs from ElectroLogIXS/EC5 local time by 2 or more
seconds. Available sync sources include EMP, SNTP, Code Line, Vital Remote, and HAWK. The EMP
option uses time update messages received from the EMP time source, SNTP receives messages from a
SNTP time server. The Code Line option uses time update messages received from the Office Port for the
external time reference and requires the selection of an Office Protocol that supports this
feature (e.g., GENISYS® or ATCS). The Vital Remote option receives its external reference through time
update messages received over its vital communication interface. The HAWK option receives its external
reference through message time stamps received from the HAWK recorder.
Display Date/Time *
Sync= Code Line
Up Go to Date/Time.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Sync

Source. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the Sync Source. Once the
Sync Source has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Request Time Update.
Time= HH:MM:SS

Diagnostic Port
Figure 5-49, Diagnostic Port Menu.
Connector
The Connector Menu provides the ability to display and set the diagnostic terminal’s physical port: VPM or
CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA.
The Diagnostic Port Menu allows access to menus for setting the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop
Bits for the Diagnostic Port and for displaying the Flow Control of the Diagnostic Port.
Display< Connector

Up Go to DIAGNOSTIC PORT.
Down Go to Connector. Press the ENTER Key to set the Connector.
Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the
Connector. Once the Connector has been
set, press the ENTER key.
Left Go to Flow.
Right Go to Baud Rate.
Baud Rate
This menu provides the ability to set the Baud Rate of the Diagnostic Port.
Display< Diagnostic Port *

Baud Rate: nnnn
Up Go to Diagnostic Port.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Diagnostic
Port Baud Rate setting. Once the Baud
Rate has been set, press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Connector.
Right Go to Parity.

CDU Program
Parity
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Diagnostic Port. Parity may be set to
Even (even parity), Odd (odd parity), or None (no parity).

Parity = None
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Parity of the
Diagnostic Port. The Parity may be set to
None, Even, or Odd. Once the Parity has
been set press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Baud Rate.
Right Go to Data Bits.
Data Bits
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Data Bits of the Diagnostic Port. The number of Data
Bits may set to 5, 6, 7, or 8.

Data Bits = n
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Data Bits of
the EC5. The Data Bits may be set to the
following values 8, 7, 6, 5. Once the Data
Bits have been set press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Parity.
Right Go to Stop Bits.

Stop Bits
This menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Diagnostic Port. The
number of Stop Bits may set to 1, 1.5, or 2.

Stop Bits: n
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the number of

Stop Bits. The Stop Bits may be set to the
following values 1, 1.5, or 2. Once the
number of Stop Bits has been set press the
ENTER Key.
Left Go to Data Bits.
Right Go to Flow.
Flow
This menu provides the ability to display the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the Diagnostic
Port.
Display< Diagnostic Port

Flow Control = None
Down N/A
Left Go to Stop Bits.
Right Go to Baud Rate.

CDU Program
Ethernet Config
The Ethernet Configuration menu provides the ability to set the IP parameters for each of the two Ethernet
ports along with the Web GUI (HTTP) TCP Port number, Trusted Source, and Telnet settings.
373-0656
Figure 5-50, Ethernet Config Menu.
Display Ethernet Config
Up N/A
Down Go to Ethernet Port 1.
Left Previous Functional Heading.
Right Next Functional Heading.

Ethernet Port
The Ethernet Port menu displays the current IP address of the selected Ethernet Port.
Display< Ethernet Port 1

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Up Ethernet Config.
Down Port 1 IP Address *
Left Set Enet Defaults.
Right Ethernet Port 2.
Port IP Address
The Port IP Address menu provides the means to set or change the IP address of the selected Port (Ethernet
Port 1 or Ethernet Port 2). The format of the address is four address values separated by periods (e.g.
192.168.1.12). An entered value must be in the range of 0 to 255 and all four values must be entered or the
address will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than three digits, use the right arrow key to
advance to the next number position.
Display< Port 1 IP Address *
Up Ethernet Port 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the IP

address for the Ethernet Port. Use the
numeric keypad to enter the values of the
address. Use the RIGHT arrow key to
advance to the next address value. Use the
LEFT arrow key to clear erroneous digit
entries or move to the previous value. Press
the ENTER key to confirm the IP Address
update. Press CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Port 1 Subnet Mask *
Right Port 1 Subnet Mask *

CDU Program
Port Subnet Mask
The Port Subnet Mask menu provides the means to set or change the Subnet Mask value of the selected Port
(Ethernet Port 1 or Ethernet Port 2). The format of the mask is four values separated by periods (e.g.
255.255.192.0). An entered value must be 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 and all four values
must be entered or the Subnet Mask will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than three digits, use
the right arrow key to advance to the next number position.
The binary value of the Subnet Mask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of
consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed
and any non-255 value must be preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value
but 255.192.240.0 is not. Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the 240 value
is now preceded by values of 255 in the first two positions.
Display< Port 1 Subnet Mask *
Up Ethernet Port 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Subnet

Mask for the Ethernet Port. Use the numeric
keypad to enter the values of the Subnet
mask. Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance
to the next address value. Use the LEFT
arrow key to clear erroneous digit entries or
move to the previous value. Press the
ENTER key to confirm the Subnet Mask
setting
Left Port 1 IP Address *
Right Port 1 IP Address *

Default Gateway
The Default Gateway menu provides a means to set the IP address of the Default Gateway. The Default
Gateway is the IP Address of the router to be used when IP messages are to be sent outside of the local
network when no other routing information has been set in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Routing Table.
Display< Default Gateway
Up Ethernet Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Default

Gateway IP address. Use the numeric
keypad to enter the values of the address.
Use the RIGHT arrow key to advance to the
next address value. Use the LEFT arrow key
to clear erroneous digit entries or move to the
previous value. Press the ENTER key to
confirm the Default Gateway IP address
setting.
Left Ethernet Port 2.
Right HTTP Settings.
HTTP Settings
The HTTP Settings menus provide the means to set parameters associated with the Web GUI (web browser)
access to ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< HTTP Settings
Up Ethernet Config.
Down HTTP TCP Port # *
Left Default Gateway.
Right Telnet Settings.

CDU Program
HTTP TCP Port Number
The HTTP TCP Port Number menu provides the means to change the TCP Port Number that is used for
HTTP (web browser) access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The default value is TCP Port Number 80 (the
industry standard).
Display< HTTP TCP Port # *
Up HTTP Settings.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the HTTP

TCP Port Number. Use the numeric keypad
to enter the new value. Press the ENTER
key again to confirm the new Port Number
value. Press CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Trusted Source Network 2.
Right Trusted Source Network 1.
Trusted Source
The Trusted Source menu provides the ability to enable or disable two Trusted Source values (Trusted
Source 1 and / or Trusted Source 2) for HTTP (web browser) access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The
Trusted Source parameter has two portions: The Trusted Network IP address and the Netmask that indicates
the portion of the Network IP address that is to be used as the acceptance criteria. The numbers entered are
decimal equivalents of the eight bits for each of the four octet entries.
For example, if the Network IP is set to 192.168.1.12 and the associated Netmask value is set to
255.255.255.255 (indicating all bits of the Network IP are significant), ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds
to HTTP messages sourced from the one IP address (192.168.1.12). If, however, the Netmask is set to
255.0.0.0, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will respond to a HTTP message sourced from any IP address with 192 as
the first value.
Trusted Source Netmask values follow the same rules as IP subnet masks. Specifically, the binary value of
the Netmask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only
the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed and any non-255 value must be
preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value but 255.192.240.0 is not.
Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the non-255 value (240) is now
preceded by 255s in the first and second position.
If both Trusted Sources are disabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to an HTTP message from any IP address.
If one or both Trusted Sources are enabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 uses the enabled values for both Ethernet
ports as acceptance criteria.

Trusted Source Network 1
Display< Trusted Source

Network 1
Up HTTP Settings.
Down Trusted Source 1

Enabled =
Left Go to HTTP TCP Port #.
Right Go to Trusted Source 2.
Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable
Display< Trusted Source 1

Enabled =
Up Trusted Source
Network 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Enable /

Disable state for Trusted Source 1. Use the
UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle between
options and press ENTER once to accept the
value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Trusted Source 1 Netmask. Press the ENTER key to change the value of
the Trusted Source Netmask for Trusted
Source 1. Values must be 0, 128, 192, 224,
240, 248, 252, 254, or 255.
Right Trusted Source 1 IP Address. Press the ENTER key to change the
value of the Trusted Source Network. IP
identifier for Trusted Source 1. Values
must be between 0 and 255.

CDU Program
Telnet Settings
The Telnet Settings menus provide the means to set parameters associated with Telnet access to the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Display< Telnet Settings
Up Ethernet Config.
Down Telnet Port 1 Enabled.
Left HTTP Settings.
Right Set Ethernet Defaults.
Note: Setting Ethernet defaults will cause the DHCP Server settings to default. The Default settings are:
For Ethernet Port 1,

The DHCP Client Gateway Default is 192.168.0.11;
The DHCP IP Pool Start Address is 192.168.0.12
The DHCP IP Pool End Address is 192.168.0.44
For Ethernet Port 2,

The DHCP Client Gateway Default is 192.168.1.12;
The DHCP IP Pool Start Address is 192.168.1.13
The DHCP IP Pool End Address is 192.168.1.45
Telnet Port 1 Enable / Disable
Telnet access may be enabled or disabled for each Ethernet port. The default state, unless otherwise set in
the application, is disabled.
Display< Telnet Port 1 *

Enabled =
Up Telnet Settings.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to enable or disable

Telnet for the first Ethernet Port. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select Enabled or
Disabled. Once the desired state has been
Left Trusted Source Network 2.
Right Telnet Port 2 Enabled.

Telnet Username
The Telnet Username can not be modified via the CDU-1. The Web Interface must be used to change the
Telnet Username.
Display< Telnet Username

admin
Up Telnet Settings.
Down N/A
Left Telnet Port 2 Enabled.
Right Telnet Password.
Telnet Password
The Telnet Password can not be modified via the CDU-1. The Web Interface must be used to change the
Telnet Password.
Display< Telnet Password

telnet
Up Telnet Settings.
Down N/A
Left Telnet Username.
Right Telnet TCP Port Number.

CDU Program
Telnet TCP Port Number
The Telnet TCP Port Number menu provides the means to change the TCP Port Number that is used for
Telnet access to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. The default value is TCP Port Number 23 (the industry standard).
Display< TNET TCP PORT# *
Up Telnet Settings.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Telnet

TCP port Number. Use the numeric keypad
to enter the new value. Press the ENTER
key again to confirm the new Port Number
value. Press CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Telnet Password.
Telnet Trusted Source Network 1
Display< Trusted Source

Network 1
Up Telnet Settings.
Down Trusted Source 1Enabled=
Left Telnet TCP Port Number.

Telnet Trusted Source 1 Enable / Disable
Display< Trusted Source 1

Enabled =
Up Trusted Source Network 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the Enable /

Disable state for Telnet Trusted Source 1.
Use the UP / DOWN arrow keys to toggle
between options and pres ENTER once to
accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain
the current setting.
Left Trusted Source 1 Netmask. Press the ENTER key to change the value of
the Telnet Trusted Source Netmask for
Trusted Source 1. Values must be 0, 123,
192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255.
Right Trusted Source 1 IP Address. Press the ENTER key to change the value of
the Telnet Trusted Source Network IP
identifier for Trusted Source 1. Values must
be between 0 and 255.

CDU Program
Office Configuration
373-0515
Figure 5-51, Office Protocol Configuration Menu
The Office Configuration Menu allows access to menus for configuring the Office protocol and port.
Display Office Configuration

Down Go to Protocol.
Left Go to Diagnostic Port.
Right Go to Local Control Panel.
Protocol
The Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office Protocol: GENISYS(R), UCE,
SCS-128, or BCS. The Office Protocol selection modifies the other available Office Configuration settings.
Display Protocol

Up Go to Office Configuration.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Office
Protocol. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the Office Protocol. Once the
Office Protocol has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Left Go to Set Office Defaults.
Go to Protocol dependent Office
Right
Configuration Parameter.

UCE Office Protocol Configuration
373-0261
Figure 5-52, UCE Office Protocol Configuration Menu
The UCE Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever UCE is the selected Office protocol.
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port to 300, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled.
Display< Office Config

Baud Rate: nnnn
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the OFFICE
CONFIG Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Baud
Rate. Once the Office Config Baud Rate has
been set, press the ENTER key.
Left Go to Protocol.
Right Go to Office Config *
Parity.

CDU Program
Parity
The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even, or None.
Display< Office Config*

Parity
CONFIG Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Once
the Office Config Parity has been set, press
the ENTER key.
Left Go to Office Config *
Baud Rate.
Data Bits.
Data Bits
The Data Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Data Bits of the Office Port: 5, 6,
7, or 8.

Data Bits
CONFIG Data Bits. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits.
Once the Office Config Data Bits has been
Parity.
Stop Bits.

Stop Bits
The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1,
1.5, or 2.

Stop Bits
CONFIG Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits.
Once the Office Config Stop Bits has been set,
Data Bits.
Right Go to Set Office Defaults.
Set Office Defaults
The Set Office Defaults provides the ability to restore factory office protocol default settings.
Display< Set Office Defaults

Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to restore factory
office protocol default settings. Press the
ENTER key a second tine to confirm the
changes or the CANCEL key to retain the
current settings.
Left Go to Office Config
Stop Bits.
Right Go to Office Configuration Protocol.

CDU Program
SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration
373-0264
Figure 5-53, SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration Menu
The SCS-128 Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever SCS-128 is the selected Office
protocol.
Baud Rate
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled.
Display< Office Configuration*

Baud Rate: nnnn
CONFIG Baud Rate. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Baud
Rate. Once the Office Config Baud Rate has
Parity.

Parity
The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even, or None.

Parity
CONFIG Parity. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the OFFICE CONFIG Parity. Once
the Office Config Parity has been set, press
the ENTER key.
Baud Rate.
Data Bits.
Data Bits
The Data Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Data Bits of the Office Port: 5, 6,
7, or 8.

Data Bits
CONFIG Data Bits. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Data Bits.
Once the Office Config Data Bits has been
Parity.
Data Bits.

CDU Program
Stop Bits
The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1,
1.5, or 2.

Stop Bits
CONFIG Stop Bits. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the OFFICE CONFIG Stop Bits.
Once the Office Config Stop Bits has been set,
Data Bits.
Right Go to Set Office Config *
Unit Address.
Unit Address
The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the SCS-128 station address (0-127).

Unit Address
CONFIG Unit Address. The Office Config Unit
Address may be set from 0 to 127. Once the
Office Config Unit Address has been set,
Stop Bits.
Set Office Defaults.

Set Office Defaults
The Set Office Defaults provides the ability to restore factory office protocol default settings.
Display< Set Office Defaults

Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to restore factory
office protocol default settings. Press the
ENTER key a second tine to confirm the
changes or the CANCEL key to retain the
current settings.
Left Go to Office Config*
Unit Address.

CDU Program
GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Serial Interface)
The GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever GENISYS® is the selected
Office protocol.
Figure 5-54, GENISYS® Office Port Configuration Menu
Baud Rate
The Baud Rate Menu provides the ability to display and set the Baud Rate of the Office Port: 300, 1200,
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled.
Display Office Config*

Baud Rate
Up Go to Office Config*
Down N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the Office
Config* Baud Rate. Use the UP and
DOWN keys to select the Office Config*
Baud Rate. Once the Office Config*
Baud Rate has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Right Go to Office Config*
Parity.

Parity
The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even or None.

Parity
Config* Parity. Use the UP and
Parity. Once the Office Config* Parity
has been set, press the ENTER key.
Baud Rate.
Data Bits.
Stop Bits
The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5,
or 2.

Stop Bits
Config* Stop Bits. Use the UP and
Stop Bits. Once the Office Config*
Stop Bits has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Data Bits.
Right Go to Office Config
Flow.

CDU Program
Flow
The Flow Menu provides the ability to display and set the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the
Office Port: Enabled is RTS Enabled/Wait on CTS, Disabled is None.

Flow
Config* Flow. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the Office Config* Flow.
Once the Office Config* Flow has been
Stop Bits.
Number Ind.
Number Ind
The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to the
GENISYS® office. Each indication word contains eight indications.

Number Ind
Config* Number Ind. The Office
Config* Number Ind may be set from 1
to 125. Once the Office Config*
Number Ind has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Flow.
Unit Address.

Unit Address
The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the GENISYS® station address (1-255).

Unit Address
Config* Unit Address. The Office
Config* Unit Address may be set from
1 to 255. Once the Office Config* Unit
Address has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Number Ind.
Ctrl Latch.
Ctrl Latch
The Ctrl Latch Menu provides the ability to display and set the persistence of Office controls input to the
vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in
the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set
to non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0).

Ctrl Latch
Config* Ctrl Latching. Use the UP and
Ctrl Latching. Once the Office Config*
Ctrl Latching has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Unit Address.
Ind Delay.

CDU Program
Ind Delay
The Ind Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the time indications are accumulated for an
office indication report after one or more indication changes are detected. Delays of 0 to 10 seconds in half
second increments are supported.

Ind Delay
Config* Ind Delay. Use the UP and
Ind Delay. Once the Office Config* Ind
Delay has been set, press the ENTER
key.
Ctrl Latch.
Const Ind.
Const Ind
The Const Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set whether indication reports sent to the office
contains the current value of all office indications (constant indication) or a partial report containing just the
current value of words containing indications that have changed since the last transmitted indication report
(no constant indication). With Const Ind set, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to each poll with a full
indication message.

Const Ind
Config* Const Indication. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select the Office
Config* Const Indication. Once the
Office Config* Const Indication has
Ind Delay.
Msg Timeout.

Msg Timeout
The Msg Timeout Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s Msg Timeout. The Msg
Timeout is the time of link inactivity for the detection of an office link failure.

Msg Timeout
Config* Timeout. The Office Config*
Msg Timeout may be set from 0 to 120
seconds. Once the Office Config* Msg
Timeout has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Constant Ind.
Tx Delay.
Tx Delay
The Tx Delay Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s RTS setup time before start of
data transmission. Delays of 0, 20, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds are supported.

Tx Delay
Config* Tx Delay. Use the UP and
Tx Delay. Once the Office Config* Tx
key.
Msg Timeout.
Tx Cutoff.

CDU Program
Tx Cutoff
The Tx Cutoff Menu provides the ability to display and set the office port’s RTS hold time after CTS goes
inactive. Hold times of 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, and 250 milliseconds are supported.

Tx Delay
Config* Tx Delay. Use the UP/DOWN
keys to select the Config Tx Delay.
Once the Office Config* Tx Delay has
Tx Delay.
CTS Timeout.
CTS Timeout
The CTS Timeout Menu provides the ability to set the time the system will wait for CTS to go active after
an RTS has been sent before a code fail is declared.

CTS Timeout
Down N/A. Press the ENTER Key to change the
CTS Timeout. Values of 0 (disable) to
5 seconds in 0.1s increments are
provided. Use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to cycle through the allowed
values and press the ENTER key once
the desired value has been selected to
confirm the changes or the CANCEL
key to retain the current settings.
Tx Cutoff.
Secure Poll.

Secure Poll
The Secure Poll Menu provides the ability to display and set whether the system will respond only to secure
poll messages from the office (enabled). When disabled, the system will respond to both secure and non-
secure poll messages received from the office.

Secure Poll
Config* Secure Polls. Use the UP and
Secure Polls. Once the Office Config*
Secure Polls has been set, press the
ENTER key.
CTS Timeout.
Right Go to Message Counts
Port = Office
Message Counts
The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance monitoring counts for the
following items:
• Rx Valid (number valid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset)
• Rx Invalid (number of invalid incoming messages received since local or the last counter reset)
• Resend (number of resent messages since local or the last counter reset)
• Link Fail (number of times Link Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset)
• Code Fail (number of times Code Fail has been set since local or the last counter reset)
Display Message Counts *

Port = Office
Down Go to Message Counts Display the number of valid messages
RX Valid. received.
Secure Poll.

CDU Program
Display Message Counts

Rx Valid
Up Go to Message Counts *
Port = Office
Down NA At the Clear Counts menu, press the
ENTER Key to reset all counter values
to zero. Press ENTER key a second
time to confirm the changes or the
CANCEL key to retain the current
values.
Left Cycle through message counters and
Clear Counts Menus.
Right Cycle through message counters and
Clear Counts Menus.
Set Office Defaults
The Set Office Defaults Menu provides the ability to restore application office protocol default settings.
Display Set Office Defaults

Down NA Press the ENTER Key to restore
application office protocol defaults.
Left Go to Message Counts.
Protocol =

BCS Office Protocol Configuration
Figure 5-55, BCS Office Port Configuration Menu
BAUD Rate
4800, 9600, 19200, or Disabled.

BAUD Rate: nnnn
Down N/A. Press the ENTER Key to set the
Office Port’s Baud Rate. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select the Baud
Rate. Once the Baud Rate has been
set, Press the ENTER key.
Protocol.
Parity.

CDU Program
Parity
The Parity Menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Office Port: Odd, Even or None.

Parity
Config* Parity. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the Office Config* Parity.
Once the Office Config* Parity has been
Baud Rate.
Stop Bits.
Stop Bits
The Stop Bits Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Office Port: 1, 1.5,
or 2.

Stop Bits
Config* Stop Bits. Use the UP and
Stop Bits. Once the Office Config* Stop
Bits has been set, press the ENTER
key.
Parity.
Flow.

Flow
The Flow Menu provides the ability to display and set the Flow Control (handshaking protocol) used by the
Office Port: Enabled is RTS Enabled/Wait on CTS, Disabled is none.

Flow
Config* Flow. Use the UP and DOWN
keys to select the Office Config* Flow.
Once the Office Config* Flow has been
Stop Bits.
Number Ind.
Number Ind
office. Each indication word contains eight indications.

Number Ind
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the
Number of Indications, which may be
set from 1 to 16. Once the Number off
indications has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Flow.
Unit Address.

CDU Program
Unit Address
The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the BCS station address (1- 127).

Unit Address
Config* Unit Address may be set from 1
to 127. Once the Office Config* Unit
ENTER key.
Number Ind.
Ctrl Latch.
Ctrl Latch
equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in the
latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set to
non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0).

Ctrl Latch
Ctrl atching has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Unit Address.
Ind Delay.

Ind Delay

Ind Delay
key.
Ctrl Latch.
Msg Timeout.
Msg Timeout

Msg Timeout
Config* Msg Timeout. The Office
Config* Msg Timeout may be set from
0 to 120 seconds. Once the Office
Config* Msg Timeout has been set,
Ind Delay.
CTS Timeout.

CDU Program
CTS Timeout
The CTS Timeout Menu provides the ability to set the time the system will wait for CTS to go active after
an RTS has been sent before a code fail is declared.

CTS Timeout
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to change the
CTS Timeout. Values of 0 (disable) to 5
seconds in 0.1s increments are
provided. Use the UP/DOWN arrow
keys to cycle through the allowed
values and press the ENTER key once
the desired value has been selected to
Msg Timeout.
RxGap Time.
RxGap Time
The RxGap Time Menu provides the ability to set the expected time between received messages. If the
time between characters is greater than the gap time then the character is the start of a message. The receive
gap time is based on the baud rate. Example:
Baud Rate Receive Gap Time in msec

1200 15.0
2400 8.0
4800 4.0
9600 2.0

RxGap Timeout
RxGap Time. Values of 1 to 35 mS in
0.5 mS increments are provided.
Once the Office RxGap Time has been
set, press the ENTER key and Confirm
the change or the CANCEL to retain
the current settings.
CTS Timeout.
IndGap Time.

IndGap Time
The IndGap Time Menu provides the ability to set the time between transmitted messages. If the time
between characters is greater than the gap time then the character is the start of a new indication message.
The indication gap time is based on the baud rate.

IndGap Timeout
IndxGap Time. Values of 1 to 35 mS
in 0.5 mS increments are provided.
Once the Office IndGap Time has been
set, press the ENTER key and Confirm
the change or the CANCEL to retain the
current settings.
IndGap Time.
Port= BCS
Message Counts
The Message Counts Menu allows you to reset and display performance-monitoring counts for the
following items:
Display Message Counts*

Port= BCS
Down Go to Message Counts Display the number of valid messages
Rx Valid= nn received.
RxGap Time

CDU Program
Display Message Counts*

Rx Valid= nn
Up Go to Message Counts
Port= BCS
Down N/A At the Clear Counts menu, press the
values.
Clear Counts Menus.
Clear Counts Menus.
Set office Defaults

Set Office Defaults
Down N/A. Press the ENTER Key to restore
confirm the changes or the CANCEL key
to retain the current settings.
Left Go to Message Counts
Port= BCS
Protocol= BCS

GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration (Ethernet)
The GENISYS® Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever GENISYS® is the selected
Office protocol.
Figure 5-56, GENISYS® Office Port Configuration Menu
Number Ind
The Number Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of indication words reported to
the GENISYS® office. Each indication word contains eight indications.

Number Ind
Config* Number Ind. The Office
Config* Number Ind may be set from 1
to 125. Once the Office Config*
Number Ind has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Flow.
Unit Address.

CDU Program
Unit Address
The Unit Address Menu provides the ability to display and set the GENISYS® station address (1-255).

Unit Address
Config* Unit Address may be set from
1 to 255. Once the Office Config* Unit
ENTER key.
Number Ind.
Ctrl Latch.
Ctrl Latch
vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is set to latching, the value of a control not contained in
the latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is set
to non-latching, the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0).

Ctrl Latch
Ctrl Latching has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Unit Address.
Ind Delay.

Ind Delay

Ind Delay
key.
Ctrl Latch.
Const Ind.
Const Ind
The Const Ind Menu provides the ability to display and set whether indication reports sent to the office
contains the current value of all office indications (constant indication) or a partial report containing just the
current value of words containing indications that have changed since the last transmitted indication report
(no constant indication). With Const Ind set, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to each poll with a full
indication message.

Const Ind
Config* Const Indication. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select the Office
Config* Const Indication. Once the
Office Config* Const Indication has
Ind Delay.
Msg Timeout.

CDU Program
Msg Timeout

Msg Timeout
Config* Timeout. The Office Config*
Msg Timeout may be set from 0 to 120
seconds. Once the Office Config* Msg
Timeout has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Constant Ind.
Tx Delay.
Secure Poll
The Secure Poll Menu provides the ability to display and set whether the system will respond only to secure
poll messages from the office (enabled). When disabled, the system will respond to both secure and non-
secure poll messages received from the office.

Secure Poll
Config* Secure Polls. Use the UP and
Secure Polls. Once the Office Config*
Secure Polls has been set, press the
ENTER key.
CTS Delay.
Message Counts.

Trusted Source
The Trusted Source menu provides the ability to enable or disable two Trusted Source values (Trusted
Source 1 and / or Trusted Source 2) for the GENISYS® Office on Ethernet. The Trusted Source parameter
has two portions: The Trusted Network IP address and the Netmask that indicates the portion of the
Network IP address that is to be used as the acceptance criteria. The numbers entered are decimal
equivalents of the eight bits for each of the four octet entries.
For example, if the Network IP is set to 192.168.1.12 and the associated Netmask value is set to
255.255.255.255 (indicating all bits of the Network IP are significant), ElectroLogIXS/EC5 only responds
to GENISYS® messages sourced from one IP address (192.168.1.12). If, however, the Netmask is set to
255.0.0.0, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 will respond to a GENISYS® message sourced from any IP address with
192 as the first value.
Trusted Source Netmask values follow the same rules as IP subnet masks. Specifically, the binary value of
the Netmask must be a series of consecutive “1s” followed by a series of consecutive “0s.” Therefore, only
the values of 0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or 255 are allowed and any non-255 value must be
preceded by values of 255. For example, 255.192.0.0 is a legitimate value but 255.192.240.0 is not.
Replacing the 192 with 255 would be legitimate (255.255.240.0) as the non-255 value (240) is now
preceded by 255s in the first and second position.
If both Trusted Sources are disabled, ElectroLogIXS/EC5 responds to a GENISYS® message from any IP
address. If one or both Trusted Sources are enabled, GENISYS® uses the enabled values for both Ethernet
ports as acceptance criteria.

Trusted Source
Up Go to Office Config.
Down Go to Trusted Source 1.
Secure Poll.
Right Go to Office Config
Port #D.
Display
Trusted Source 1

Up Office Config
Trusted Source.
Down Go to Trusted Source * Press the ENTER key to change the
Trust Src1 = Enabled / Disabled Enable / Disable state for Trusted
Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow
keys to toggle between options and
press ENTER once to accept the value.
Enter CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Go to Trusted Source 2.
Right Go to Trusted Source 2.

CDU Program
Display
Trusted Source *

Up Trusted Source 1.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to change the

Enable / Disable state for Trusted
Source 1. Use the UP / DOWN arrow
keys to toggle between options and
press ENTER once to accept the value.
Enter CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Go to Trusted Source * Press the ENTER key to change the
NM1 = value of the Trusted Source Netmask
for Trusted Source 1. Values must be
0, 128, 192, 224, 240, 248, 252, 254, or
255.
Right Go to Trusted Source * Press the ENTER key to change the
IP1 = value of the Trusted Source Network.
IP identifier for Trusted Source 1.
Values must be between 0 and 255.
Port Number
The Port Number menu allows selection of the UDP Port Number to be used for GENISYS® over Ethernet
communications for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Press the ENTER key to change the value of the GENISYS® Port Number. Use the numeric keypad to
enter the new number and press ENTER once to accept the value. Enter CANCEL to retain the current
setting.

Port # =
Down N/A
Trusted Source.
Right Go to Message Counts
Port = Office

Message Counts
following items:

Port = Office
Down Go to Message Counts * Press the ENTER Key to restore
RX Valid. application office protocol defaults. Press
ENTER key a second time to confirm the
changes or the CANCEL key to retain
Secure Poll.

Rx Valid
Up Go to Message Counts *
Port = Office
Down NA At the Clear Counts menu, press the
values.
Clear Counts Menus.
Clear Counts Menus.

CDU Program
Set Office Defaults
Display
Set Office Defaults

Down NA Press the ENTER Key to restore
application office protocol defaults. Press
ENTER key a second time to confirm the
changes or the CANCEL key to retain

ATCS Office Port
The ATCS office port provides the following communication configuration parameters:

• Railroad number (620 default)
• Address ID (7 default)
• Address length (for Station and MCP addressing (14 default))
• Station addressing (local) [Address ID, Railroad number, Station network address, Station network
node, Station routing (internally generated)]:
• Station network address (101001 default)
• Station network node (02 default)
• MCP addressing [Address ID, Railroad number, MCP network address, MCP network node, MCP
routing (internally generated)]:
• MCP network address (101001 default)
• MCP network node (01 default)
• Office addressing [office address ID (2), Railroad number, Office network node, Office network
address]:
• Office network node (10 default)
• Office network address (5010 default)
• CDC addressing (time server) [CDC address ID (2), Railroad number, CDC network node, CDC
network address]:
• CDC network node (10 default)
• CDC network address (5026 default)
• Indication priority (priority for indication message transmission (4 default))
• Log priority (priority for remote log report message transmission (7 default))
The following parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in Figure 5-57. Available
settings for these parameters are:
• BAUD rate: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, or Disabled
• Railroad number: 001-998
• Address ID: 3, 5, or 7
• Address length: 10, 12, or 14
• Station addressing (local) [Address ID, Railroad number, Station network address, Station
network node, Station routing (internally generated)]:
• Station network address: 000001 to 999999
• Station network node: 01 to 99
• MCP addressing [Address ID, Railroad number, MCP network address, MCP network node, MCP
routing (internally generated)]:
• MCP network address: 000001 to 999999
• MCP network node: 01 to 99
• Office addressing [office address ID (2), Railroad number, Office network node, Office network
address]:
• Office network node: 01 to 99
• Office network address: 5000 to 6999
• CDC addressing (time server) [CDC address ID (2), Railroad number, CDC network node, CDC
network address]:
• CDC network node: 01 to 99
• CDC network address: 5020 to 6999
• Indication priority: 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest)
• Log priority: 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest)
The ATCS office port provides the following operational configuration parameters:
• Number of indications (the number of indication words reported to the office)

CDU Program
• Control latching (the value for controls submitted to application logic when they are omitted in
Codeline Control messages (enabled submits the last received value for the control while disabled
resets the control to 0))
• Indication delay (the time Indication changes are collected prior to the transmission of Indication
message)
• CPC protocol (the set of ATCS messages to be utilized for office communications. Protocol 1 is
provided for backward compatibility but protocol 2 (default) is recommended for most
installations)
• Indication refresh rate (the time between autonomously generated indication messages)
• Page size for remote log reports (the number of lines of log entries included in paged remote log
reports (19 default)
• The values for these operational parameters can be configured through the CDU menu shown in
Figure 5-57. Available settings for these parameters are:
• Number of indications: 1-98 bytes (8-784 total indications)
• Control latching: enabled, disabled
• Indication delay: 0 to 10 seconds in 0.5 second increments (0 is disabled)
• CPC protocol: 1 (non-standard pre-S250 message set), 2 (standard S250 message set)
• Indication refresh rate: 0 to 10 minutes in 1 minute increments (0 is disabled)
• Page size: 19 to 255
Figure 5-57, ATCS Office Protocol Configuration Menu

ATCS Office Protocol Configuration
The ATCS Office Protocol Configuration menus are available whenever ATCS is the selected Office
protocol.
Protocol
The Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office Protocol. When serial ports 2 or 3
are used as the office ports, the only protocol selections available are: ATCS or none.
Display Office Config *

Baud Rate: nnnn

to select the Office Protocol. Once the
Office Protocol has been set, press the
ENTER key.


BAUD Rate.
BAUD Rate
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or Disabled.

Baud Rate: nnnn

Port’s Baud Rate. Use the UP and
DOWN keys to select the Baud Rate.
Once the Baud Rate has been set,

Protocol.

Number Ind.

CDU Program
Number Ind
office. Each indication word contains eight indications.

Number Ind

Number of Indications, which may be
set from 1 to 98. Once the Number of
Indications has been set, press the
ENTER key.

Number Ind.

Ctrl Latch.
Ctrl Latch
vital equations application logic. When Ctrl Latch is enabled, the value of a control not contained in the
latest office control update is latched at the last value received from the office. When Ctrl Latch is disabled,
the value of a control not contained in the latest office control update is set to FALSE (0).

Ctrl Latch
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set Control

Latching. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the Control Latching. Once the
Office Control Latching has been set,

Number Ind.

Ind Delay.

Ind Delay

Ind Delay

Indication Delay. Use the UP and
DOWN keys to select the Indication
Delay. Once the Office Indication Delay

Ctrl Latch.

ATCS Config.
ATCS Config
The ATCS Config Menu provides access to ATCS specific configuration parameters.

ATCS Config
Down Go to ATCS Config *

CPC Protocol.

Ind Delay.
Right Go to Message Counts.

CDU Program
Message Counts
following items:
Display Message Counts

Port= Office
Down Go to Message Counts * Continue pressing the Down arrow key

RX Valid. to cycle through all message counts

ATCS Config.

Set Office Defaults
Display Set Office Defaults
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to restore

confirm the changes or the
settings.

Protocol.

CPC Protocol
The CPC Protocol Menu provides the ability to display and set the ATCS messages to be utilized for office
communications. Two options are available: protocol 1 is a pre-standards message set provided for
backward compatibility and protocol 2 (recommended) utilizes the standard ATCS S250 message set.
Display ATCS Config *

CPC Protocol
Up Go to Office Config *
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the CPC

to select the CPC Protocol. Once the
CPC Protocol has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Left Go to ATCS Config *

Page Size.
Right Go to ATCS Config *

Address Id.
Address Id
The Address Id Menu provides the ability to display and set source ID address field for MCP and station
ATCS network addresses.

Address Id
ATCS Config.

Address Id. Once the Address Id has

CPC Protocol.

Addr Length.

CDU Program
Addr Length
The Addr Length Menu provides the ability to display and set the address length for MCP and station
network addresses.

Railroad Id
ATCS Config.

Address Length. Once the Address
Length has been set, press the ENTER
key.

Address Id.

Railroad Id.
Railroad Id
The Railroad Id Menu provides the ability to display and set the railroad identifier used in ATCS addresses
to the unique value assigned to the railroad company.

Address Length
ATCS Config.

Railroad Id. Once the Railroad Id has

Addr Length.

Station Addr.

Station Addr
The Station Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the station address field of the station
network address.

Station Addr
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Station

Address. Once the Station Address

Railroad Id.

Station Node.
Station Node
The Station Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the station node field of the station network
address.

Station Node
Arrow Key Comment

Function
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Station

Node. Once the Station Node has

Station Addr.

MCP Addr.

CDU Program
MCP Addr
The MCP Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the MCP address field of the MCP network
address.

MCP Addr
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the MCP

Address. Once the MCP Address has

Station Node.

MCP Node.
MCP Node
The MCP Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the MCP node field of the MCP network.
address

MCP Node
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the MCP

Node. Once the MCP Node has been

MCP Addr.

Office Addr.

Office Addr
The Office Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office address field of the Office network
address.

Office Addr
ATCS Config.

Address. Once the Office Address has

MCP Node.

Office Node.
Office Node
The Office Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the Office node field of the Office network.
address.

Office Node
ATCS Config.

Node. Once the Office Node has been

Office Addr.

CDC Addr.

CDU Program
CDC Addr
The CDC Addr Menu provides the ability to display and set the CDC address field of the CDC network
address.

CDC Addr
Up Go to CDC Config *
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the CDC

Address. Once the CDC Address has

Office Node.

CDC Node.
CDC Node
The CDC Node Menu provides the ability to display and set the CDC node field of the CDC network.
address.

CDC Node
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the CDC

Node. Once the CDC Node has been

CDC Addr.

Ind Refresh.

Ind Refresh
The Ind Refresh Menu provides the ability to display and set the rate (in minutes) at which autonomous
indication messages are transmitted to the office.

Ind Refresh
ATCS Config.

Indication Refresh rate. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select the Indication
Refresh rate. Once the Indication
Refresh rate has been set, press the
ENTER key.

CDC Node.

Ind Priority.
Ind Priority
The Ind Priority Menu provides the ability to display and set the priority level for indication messages
transmitted to the office.

Ind Pririty
Arrow Key Comment

Function
ATCS Config.

Indication Priority. Use the UP and
DOWN keys to select the Indication
Priority. Once the Indication Priority

Ind Refresh.

Log Priority.

CDU Program
Log Priority
The Log Priority Menu provides the ability to display and set the priority level for remote log reports
messages transmitted to the office.

Log Pririty
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Log

Priority. Use the UP and DOWN keys
to select the Log Priority. Once the Log
Priority has been set, press the ENTER
key.

Ind Priority.

Page Size.
Page Size
The Page Size Menu provides the ability to display and set the number of lines of log entries included in
pages of remote log reports transmitted to the office.

Page Size
Arrow Key Comment

Function
ATCS Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set the Page

Size. Once the Page Size has been

Log Priority.

CPC Protocol.

Local Control Panel Configuration
Figure 5-58, Local Control Panel Configuration Menu
The Local Control Configuration Panel Menu allows access to menus for enabling the LCP port.
Display LCP Configuration

Down Go to LCP Enabled.
Left Go to Office Config.
Right Go to HAWK Config.
LCP Enabled
The LCP Enabled Menu provides the ability to display and enable or disable the LCP port.
Display LCP Configuration*

Enabled =
Up Go to LCP Configuration.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to enable LCP
Enable setting changes. Use the UP
and DOWN keys to select LCP Enabled
or Disabled. Once the LCP Enable has
Left N/A
Right N/A

CDU Program
HAWK Interface Configuration
HAWK Configuration
HAWK Serial Number *
373-0517
Figure 5-59, HAWK Interface Configuration Menu
The HAWK Interface Configuration Menu allows access to menus for setting the HAWK Serial Number.
Display HAWK Configuration

Down Go to HAWK Serial Number *
Left Go to Local Control Panel.
Right Go to Vital Remote Ports.
HAWK Serial Number
The HAWK Configuration Menu provides the ability to display and set the HAWK Serial Number. The
HAWK recorder requires this Serial Number to be configured in both the HAWK recorder and
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 before event recording across the HAWK serial interface can occur. The serial number
may contain any combination of up to twenty alphabetic, numeric, and special characters. Entering a space
terminates the serial number.
Display HAWK Serial Number *

Up Go to HAWK Configuration.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to enter the

HAWK Serial Number. Use the
numeric keypad to enter characters and
the RIGHT key to move to the next
character. Once the HAWK Serial
Number has been set, press the
ENTER key.
Left N/A
Right N/A

Vital Remote Configuration
The Vital Remote Configuration Menu allows access to the menus for display and modification of non-vital
configuration for each remote port and device defined in the application. See Figure 5-60 and Figure 5-61.
Display Vital Remote Config
Up N/A
Down Go to Vital Remote Port Settings.
Vital Remote Port Settings
This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital port parameters for the Serial/Ethernet
remotes.
Display Vital Remote

Port Settings
Up Go to Vital Remote Config.
Down Go to Vital Remote Serial Port #. If no Serial Port remotes are in

the application, this key will go
to the Ethernet Port menu.
Left Go to Vital Remote Set NV Defaults.
Right Go to MAC Switchover.
Vital Remote Set NV Defaults
This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital parameters to the application default
values for the remotes.
Display Vital Remote *

Set NV Defaults
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to go to

the Set Remote Defaults
confirmation menu. Press
ENTER again to set the values
to the application default
settings. Press CANCEL to
retain the current settings.
Left Go to MAC Switchover.
Right Go to Vital Remote Port Settings.

CDU Program
MAC Switchover
This menu provides the ability to display and set the non-vital parameters associated with MAC
Switchover for the remotes.
Display MAC Switchover
Down Go to MAC Switchover MMST.
Left Go to Vital Remote Port Settings.
Right Go to Vital Remote Set NV Defaults.
MMST (Maximum MAC Switchover Time)
This menu provides the ability to display and set the MMST value. The MMST may be set from 1 second
to 2 hours. The MMST is the maximum amount of time that messages will be accepted with MACs
generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys once MAC key switchover is enabled.
Display MAC Switchover *

MMST=nnnn
Up Go to MAC Switchover.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set

the MMST value. Enter the
value in seconds, and then
press the ENTER key to select
the MMST value.
Left Go to Delete Old Key Vault.
Right Go to Switchover Enable.
Switchover Enable
This menu provides the ability to enable/start MAC Switchover. Enabling the MAC Switchover starts
the timer to run for MMST period of time, during which messages will be accepted with MACs
generated from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys.
Display Switchover Enable
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to

enable switchover.
Left Go to MAC Switchover MMST.
Right Go to Switchover Restart.

Switchover Restart
This menu provides the ability to re-start MAC Switchover. Restarting MAC Switchover restarts the
timer to run for MMST period of time, during which messages will be accepted with MACs generated
from either the new or the pre-existing MAC keys.
Display Switchover Restart
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to restart

switchover.
Left Go to Switchover Enable.
Right Go to Switchover Cancel.
Switchover Cancel
This menu provides the ability to cancel MAC Switchover. Canceling MAC Switchover will stop the
MAC Switchover timer.
Display Switchover Cancel
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to stop

switchover.
Left Go to Switchover Restart.
Right Go to Delete Old Key Vault.
Delete Old Key Vault
This menu provides the ability to delete the old MAC vault keys.
Display Delete Old Key Vault
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to delete

the old MAC vault keys.
Left Go to Switchover Cancel.
Right Go to MAC Switchover MMST.

CDU Program
Vital Remote Ports (Serial Ports)
This menu provides the ability to set the non-vital parameters for each remote port and device in the
application.
Vital Remote Config
Vital Remote * Vital Remote MAC Switchover

Set NV Defaults Port Settings
Set Remote Defaults

ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO MAC Switchover * Switchover Enable Switchover Restart
MMST= ENTER/YES ENTER/YES
Delete Old Key Vault Switchover Cancel

Vital Remote Vital Remote Vital Remote ENTER/YES ENTER/YES
Ethernet Port Serial Port 2 Serial Port 3
Port Statistics * Remote Port Confg Attached Remote(s)
Remote Port Confg * Remote Port Confg * Remote Port Confg *

Local Addr = Mode = Type =
Remote Port Confg * Remote Port Confg * Remote Port Confg *

Baud Rate = Parity = Stop Bits =
Attached Remote * Attached Remote * Attached Remote *

Remote n Remote 1 Remote 2

Address = Date Update= Poll Timeout=
Attached Remote * Attached Remote * Attached Remote

MAC= Use New Key= Msg MAC=
Figure 5-60, Vital Remote Port Menu - Serial Port
Vital Remote Serial Port
The Vital Remote menu provides the ability to configure each serial port in your application.
Display Vital Remote

Serial Port #
Up Go to Vital Remote Port Settings.
Down Go to Remote Port Config.
Left Go to previous vital remote port. Only available if more than one
port is installed in your system.
Right Go to next vital remote port. Only available if more than one
port is installed in your system.

Remote Port Configuration

The Remote Port Configuration menu provides the ability to configure the port. Each port requires
setup.
Display Remote Port Config
Up Go to Vital Remote Port n.
Down Go to Remote Port Config Mode.
Left Go to Port Statistics.
Right Go to Attached Remote(s).
Mode
This menu provides the ability to select the link mode. The mode may be set to Point to Point, Multi-drop
Slave, or Multi-drop Master.
Display Remote Port Config *

Mode = xxxxx
Up Go to Remote Port Config.
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to set

the Mode. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to select
Point to Point, Multi- drop
Slave, or Multi-drop Master.
Once the Mode has been set
press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Local Addr.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Type.
Type
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Vital Port Type. The type may be asynchronous,
synchronous internal clock, or synchronous external clock.

Type = xxxxx

the Type. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to select
asynchronous, synchronous
internal clock, or synchronous
external clock. Once the
Type has been set press the
ENTER Key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Mode.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Baud Rate.

CDU Program
Baud Rate
This menu provides the ability to set the Baud Rate of the Vital Remote Port. Note that if the Baud Rate is
set too low for the amount of data to be exchanged, unreliable communication can result. Asynchronous,
point-to-point connections sending more than 60 statuses (one way) should use 2400 baud or greater.
Point-to-multi-point connections should use 9600 baud or greater.

Baud Rate = nnnnn

the Remote Port Baud Rate
setting. Use the UP and
DOWN keys to select a baud
rate. Once the Baud Rate has
been set, press the ENTER
Key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Type.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Parity.
Parity
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Parity of the Vital Remote Port. Parity may be set to
Even (even parity), Odd (odd parity), or None (no parity).

Parity = xxxx

Remote Port Parity setting. Use the UP
or DOWN arrow keys to set the parity to
None, Even, or Odd. Once the Parity
has been set press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Baud

Rate.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Stop Bits.
Stop Bits
This menu provides the ability to display and set the number of Stop Bits of the Vital Remote Port. The
number of Stop Bits may be set to 1, 1.5, or 2.


Stop Bits = n

Remote Port number of Stop Bits.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow keys to
set the Stop Bits to 1, 1.5, or 2. Once
the number of Stop Bits has been
set press the ENTER Key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Parity.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Local

Addr.
Local Address
This menu provides the ability to display and set the local address. The address can be set from 0 to 63.

Local Addr = nn
Down N/A Press the ENTER Key to select Local

Address. Enter the address and press
the ENTER key.
Left Go to Remote Port Config Stop Bits.
Right Go to Remote Port Config Mode.
Attached Remote(s)
This menu provides the ability to configure each attached remote device. Setup is required for each
attached remote.
Display Attached Remote(s)
Down Attached Remote

Remote 1
Left Go to Remote Port Config.
Right Go to Port Statistics.

CDU Program
Remote 1
This menu provides the ability to select the Remote device to configure.
Display Attached Remote *

Remote 1
Up Go to Attached Remote(s).
Down Go to Attached Remote Date

Update.
Left Go to previous attached remote. Only available if more than one

attached remote.
Right Go to next attached remote. Only available if more one attached

remote.
Date Update
This menu selects whether the remote date update is enabled or disabled. If Enabled, a date/time update
message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours.

Date Update = xxxxxxxx
Up Go to Attached Remote n.
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to select the

Date Update mode. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to select Enabled or
Disabled. Press the ENTER key to
select the mode.
Left Go to attached remote Address.
Right Go to attached remote Poll Timeout.
Poll Timeout
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Poll Timeout. The Poll Timeout may be set from 10
to 500 mS. The minimum value for Poll Timeout is the time to send a message plus 10 mS.

Poll Timeout = nnn
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Poll

Timeout. Enter the value and then
press the ENTER key to select the Poll
Timeout.
Left Go to attached remote Date Update.
Right Go to attached remote Msg MAC.

Msg MAC
This menu provides a display of the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote messages.
If MAC switchover is in progress, it displays NEW or OLD, based on whether MAC is based on the
newly loaded MAC Vault or based on the pre-existing MAC Vault, or displays No if the incoming vital
remote messages do not include the MAC. If MAC switchover is not in progress, it displays Yes or No,
based on whether or not MAC is included in the vital remote messages.
Display Attached Remote

Msg MAC = NEW / OLD / Yes / No
Down N/A
Left Go to attached remote Poll

Timeout.
Right Go to attached remote Use New

Key.
Use New Key
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Use New Key. If MAC switchover is in progress,
selecting the ‘Yes’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the newly
loaded MAC Vault, and selecting the ‘No’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with
MAC based on the pre-existing MAC Vault.

Use New Key = xxx
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Use

New Key to Yes/No. Enter the value
and then press the ENTER key to
select the Use New Key.
Left Go to attached remote Msg MAC.
Right Go to attached remote MAC Enable/

Disable.
MAC Enable / Disable
This menu provides the ability to display and set MAC enable/disable. This option is used to enable or
disable sending of MAC in vital remote messages.

CDU Program

MAC = xxxxxxxx
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the MAC

to Enabled/Disabled. Enter the value
select MAC enable/disable.
Left Go to attached remote Use New

Key.
Right Go to attached remote Address.
Address
This menu provides the ability to display and set the remote device address. The address can be set from
0 to 63. This is a message network address for RP2000/RP2009 multi-drop messages.

Address = nn
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the

address. Enter the address and
Left Go to attached remote MAC Enable/

Disable.
Right Go to attached remote Date

Update.
Port Statistics
This menu provides the ability to display Port Statistics.
Display Port Statistics *
Down Go to a list of Port Statistics. At Port Statistics, press the RIGHT and
LEFT arrow keys to view a variety of
port statistic values.
Left Go to Attached Remote(s).
Right Go to Remote Port Config.

Vital Remote Ports (Ethernet)
This menu provides the ability to setup the Ethernet communication to the remote devices in the
application.
Vital Remote Config
Vital Remote * Vital Remote MAC Switchover

Set Defaults Port Settings
Set Remote Defaults

ENTER/YES CANCEL/NO MAC Switchover * Switchover Enable Switchover Restart
MMST= ENTER/YES ENTER/YES
Delete Old Key Vault Switchover Cancel

Vital Remote Vital Remote Vital Remote ENTER/YES ENTER/YES
Ethernet Port Serial Port 2 Serial Port 3
Remote Port Config Attached Remote(s) Port Statistics *
Remote Port Config *

Mode=Ethernet PTP

Remote n Remote 1 Remote 2
Attached Remote * Attached Remote Attached Remote *

Date Update= Msg MAC= Use New Key=

Port=8280 IP=xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx MAC=
Figure 5-61, Vital Remote Port Menu - Ethernet Port
Remote Port Configuration
For Ethernet remotes, the Remote Port Configuration menu only displays the communication mode. Since
the only mode available is Ethernet Point to Point, no change is available from this menu.

CDU Program
Attached Remote(s)
This menu provides the ability to configure each attached remote device. Setup is required for each attached
remote.
Display Attached Remote(s)
Down Attached Remote

Remote 1
Left Go to Remote Port Config.
Right Go to Port Statistics.
Remote 1
This menu provides the ability to select the Remote device to configure.

Remote 1
Up Go to Attached Remote(s).
Down Go to Attached Remote Date Update.
Left Go to previous attached remote. Only available if more than one attached
remote.
Right Go to next attached remote. Only available if more one attached remote.
Date Update
This menu selects whether the remote date update is enabled or disabled. If Enabled, a date/time update
message is sent when the system clock changes or when an update was not sent in the last 24 hours.


Date Update = xxxxxxxx
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to select the

Date Update mode. Use the UP or
DOWN arrow keys to select Enabled
or Disabled. Press the ENTER key to
select the mode.
Left Go to attached remote Port Number.
Right Go to attached remote Msg MAC.
Msg MAC
This menu provides a display of the state of MAC that is included in the incoming vital remote
messages. If MAC switchover is in progress, it displays NEW or OLD, based on whether MAC is
based on the newly loaded MAC Vault or based on the pre-existing MAC Vault, or displays No if the
incoming vital remote messages do not include the MAC. If MAC switchover is not in progress, it
displays Yes or No, based on whether or not MAC is included in the vital remote messages.
Display Attached Remote

Msg MAC = NEW / OLD / Yes / No
Down N/A
Left Go to attached remote Date

Update.
Right Go to attached remote Use New

Key.
Use New Key
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Use New Key. If MAC switchover is in progress,
selecting the ‘Yes’ option will enable the sending of vital remote messages with MAC based on the
newly loaded MAC Vault, and selecting the ‘No’ option will enable the sending of vital remote
messages with MAC based on the pre-existing MAC Vault.

CDU Program

Use New Key = xxx
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the Use

New Key to Yes/No, and then press
the ENTER key to select the Use
New Key.
Left Go to attached remote Msg MAC.
Right Go to attached remote MAC Enable/

Disable.
MAC Enable / Disable
This menu provides the ability to display and set MAC enable/disable. This option is used to enable or
disable sending of MAC in vital remote messages.

MAC = xxxxxxxx
Down N/A Press the ENTER key to set the MAC

to Enabled/Disabled. Enter the value
select the MAC.
Left Go to attached remote Use New

Key.
Right Go to attached remote IP Address.
IP Address
This menu provides the means to set the IP address of the attached remote. The format of the address is four
address values separated by periods (e.g. 192.168.1.12). An entered value must be in the range of 0 to 255
and all four values must be entered or the address will not be accepted. If a particular value is less than
three digits, use the right arrow key to advance to the next number position. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 address
is the DHCP Server IP Address on the interface connected to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. To view the DHCP
Server IP Address, open command prompt window and enter “ipconfig /all” command.


IP = nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Attached Remote’s IP address. Use
the numeric keypad to enter the
values of the address. Use the
RIGHT arrow key to advance to the
next address value. Use the LEFT
arrow key to clear erroneous digit
entries or move to the previous
value. Press the ENTER key to
confirm the IP Address update.
Press CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Go to attached remote MAC Enable/

Disable.
Right Go to attached remote Port Number.
Port Number
This menu provides the ability to display and set the Port Number used for vital communication
(both sending and receiving) with the attached remote. Note that communication problems will result
if an Attached Remote has the same IP address AND the same Port # as another Attached Remote.

Port = nnnn

Port number for the Attached
Remote. Use the numeric keypad to
enter the Port number value. Press
ENTER again to confirm entry. Press
CANCEL to retain the current
setting.
Left Go to attached remote IP Address.
Right Go to attached remote Date

Update.

CDU Program
EPROM Information
Figure 5-62, EPROM Information Menu
This menu provides the ability to display the information associated with the application program. Pressing
the Right or Left Arrow keys advances the display a full page. Pressing the 1 or 3 Alphanumeric key
advance the display 1 character at a time.
Display< EPROM Information

Down Go to EPROM CRC and Checksum.
Left Go to Vital Remote Ports.
Right Go to Executive Information.
Application EPROM
This menu provides the ability to view EPROM Header Information from the Application EPROM located
in the CI Module.
Display< EPROM EPT CRC = XXXX

Checksum=YYYY
Up Go to EPROM Information.
Down Displays the Application Header.

Executive Information
Figure 5-63, Executive Information Menu (VPM-3)
This menu provides the ability to display the status of the application Executive Firmware.
Note: With the VPM-2, Executive Information is located under the EPROM Information Menu.
Display< Executive Information

Down Go to VPM A- Processor.
Left Go to EPROM Information.
Right Go to Recorder Battery.
VPM A-Processor
This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor A on the VPM
Module.
Display< VPM A-Processor

Up Go to EPROM Information.
Down Displays the VPM's A-Processor's
Executive Header Information.
Left Go to CDU Processor.
Right Go to VPM B-Processor.

CDU Program
VPM B-Processor
This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor B on the VPM Module.
Display< VPM B-Processor

Up Go to Executive Information.
Down Displays the VPM's B-Processor's
Left Go to VPM A-Processor.
Right Go to VPM C-Processor.
VPM C-Processor
This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from Processor C on the VPM Module.
Display< VPM C-Processor
Down Displays the VPM's C-Processor

Left Go to VPM B-Processor.
Right Go to VTI DSP D-Processor.
CDU Processor
This menu provides the ability to view Executive Header Information from the CDU-1.
Display< CDU Processor

Down Displays the CDU-1 Executive Header.
Left Go to VTI DSP E-Processor.
Right Go to VPM A-Processor

Default Maintenance Values

Default settings for the CDU-1 are listed below.
Default Setup Table
Setting or Description Default Value Possible Values
Lamp Output Voltage 10.0 Volts 9.0 to 13.5 Volts in .5 Volt

increments
Track Transmit Voltage .5 Volts .5 to 4.0 Volts in .5 Volt

increments
Track Receive Reference 6.14 Amps .5 to 9.99 Amps
Diagnostic Port Parity None None, Even, Odd
Diagnostic Port Baud Rate 19200 bps 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 34800
Diagnostic Port Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2
Diagnostic Port Data Bits 8 8, 7, 6, 5
Office Port Parity None None, Even, Odd
Office Port Baud Rate various bps 300, 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600, 19200, 34800
Office Port Stop Bits 1 1, 1.5, 2
Office Port Data Bits 8 8, 7, 6, 5
Office Port Protocol Determined by application None, UCE, SCS-1287,

Genisys

GE Transportation Systems
Global Signaling

100373-010 AR0
VOLUME TWO
© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC. All rights reserved. The information contained in this publication is the
property of GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC ("GETS") and is disclosed in confidence. This publication is intended for
use by GETS customers solely for purposes of operating, training and performing routine maintenance of purchased or licensed GETS
products, and it shall not be reproduced, redistributed, retransmitted, translated, abridged, adapted, condensed, revised or otherwise
modified, in any form, in whole or in part, or used for any other purpose or disclosed to others, without the express written consent of
GETS. However, if a GETS customer (“Customer”) requires additional copies of this document or portions thereof for internal use, GETS
hereby grants to Customer a limited right to reproduce this publication, in whole or in part, and Customer agrees to use such authorized
copies (“Copies”) solely for its intended purposes. Any Copies made under this limited reproduction right shall contain this notice and
any other legal notices appearing in this publication. The Customer shall be responsible for complying with U.S. export control laws with
respect of distribution of all Copies.
GETS and Customer agree that the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in GETS products
or to provide for every possible contingency with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should
particular problems arise that are not covered sufficiently for the user’s purposes, the matter should be referred to GETS. Any applicable
Federal, State or local regulations or company safety or operating rules must take precedence over any information or instructions given
in the Technical Documentation. GETS has no obligation to keep the material up to date after the original publication.
GE TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS GLOBAL SIGNALING, LLC EXPLICITLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES OF ACCURACY,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE IN CONNECTION WITH THIS PUBLICATION AND USE THEREOF.
Reproduction and Use Restrictions Agreement
The information contained in this Technical Manual (the “Document”) is the property of GE Transportation Global
Signaling (“GETSGS”) and is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws. Any unauthorized use or
reproduction of this Document without the prior written consent of GETSGS, whether in hard copy or in an
electronic form, is strictly prohibited [except as otherwise set forth below]. Notwithstanding the foregoing, GETSGS
hereby grants to the purchaser of the GETSGS equipment, or licensee of the GETSGS software (such purchaser
of licensee referred to herein as “You”), to which the Document pertains, the following limited reproduction rights.
By reproducing any portion of the Document, You expressly agree to the following terms and conditions. You may
make additional copies of the Document solely for use in connection with the GETSGS equipment or GETSGS
software to which it pertains, provided that each copy is a complete copy and does not alter the content or meaning
of the Document in any way, and provided further that each such copy preserves unaltered all trademark, copyright,
patent designations and proprietary or confidentiality notices contained therein, including this Reproduction and
Use Restrictions Agreement. Any other use or reproduction of any portion of the Document without the prior written
authorization of GETSGS is expressly prohibited.
Without limiting any other rights or remedies of GETSGS, in the event that You or any of Your employees, agents
or contractors copies any portion of the Document in violation of this Reproduction and Use Restrictions
Agreement, You agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless GETSGS from and against any and all claims,
damages, losses, liabilities and expenses (including reasonable attorney’s fees) that may be incurred or awarded
by reason thereof.
Revision History
This document supersedes all previously issued versions, providing new or revised information. The most
recent publication can be determined by comparing the last three characters at the end of the part number
and the date issued.
Part Number: 100373-010 AR0
Revision Date
Level Issued General Description of Changes
AA0 02/28/03 Initial Release
AB0 02/01/05 Re-brand manual revise track circuit transmit and receive procedure.
AC0 02/01/06 Added new modules (VLD-R16S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S)
AD0 01/16/07 Minor typographical errors fixed
Updated ElectrologIXS CIO key Pins to remove when CIO-2A and CIO-MDA are
AE0 07/02/07 installed in the system and also updated as per the markup’s.
AF0 12/03/07 Incorporated VPM-3 module, CI-2 module and Web GUI information.
AG0 04/16/08 Added CI-2 Flash Memory application download.
AH0 06/16/08 Incorporated 4-Slot Chassis.
AI0 09/08/08 Added BCS Protocol and description of CIO-2AB module.

AJ0 12/03/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 1-Slot Chassis.
AK0 12/15/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 4-Slot Chassis.
AL0 06/01/09 Update for EDVP release of ElectroLogIXS.
AM0 08/26/09 Update for EDVP 2 release of ElectroLogIXS.

AN0 03/08/10 Added DHCP Server Details.
AO0 05/19/10 Added EC5 Details.
AP0 09/07/10 Add PTC Functionality.
AQ0 07/01/11 Added PTC2, 100373-U001, 100373-U002, and 100373-U003 Updates.
AR0 10/25/12 Added PTC3 Updates.
All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page.
Conventions
Safety Alert Symbols
The symbol indicates that important personal safety information follows. Carefully read this text for
the warnings information it contains. The signal word next to each safety alert symbol is defined as:
WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

result in minor or moderate injury. This signal word may also be used
to identify unsafe practices.
Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions
The and symbols indicate important handling guidelines established by the AREMA (American
Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Association) for proper handling of electronic equipment
modules and sensitive components for the prevention of potential damage that could be caused by ESD
(electrostatic discharge) during routine maintenance, handling and transportation.
Module To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

ESD modules, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use protective measures could result in permanent
Notice equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when handling
modules.

ESD components, follow the field procedures in AREMA C&S Manual, Part
11.4.5. Failure to use recommended protective measures could result
Notice in permanent equipment damage, either immediate or latent, when
handling components.
Important/Notable Information
Important: Indicates an operating procedure, practice, or condition which, if not strictly followed, may
cause equipment damage.
Note: Indicates additional information or emphasizes a topic related to the subject being discussed.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. iii
General Safety Instructions

WARNING No information in this manual supersedes or replaces your railroad’s
instruction.
Only qualified personnel should work on or around this equipment. To
ensure the highest degree of safety, all personnel are required to
become thoroughly familiar with all personal safety instructions
contained in this manual. Successful and safe operation of this
equipment is dependent upon correct handling, operation,
maintenance, repair, and application of associated railroad equipment.
Deliberate misuse or abuse of electronic equipment and components
may result in death or serious injury
Do not use this equipment until you are sure the application logic is
properly programmed and functionally tested. Test it according to
United States DOT (Department of Transportation) FRA (Federal
Railroad Administration) Code of Federal Regulation, Title 49
procedures, or other equivalent tests, as deemed necessary by other
appropriate regulatory agencies.

serious injury.
Updating or modifying modules, firmware, and values (both application
and executive) must be performed by qualified personnel that are
physically present at the site being updated.
Track circuit troubleshooting interferes with signal system operation.
Always obtain proper authorization prior to performing track circuit
troubleshooting.
If any failure of the equipment is detected, it is the railroads responsibility
to ensure the failure is reported in a timely manner. Once the failure is
reported the appropriate steps must be taken to ensure the equipment is
repaired or replaced promptly. Failure to report and repair unit/module in a
timely fashion may result in death or serious injury. Timely is defined
as without undue delay per 49 CFR 236.1023(j).
Follow your railroad's operating rules while moving a locomotive with

inoperative equipment or during irregular operating situations.
Failure to follow your railroad’s operating rules may result in death
or serious injury.

iv All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequence energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
at his own expense.
CAUTION Modifications or changes not expressly approved by GE

Transportation Systems Global Signaling could affect the compliance
of the equipment with the FCC Rules and void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Foreword
There are no electronic components or modules in the ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 system that can be
repaired by the customer. Defective or damaged modules should be sent to GE Transportation Global
Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600.
Technical Support
GE Transportation Global Signaling will accept telephone calls between 7:30 AM and 5:30 PM CST. Call
TOLL FREE (800) 825-7090 regarding installation, maintenance, calibration, adjustment, or repair of any
components.
Scope
GE Transportation Global Signaling, Technical Information Department under the direction of the
designated equipment Product Manager, issues this document. The manual introduces you to the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 by providing specific information related to Installation, Maintenance,
Troubleshooting, CDU Program, Web Graphical User Interface, Terminal Program, Retest Guide,
Specifications and Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines. Please read carefully and thoroughly
understand the instructions and processes before making any adjustments or modifications to the
equipment. Carelessness may result in loss of life or property damage.
How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing
Additional copies of this document may be ordered by directing all correspondence to GE Transportation
Global Signaling, Customer Service Department, 2712 S. Dillingham Road, Grain Valley, MO 64029-0600
or calling (800) 825-7090 or by FAX (816) 650-9501.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. v

vi All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Contents
Volume One
Chapter 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2 – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 3 – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chapter 5 – CDU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Volume Two
Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Chapter 7 – Terminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Chapter 8 – Secure Shell Program (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Chapter 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Chapter 10 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1
Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. vii

viii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Web Graphical User Interface
Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface
Contents
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Connecting to the Web GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Web GUI Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Web GUI Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Main Menu Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Parameter Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Local Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Web GUI Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
General Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Vital Application and Non-Vital Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
PTC Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Executive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Boot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Configuration Main Menu – System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Local Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
System Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
System Battery Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Upload Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Apply Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Selective Function Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
PTC Non-Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
PTC Vital Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42

PTC Applicability Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
PTC Key Mgmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Configuration - SNMP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

Active SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
SNMP General Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
SNMP Trap Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
SNMP Temporary Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
I/O Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64

Electro Code Track Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Cab Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Code Select Inputs / Track Decoder Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Vital Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Ground Fault Detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Communication Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82

General Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
General Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Web Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Telnet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
SSH Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-88
Ethernet Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 89
Ethernet Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Ethernet Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
Ethernet GENISYS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Serial Diagnostic Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Serial LCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Serial Vital Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Serial Vital Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Serial Office Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Serial UCE Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Serial SCS-128 Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Serial GENISYS Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Serial BCS Office Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
HAWK Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-101
Diagnostics Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
View Live Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102
Configure Live Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Configure PTC Comm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104
Configure Office Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105
Log Archive Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107
Configuration Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108
Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
GDA Data Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
PTC Comm Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
PTC Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113

PTC Device State Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114

View Office Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Communication Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Ethernet Vital Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Ethernet Office Comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Office Manual Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
All Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Watch Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-120
PTC Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-121
PTC Device State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122

Remote Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-123
Office Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-124
Local Control Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-125
Vital and Non-Vital Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126


Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface
WARNING Unauthorized modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters or

configuration may result in unsafe conditions that could result in death
or serious injury. Responsibility for security of passwords for
equipment access lies with the railway authority. Passwords should
be of a non-obvious nature and of sufficient length to preclude an
unauthorized user from easily guessing the password.
Introduction
A VPM-3 based ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system provides user access to status, diagnostic, and set-up
information via the Web Graphical User Interface (Web GUI). Access to the Web GUI is achieved by
connecting to one of the two VPM-3 Ethernet ports, accessing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 via an Internet web
browser, and providing the correct username / password combination. Diagnostic, status, and control of
system settings are then available via the various web pages provided by the Web GUI.
The loaded application program controls the access to the Web GUI for each of the two Ethernet ports. The
application may set a port to “disabled’ (no Web GUI access permitted), Read Only (no parameter changes
permitted) or Read & Write access. If the port is disabled, an attempt to access that port with a web
browser results in a “You are not authorized to access this device” message being displayed. If the port is
set to Read Only, all parameter entries are “grayed-out” allowing the values to be viewed but not changed.
Similarly, if a parameter is otherwise not able to be modified (e.g. Local Presence is required but not
established) the parameter appears "grayed-out" allowing the value to be viewed but not modified.
The emphasis of this section is the operation and usage of the Web GUI interface. While this interface
allows the various parameters and settings to be viewed or modified, the discussion of the parameters
themselves contained in the CDU section is not repeated. Note also that interface images are for a 9-slot
chassis; the additional I/O modules are not applicable on a 4-slot or 1-slot chassis.
Connecting to the Web GUI
Access to the Web GUI is achieved via entering the IP address of the port in the web browser address bar
after either connecting directly to one of the two VPM-3 Ethernet ports or to the network being used by the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. As noted on the login page, the browser must have JavaScript and cookies
enabled for Web GUI access and operation.
Note: Some web page status updates may not be visible in Internet Explorer if a Web Content Scanner
or a Java SSV Add-on is ENABLED on the web browser. To disable Web Content Scanner in
Internet Explorer, go to Tools>Manage Add-ons, and disable the Web Content Scanner and
Java SSV Add-on.

PTC-ElectrologIXS Login
Railroad: undefined
When shipped from
Subdivision: undefined GETS-GS, the initial
Address: undefined settings are:
Site ID: GETS-GS Login ID: admin
Chassis ID: 0 Password: admin
Login ID:
Password:
Login
Note: JavaScript and cookies must be enabled to access this interface.

373-0666
Figure 6-1, Web GUI Login
Web GUI Login
The Login page displays identifying information for the specific ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system along with
entry boxes for Login ID and Password. A checkbox is provided to select PDA page format if desired.
Leaving the box unchecked selects the computer page format.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 allows a single user to be logged in at a time. If there is an active session when another
user enters login information, the user logging in is informed that another user is already logged on and is
asked to either continue or cancel the login process. Selecting “continue” logs the other user out and logs
the second user in. Selecting cancel returns the user to the log in page. See Figure 6-2.
ElectroLogIXS Login
There is an Administrator currently logged on.

Do you want to continue to log on?
If you continue, the other Administrator will be logged off.
Continue Cancel
373-0667
Figure 6-2, Web GUI Login, Other User Session Active

Web GUI Navigation

The Web GUI pages are divided among four Main Menu categories: General, Configuration, Diagnostics,
and Status with the names of these Main Menu categories appearing across the top of each page. Selecting
one of the Main Menu categories displays the Side Menu for that category. Selecting an item on the Side
Menu displays the web page for that item in the main portion of the screen. See Figure 6-3 for an example
web page that depicts these various areas in the computer format of the page.
Site ID and Chassis ID are
shown here on every page
The Main Menu categories
are shown at the top with
the current selection
highlighted. Site ID: GETS-GS
Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Application

Local Presence
System Time Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page.
Click Here to request Local Presence
Application Modifiable settings are
Change Password Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpv : CRC#E75D shown as drop-down items,
General Configuration entry fields, or check-boxes
Non-Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpnv : CRC#3962
Vital Timers
as appropriate for the
Non-Vital Timers
Update Settings parameter type.
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update Changes are applied by

Upload Software selecting "Update Settings"
Apply Software and confirming the changed
values on the next page.
Selective Functionality
Selective Function Enable Selection of a Main Menu category
(top) displays the selections for tha
PTC Main category on the side menu. t
PTC Non-Vital Configuration The selected Side Menu item is
PTC Vital Configuration highlighted and the page title
PTC Key Mgmt matches the Side Menu term.
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration
SNMP General Configuration
SNMP Trap Configuration
SNMP Temporary Disable
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S Note: The existence of some Side Menu
4 - VLD-R16S items is dependent upon the application
5 - VLD-C6S program. For example, the Non-Vital timers
6 - VIO-44R item is not displayed if the application
7 - CAB-16S
has no Non-Vital Timers defined.
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-3, Web GUI Main Menu

As a convenience, some pages (e.g. the I/O module pages) have a pair of links on the page that allows
navigation to the Configuration, Diagnostics, or Status pages for that item. This feature allows all aspects of
an I/O module to be “one-click away” from the current page. See Figure 6-4.

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
System Time Flash Rate 30 FPM
Application
Change Password Manual Voltage Setup:
General Configuration
Bank 1 Links to the Diagnostics
Vital Timers and Status page for this
Non-Vital Timers Bank Voltage 10.0 Volts VLC-C6S are provided here.
Vital Configuration Bank 2
Battery Alarms 10.0
Bank Voltage Volts
Software Update
Update Settings
Upload Software
Apply Software
Automated Voltage Setup:
Selective Functionality Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied.
Selective Function Enable Bank 1
Target Bulb Voltage 9.5 Volts
PTC
Last Status None Start Auto Setup
PTC Non-Vital Configuration
PTC Vital Configuration
PTC Key Mgmt Bank 2
SNMP Settings Last Status None Start Auto Setup
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-4, Web GUI Configuration Menu

Main Menu Categories
The following paragraphs describe the overall purpose and type of information available under each of the
four Main Menu categories. A more detailed description of the pages themselves follows in a later section.
General
Items under the General menu depict the top-level condition of the system along with the information
associated with the software and application program versions. No entries can be made on the pages under
the General category.
Configuration
The Configuration pages allow viewing and modification of the various programmable settings for the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system as well as the individual modules that have settable parameters. The one page
that is the exception to this is the System Configuration page, which lists the current values of all the
settable parameters. This one page can be printed or saved electronically from the web browser to capture
the current values of the system settings.
Diagnostics
The Diagnostic pages provide for viewing and download of the various ElectroLogIXS/EC5 logs as well as
provide access to the diagnostic modes of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 I/O modules such as the test modes for
the VLD-R16S or the bank switchover for the VIO-44R.
Status
The Status pages allow viewing of the current value of the various application statuses in the loaded
application program. This page automatically refreshes the display of the status values every two seconds.
The “All Statuses” Side Menu selection lists every status in the application in alphanumeric order of the
status names. Selecting an I/O Module or Communication Port shows only those statuses associated with
that module or that communications channel. Selecting the “Watch” box next to a status name places it
under the Watch Statuses Side Menu so that any group of statuses may be selected for more convenient
monitoring. Figure 6-5 depicts these items on the All Statuses page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
All Statuses Navigation to the status pages can be done
Watch Statuses via the page "buttons" or the Page drop-down
Page: Page 3 (5-B2L1F-7-CODEOUT2)
list. The drop-down list shows the status name
PTC of the first and last status on that particular page.
PTC Statuses First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page
Statuses are sorted by status
PTC Device State
Pa e 3/6 name in alpha-numeric order.
I/O Slots Description Status Name Value Watch

1 - VIO-1010S Bank 2 Flash Lamp 1 5-B2L1F FALSE
2 - VIO-86S Bank 2 Lamp 1 Out 5-B2LIOUT FALSE
3 - VLD-R16S Module Health 5-HEALTH TRUE
4 - VLD-R16S
Lamp Normal Mode 5-NORMAL TRUE
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
Non-Vital Input 2 5-NVIN1 FALSE
7 - CAB-16S Non-Vital Output 1 5-NVOUT1 FALSE
8 - VIO-44S Non-Vital Timer Complete 5-NVOUT11 FALSE
9 - VTI-2S Non-Vital Timer Enable 5-NVOUT11EN FALSE
GFD-1 Selecting "Watch" for a set of
Vital Timer Enable 5-SETUPEN FALSE
statuses allows them to be
Vital Timer Complete 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE viewed together on the
Comm I/O
Lamp Setup Grant 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE "Watch Statuses" page.
Ethernet
Remote Custom Rate 1 50RATE-T1 FALSE
Office 3rd Pulse Timer Running 50RATE-T2 FALSE
Serial Ports Module Health 6-HEALTH TRUE
1 - LCP Vital Input 1 6-VIN1 FALSE
2 - Remote
Vital Output 1 6-VOUT1 FALSE
3 - (empty)
Custom Rate 3 7-CAB120 TRUE
Internal Custom Rate 1 7-CAB50 FALSE
Custom Rate 2 7-CAB75 FALSE
Vital Timers Track Code Decoder Output 2 7-CODEOUT2 FALSE
Non-Vital Timers
373-0670
Figure 6-5, Web GUI Status Menu

Parameter Update
Modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters via the Web GUI is a two-step process for any type of
parameter. After changing one or more parameters on a given web page, select “Update Settings” below
the list of parameters (See Figure 6-6). This selection causes the parameter confirmation page to be
displayed for the parameters listed on that specific page. All modifiable parameters on the entry page are
shown on the confirmation page with those parameters that have modified values highlighted (See Figure 6-
7). Selecting “Confirm” causes the new parameter values to be accepted. Selecting “Cancel” causes the
new values to be rejected. In both cases, the user is returned to the web page being viewed previously. If a
parameter change is not confirmed within 60 seconds of selecting “Update Settings”, the modifications are
canceled by the system and the previous page is displayed.
If an out-of-range entry is submitted or an error occurs during the update process, the Web GUI indicates
the type of error. When an error occurs, the requested update is canceled and must be reentered.
Some parameter updates may alter the operation of the system or the ability to access the system via the
Web GUI in a non-obvious way. When such is the case, an Alert is provided on the confirmation screen to
indicate the resulting behavior. Figure 6-8 shows an example of an alert message. In this example
case, the current user will be logged out if the change is accepted.
Site ID: GETS-GS
Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - General Ethernet

Local Presence
Port 1
System Time
MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:48
Application
Change Password IP Address 192.168.0.11
General Configuration Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Vital Timers
DHCP Server Enabled
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.0.12
Battery Alarms DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.0.43
DHCP Server Default Gateway 192.168.0.11
Software Update
Upload Software
Port 2
Apply Software
MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:49
Selective Functionality IP Address 192.168.1.12

Selective Function Enable Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP Server Enabled
PTC
DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.1.13
PTC Vital Configuration DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.1.44
PTC Key Mgmt DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Update Settings
I/O Slots
Set Ethernet Settings to the Application Defaults
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
NOTE: Click this button to set all the Ethernet settings to the application defaults.
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
Set Ethernet Defaults
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-6, Configuration - General Ethernet Example

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Active values and New values

are shown side by side for
Description Active Value New Value easy comparison.
IP Address 1 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.11
Subnet Mask 1 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
DHCP Server Port 1 Enabled Enabled
DHCP 1 Pool Start 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.12
DHCP 1 Pool End 192.168.0.43 192.168.0.43
DHCP 1 Default Gateway 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.11 Changed values are

highlighted.
IP Address 2 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.10
Subnet Mask 2 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
DHCP 2 Pool Start 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.13
DHCP 2 Pool End 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.44
DHCP 2 Default Gateway 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.12
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Confirm Cancel
Select "Confirm" to accept Select "Cancel" to reject the

the new values as shown values entered and return to 373-0739
in the Table. the previous page.
Figure 6-7, Submit Form Example
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Description Active Value New Value
IP Address 1 192.168.0.11 192.168.0.10
Subnet Mask 1 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
DHCP 1 Pool Start 192.168.0.12 192.168.0.12
DHCP 1 Pool End 192.168.0.43 192.168.0.43
IP Address 2 192.168.1.12 192.168.1.12
Subnet Mask 2 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
DHCP 2 Pool Start 192.168.1.13 192.168.1.13
DHCP 2 Pool End 192.168.1.44 192.168.1.44
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
ALERT: Clicking "Confirm" will change the following parameters of the current web
session:
IP Address
You will be logged off and will need to logon again using the new URL:
http://192.168.0.10
Confirm Cancel
Figure 6-8, Web GUI Alert message

The application program has an access control setting that allows one or both of the Ethernet ports to be set
to "Read Only." When that is the case, all parameters will be shown "Grayed-Out" and are not modifiable
via that Ethernet Port.
Local Presence
Modification of vital parameters via the Web GUI requires Local Presence to be established for the active
Web GUI session. Each web page that requires Local Presence for parameter entry has a link to the Local
Presence page. When this web page link is used to navigate to the Local Presence page, the user returns to
the original page after Local Presence is established. A link to Local Presence is also provided on the
Configuration page Side Menu under System Settings.
To establish Local Presence, navigate to the Local Presence page. Select “Request Local Presence“ (See
Figure 6-9) and follow the instructions on the Local Presence Confirmation screen (See Figure 6-10).
When the Local Presence Key is typed in correctly, the PROG button on the VPM-3 is pressed, and the
“Confirm Request for Local Presence” is selected within 60 seconds of the initial request, Local Presence is
established for the current login session.
Note that if the PROG button on the VPM-3 is pressed out of sequence, pressed more than once, or pressed
longer than five seconds Local Presence will not be established.
Local Presence remains in effect until one of the following occur:
1. Local Presence is disabled via the Web GUI (Local Presence page).
2. The active session ends (user logs out or is logged out)
3. Local Presence is established via the CDU
4. Thirty minutes elapses since the last parameter change (any parameter)
5. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is reset.

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Local Presence Configuration

Local Presence Local Presence Not Established
System Time
Application
Request Local Presence
Change Password
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
Selective Function Enable
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-9, Local Presence
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
To confirm local user presence request, perform the

following steps in order within 60 seconds:
• Type in the Local Presence Key shown on the

screen
• Press and release the program button on the
VPM-3 module (1 to 5 second duration)
• Confirm Request for Local Presence
Local Presence Key : i 9 a 5 t

Note that the format of the
Confirm Request for Local Presence Cancel
Local Presence Key is always
letter-number-letter-number-letter.
Figure 6-10, Confirm Local Presence 373-0741

Web GUI Pages
General Main Menu

The pages in this section are on the Side Menu under the General main menu category.
General Information
The General Information page displays identifying information from the selected application, and
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system along with the list of active alarms and the status of each module defined in the
application. Links to the Alarms page and the Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages of each of the
I/O modules and communication interfaces are provided.
Site ID: GETS-GS
Chassis ID: 0
General Information
Vital Application General Information
Non-Vital Application
PTC Application Railroad: GE Transportation
Executive Information Subdivision: Global Signaling
Boot Information
Address: Grain Valley, MO Application and Unit Specific Information
Site ID: undefined
Chassis ID: 0
0000 0000
Application ID: 65535
1111 1111 1111 1111
EPROM EPT CRC 2FD3
EPROM Checksum 5B5A
PTC Enabled Disabled
PTC Time Not Established
Local Time: 05-05-11 10:27:38 Time of web page load/refresh

Last Reset:
AB Processor: 05-05-11 09:43:31 -- Power/External (RSR: 00000001)
C Processor: 05-05-11 09:43:23 -- Power/External (RSR: 00000001)
Link to Active Alarms:
Alarms page 1. 05-05-11 09:44:23 -- LCP Link Down
Slot 1:
Healthy [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status]
VIO-1010
Slot 2:
VIO-86S
Slot 3:
VLD-R16S
Slot 4:
VLD-R16S
Slot 5:
VLD-C6S
Slot 6:
Quick Status of System
VIO-44R Components with links to
Slot 7:
CAB-16
Healthy [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status] Configuration, Diagnostics,
Slot 8:
and Status pages
VIO-44S
Slot 9:
VTI-2S
Ethernet:
Disabled [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status]
Office
Ethernet:
3 Link(s) Down [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status]
Remote
Serial 1:
Link Down [Configuration][Diagnostics][Status]
LCP
NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates.

Page must be refreshed 373-0675
to see latest status
Figure 6-11, General - General Information

Vital Application and Non-Vital Application
Two pages are provided to display the information for each of the selected applications.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Vital Application
Non-Vital Application Vital Application
PTC Application
Executive Information Name vlcmanual-edvpv
Boot Information
Index 001
EPT CRC E75D
EPT Checksum 2B4A
ACE Editor: 4.8.33110

IXS Compiler 1.4.11199
Railroad: GE Transportation
Subdivision: Global Signaling
Address: Grain Valley, MO
Chassis ID: 0
Location Number: 12
Flash Rate (flash/per sec): 30
Date 07/21/2010
Figure 6-12, General - Vital Application
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Vital Application
Non-Vital Application Non-Vital Application
PTC Application
Executive Information Name vlcmanual-edvpnv
Boot Information
Index 001
EPT CRC 3962
EPT Checksum FC01
ACE Editor: 4.8.33110

IXS Compiler 1.4.11199
Railroad: GE Transportation
Subdivision: Global Signaling
Address: Grain Valley, MO
Chassis ID: 0
Location Number: 12
Flash Rate (flash/per sec): 30
Date 07/21/2010
Figure 6-13, General - Non-Vital Application

PTC Application
This page is provided to display information on the PTC Mapping file and PTC Configuration file if it is
loaded.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Vital Application
Non-Vital Application PTC Application
PTC Application
Executive Information Header: PTC Editor Version: "1.0.0.3" Source Filename: "D:\PTC\Lab\IXS
Boot Information PTC Mapping App\vlcmanual-edvpv\vlcmanual-edvp.ptcprj" File Compile Date
File: "Saturday, June 05, 2010, 3:50:16 PM"
CRC: 0x1451F216
Header: PTC Editor Version: "1.0.0.3" Source Filename: "D:\PTC\Lab\IXS
PTC
App\vlcmanual-edvpv\vlcmanual-edvp.ptcprj" File Compile Date
Configuration
"Saturday, June 05, 2010, 3:50:11 PM"
File:
CRC: 0x71448269
Figure 6-14, General – PTC Application

The Executive Information page displays the available information for all processors in the unit. The
amount and type of information available is dependent upon the module type.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Vital Application
Non-Vital Application Executive Information
PTC Application
Executive Information PN: INTERNAL
Boot Information
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: A
CRC: CDC13F88
PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
CRC: B5C16CC5
PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0098F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: C
CRC: BF28C276
PN: 202550-000
Ver: 2.1
Module: VTI
Processor: D
Ref: U76
PN: 202550-000
Ver: 2.1
Module: VTI
Processor: E
Ref: U86
Figure 6-15, General - Executive Information

Boot Information
The Boot Information page displays the available information for all processors in the unit.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
PTC System [Print]

General Information
PTC Application
Boot Information
Boot Information PN: 083023-511
Ver: 5.11 Bld 004
Signal System Module: VPM-3
Vital Application
Processor: A
CRC: 0A0A4944
PN: 083023-511
Ver: 5.11 Bld 004
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
CRC: AE0100F4
PN: 083023-511
Ver: 5.11 Bld 004
Module: VPM-3
Processor: C
CRC: EDA9B689
Figure 6-16 , General - Boot Information

Configuration Main Menu – System Settings

The System Configuration page displays the current value for the various configuration settings in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system. This page may be printed or saved electronically from the web browser to
capture the current value of all system settings.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings [Print]

System Configuration Active System Configuration
Local Presence
System Time Site ID GETS-GS
Application Chassis ID 0
Change Password Application ID 0
Vital Timers Local Time 06-29-12 13:46:18
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Executive Information
Battery Alarms PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0120F
Software Update Module: VPM-3
Upload Software Processor: A
Copyright: GETS Global
Apply Software
Signaling, LLC (C)
2012
Selective Functionality CRC: 0FC5496D
PTC PN: INTERNAL

PTC Non-Vital Configuration Ver: FULL Bld0120F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
PTC Key Mgmt
Signaling, LLC (C)
SNMP Settings 2012
Active SNMP Configuration CRC: 7EACD379
SNMP Temporary Disable PN: INTERNAL
Ver: FULL Bld0120F
Module: VPM-3
I/O Slots
Processor: C
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Signaling, LLC. (C)
3 - VLD-R16S 2012
4 - VLD-R16S CRC: 5B0632EC
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S PN: 202550-000
8 - VIO-44S Ver: 2.1
9 - VTI-2S Module: VTI
Processor: D
GFD-1
Ref: U76
Copyright: Harmon Industries
Comm Settings Inc. (C) 1998
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet PN: 202550-000
Routing Table Ver: 2.1
Web Interface Module: VTI
Telnet Interface Processor: E
SSH Interface Ref: U86
Remote Copyright: Harmon Industries
Inc. (C) 1998
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic PN: 202551-000
1 - LCP Ver: 1.0
Module: CDU
Processor: MC68HC711D3CFN2
Ref: U2
Copyright: (c) 1998 Harmon
Industries Inc.
Datecode: 980707
Figure 6-17, Configuration - System Configuration (1) (Cont. on next page)

2 - Remote Boot Information

3 - (empty) PN: 083023-512
Ver: 5.12 Bld 001
Module: VPM-3
Processor: A
Signaling, LLC. (C)
2012
CRC: 20705102
PN: 083023-512
Ver: 5.12 Bld 001
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
Signaling, LLC. (C)
2012
CRC: 3E131DD0
PN: 083023-512
Ver: 5.12 Bld 001
Module: VPM-3
Processor: C
Signaling, LLC. (C)
2012
CRC: A9CDFCBB
PTC Application
PTC Mapping File: Header: PTC Editor
Version: "3.5.1.1"
Source Filename:
"vlcmanual-
edvp_PTC3.ptcprj"
File Compile Date:
"Tuesday, December
13, 2011, 5:55:51 PM
UTC" Chassis: "EIXS"
Library CRC:
"0B1155D2" Library
Date: "Friday, July
22, 2011 8:51:10 PM
UTC"
CRC: 0x63E25AEE
PTC Configuration File: Header: PTC Editor
Version: "3.5.1.1"
Source Filename:
"vlcmanual-
edvp_PTC3.ptcprj"
File Compile Date:
"Friday, May 11,
2012, 7:16:15 PM
UTC" Chassis: "EIXS"
CRC: 0x5849686A
System Time Settings

Time sync source None
Application EPROM Information

EPT CRC 2FD3
EPT Checksum 5B5A
Vital Application Information

Name vlcmanual-edvpv
Index 001
EPT CRC E75D
EPT Checksum 2B4A
Non-Vital Application Information

Name vlcmanual-edvpnv
Index 001
EPT CRC 3962
EPT Checksum FC01

Ethernet Settings
IP Address 1 192.168.0.11
Subnet Mask 1 255.255.255.0
MAC Address 1 00:09:91:44:7E:48
IP Address 2 192.168.1.12
Subnet Mask 2 255.255.255.0
MAC Address 2 00:09:91:44:7E:49
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
DHCP Server Port 1 Enabled
DHCP 1 Pool Start 192.168.0.12
DHCP 1 Pool End 192.168.0.43
DHCP 1 Default Gateway 192.168.0.11
DHCP Server Port 2 Enabled
DHCP 2 Pool Start 192.168.1.13
DHCP 2 Pool End 192.168.1.44
DHCP 2 Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Routing Table Settings

No Entries
HTTP Settings
Inactivity timeout 60
HTTP TCP Port# 80
Trusted Source 1 Status Disabled
Trusted Source 1 IP Addr 0.0.0.0
Trusted Source 1 Net Mask 0.0.0.0
Trusted Source 2 IP Addr 0.0.0.0
Telnet Settings
Telnet Port 1 Disabled
Telnet Port 2 Disabled
Telnet TCP Port# 23
Inactivity timeout Disabled
Trusted Source 1 Network 0.0.0.0
Trusted Source 2 Network 0.0.0.0
SSH Settings
SSH Port 1 Enabled
SSH Port 2 Disabled
SSH Server Port# 22
SSH Inactivity timeout Disabled
Authorized Keys File CRC 0xD49B0BF4
Diagnostic Port Settings

Baud Rate 57600
Parity None
Data Bits 8
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control Disabled
LCP Settings
LCP Enable Enabled
Non-Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timer 5-NVOUT11 00:20.0
Non-Vital Timer A_NV_EQN 00:00.0
Non-Vital Timer GRANT 00:20.0
Non-Vital Timer IND-3 00:00.0
Non-Vital Timer R_NVEQM 00:00.2
Non-Vital Timer R_NVEQN 00:00.2
Non-Vital Timer _NVEQN 00:00.2
Vital Comm Serial Port 2 Settings

Baud Rate 9600
Parity None

Stop Bits 1
Type Asynchronous
Mode Point to Point
Maximum MAC Switchover Time 1
Remote 1 Date Time Update Disabled
Remote 1 MAC Enable Disabled
Remote 1 MAC Use New Key No
Remote 1 Remote Enabled
Remote 1 Protocol RP2000
Remote 1 Local Network Id 0
Remote 1 Remote Network Id 200
Remote 1 Maximum Send Time Difference 2100
Remote 1 Maximum Receive Time Difference 2100
Vital Comm Ethernet Settings

Maximum MAC Switchover Time 1
Remote 1 IP Address 0.0.0.0
Remote 1 Port 8280
Remote 1 Heartbeat Message Interval 0 248
Remote 1 Update Period 248
Remote 1 Acknowledge Timeout 992
Remote 2 Port 8280
Remote 2 Local Network Id ***
Remote 2 Remote Network Id ***
Remote 3 Port 8280
Remote 3 Local Network Id ***
Remote 3 Remote Network Id ***
Remote 3 Update Period 248
Remote 3 Acknowledge Timeout 992
Vital Timers
Vital Timer 5-B1L1 00:06
Vital Timer 5-B1L2 00:10

Vital Timer 5-B1L3F 00:04

Vital Timer 5-SETUPGRANT 00:00
Vital Timer CAB1EB 00:05
Vital Timer LCPOUT1 00:00
Vital Timer TXCODE2-T2 00:03
Vital Configuration
Vital Setting 1 - LAMP1-1ON FALSE
Vital Setting 5 - LAMP1-1F FALSE
Vital Setting 9 - 5-GRANT FALSE
Vital Setting 10 - VC10 FALSE
Vital Setting 13 - ALLOW_LINKS FALSE
Vital Setting 14 - HMI1 FALSE
Vital Setting 17 - EVENT FALSE
Vital Configuration ID 0000 0000
Battery Alarm Settings

High Battery Alarm Voltage 17.5
Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0
Slot 1 VIO-1010S Settings

No field settable values

Vital Input 1 Slow Pick 2
Vital Input 1 Slow Release 2
Vital Input 2 Slow Pick 2
Slot 3 VLD-R16S Settings

Flash Rate 30
Slot 4 VLD-R16S Settings

Flash Rate 30
Slot 5 VLD-C6S Settings

Flash Rate 30
Bank 1 Manual Voltage 10.0
Bank 2 Manual Voltage 10.0
Slot 6 VIO-44R Settings

No Slow Pick / Slow Release settings
Slot 7 CAB-16S Settings


Slot 9 VTI-2S Settings

Track 1 Transmit Output Voltage 0.5
Track 1 Receive Reference Ratio 6.00
Track 1 Code 5 Setting NON-ALT
Track 1 Transmit Test Mode OFF
Track 1 Receive Test Mode OFF
Track 1 Transmit Current 0.07
Track 1 Track Resistance 7.11
Track 1 Receive Current 0.05
Track 2 Transmit Output Voltage 0.5
Track 2 Receive Reference Ratio 6.00
Track 2 Code 5 Setting NON-ALT
Track 2 Transmit Test Mode OFF

Track 2 Receive Test Mode OFF

Track 2 Transmit Current 0.07
Track 2 Track Resistance 7.11
Track 2 Receive Current 0.05
GFD-1 Settings
Battery 1 Name Battery 1
Battery 1 Fault Status Bad Voltage Cal.
Battery 1 Calibrated Voltage 13.5
Battery 1 Ground Fault Threshold 10
Battery 1 Ground Fault Time 5
Battery 1 Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0
Battery 1 High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5
Battery Not
Battery 2 Fault Status
Connected
Battery Not
Battery 3 Fault Status
Connected
PTC CRC Information

WIU Configuration CRC 0x27FCAEEB
PTC Mapping File CRC 0x63E25AEE
PTC Configuration File CRC 0x5849686A
Applicability Settings CRC 0x58BEABED

External Time Update Timeout (s) 7200
Beacon Continuous Enabled
Broadcast Rate (ms) 1000
Beacon Bit Time (s) 300
Beacon End Time (s) 120
Max Beacon Interval (s) 900
Broadcast On Change No
Source Address XX.w.456789:10.wiu
Destination Address XX.L.X.000000:tmc
Flags - Time Format Absolute
Flags - Encryption Disabled
Flags - Compression Disabled
Flags - Data Integrity App Specific
TTL Timed Beacon (s) 12
QoS Timed Beacon 1
TTL Get WIU Status (s) 12
QoS Get WIU Status 1
LRM Max Secs Time Difference 3
No Time Sync Message 2
PTC Time Re-Sync Enable No
Destination IP Address 1 192.168.0.12
Destination IP Port 1 3001

High Availability Enabled Yes

Mode Bidirectional
Keep Alive Interval (ms) 9000
Keep Alive Ack Timeout (ms) 1000
Data Ack Enabled Yes
Data Ack Timeout (ms) 1000
Data NAK Retry Limit 2
Retransmit Delay (ms) 0
Connection Attempt Timeout (ms) 1000
Connection Delay (ms) 1000
Connection Retry Limit -1
Reconnection Limit -1

WIU Address 712345678910
Time Messages Before Sending WSM 5
Time Message Deviation 1
Ignored Time Difference 3
Max Secs Time Change 3
Max Time Change Within Mins 2
WIU Enabled Disabled
Device VIN1
Debounce Time 0 msec
Applicability Properties FFFFFF
PTC Key Management Configuration

Encrypted HMAC Key 542008BD5CE6
0CC94D5B4C7B
9E33B721F7DA
C70EDDF4C9CD
Encrytped HMAC CRC C264639B

RC2 Key File CRC F17B0738
Figure 6-23, Configuration - System Configuration (7)

Local Presence
The Local Presence page indicates the current state of Local Presence (Established or Not Established)
along with a button to change the state.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Local Presence Configuration

System Configuration Current state of Local Presence
Local Presence Local Presence Not Established
System Time
Application
Request Local Presence
Change Password
General Configuration Button to change the Local
Vital Timers Presence state
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-24, Configuration - Local Presence

After requesting Local Presence, the Local Presence key value displayed on the next web page must be
entered. The key is always letter-number-letter-number-letter. Press the PROG button on the VPM3 prior
to selecting “Confirm.” If all steps are followed in sequence, Local Presence is established for the current
login session.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
To confirm local user presence request, perform the

following steps in order within 60 seconds:
• Type in the Local Presence Key shown on the

screen
• Press and release the program button on the
VPM-3 module (1 to 5 second duration)
• Confirm Request for Local Presence
Enter the value of the key shown

Local Presence Key : i 9 a 5 t The key is always in the format of
letter-number-letter-number-letter
Confirm Request for Local Presence Cancel
Select Confirm after the PROG

button on the VPM3 has been
pressed. Confirm must be selected
within 60 seconds of requesting
Local Presence
Figure 6-25, Local Presence Confirm

System Time
The System Time page is used to change the current time and the Time Sync Source options. For PTC to be
enabled, the Time Sync Source must be either EMP or SNTP, and a time sync message must be received by
the system within the last two hours, or anytime after a system restart.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings System Time

Local Presence
Date 29 June 2012
System Time
Application Time 9 : 53 : 40
Change Password
General Configuration Update Time
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Time Synchronization
Vital Configuration
Time sync source None
Battery Alarms
Update Time Settings

Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
Set all Time parameters to Defaults
NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters.
Set Defaults
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-26, Configuration - System Time

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Local Presence
Date 29 June 2012
System Time
Change Password
General Configuration Update Time For PTC messaging to be
Vital Timers enabled, time sync source
Non-Vital Timers must be EMP or SNTP
Time Synchronization
Vital Configuration
Time sync source EMP
Battery Alarms
Time Zone Settings

Software Update
Upload Software Time Zone -5 hours from GMT
Apply Software Daylight Savings Time Enabled
Daylight Savings Start Month March
Selective Functionality Daylight Savings Start Week 2
Daylight Savings End Month November
Daylight Savings End Week 1
PTC Multicast address that
PTC Non-Vital Configuration EIXS connects to to
PTC Vital Configuration EMP Server Settings receive time updates
PTC Key Mgmt EMP Time Multicast IP Address 239.255.0.5
EMP Time Multicast Port Number 32768
SNMP Settings
UDP port number used
Update Time Settings for EMP time messages
Set all Time parameters to Defaults
I/O Slots
NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters.
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S Set Defaults
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-27, Configuration – System Time EMP Settings

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Local Presence
Date 29 June 2012
System Time
Change Password
General Configuration Update Time
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Time Synchronization
Vital Configuration
Time sync source SNTP
Battery Alarms
Time Zone Settings

Software Update
Upload Software Time Zone -5 hours from GMT
Apply Software Daylight Savings Time Enabled
Daylight Savings Start Month March
Selective Functionality Daylight Savings Start Week 2
Daylight Savings End Month November
Daylight Savings End Week 1
PTC Interval between active
time queries
PTC Vital Configuration SNTP Server Settings
PTC Key Mgmt SNTP Active Query Interval 60 minutes IP Addresses that IXS
connects to for SNTP
SNTP Unicast Server 1 IP Address 0.0.0.0 time updates
SNMP Settings
SNTP Unicast Server 2 IP Address 0.0.0.0
SNMP Trap Configuration Update Time Settings
I/O Slots Set all Time parameters to Defaults

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S NOTE: Click this button to default all time parameters.
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S Set Defaults
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-28, Configuration – System Time SNTP Passive Settings

Application
The Application page displays the currently operating application pair. If Local Presence is established, the
new applications may be selected from the drop-down list. Note that after the new application selections are
confirmed, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 resets causing a user log out.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Application

Local Presence
Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page.
System Time Click Here to request Local Presence
Application
Change Password
General Configuration Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpv : CRC#E75D
Vital Timers Non-Vital Application 001 : vlcmanual-edvpnv : CRC#3962
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Update Settings
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-29, Configuration - Application

Change Password
The Change Password page allows the password to be set to a new value. The new password value may be
any length of up to 32 characters.
WARNING Unauthorized modification of ElectroLogIXS/EC5 parameters or

configuration may result in unsafe conditions that could result in death
or serious injury. Responsibility for security of passwords for
equipment access lies with the railway authority. Passwords should
be of a non-obvious nature and of sufficient length to preclude an
unauthorized user from easily guessing the password.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Change Password

Local Presence
Login ID admin
System Time
Application Old Password
Change Password New Password
Confirm new password
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Update Password
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-30, Configuration - Change Password

The General Configuration displays and allows modification of the Site ID parameter for the unit.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings General Settings

Local Presence
Site ID GETS-GS
System Time
Application
Change Password Update Settings
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-31, Configuration - General Configuration

Vital Timers
The Vital Timers page displays the current settings and ranges allowed for the individual timers. If Local
Presence is established, the timer values may be modified to any value within the application defined range.
Navigation aids (the page drop-down list and the Prev / Next page and First / Last page buttons) are
provided for situations where the number of timers in the application is large and must be displayed on
more than one web page.
WARNING For Vital Timers of 4 seconds or more, accuracy will be within +10%/-
0%.
For Vital Timers of less than 4 seconds, accuracy will be within +0.5
second under worst case timing conditions.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Vital Timer Settings

Local Presence
Application
Change Password
General Configuration Page: Page 1 (5-B1L1-TXCODE2-T2)
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page
Vital Configuration
Max Value
Battery Alarms Status Minimum
(Default) (min:sec)
5-B1L1 00:00 00:06 00 : 06
Software Update
5-B1L2 00:00 00:10 00 : 10
Upload Software
Apply Software 5-B1L3F 00:00 00:04 00 : 04
5-SETUPGRANT 00:00 00:00 00 : 00
Selective Functionality CAB1EB 00:00 00:05 00 : 05
LCPOUT1 00:00 00:00 00 : 00
TXCODE2-T2 00:00 00:03 00 : 03
PTC
PTC Vital Configuration Update Settings
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-32, Configuration - Vital Timers

Non-Vital Timers
The Non-Vital Timers page operates identically to the Vital Timers page with the exception that Local
Presence is not required to change the timer values.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Non-Vital Timer Settings

Local Presence
Page: Page 1 (5-NVOUT11-_NVEQN)
System Time
Application
Change Password First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page
General Configuration Max Value

Status Minimum
Vital Timers (Default) (min:sec.tenths)
Non-Vital Timers 5-NVOUT11 00:00.0 00:20.0 00 : 20 .0
Vital Configuration A_NV_EQN 00:00.0 00:00.0 00 : 00 .0
Battery Alarms
GRANT 00:00.0 00:20.0 00 : 20 .0
IND-3 00:00.0 00:00.0 00 : 00 .0
Software Update
Upload Software R_NVEQM 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2
Apply Software R_NVEQN 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2
_NVEQN 00:00.0 00:00.2 00 : 00 .2
Selective Function Enable Update Settings
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-33, Configuration - Non-Vital Timers

Vital Configuration
The Vital Configuration page displays the current values for the Vital Configuration Settings. If Local
Presence is established, the values of the settings may be modified.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Vital Configuration

Local Presence
Application
Change Password Description Status Name Value
General Configuration Vital Setting 1 LAMP1-1ON FALSE
Vital Timers
Vital Setting 2 LAMP1-2ON FALSE
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Vital Setting 3 LAMP1-3ON FALSE
Battery Alarms Vital Setting 4 LAMP2-1ON FALSE
Vital Setting 5 LAMP1-1F FALSE
Software Update Vital Setting 6 LAMP1-2F FALSE
Upload Software
Apply Software
Selective Functionality Vital Setting 9 5-GRANT FALSE

Selective Function Enable Vital Setting 10 VC10 FALSE
Vital Setting 11 VC11 FALSE
PTC Vital Setting 12 VC12 FALSE
Vital Setting 13 ALLOW_LINKS FALSE
PTC Key Mgmt Vital Setting 14 HMI1 FALSE
Vital Setting 15 HMI2 FALSE
SNMP Settings Vital Setting 16 HMI3 FALSE
Vital Setting 17 EVENT FALSE
Vital Configuration ID 0000 0000
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
Update Settings
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-34, Configuration - Vital Configuration

System Battery Alarm
The System Battery Alarm option is available when a VTI-2S module is defined in the application. The
battery voltages for the High Battery and Low Batter alarms are set on this page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings System Battery Alarm Settings

Local Presence
Application
Change Password
General Configuration High Battery Alarm Voltage 17.5 Volts
Vital Timers Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Update Settings
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-35, Configuration – Battery Alarms

Upload Software
The Upload Software page allows users to remotely upload software to the VPM-3. Executive, Boot,
Application, PTC Mapping and PTC Configuration files may all be uploaded. It should be noted that
files uploaded from this page are only uploaded to VPM-3 system memory and are not used for any
data processing. In order for the VPM-3 to be able to use the software, a user with local presence must
apply the files from the Update Mode GUI or from the Apply Software page. Figure 6-36 displays the
Upload Software page and its functionality.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Upload Software -Select the desired file type

System Configuration -Click “Browse” to point to the specific file being uploaded
Local Presence -Click “Upload” to begin the Upload Software process
System Time
Upload New Application Browse... Upload
Application
Change Password Upload Status: Upload completed successfully.
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Uploaded Boot
Delete : No file present.
File
Vital Configuration
Uploaded Exec
Battery Alarms Delete : No file present.
File
Header: IWP multi-application EPROM PTC LONG
Software Update Uploaded 3HEAD created 12/07/10 by ACE Version 4.8 Build:
Upload Software Delete Application : 33110
Apply Software File MultiApp EPROM
EPT CRC: 31B2
Selective Functionality Header: PTC Editor Version: "2.0.0.0" Source
Filename: "D:\Documents and Settings\psegroup\My
Uploaded PTC Documents\PTC Lab Tests\PTC Long 3head ELX\PTC
Delete :
Map File Long 3head ELX.ptcprj" File Compile Date "Monday,
PTC August 16, 2010, 2:49:43 PM"
PTC Non-Vital Configuration CRC: 0x4BED30AC
PTC Vital Configuration Uploaded PTC
Delete : No file present.
PTC Key Mgmt Config File
Files that have been uploaded displays their Header
SNMP Settings and CRC information. The user may also use the
Uploaded Vital “Delete” button to remove the uploaded file.
Active SNMP Configuration Delete Config Text : No file present.
SNMP General Configuration File
SNMP Trap Configuration Uploaded Non-
SNMP Temporary Disable Delete Vital Config : No file present.
Text File
I/O Slots Uploaded
Delete SNMP Config : No file present.
1 - VIO-1010S
Text File
2 - VIO-86S
Uploaded
3 - VLD-R16S
Selective
4 - VLD-R16S Delete : No file present.
Function Key
5 - VLD-C6S File
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-36, Configuration – Software Upload

Apply Software
The Apply Software page allows users with Local Presence to apply and activate software. Executive,
Boot, Application, PTC Mapping and Config files, which were previously uploaded from the Upload
Software page, may be applied for use from this page. Text configuration files copied and validated
using the SSH interface can be applied from this page. Also, PTC Mapping files and Executives that
were applied from the Update Mode GUI may be activated from this page. The Set All PTC Defaults
selection sets the Time sync parameters, Ethernet defaults, Non-Vital and Vital configuration parameter
defaults. Figure 6-37 displays the Apply Software page and its functionality.
Note: Local Presence is required to apply and activate files to prevent unauthorized users from changing
safety critical software.
Instructions on requesting Local Presence are given in

the Local Presence section of the manual. Local
Presence is required when applying files.
Files uploaded and validated using the SSH interface

can be applied here.
Sets all PTC Defaults from this button.
Figure 6-37, Configuration – Software Apply

- Click “ActivateExec” button to begin activating the

file.
- Once the activate PTC Exec file has been selected,
and confirmed, the system will require resetting in
order to return to the Web GUI. Once returned to
the Web GUI the PTC Exec file will no longer be
displayed.
- Click “ActivatePtcMap” button to begin activating the

file.
- Once the activate PTC Mapping file has been selected,
and confirmed, the page will be refreshed and the
PTC Mapping file will no longer be displayed.
Figure 6-38, Configuration – Software Apply (Cont. on next page)

- Executive files and PTC Mapping files applied from

Boot mode must be activated from the “Apply Software”
page for the VPM-3 to begin using them.
- When there are no files applied from boot mode, the
“Activate Files” section will be blank.
- Header and CRC information appear for PTC mapping

and Config files that have been uploaded.
- Files that have not been uploaded display “No file
present”.
- Once the file has been applied and confirmed, the
page will be refreshed and the file that was applied
will display“No file present”.
Figure 6-39, Configuration – Software Apply (2)


The Selective Functionality page provides for entering keys to authorize the operation of additional
functionality in the system. When the key is entered, it is stored on the backplane and remains enabled until
either the backplane is erased, or the function is disabled. On non-VPM-3 systems, the key is stored on the
PTC processor.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Selective Functions

Local Presence
Selective Function Authorization Key
System Time
New Selective Function Authorization Key HA929002
Application
Change Password Enable Selective Function
General Configuration Upload Status:
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Enter Selective Function authorization key
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-40, Configuration – Selective Function Enable

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Selective Functions

Local Presence
Selective Function Authorization Key
System Time
Application New Selective Function Authorization Key
Change Password Enable Selective Function
General Configuration Upload Status: Valid Key
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Disable High Availability : 11 : Enabled
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software Disables the selected function
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-41, Configuration - Selective Function Disable

The PTC Non-Vital Configuration Page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC
Non-Vital Configuration page lets users set PTC message interface parameters. When “Set PTC Defaults”
is selected, all parameters are defaulted to the parameters uploaded in the PTC Configuration file or to
the controller default values if no PTC Configuration file is loaded.
Class D Settings
Destination IP Address 1 IP Address where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to
10.255.255.210 )
Destination IP Port 1 TCP port number where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to
3001)
Destination IP Address IP Address where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to
2-8 0.0.0.0 ) Enabled when High Availability Enable is set to Yes
Destination IP Port 2-8 TCP port number where all Class D messages are sent (defaults to
3001) Enabled when High Availability Enable is set to Yes
High Availability Enable Enables High Availability mode (defaults to No)
Keep Alive Interval Time between sending Keep Alive Messages. Must be greater than
Keep Alive Ack Timeout. (Defaults to 30 Sec)
Keep Alive Ack Timeout Amount of time allowed to receive an ACK message in response to
a Keep Alive message. Must be less than Keep Alive Interval.
(defaults to15 sec)
Data Ack Enabled Indicates whether acknowledgements to Class D messages are
sent or expected in response to data messages. Both ends of the
link must be configured the same (defaults to No)
Data Ack Timeout Time allowed to elapse between sending a data message and
receipt of Ack message (defaults to 15 sec)
Data NAK Retry Limit The maximum number of retry attempts in response to a negative
acknowledgement that allows retries. (defaults to 3)
Retransmit Delay On receipt of a negative ack, how long to wait before attempting to
retransmit a message. Not modifiable. (defaults to 0)
Connection Attempt Time allowed to spend on a single attempt to open a Class D TCP
Timeout connection to a server. (defaults to 30 sec)
Connection Delay Time to wait before retrying to establish a connection. (defaults to
60 sec)
Connection Retry Limit Number of times a connection attempt is retried in the event that
connection attempts are failing. (defaults to –1 meaning retry
forever)
Reconnection Limit Number of times allowed to reconnect before giving up. Number of
reconnection attempts is counted from time the link was initiated at
system startup. It is not reset between successful reconnections
(defaults to -1)
Note: All defaults shown above are controller defaults. If a PTC Configuration file is loaded, the values
in the file are used for defaults.

Time that beacons

are sent with the Site ID: undefined Time that beacons
BeaconTTL = 1 Chassis ID: 0 are sent with the
BeaconTTL = 0
System Settings PTC Non-Vital Configuration Time between EMP or SNTP

System Configuration external time updates. PTC is
Local Presence
General WIU Settings disabled if this is exceeded.
System Time
Application External Time Update Timeout (s) 7200
Change Password Beacon Continuous Enabled
Time interval between successive
Broadcast Rate (ms) 1000
Vital Timers WIU Status messages while
Non-Vital Timers
Beacon Bit Time (s) 300 beaconing.
Vital Configuration Beacon End Time (s) 120
Battery Alarms Max Beacon Interval (s) 900 Maximum Idle Time between
Broadcast On Change No beaconing intervals. Only active if
Software Update Beacon Continuous is set to Times
Upload Software
EMP Settings Out.
Apply Software
Source Address XX.w.456789:10.wiu
Selective Functionality Destination Address XX.L.X.000000:tmc
Selective Function Enable ATCS Address of this WIU
PTC Settings is Flags - Time Format Absolute
displayed when Flags - Encryption Disabled
PTC
a PTC mapping PTC Non-Vital Configuration Flags - Compression Disabled
file is loaded. PTC Vital Configuration Flags - Data Integrity App Specific
PTC Key Mgmt TTL Timed Beacon (s) 12
QoS Timed Beacon 1 Message Time-to-live (one for
SNMP Settings each WIU Status Message Type)
Active SNMP Configuration TTL Get WIU Status (s) 12
SNMP General Configuration QoS Get WIU Status 1
LRM Max Secs Time Difference 3 Quality of Service
No Time Sync Message 2
I/O Slots PTC Time Re-Sync Enable No
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Class D Settings
3 - VLD-R16S
Destination IP Address 1 192.168.0.12 Message Destination
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S Destination IP Port 1 3001
6 - VIO-44R Destination IP Address 2 0.0.0.0
7 - CAB-16S
3001
Destination IP Port 2
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S Destination IP Address 3 0.0.0.0
GFD-1 Destination IP Port 3 3001
Comm Settings
General Remote Additional message destinations when
Ethernet Destination IP Address 5 0.0.0.0 High Availability is Enabled
General Ethernet Destination IP Port 5 3001
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface Destination IP Port 6 3001
SSH Interface Destination IP Address 7 0.0.0.0
Remote
Office
Serial Ports Destination IP Address 8 0.0.0.0
Diagnostic Destination IP Port 8 3001
1 - LCP
High Availability Enable No Enables High Availability mode
2 - Remote
Mode Bidirectional
3 - (empty)
Keep Alive Interval (ms) 9000
Keep Alive Ack Timeout (ms) 1000
Data Ack Enabled Yes
Data Ack Timeout (ms) 1000
Data NAK Retry Limit 2
Retransmit Delay (ms) 0
Connection Attempt Timeout (ms) 1000
Connection Delay (ms) 1000
Connection Retry Limit -1
Reconnection Limit -1 -1 means retry forever
Update Settings
Set Non-Vital PTC Settings to the Application Defaults
NOTE: Click this button to set all Non-Vital PTC settings to the application defaults.
Set PTC Defaults Selection defaults all non-vital PTC

parameters to the values in the PTC
Configuration file (if it is loaded) or
to the controller default values.
Figure 6-42, Configuration – PTC Non-Vital Settings

WARNING An ElectroLogIXS unit must be configured with a unique Wayside

Interface Unit (WIU) address for Positive Train Control (PTC)
messaging. Failure to ensure the uniqueness of the WIU address
proper values are set for each vital timer, vital Configuration
setting (vital soft switches), PTC applicability settings, PTC debounce
serious injury.
When configuring an ElectroLogIXS unit for PTC operation, use only
value is not available from the site plans, do not enable PTC operation
on the unit. Failure to comply could result in death or serious injury.
The PTC Vital Configuration Page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC Vital
Configuration page allows the selection of the vital PTC parameters - WIU Enabled, Device Debounce
times, and Applicability properties. When "Set PTC Vital Defaults" is clicked, it will set:
1) The WIU Address to the value in the PTC Configuration file, otherwise it is set to 000000000000
2) The WIU Enabled parameter to "Disable"
3) The Debounce times to the default values in the PTC Mapping file
4) The Applicability Properties to the default values in the PTC Mapping file

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings PTC Vital Configuration

Local Presence
Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page. PTC WIU Address. Must be nonzero for
System Time
Click Here to request Local Presence PTC messaging to be enabled. Check
Application plans for correct setting.
Change Password WIU Address 712345678910
Time Messages Before Sending WSM 5
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Time Message Deviation 1
Vital Configuration Ignored Time Difference 3
Battery Alarms
Max Secs Time Change 3
WIU Enabled - manual enable/disable of PTC
Software Update Max Time Change Within Mins 5 messaging. Must be set Disabled to apply a new
PTC Mapping file. Setting to Enabled causes the
Upload Software WIU Enabled Enabled
Class D connection attempts to begin.
Apply Software PTC Enabled Disabled
PTC Time Not Established Status of PTC messaging. The specific reason(s)
Selective Functionality for being PTC disabled are shown in the PTC Event
Selective Function Enable log on the Diagnostics web page.
Device Debounce Time Applicability Properties
PTC signal 0 msec F F F F F F F F - Edit Signal system applicability properties.
PTC Non-Vital Configuration Check the site plans for correct settings.
Update Settings Length of time to debounce an invalid PTC status in
PTC Key Mgmt
outgoing message. Check the site plans for correct
settings.
SNMP Settings Set PTC Vital Settings to Defaults
NOTE: Click this button to set all Vital PTC settings to the application defaults.
Set PTC Vital Defaults
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-43, Configuration – PTC Vital Settings (1) (Cont. on next page)

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings PTC Vital Configuration

Local Presence
WIU Address 712345678910
System Time
Application Time Messages Before Sending WSM 5
Change Password Time Message Deviation 1
Ignored Time Difference 3
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Max Secs Time Change 3
Vital Configuration Max Time Change Within Mins 5
Battery Alarms Enabled
WIU Enabled
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
Device Debounce Time Applicability Properties

signal 0 msec F F F F F F F F - Edit
PTC Update Settings

PTC Key Mgmt Set PTC Vital Settings to Defaults
SNMP Settings NOTE: Click this button to set all Vital PTC settings to the application defaults.
SNMP General Configuration Set PTC Vital Defaults
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-44, Configuration – PTC Vital Settings (2)

PTC Applicability Properties

PTC Applicability Properties page is displayed when the Applicability properties are selected on the PTC
Vital Configuration page. Each property can be set true or false as defined on the site plans.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings PTC Applicability Properties [PTC Vital Configuration]

Local Presence
System Time Device - signal
Application
Property - # Board False
Change Password
General Configuration Property - G Marker False
Vital Timers Property - S Marker False Sets the Applicability Property values for
Non-Vital Timers those that the mapping file allows field
Property - F Marker False
Vital Configuration programmability.
Property - H Marker False
Battery Alarms
Property - 1 Head False
Software Update Property - 2 Head False

Upload Software Property - 3 Head False
Apply Software
Update Settings
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-45, Configuration – PTC Vital Applicability Settings

PTC Key Mgmt

The PTC Key Mgmt page is displayed when a PTC mapping file is loaded. The PTC Key Mgmt page lets
the user upload and apply RC2 Key files and HMAC Keys. The Update PTC HMAC Key function also lets
the user upload an HMAC key and set the future time and date when it will automatically be applied.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings PTC Key Management

Current Encrypted HMAC Key
Local Presence
HMAC Key
System Time
Current
Application
Encrypted HMAC 0x1508BB10D2B76533767B4B0559E4D7182C85F1961DC6B964
Change Password Key
General Configuration Current HMAC Key CRCs
Current
Vital Timers Encrypted HMAC 0x0E371581
Non-Vital Timers CRC 1) Enter 48 character HMAC Key
Vital Configuration Pending 2) Select Data/Time to apply the new
Battery Alarms Encrypted HMAC No Future HMAC Key Present HMAC Key
Key
Software Update Pending
Encrypted HMAC No Future HMAC Key Present
Upload Software
CRC
Apply Software
New HMAC Key 0x 0
Date to Apply HMAC Key 7 5 2012 3) Click Upload HMAC Key
Selective Function Enable Time to Apply HMAC Key 14 : 10 : 51
Upload HMAC Key
PTC Uploaded HMAC Key Status None Apply the new HMAC Key
Delete New HMAC Key Apply New HMAC Key
PTC Key Mgmt
Upload Default HMAC Key
Set HMAC Key to Delete the new HMAC Key
SNMP Settings default(Configured if not already applied
Upload Default HMAC Key
Active SNMP Configuration in PTC Config file)
SNMP Trap Configuration 1) Click Browse...
SNMP Temporary Disable Current RC2 Key CRCs
2) Select the RC2 Key File
I/O Slots RC2 Key

1 - VIO-1010S Current RC2 Key CRC 0x42B26D64
2 - VIO-86S
Upload New RC2 Key File Browse... Upload
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S Uploaded RC2 Key Status None
5 - VLD-C6S Delete New RC2 Key Apply New RC2 Key 3) Click Upload
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Delete uploaded RC2 Key Apply the uploaded RC2
9 - VTI-2S File if not already applied Key File.
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-46, Configuration – PTC Key Management

Configuration - SNMP Settings

The Active SNMP Configuration page displays the current value for the various configuration settings on the
ElectrologIXS SNMP General Configuration and SNMP Trap Configuration pages. This page may be printed
or saved electronically from the web browser to capture the current value of the SNMP General Configuration
or SNMP Trap Configuration settings.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings [Print]

System Configuration Active SNMP Configuration
Local Presence
System Time SNMP General Configuration
Application
Temporary SNMP Trap Disable
Change Password 60
Time
General Configuration Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Disabled
Vital Timers Destination IP 1 0.0.0.0
Non-Vital Timers Destination IP 2 0.0.0.0
Vital Configuration Destination IP 3 0.0.0.0
Battery Alarms Destination IP 4 0.0.0.0
Destination UDP Port 1 162
Software Update Destination UDP Port 2 162
Upload Software
Apply Software
Wayside Device Type ElectroLogIXS
Location undefined
Selective Functionality Public Community String
Selective Function Enable Private Community String
WIU Hearbeat Trap Logging Disabled
PTC SNMP Trap Enable Disabled
PTC Vital Configuration SNMP Trap Configuration
PTC Key Mgmt Battery Alarm
Trap Enable Disabled
SNMP Settings Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data
Active SNMP Configuration Trap Text Battery Alarm Battery OK
SNMP General Configuration Number of Occurrences N/A N/A
SNMP Trap Configuration Time (seconds) 0 0
Battery 1 Voltage: Specific Trap
Enabled
Enable
I/O Slots Battery 1 Voltage: Trap ID 1 2
1 - VIO-1010S Bat 1 Voltage Out of
2 - VIO-86S Battery 1 Voltage: Reason Bat 1 Voltage OK
Rng
3 - VLD-R16S Battery 1 Voltage: Flag 1 2
4 - VLD-R16S Battery 1 Voltage: Priority 1 5
5 - VLD-C6S Battery 1 Voltage: Text Field 1
6 - VIO-44R Battery 1 Voltage: Text Field 2
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Battery 1 Cal Required: Specific
Enabled
Trap Enable
9 - VTI-2S
Battery 1 Cal Required: Trap ID 3 4
GFD-1
Bat 1: Cal. Required
Battery 1 Cal Required: Reason Bat 1: Cal. Required
OK
Comm Settings Battery 1 Cal Required: Flag 1 2
General Remote Battery 1 Cal Required: Priority 1 5
Ethernet Battery 1 Cal Required: Text Field
General Ethernet 1
Routing Table Battery 1 Cal Required: Text Field
2
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Battery 1 Ground Fault: Specific
SSH Interface Enabled
Trap Enable
Remote Battery 1 Ground Fault: Trap ID 5 6
Office
Figure 6-47, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (1) (Cont. on next page)
Serial Ports Bat 1 [Polarity]: Bat 1 [Polarity]:

Battery 1 Ground Fault: Reason
Diagnostic Ground Fault Ground Fault OK
1 - LCP Battery 1 Ground Fault: Flag 1 2
Battery 1 Ground Fault: Priority 1 5
2 - Remote
Battery 1 Ground Fault: Text Field
3 - (empty) 1
2

Enabled
Enable
Battery 2 Voltage: Trap ID 7 8
Bat 2 Voltage Out of
Battery 2 Voltage: Reason Bat 2 Voltage OK
Rng
Battery 2 Voltage: Flag 1 2
Battery 2 Voltage: Priority 1 5
Battery 2 Voltage: Text Field 1
Battery 2 Cal Required: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
OK
Battery 2 Cal Required: Flag 1 2
Battery 2 Cal Required: Priority 1 5
Battery 2 Cal Required: Text Field
1
2

Enabled
Trap Enable
Battery 2 Ground Fault: Trap ID 11 12
Bat 2 [Polarity]: Bat 2 [Polarity]:
Ground Fault Ground Fault OK
Battery 2 Ground Fault: Flag 1 2
1
2

Enabled
Enable
Battery 3 Voltage: Trap ID 13 14
Bat 3 Voltage Out of
Battery 3 Voltage: Reason Bat 3 Voltage OK
Rng
Battery 3 Voltage: Flag 1 2
Battery 3 Voltage: Priority 1 5
Battery 3 Cal Required: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
OK
Battery 3 Cal Required: Flag 1 2
Battery 3 Cal Required: Priority 1 5
1
2


Enabled
Trap Enable
Battery 3 Ground Fault: Trap ID 17 18
Bat 3 [Polarity]: Bat 3 [Polarity]:
Ground Fault Ground Fault OK
Battery 3 Ground Fault: Flag 1 2
1
2
Signaling Alarm
Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data
Signaling System Signaling System
Trap Text
Alarm Alarm OK
Number of Occurrences N/A N/A
Time (seconds) N/A N/A
Light Out Detected: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Light Out Detected: Trap ID 25 26
S# B# L#: Light Out
Light Out Detected: Reason S# B# L#: Light Out
OK
Light Out Detected: Flag 1 2
Light Out Detected: Priority 1 5
Light Out Detected: Text Field 1
Light Out Detected: Text Field 2
Open Track CKT Detected: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Open Track CKT Detected: Trap ID 27 28
Open Trk Circuit Open Trk Circuit
Open Track CKT Detected: Reason
Detected Detected OK
Open Track CKT Detected: Flag 1 2
Open Track CKT Detected: Priority 1 5
Open Track CKT Detected: Text
Field 1
Open Track CKT Detected: Text
Field 2
System Health
Trap Text System Health System Health OK
Module Health: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Module Health: Trap ID 29 30
[Module] #: [Failure [Module] #: [Failure
Module Health: Reason
Message] Message] OK
Module Health: Flag 1 2
Module Health: Priority 1 5
Module Health: Text Field 1
Module Health: Text Field 2
Module Removed: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Module Removed: Trap ID 31 32
Module Removed: Reason IXC S# Removed IXC S# Removed OK
Module Removed: Flag 1 2
Module Removed: Priority 1 5

Module Removed: Text Field 1

Module Removed: Text Field 2
Module Not Installed: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Module Not Installed: Trap ID 33 34
[VLD S#:/XCI] Not [VLD S#:/XCI] Not
Module Not Installed: Reason
Installed Installed OK
Module Not Installed: Flag 1 2
Module Not Installed: Priority 1 5
Module Not Installed: Text Field 1
Module Not Installed: Text Field 2
Communications Link
Communications link Communications link
Trap Text
state OK
Number of Occurrences 0 N/A
Time (seconds) 0 N/A
Class D Message Error: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Class D Message Error: Trap ID 35 36
Class D Message Error: Reason Class D port error Class D port OK
Class D Message Error: Flag 1 2
Class D Message Error: Priority 1 5
Class D Message Error: Text Field 1
Class D Message Error: Text Field 2
Class D Server Changed: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Class D Server Changed: Trap ID 109 N/A
Class D Server
Class D Server Changed: Reason N/A
changed
Class D Server Changed: Flag 1 N/A
Class D Server Changed: Priority 1 N/A
Class D Server Changed: Text Field
N/A
1
Class D Server Changed: Text Field
N/A
2
Vital Remote Link Error: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Vital Remote Link Error: Trap ID 37 38
Vital Remote Link Error: Reason Remote Link Error Remote Link OK
Vital Remote Link Error: Flag 1 2
Vital Remote Link Error: Priority 1 5
Vital Remote Link Error: Text Field
1
Vital Remote Link Error: Text Field
2
LCP Link Down: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
LCP Link Down: Trap ID 39 40
LCP Link Down: Reason LCP Link Down LCP Link Down OK
LCP Link Down: Flag 1 2
LCP Link Down: Priority 1 5
LCP Link Down: Text Field 1
LCP Link Down: Text Field 2
HAWK Link Down: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
HAWK Link Down: Trap ID 41 42

HAWK Link Down: Reason HAWK Link Down HAWK Link Down OK
HAWK Link Down: Flag 1 2
HAWK Link Down: Priority 1 5
HAWK Link Down: Text Field 1
HAWK Link Down: Text Field 2
Office Code Fail: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Office Code Fail: Trap ID 43 44
Office Code Fail: Reason Office Code Fail Office Code Fail OK
Office Code Fail: Flag 1 2
Office Code Fail: Priority 1 5
Office Code Fail: Text Field 1
Office Code Fail: Text Field 2
Office Link Fail: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Office Link Fail: Trap ID 45 46
Office Link Fail: Reason Office Link Fail Office Link Fail OK
Office Link Fail: Flag 1 2
Office Link Fail: Priority 1 5
Office Link Fail: Text Field 1
Office Link Fail: Text Field 2
Dup MAC Detected: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Dup MAC Detected: Trap ID 47 48
Dup MAC Detected: Reason Duplicate MAC Duplicate MAC OK
Dup MAC Detected: Flag 1 2
Dup MAC Detected: Priority 1 5
Dup MAC Detected: Text Field 1
Dup MAC Detected: Text Field 2
Dup IP Address Detected: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Dup IP Address Detected: Trap ID 49 50
Duplicate IP Port #
Dup IP Address Detected: Reason Duplicate IP Port #
OK
Dup IP Address Detected: Flag 1 2
Dup IP Address Detected: Priority 1 5
Dup IP Address Detected: Text
Field 1
Dup IP Address Detected: Text
Field 2
Configuration Change
Trap Text Configuration Change N/A
Vital Config Change: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Vital Config Change: Trap ID 67 N/A
Vital Config Param
Vital Config Change: Reason N/A
Changed
Vital Config Change: Flag 1 N/A
Vital Config Change: Priority 1 N/A
Vital Config Change: Text Field 1 N/A
Vital Config Change: Text Field 2 N/A
Non-Vital Config Change: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Non-Vital Config Change: Trap ID 69 N/A

Non-Vital Config
Non-Vital Config Change: Reason N/A
Param Changed
Non-Vital Config Change: Flag 1 N/A
Non-Vital Config Change: Priority 1 N/A
Non-Vital Config Change: Text
N/A
Field 1
Non-Vital Config Change: Text
N/A
Field 2
WIU Health
Trap Text WIU Health WIU Health OK
Time (seconds) 0 0
PTC Disabled: Specific Trap Enable Enabled

PTC Disabled: Trap ID 71 72
PTC Disabled: Reason PTC Disabled PTC Enabled
PTC Disabled: Flag 1 2
PTC Disabled: Priority 1 5
PTC Disabled: Text Field 1
PTC Disabled: Text Field 2
Processor Reset: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Processor Reset: Trap ID 73 74
Processor C Reset
Processor Reset: Reason Processor C Reset
clear
Processor Reset: Flag 1 2
Processor Reset: Priority 1 5
Processor Reset: Text Field 1
Processor Reset: Text Field 2
Program Flash Error: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Program Flash Error: Trap ID 75 N/A
Program Flash Error: Reason Program Flash Fault N/A
Program Flash Error: Flag 1 N/A
Program Flash Error: Priority 1 N/A
Program Flash Error: Text Field 1 N/A
Program Flash Error: Text Field 2 N/A
Log Flash Error: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Log Flash Error: Trap ID 77 N/A
Log Flash Error: Reason Log Flash Fault N/A
Log Flash Error: Flag 1 N/A
Log Flash Error: Priority 1 N/A
Log Flash Error: Text Field 1 N/A
Log Flash Error: Text Field 2 N/A
HMAC Rejection
Trap Text HMAC rejection N/A
HMAC Rejection: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
HMAC Rejection: Trap ID 81 N/A
HMAC Rejection: Reason HMAC rejection N/A
HMAC Rejection: Flag 1 N/A

HMAC Rejection: Priority 1 N/A

HMAC Rejection: Text Field 1 N/A
HMAC Rejection: Text Field 2 N/A
EMP CRC Rejection

Trap Text EMP CRC rejection N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
EMP CRC Rejection: Trap ID 83 N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Reason EMP CRC rejection N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Flag 1 N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Priority 1 N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Text Field 1 N/A
EMP CRC Rejection: Text Field 2 N/A
HMAC Key Change

Trap Text HMAC key change N/A
HMAC Key Change: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
HMAC Key Change: Trap ID 85 N/A
HMAC Key Change: Reason HMAC key change N/A
HMAC Key Change: Flag 1 N/A
HMAC Key Change: Priority 1 N/A
HMAC Key Change: Text Field 1 N/A
HMAC Key Change: Text Field 2 N/A
Time Synchronization Error

Trap Text Time sync error Time sync error clear
Time Sync Expired: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Time Sync Expired: Trap ID 87 88
Time Sync Expired: Reason Time sync expired Time sync OK
Time Sync Expired: Flag 1 2
Time Sync Expired: Priority 1 5
Time Sync Expired: Text Field 1
Time Sync Expired: Text Field 2
Time Sync Not Initialized: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Time Sync Not Initialized: Trap ID 89 90
Time sync not
Time Sync Not Initialized: Reason Time sync initialized
initialized
Time Sync Not Initialized: Flag 1 2
Time Sync Not Initialized: Priority 1 5
Time Sync Not Initialized: Text
Field 1
Time Sync Not Initialized: Text
Field 2

Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Trap ID 91 92
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Reason Msg Delta Time Msg Delta Time Clear
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Flag 1 2
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Priority 1 5
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Text
Field 1
Time Sync Delta Msg Time: Text
Field 2
Time Sync Msg Window: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
Time Sync Msg Window: Trap ID 93 94
Msg Delta Time Msg Delta Time
Time Sync Msg Window: Reason
Window Window Clear
Time Sync Msg Window: Flag 1 2
Time Sync Msg Window: Priority 1 5
Time Sync Msg Window: Text Field
1
Time Sync Msg Window: Text Field
2
Time Sync LRM Time: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Time Sync LRM Time: Trap ID 95 N/A
Time Sync LRM Time: Reason LRM Msg Delta Time N/A
Time Sync LRM Time: Flag 1 N/A
Time Sync LRM Time: Priority 1 N/A
Time Sync LRM Time: Text Field 1 N/A
Time Sync LRM Time: Text Field 2 N/A
Application Changed
Trap Text Application changed N/A
Signal System App Changed:

Enabled
Specific Trap Enable
Signal System App Changed: Trap
97 N/A
ID
Signal System App Changed: Signal System App
N/A
Reason changed
Signal System App Changed: Flag 1 N/A
Signal System App Changed:
1 N/A
Priority
Signal System App Changed: Text
N/A
Field 1
Signal System App Changed: Text
N/A
Field 2
PTC Mapping File Changed:

Enabled
PTC Mapping File Changed: Trap ID 99 N/A
PTC Mapping File
PTC Mapping File Changed: Reason N/A
changed
PTC Mapping File Changed: Flag 1 N/A
PTC Mapping File Changed: Priority 1 N/A
PTC Mapping File Changed: Text
N/A
Field 1
PTC Mapping File Changed: Text
N/A
Field 2

PTC Config File Changed: Specific

Enabled
Trap Enable
PTC Config File Changed: Trap ID 101 N/A
PTC Config File
PTC Config File Changed: Reason N/A
changed
PTC Config File Changed: Flag 1 N/A
PTC Config File Changed: Priority 1 N/A
PTC Config File Changed: Text
N/A
Field 1
PTC Config File Changed: Text
N/A
Field 2
Invalid Wayside Device Status

Invalid wayside
Trap Text N/A
device status
Invalid Wayside Device Status:

Enabled
103 N/A
Trap ID
Dev: Val: N/A
Reason
1 N/A
Flag
1 N/A
Priority
N/A
Text Field 1
N/A
Text Field 2
WIU Heartbeat
Trap Text WIU Heartbeat N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
WIU Heartbeat: Trap ID 105 N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Reason WIU Heartbeat N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Flag 1 N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Priority N/A N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Text Field 1 N/A N/A
WIU Heartbeat: Text Field 2 N/A N/A
Local Presence
Local Presence Local Presence
Trap Text
Established Removed
Local Presence: Specific Trap

Enabled
Enable
Local Presence: Trap ID 107 108
Local Presence Local Presence
Local Presence: Reason
Established Removed
Local Presence: Flag 1 2
Local Presence: Priority 1 5
Local Presence: Text Field 1
Local Presence: Text Field 2
Figure 6-55, Configuration - Active SNMP Configuration (9)

The SNMP General Configuration page is used to set up the SNMP destination IP address, SNMP UDP
port. SNMP Trap Enable, Public and Private community strings, and location and device identification
parameters. This page lets the user enable and disable the SNMP functionality. The SNMP parameters are
stored on the VPM-3.
The following SNMP General Configuration parameters define the SNMP operations and apply to all the
SNMP Traps defined in the system:
• Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time: Length of time to expire before Temporary
SNMP Trap disabled is set to "stop".
• Temporary SNMP Trap Disable: The NMS subsystem will set the Temporary SNMP
Trap Disable to stop when the Temporary SNMP
Trap Disable is set to "Start/Re-Start", and the time
defined by the Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time
has passed.
• Destination IP 1-4: IP addresses of the network management systems receiving the traps –
Default value 0.0.0.0
• Destination UDP Port 1-4: UDP ports (161, 162) selectable of the network management
systems receiving the traps – Default value 162
• Wayside Device Type: Wayside equipment type associated with this WIU. Defaults to
the WIU device. (EL1A, EC4, VHLC or ElectroLogIXS)
• Location: String used to define the local unit. If a PTC mapping file is loaded, it
defaults to WIU Address. If no Mapping file loaded, it defaults to the Site ID
• Public Community String: Setting this value grants access to the SNMP site –
Defaults to Blanks
• Private Community String: Password for internal account on the network management
system receiving the traps. – Defaults to blanks
• WIU Heartbeat Trap Logging: The SNMP Comm Log will be withheld from logging
of the WIU Heartbeat Traps if the "WIU Heartbeat Trap
Logging" is set to disable.
• SNMP Trap Enable: Indicates if the SNMP Subsystem is active. – Defaults to Disabled

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings SNMP General Configuration

IP Address of network management
Local Presence system traps are sent to
Destination IP
System Time 0.0.0.0
1
Application Destination IP
Change Password 0.0.0.0
2
General Configuration Destination IP
0.0.0.0
Vital Timers 3
Non-Vital Timers Destination IP
0.0.0.0
Vital Configuration 4
Battery Alarms Destination SNMP UDP Port (161 or 162)
162
UDP Port 1
Software Update Destination
162
Upload Software UDP Port 2
Apply Software Destination
162
UDP Port 3
Destination
Selective Functionality 162 User entered value. Defaults to host platform
UDP Port 4
Wayside Device
ElectroLogIXS User entered value. Defaults to Site ID
Type
PTC undefined
Location
PTC Vital Configuration Public
Community
PTC Key Mgmt String
User entered values
Private
SNMP Settings Community
Active SNMP Configuration String
SNMP General Configuration WIU Heartbeat
Disabled
SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Logging
SNMP Temporary Disable SNMP Trap
Disabled
Enable
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S Update Settings
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S SNMP Configuration File
4 - VLD-R16S Upload SNMP Configuration File
5 - VLD-C6S
Browse... Upload
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Download SNMP Configuration File
9 - VTI-2S Download
GFD-1
Set General SNMP Settings to the Defaults
Comm Settings
General Remote NOTE: Click this button to set General SNMP Settings to the defaults.
Ethernet
General Ethernet Set SNMP Defaults
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-56, Configuration - SNMP General Configuration

The SNMP Trap Configuration page lets the user customize each trap the system is set up to send. Each
trap can have one or more specific traps with user editable fields. Enabling and disabling a Trap enables or
disables all the specific traps associated with the Trap. All the user customizable fields are independent of
the trap implementation in the system and their values have meaning to the network management system
that receives the traps.
Depending on the trap, a trap can have an associated clear trap that is invoked when the condition that
caused the trap no longer applies. For example, if a Communications Link trap is sent when 5 Class D
Message errors are detected in 60 seconds. The Communications Link trap clear can be set so that the
clear is sent when a single good Class D message is detected.
The following SNMP Trap Configuration parameters allow customization of the traps:
Trap Name Dropdown list of all generic trap names

Trap Enable Enables the Trap defined by Trap Name
Alert Configuration data associated with the Alert trap
Trap Text user modifiable text field describing the trap
Number of Occurrences If applicable, lets the user define the number of times the
event has to occur in the time period defined by Time
before the trap will be sent
Time If applicable, lets the user define the period of time an alert
condition has to exist before a trap will be sent. Used in
conjunction with Number of Occurrences
Clear Configuration data associated with the Clear trap for an
alert
Trap Text user modifiable text field describing the trap
Number of Occurrences If applicable, lets the user define the number of times the
event has to occur in the time period defined by Time
before the clear trap will be sent
Time If applicable, lets the use define the period of time an alert
condition has to exist before a clear trap will be sent. Used
in conjunction with Number of Occurrences
Specific Trap Name Dropdown list of Specific Traps for the selected Generic
Trap
Trap ID User editable Trap ID. The system ensures that all are
unique.
Alert Specific Data
Reason Fixed field denoting the reason for the trap

Flag User editable number providing an additional identifier
Priority User editable priority field

Text Field 1 User editable text field


Clear Specific Data
Reason Fixed field denoting the reason for the trap

Flag User editable number providing an additional identifier
System ensures that this field is different than the Priority
associated with the alert.
Priority User editable priority field
The following traps are defined in the system:
• Battery Voltage – Battery 1 2 or 3 alarms are detected. Only applicable if a VTI-2S or

GFD module is installed
• Battery Voltage Clear
• Signaling Alarms
• Signaling Alarms Clear
• System Health
• System Health Clear
• Communications Link
• Communications Link Clear
• Configuration Change - Vital Configuration Change, or Non-Vital Configuration Change
• WIU Health – PTC Disabled, Processor Reset, or Program Flash error
• WIU Health Clear
• HMAC Rejection -Incoming message to WIU fails HMAC verification
• EMP CRC Rejection – Incoming message to WIU fails CRC verification
• HMAC Key Change -HMAC Key is changed
• Time Synchronization Error – Time synchronization expires, time synchronization is not
initialized, Time Synchronization Delta Message Time, Time Synchronization Message Window,
or Time Synchronization LRM Time
• Time Synchronization Clear
• Application Changed – Signal System App Changed, PTC Mapping file changed, or PTC
Config file is changed
• Invalid Wayside Device Status – State of any wayside device monitored by the WIU is invalid or
unknown
• WIU Heartbeat – Generic trap sent when Time elapses Local Presence
• Local Presence – Sent when Local Presence is applied or removed.

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings SNMP Trap Configuration

System Configuration Dropdown list of defined Generic Traps
Local Presence
SNMP Traps are currently Disabled
System Time
Application Sets all specific traps defined for this
Generic Trap
Change Password generic trap to enabled
Data
User editable trap text.
Vital Timers Trap Name Local Presence
If no Clear trap is defined for this trap,
Default
Non-Vital value shown
Timers Trap Enable Disabled these fields are greyed out
Vital Configuration Alert Clear
Battery Alarms
Trap Text Local Presence Established Local Presence Removed
Software Update Number of

N/A N/A
Occurrences
Upload Software
Time
Apply Software N/A N/A
(seconds)
Selective Functionality Specific Trap

Selective Function Enable Dropdown list of specific traps
Data
defined fo this generic trap
Specific Trap
PTC Name
Local Presence
PTC Non-Vital Configuration Specific Trap
PTC Vital Configuration Enabled
Enable
PTC Key Mgmt Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data
Uneditable
Trap ID 107 108
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Reason Local Presence Established
Established Local Presence Removed
SNMP General Configuration Flag 1 2
Priority 1 5
Text Field 1
I/O Slots Text Field 2
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Additional user editable Update Settings
User editable. System checks for uniqueness
3 - VLD-R16S fields
4 - VLD-R16S
Set Local Presence to the Defaults
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
NOTE: Click this button to set Local Presence to the defaults.
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Resets all parameters
Default Local Presence Back to defaults
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-57, Configuration - SNMP Trap Configuration

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings SNMP Trap Configuration

Local Presence
SNMP Traps are currently Disabled
System Time
Application
Generic Trap
Change Password
Data When a clear trap is defined for the
General Configuration trap these fields are editable
Vital Timers Trap Name Communications Link
Non-Vital Timers Trap Enable Enabled
Vital Configuration Alert Clear
Battery Alarms
Trap Text Communications link state Communications link OK
Software Update Number of

0 N/A
Occurrences
Upload Software
Time
Apply Software 0 N/A
(seconds)
Time in seconds
Selective Functionality Specific Trap
Event must occur this many times in the time
defined by “Time” for the trap to be sent
Selective Function Enable Data
Specific Trap
PTC Name
Class D Message Error
PTC Non-Vital Configuration Specific Trap
PTC Vital Configuration Enabled
Enable
PTC Key Mgmt Alert Specific Data Clear Specific Data
Trap ID 35 36
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Reason Class D port error Class D port OK
SNMP General Configuration Flag 1 2 System checks that
SNMP Trap Configuration Flag is unique
Priority 1 5
SNMP Temporary Disable for this specific trap
Text Field 1
I/O Slots Text Field 2
1 - VIO-1010S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
Set Communications Link to the Defaults
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
NOTE: Click this button to set Communications Link to the defaults.
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
Default Communications Link
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-58, Configuration – SNMP Trap Configuration

The SNMP Temporary Disable page allows temporarily disabling the SNMP Traps. Starting the timer
disables sending traps until the timer expires. The timer can be set in 30 minute increments up to 8 hours. It
defaults to 60 minutes.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings SNMP Temporary Disable

Local Presence
Application
Change Password
General Configuration Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time 60
Vital Timers
Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Start/Re-start
Start/Re- Stop
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Update Settings
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-59, Configuration - SNMP Temporary Disable

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings SNMP Temporary Disable

System Configuration Select the time for SNMP traps
to be disabled
Local Presence
System Time
Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Time 60
Application Stops the disable timer
Change Password Temporary SNMP Trap Disable Start/Re-start Stop
and resumes sending traps
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Update Settings Start or re-start the timer
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-60, Configuration - SNMP Temporary Disable

I/O Slots
Electro Code Track Circuits
The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages for a VIT-2S module are shown in Figures 6-61, 6-62 and
6-63.

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Slot 9 - VTI-2S Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence Track 1: RXCODE1-T1
System Time
Transmit Output Voltage 0.5 Volts
Application
Change Password Receive Reference Ratio 6.00
General Configuration Code 5 Setting NON-ALT
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Transmit Current 0.07 Amps
Vital Configuration
Track Resistance 7.11 Ohms
Battery Alarms
Receive Current 0.05 Amps
Software Update Track 2: RXCODE1-T2

Upload Software
Apply Software Transmit Output Voltage 0.5 Volts
Receive Reference Ratio 6.00
Selective Functionality Code 5 Setting NON-ALT
Transmit Current 0.07 Amps
PTC Track Resistance 7.11 Ohms
Receive Current 0.05 Amps
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings Update Settings

I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-61, Configuration - VTI-2S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log [Configuration][Status]

Live Log Slot 9 - VTI-2S Diagnostics
Configure Logs Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page.
Configure Live Log Click Here to request Local Presence
Configure PTC Comm Log
Configure Office Log
Log Archive Size Track 1: RXCODE1-T1
Transmit Test Mode OFF
System Logs
System Log Transmit Current 0.07 Amps
Configuration Log
Data Log Receive Test Mode OFF
GDA Data Logs
Alarms Receive Current 3.25 Amps
PTC Logs Track 2: RXCODE1-T2

PTC Comm Log Transmit Test Mode ON
PTC Event Log
PTC Device State Log Transmit Current 3.20 Amps
Office Log Receive Test Mode OFF

View Office Log Receive Current 0.05 Amps
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates.
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0692
Figure 6-62, Diagnostics - VTI-2S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
[Configuration][Diagnostics]
All Statuses
Watch Statuses
Slot 9 - VTI-2S
Description Status Name Value Watch
PTC Module Health 9-HEALTH TRUE
PTC Statuses
Cab Enable 1 Status 1CABEN FALSE
PTC Device State
Rate 1 50RATE-T1 FALSE
I/O Slots 3rd Pulse Timer Running 9-3RDPULSE FALSE
1 - VIO-1010S Broken Rail 9-BROKENRAIL TRUE
2 - VIO-86S
NON-ALT Selected 9-NON-ALT TRUE
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
Transmit Test Mode 9-TX_TEST TRUE
5 - VLD-C6S Receive Test Mode 9-RX_TEST TRUE
6 - VIO-44R Quick Shunt Code 1 QUICK-TRK1 FALSE
7 - CAB-16S
Code 1 RXCODE1-T1 FALSE
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
Code 3 RXCODE3-T2 FALSE
GFD-1 Code 1 TXCODE1-T1 TRUE
Code 3 TXCODE3-T1 FALSE
Comm I/O Stick 9-STICK TRUE
Ethernet
Remote
Quick Shunt Code 1 QUICK-TRK2 FALSE
Office Code 1 RXCODE1-T2 FALSE
Serial Ports Code 2 RXCODE2-T2 FALSE
1 - LCP Code 4 RXCODE4-T2 FALSE
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Code 1 TXCODE1-T2 FALSE
Code 2 TXCODE2-T2 TRUE
Internal Code 4 TXCODE4-T2 FALSE
Vital Timers Cab Enable 2 Status 2CABEN FALSE
Non-Vital Timers
Rate 1 50RATE-T2 FALSE
Vital Input 1 9-VIN1 FALSE
Figure 6-63, Status - VTI-2S

Cab Signaling
The status page for the CAB-16 module is shown in Figure 6-64. The CAB-16 module does not have any
configuration settings or diagnostic modes of operation.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Slot 7 - CAB-16S
Watch Statuses
PTC
Module Health 7-HEALTH FALSE
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State Cab Enable 1 Status CAB1EB TRUE
Rate 1 7-CAB50 FALSE
I/O Slots Rate 2 7-CAB75 FALSE
1 - VIO-1010S Rate 3 7-CAB120 TRUE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0694
Figure 6-64, Status - CAB -16S

Code Select Inputs / Track Decoder Outputs
The status page for the VIO-1010 module is shown in Figure 6-65. The VIO-1010 module does not have
any configuration settings or diagnostic modes of operation.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Slot 1 - VIO-1010S
Watch Statuses
PTC
Module Health 1-HEALTH FALSE
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State Track Code Select Input 1 TCS-IN1 FALSE
Track Code Select Input 2 TCS-IN2 FALSE
I/O Slots Track Code Select Input 3 TCS-IN3 FALSE
1 - VIO-1010S Track Code Select Input 4 TCS-IN4 FALSE
2 - VIO-86S
Track Code Decoder Output 1 7-CODEOUT1 FALSE
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S Track Code Decoder Output 2 7-CODEOUT2 FALSE
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0695
Figure 6-65, Status - VIO-1010S

Lamps
The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages from the VLD-C6S are shown in Figures 6-66, 6-67 and 6-
68. The Diagnostic and Status pages for the VLD-R16S are shown in Figures 6-69 and 6-70. The VLD-R16
has no field settable configuration settings.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
System Time Flash Rate 30 FPM
Application
Change Password Manual Voltage Setup:
Bank 1
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Bank Voltage 10.0 Volts
Vital Configuration Bank 2
Battery Alarms 10.0
Bank Voltage Volts
Software Update
Update Settings
Upload Software
Apply Software
Automated Voltage Setup:
Selective Functionality Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied.
Selective Function Enable Bank 1
PTC
Last Status None Start Auto Setup
PTC Key Mgmt Bank 2
SNMP Settings Last Status None Start Auto Setup
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-66, Configuration - VLD-C6S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Slot 5 - VLD-C6S Diagnostics [Configuration][Status]

Live Log
Configure Logs Local Presence required to modify the parameters on this page.
Configure Live Log Click Here to request Local Presence
Log Archive Size Lamp Setup Grant For Module Is Denied.
Lamp Test Mode off
System Logs
System Log Bank 1 Lamp Test Enable None
Configuration Log
Bank 2 Lamp Test Enable None
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms Update Settings
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
PTC Device State Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0697
Figure 6-67, Diagnostics - VLD-C6S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Slot 5 - VLD-C6S
Watch Statuses
PTC
PTC Statuses
Module Health 5-HEALTH TRUE
PTC Device State Bank 1 Lamp 1 5-B1L1 FALSE
Bank 1 Flash Lamp 1 5-B1L1F FALSE
I/O Slots Bank 1 Lamp 1 Out 5-B1L1OUT TRUE
1 - VIO-1010S
Bank 1 Lamp 2 5-B1L2 FALSE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S Bank 1 Flash Lamp 2 5-B1L2F FALSE
4 - VLD-R16S Bank 1 Lamp 2 Out 5-B1L2OUT FALSE
5 - VLD-C6S Bank 1 Lamp 3 5-B1L3 FALSE
6 - VIO-44R
Bank 1 Flash Lamp 3 5-B1L3F FALSE
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Bank 1 Lamp 3 Out 5-B1L3OUT FALSE
9 - VTI-2S Bank 2 Lamp 1 5-B2L1 FALSE
GFD-1 Bank 2 Flash Lamp 1 5-B2L1F FALSE
Bank 2 Lamp 1 Out 5-B2LIOUT FALSE
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Non-Vital Output 1 5-NVOUT1 FALSE
Remote Non-Vital Input 2 5-NVIN1 FALSE
Office Lamp Setup Grant 5-SETUPGRANT FALSE
Serial Ports Lamp Normal Mode 5-NORMAL TRUE
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0698
Figure 6-68, Status - VLD-C6S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Live Log
Slot 3 - VLD-R16S Diagnostics
Configure Logs Bank 1 If Test Mode is not available

Configure Live Log Lamp Test Grant For Bank 1 Is Denied. the reason is shown here.
Lamp Test Mode off
Log Archive Size Lamp 1 Enable
Lamp 2 Enable
System Logs
System Log Lamp 3 Enable
Configuration Log Lamp 4 Enable
Data Log
GDA Data Logs Lamp 5 Enable
Alarms
Lamp 6 Enable
Lamp 7 Enable
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log Lamp 8 Enable
PTC Event Log
Bank 2
Lamp Test Mode on
Office Log Lamp 9 Enable
View Office Log
Lamp 10 Enable
when Test Mode is On,
I/O Slots Lamp 11 Enable
Select Lamps to turn on
1 - VIO-1010S Lamp 12 Enable (check box) then select
2 - VIO-86S
Lamp 13 Enable Update Settings
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S Lamp 14 Enable
5 - VLD-C6S Lamp 15 Enable
6 - VIO-44R Lamp 16 Enable
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
Update Settings
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0699
Figure 6-69, Diagnostics - VLD-R16S

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses [Configuration][Diagnostics]

Watch Statuses
Slot 3 - VLD-R16S Status
PTC
PTC Statuses
Module Health 3-HLTH TRUE
PTC Device State Vital Signal Stop 1 3-VSSR1 TRUE
Vital Signal Stop 2 3-VSSR2 TRUE
I/O Slots Lamp Grant Bank 1 3-B1GRANT FALSE
1 - VIO-1010S
Lamp Grant Bank 2 3-B2GRANT FALSE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S Bank 1 Health 3-B1HLTH TRUE
4 - VLD-R16S Bank 2 Health 3-B2HLTH TRUE
5 - VLD-C6S Lamp Bank 1 Normal 3-B1NORM TRUE
6 - VIO-44R
Lamp Bank 2 Normal 3-B2NORM TRUE
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
Lamp Steady On 1 3-LAMP1ON FALSE
9 - VTI-2S Lamp Flash 1 3-LAMP1FLASH FALSE
GFD-1 Lamp Alt Flash 1 3-LAMP1ALT FALSE
Lamp OK Status 1 3-LAMP1OK FALSE
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0700
Figure 6-70, Status - VLD-R16S

Vital Inputs and Outputs
The Configuration and Status pages for the VIO-86 module are shown in Figures 6-71 and 6-72. The
VIO-86 has no diagnostic settings. The status page for the VIO-44S is shown in Figure 6-73. The VIO-44S
has no configuration or diagnostic pages. The Configuration, Diagnostic, and Status pages for the VIO-44R
are shown in Figures 6-74, 6-75 and 6-76. The switchover operation for the redundant banks is provided on
the diagnostic page.
WARNING For Slow Pick or Release Timers of 9 seconds or more, accuracy will
be within +10%/-0%.
For Slow Pick or Release Timers of less than 9 seconds, accuracy will
be within +1 second under worst case timing conditions.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

System Configuration Slot 2 - VI O-86S Settings
Local Presence Defined Input with both
System Time Slow Pick & Slow Release
Application
Input Name Slow Pick Slow Release
Change Password
Vital Timers Vital Input 1 2-VIN1 2 2 Input with only Slow Pick
Non-Vital Timers 2 Disabled
Vital Input 2 2-VIN2
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Vital Input 3 2-VIN3 Disabled Disabled Input without Slow Pick
Vital Input 4 Undefined or Slow Release
Software Update Vital Input 5 Undefined
Upload Software
Vital Input 6 Undefined
Apply Software Inputs not defined (not used)
Vital Input 7 Undefined in the application program.
PTC Vital Input 8 Undefined
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Update Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty) 373-0701
Figure 6-71, Configuration - VIO-86S

All Statuses
Watch Statuses 2
PTC
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0702

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses
Slot 8 - VIO-44S Status
PTC Module Health 8-HEALTH TRUE
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State
I/O Slots Vital Output 1 8-VOUT1 TRUE
1 - VIO-1010S Vital Output 4 8-VOUT4 TRUE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers

Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Slot 6 - VIO-44R Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
Application
Change Password
General Configuration Input Name Slow Pick Slow Release
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Vital Input 1 6-VIN1 Disabled Disabled
Vital Configuration Vital Input 2 Undefined
Battery Alarms Vital Input 3 Undefined
Vital Input 4 Undefined
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
Selective Functionality Update Settings

PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-74, Configuration - VIO-44R

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Live Log
Slot 6 - VIO-44R Diagnostics
Configure Logs Active Bank

Configure Live Log Current Active Bank Bank 1
Log Archive Size Force Switchover
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0705
Figure 6-75, Diagnostics - VIO-44R

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Watch Statuses
Slot 6 - VIO-44R Status
PTC
PTC Statuses
Module Health 6-HEALTH TRUE
PTC Device State Input Redundancy 6-IN-REDUND TRUE
Output Redundancy 6-OUT-REDUND TRUE
I/O Slots Vital Input 1 6-VIN1 FALSE
1 - VIO-1010S
Vital Output 1 6-VOUT1 FALSE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0706
Figure 6-76, Status - VIO-44R

Ground Fault Detect

The Configuration, and Status pages for the GFD-1 are shown in Figures 6-77 and 6-78. The GFD-1 does
not have a Diagnostics page.
Site ID: undefined

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings GFD-1 Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Battery 1
Local Presence
System Time Battery Name Battery 1
Application Fault Status No Fault
Change Password Calibrated Voltage 12.0 Volts
Ground Fault Threshold 10 kOhms
Vital Timers
Ground Fault Time 5 seconds
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts
Battery Alarms High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts
Software Update Battery 2

Upload Software
Apply Software Battery Name Battery 2
Fault Status Low Battery
Selective Functionality Calibrated Voltage 12.0 Volts
Selective Function Enable Ground Fault Threshold 10 kOhms
PTC
Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts
PTC Vital Configuration High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts
PTC Key Mgmt
Battery 3
SNMP Settings Battery Name Battery 3
Fault Status Ground Fault
SNMP Trap Configuration Calibrated Voltage 12.0 Volts
SNMP Temporary Disable Ground Fault Threshold 20 kOhms
I/O Slots Low Battery Alarm Voltage 8.0 Volts
1 - VIO-1010S
High Battery Alarm Voltage 16.5 Volts
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S Update Settings
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-77, Configuration - Ground Fault Detect

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Watch Statuses
Slot 10 - GFD
PTC
PTC Statuses
Battery 1 Fault B1FALUT TRUE
PTC Device State Battery 1 High Alarm BATT1HIGH TRUE
Battery 1 Low Alarm BAT1LOW TRUE
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0748
Figure 6-78, Status - Ground Fault Detect

Communication Settings
General Remote
The General Remote Configuration page allows loading of MAC vault, deleting of the loaded MAC vault,
starting and re-starting of MAC switchover, canceling of MAC switchover, viewing and updating the
MMST value, and defaulting of vital and non-vital parameters. Selecting "Default Non-Vital Parameters" or
"Default Vital Parameters" applies the default settings in the loaded application.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Vital Comm General Remote

Local Presence
MAC Vault
System Time
Application
Current Vault No vault present
Change Password
General Configuration Upload New Vault Browse... Upload
Vital Timers Uploaded Vault Status None Delete New Vault
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms MAC Switchover
Maximum MAC Switchover Time 1 sec Update Setting
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software MAC Switchover Time 00:00:00 Switchover Enable
Remaining Switchover Cancel
PTC Set Vital Comm Parameters to Application Defaults

PTC Key Mgmt Default Non-Vital Parameters Default Vital Parameters
SNMP Settings
SNMP Trap Configuration Note that selecting Default Parameters causes
SNMP Temporary Disable both Ethernet and Serial settings to be reset.
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-79, Configuration - General Remote

General Ethernet
The General Ethernet Configuration page, shown in Figure 6-80, allows modification of the IP address,
subnet mask, DHCP Server Enable/Disable, DHCP Server IP Pool Start, DHCP Server IP Pool End, DHCP
Server Default Gateway for each of the two Ethernet ports along with the IP address of the Default
Gateway. A Set Ethernet Defaults selection is provided to establish the settings contained in the
application. When "Set Ethernet Defaults" is selected on the CDU or Web GUI, the DHCP Server Settings
will be defaulted. Note that if the IP address of the Ethernet Port being used for the Web GUI session
changes, the user will be logged out and will be required to log in to the new IP address.
ElectroLogIXS uses a DHCP address pool from the subnet of each of the two Ethernet ports. The typical case
is that the two ports are on different subnets; therefore each has its own pool of IP addresses to assign.
An IP address is comprised of a Network field and a Host field. The Network field is identified by the "1s" in
the subnet mask while the Host field is identified by the "0s" in the subnet mask. For example 255.255.255.0
The minimum allowable IP Pool address is the third address value from the beginning of the host field (e.g.
192.168.10.2) and the maximum allowable IP Pool address is the third address from the end value of the
host field (e.g. 192.168.10.253).
The maximum ElectroLogIXS DHCP IP pool range is 32 consecutive IP addresses from each of the possible
subnets. Also, the x.x.x.0, x.x.x.1, x.x.x.254, and x.x.x.255 address of a subnet are not assignable as these are
reserved for use by routers or other networking devices.
Additionally, a DHCP IP pool range cannot span the Ethernet port IP address. That is, if the IP address is
set to 192.168.10.20 and the DHCP IP Pool Start address is set to 192.168.0.15, the DHCP IP Pool End
must be 192.168.0.19

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - General Ethernet

Local Presence
Port 1
System Time
MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:48
Application
Change Password IP Address 192.168.0.11
General Configuration Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Vital Timers
DHCP Server Enabled
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.0.12
Battery Alarms DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.0.43
DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Software Update
Upload Software
Port 2
Apply Software
MAC Address 00:09:91:44:7E:49
Selective Functionality IP Address 192.168.1.12

Selective Function Enable Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP Server Enabled
PTC
DHCP Server IP Pool Start 192.168.1.13
PTC Vital Configuration DHCP Server IP Pool End 192.168.1.44
PTC Key Mgmt DHCP Server Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Enter new parameter Value
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
Update Settings Select "Update Settings" to
go to the confirmation page
I/O Slots
Set Ethernet Settings to the Application Defaults
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
NOTE: Click this button to set all the Ethernet settings to the application defaults.
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
Set Ethernet Defaults
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-80, Configuration - General Ethernet

Routing Table
The Routing Table configuration page, shown in Figure 6-81, allows up to eight static route entries to be
designated. To manually enter and activate a routing table entry, click the “Enabled” box, enter the IP
routing information along with the physical Ethernet port to use for that entry, and select Update Settings.
To remove an existing entry from the table, uncheck the “Enabled” box and select Update Settings.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - Routing Table

Local Presence
Routing Table
System Time
Network
Application Enabled Subnet Mask Gateway Interface
Destination
Change Password
3.192.0.0 255.255.0.0 192.168.1.1 1
Vital Timers 1
Non-Vital Timers 1
Vital Configuration
1
Battery Alarms
1
Software Update 1
Upload Software
1
Apply Software
1
Selective Function Enable Update Settings
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-81, Configuration - Routing Table

Web Interface
The Web Interface configuration page, shown in Figure 6-82, provides a means to change the TCP Port
number to be used for HTTP access, the Inactivity time-out (auto log out time), and the Trusted Source
settings for the two Ethernet Ports.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - Web Interface

Local Presence
HTTP Port 80
System Time
Application Inactivity Timeout 60 minutes
Change Password
General Configuration Trusted Source 1
Vital Timers Trusted Source Enabled
Non-Vital Timers
Trusted Source Network 192.168.0.0
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Trusted Source Netmask 255.255.0.0
Software Update Trusted Source 2

Upload Software Trusted Source Disabled
Apply Software
Selective Functionality Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0

Update Settings
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-82, Configuration - Web Interface

Telnet Interface
The Telnet Interface configuration page provides a means to change the Username, Password, TCP port
number, Inactivity timeout, and the Trusted Source settings for the two Ethernet ports.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - Telnet

Local Presence
Telnet Configuration
System Time
Application Port 1 Disabled
Change Password Port 2 Disabled
Vital Timers Telnet Username admin
Non-Vital Timers
Telnet Password telnet
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Do Not Use the Web GUI Password for Telnet
Telnet TCP Port 23
Software Update Inactivity Timeout Disabled minutes
Upload Software
Apply Software Trusted Source 1
Trusted Source Disabled
Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0
PTC
PTC Non-Vital Configuration Trusted Source 2
PTC Vital Configuration Trusted Source Disabled
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0

SNMP General Configuration Update Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Figure 6-83, Configuration – Telnet Interface

SSH Interface
The Ethernet SSH Interface configuration page provides the means to enable the SSH interface and change
the Username, Password, SSH port number, SSH Inactivity Timeout and upload Authorized Key files for
the SSH interface.
Site ID: Jims Office

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet Settings - SSH

Local Presence
System Time SSH Configuration
Application
Change Password SSH Port 1 Enabled
General Configuration SSH Port 2 Enabled
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
SSH Username admin
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms SSH Password sshuser
Do Not Use the Web GUI Password for SSH
Software Update SSH Server Port 22
Upload Software
SSH Inactivity Timeout Disabled minutes Timeout value to log off inactive user
Apply Software
Update Settings
CRC of current authorized key file
PTC Deletes current authorized key

SSH Authorized Keys File
PTC Vital Configuration Current SSH Authorized Keys File 0xD49B0BF4
CRC [DateTime to Expire 14:56:20 9/11/2013]
PTC Key Mgmt
Delete Current File
SNMP Settings Pending SSH Authorized Keys File No Future SSH Authorized Keys File
Active SNMP Configuration CRC Present
SNMP General Configuration Delete Pending File
SNMP Temporary Disable Upload New SSH Authorized Keys Browse...
File Upload
Authorized key file can be uploaded
I/O Slots Date to Apply SSH Authorized Keys for automatic application at a future date
1 - VIO-1010S 9 11 2012
File
2 - VIO-86S Time to Apply SSH Authorized Keys
3 - VLD-R16S 15 :4 : 34
File
4 - VLD-R16S Date to Expire SSH Authorized Keys
9 11 2013
5 - VLD-C6S File
6 - VIO-44R Time to Expire SSH Authorized
15 :4 : 34
7 - CAB-16S Keys File
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S Uploaded SSH Authorized
None
GFD-1 Keys File Status
Delete Uploaded File
Comm Settings Apply New Authorized Keys
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Set SSH Settings to the Controller Defaults
Routing Table
Web Interface
NOTE: Click this button to set all the SSH settings to the controller defaults.
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Set SSH Defaults
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-84, Configuration - SSH Interface

Ethernet Vital Remote
The Ethernet Vital Remote configuration page allows non-vital parameters of IP address, Port Number,
Date/Time update and MAC enable/disable to be configured for each remote.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet - Vital Comm Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
Attached Remotes
System Time
Application Network ID Key
Date/Time Vital
# Protocol IP Address Port MAC In
Change Password Local Remote Update Settings
Use
1 RP2009 1 10 192.168.0.2 8280 Enabled Disabled No Edit
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers 2 RP2000 *** *** 192.168.1.98 8281 Disabled Disabled No Edit
Vital Configuration 3 Disabled 1 14 192.168.1.96 8282 Disabled Disabled No Edit
Battery Alarms
Update Settings
Software Update A*** in this area indicates that
Upload Software the Network IDs have not
Apply Software been set for a remote Select “Edit” to go to the
vital settings page for a
Selective Functionality given remote.
Displays the state of MAC

PTC that is included in the
incoming vital remote message.
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-85, Configuration - Remote (Ethernet)

Ethernet Vital Communication
WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper
values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury.
WARNING When setting a vital remote link Local or Remote Network ID on an

ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit
plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do
not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to
comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more
detailed information)
The Ethernet Vital Communication page allows the modification of the various vital settings for a given
remote device. Modifications may be fixed or may have parameter ranges defined by the application
program.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Ethernet - Vital Comm Remote 1 [Vital Comm

Settings]
Local Presence Settings
System Time
Application
Vital Protocol Settings
Change Password
General Configuration Remote Enabled
Vital Timers Protocol RP2009
Non-Vital Timers
1 Confirm ID Value with Circuit
Vital Configuration Local Network Id
Plan
Battery Alarms
Remote Network Id
Plan
Software Update
Maximum Send Time Difference 2100 msec
Upload Software
Apply Software Maximum Receive Time
2100 msec
Difference
Selective Function Enable Update Protocol Settings
PTC
RP2009 Time Settings
PTC Key Mgmt Heartbeat Message Interval 0 248 msec
4000 msec
Heartbeat Message Interval 1
These settings are only shown
SNMP Settings Heartbeat Message Interval 2 12000 msec
Active SNMP Configuration when RP2009 is the selected
Heartbeat Message Interval 3 20000 msec
SNMP General Configuration protocol
SNMP Trap Configuration Update Period 248 msec
SNMP Temporary Disable Acknowledge Timeout 992 msec
I/O Slots Update RP2009 Settings

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
Figure 6-86, Configuration - Vital Communication (Ethernet)

Ethernet Office
The Ethernet Office configuration page allows the selection of the office protocol to be used on the Ethernet
interface when an Ethernet Office is defined in the application program.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Office Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence Protocol Selection
System Time
Application
Office Protocol GENISYS
Change Password
Vital Timers Update Settings
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Set Office to the Application Defaults
Software Update NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults.
Upload Software
Apply Software Set Application Defaults
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-87, Configuration - Office (Ethernet)

Ethernet GENISYS Settings
If the GENISYS protocol is selected for the Ethernet Office, the GENISYS Settings option is displayed in
the Side Menu. The protocol settings, UDP Port Number for GENISYS messages and settings for the
GENISYS Trusted Source feature may be modified from this page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Office Settings - Genisys Protocol [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
Indication Words 1 words
System Time
Application Unit Address 1
Change Password Control Latching Enabled
General Configuration Indication Delay 0.0 sec
Vital Timers
Constant Indication Disabled
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Message Timeout 10 sec
Battery Alarms Secure Poll Disabled
Software Update Office UDP Port 7169

Upload Software
Trusted Source 1
Apply Software
Trusted Source Disabled
Selective Functionality Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0
Selective Function Enable Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0
PTC Trusted Source 2

PTC Vital Configuration Trusted Source Disabled
PTC Key Mgmt Trusted Source Network 0.0.0.0
Trusted Source Netmask 0.0.0.0
SNMP Settings
Update Settings
Set Office to the Application Defaults
I/O Slots
NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults.
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
Set Application Defaults
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-88, Configuration - GENISYS Settings (Ethernet)

Serial Diagnostic Port
Settings for the Diagnostic Serial Port interface are controlled via this page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Diagnostic Port Settings

Local Presence
Diagnostic Port
System Time
Application Baud Rate 57600
Change Password Parity None
General Configuration Data Bits 8
Vital Timers
Stop Bits 1
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Update Settings
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-89, Configuration - Diagnostic (Serial Port)

Serial LCP
The Local Control Panel interface may be enabled or disabled via this page when an LCP interface is
defined in the application program.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings LCP Settings [Diagnostics][Status]

Local Presence
LCP Enabled Enabled
System Time
Application
Change Password Update Settings
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
Figure 6-90, Configuration - LCP (Serial Port)

Serial Vital Remote
The Serial vital remote page provides the ability to set the non-vital parameters for the remotes on a serial
interface when defined in the application program.
ElectroLogIXS Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID : 0
General Configuration Diagnostic Status Log Off
System Settings [Diagnostics][Status]
Local Presence
System Time
Application Baud Rate
Change Password
Parity
Vital Timers Stop Bits
Non-Vital Timers Type
Vital Configuration
Mode
Battery Alarms
Local Address
Software Update
Upload Software
Apply Software
# Protocol
PTC
1
PTC Key Mgmt
Select “Edit” to go to the
A*** in this area indicates vital settings page for a
SNMP Settings that the Network IDs have not This field is displayed when given remote.
Active SNMP Configuration been set. MAC switchover is in progress.
Displays the state of MAC
I/O Slots that is included in the
1 - VIO-1010S incoming vital remote message.
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - (empty)
2 - HAWK
3 - Remote
373-071
Figure 6-91, Configuration - Remote (Serial Port)

Serial Vital Communication
WARNING Railroad Configuration Management Procedures must ensure that the proper
values are set for each vital remote parameter in the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
units. Incorrect settings may result in death or serious injury.

ElectroLogIXS/EC5, use only the value supplied on the application circuit
plans. If this information is not available from the application circuit plans, do
not put that vital remote link into service until this is corrected. Failure to
comply could result in death or serious injury. (See Appendix B for more
detailed information)
The Serial Vital Communication page allows the modification of the various vital settings for a given
remote device. Modifications may be fixed or may have parameter ranges defined by the application
program.
Site ID: GETS-GS
Chassis ID: 0
System Settings Serial Port 2 - Vital Comm Remote 1 [Vital Comm

Settings]
Local Presence Settings
System Time
Application
Vital Protocol Settings
Change Password
General Configuration Remote Enabled
Vital Timers Protocol RP2009
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Local Network Id
Plan
Battery Alarms
Remote Network Id
Plan
Software Update
Maximum Send Time Difference 2100 msec
Upload Software
Apply Software Maximum Receive Time
2100 msec
Difference
Selective Function Enable Update Protocol Settings
PTC
RP2009 Time Settings
PTC Key Mgmt Heartbeat Message Interval 0 4960 msec
Heartbeat Message Interval 1 4960 msec These settings are shown only
SNMP Settings Heartbeat Message Interval 2 4960 msec when RP2009 is the selected
Heartbeat Message Interval 3 4960 msec protocol
SNMP Trap Configuration Update Period 248 msec
SNMP Temporary Disable Acknowledge Timeout 992 msec
I/O Slots Update RP2009 Settings

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
SSH Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - LCP
Figure 6-92, Configuration - Vital Communication (Serial)

Serial Office Protocol
The Serial Office Protocol page allows selection of the serial office protocol to be used when a serial office
is defined in the application program.
Serial UCE Office Settings
The Serial UCE Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the
application program and the UCE protocol has been selected.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings
[Diagnostics][Status]
Local Presence
Office Protocol Settings For UCE
System Time
Application
Change Password Baud 9600 bps
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Parity None
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Data Bits 8 bits
Software Update Stop Bits 1 bits

Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
Update Settings
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
SNMP General Configuration Set Office to the Application Defaults
I/O Slots NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults.
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - Office
Protocol
UCE Settings
Figure 6-93, Configuration - UCE Office (Serial Port)

Serial SCS-128 Office Settings
The Serial SCS-128 Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the
application program and the SCS-128 protocol has been selected.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

System Settings
[Diagnostics]
Local Presence
Office Protocol Settings For SCS- [Status]
128
System Time
Application
Change Password
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Baud 9600 bps
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Parity None
Software Update Data Bits 8 bits

Upload Software
Apply Software Stop Bits 1 bits
PTC Unit Address 1
PTC Key Mgmt
Update Settings
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots Set Office to the Application Defaults

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults.
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R Set Application Defaults
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - Office
Protocol
SCS-128 Settings
Figure 6-94, Configuration - SCS-128 Office (Serial Port)

Serial GENISYS Office Settings
The Serial GENISYS Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the
application program and the GENISYS protocol has been selected.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

System Settings
[Diagnostics]
Local Presence
Office Protocol Settings For [Status]
System Time
Application Genisys
Change Password
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Baud Rate 9600 bps
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms Parity None
Software Update Stop Bits 1 bits

Upload Software
Apply Software Flow Control Disabled
PTC Indication Words 1 words

PTC Vital Configuration Unit Address 1
PTC Key Mgmt
Control Latching Disabled
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Indication Delay 0.0 sec
SNMP Trap Configuration Constant Indication Disabled
I/O Slots Message Timeout 10
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
Transmission Delay 0 msec
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
Transmission Cutoff 0 msec
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S CTS Timeout 1.0 sec
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S Secure Poll Disabled
GFD-1
Comm Settings Update Settings

General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Set Office to the Application Defaults
Office
GENISYS Settings
NOTE: Click this button to set all the office settings to the application defaults.
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - Office Set Application Defaults
Protocol
GENISYS Settings
Figure 6-95, Configuration - GENISYS Office (Serial Port)

Serial BCS Office Settings
The Serial BCS Office configuration page is available when a Serial Office interface is defined in the
application program and the BCS protocol has been selected.
Site ID: GETS-G S

Chassis ID: 0
General Configur atio n Diagn ostics Status Log Off
System Settings
Local Presence
Office Protocol Settings For BCS [Diagnostics ][Status]
System Time
Application
Change Password Baud Rate 1200 bps
Vital Timers Parit y Even
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Configuration Stop Bit s 1
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Upload Software Indication Words 1 words
Apply Software
Unit Addre ss 1
PTC
Control Latchin g Disabled
PTC Key Mgmt
Indication D elay 0.0 sec
SNMP Settings
Active SNMP Configuration Message Ti meout 10 sec
SNMP Trap Configuration CTS Timeout 1.0 sec
I/O Slots Receive Gap Time 15.0 0 msec

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Indica tion Gap Time 15.0 0 msec
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R Upda te Settings
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings Set Office to the Application Defaults

General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet NOTE : Click this button to set all the office settings to the applic ation defaults.
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface Set Appl ication Default s
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - Office
Protocol
BCS Settings 373-0750
Figure 6-96, Configuration - BCS Office (Serial Port)

HAWK Interface Settings
The serial number for the HAWK may be set on this page when an interface to the HAWK is defined in the
application.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
System Settings
[Diagnostics][Status]
Local Presence HAWK Se ttings
System Time
Application
Change Password
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers Serial Number 105139
Vital Configuration
Battery Alarms
Software Update
Update Settings
Upload Software
Apply Software
PTC
PTC Key Mgmt
SNMP Settings
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm Settings
General Remote
Ethernet
General Ethernet
Routing Table
Web Interface
Telnet Interface
Remote
Office
GENISYS Settings
Serial Ports
Diagnostic
1 - Office
Protocol
GENISYS Settings
2 - HAWK
373-0719
Figure 6-97, Configuration - HAWK (Serial Port)

Diagnostics Main Menu

Logging
View Live Log
Items selected for live logging on the Configure Live Log page are displayed as logging events occur.
When this page is first selected, no items will be shown. If another page is loaded then the View Live Log
page is selected again, it will start a new live log display from a blank screen. It is possible to capture the
live log screen by clicking inside the live log screen area and selecting the text in the logging window by
simultaneously pressing the “CTRL” key and the “A” key (CTRL-A), copying the text (CTRL-C) and
pasting the text into a text editor such as notepad.
Note: View Live Log may not be visible if a Web Content Scanner Add-on is ENABLED on the web
browser. To disable Web Content Scanner in Internet Explorer, go to Tools>Manage Add-ons...,
and disable the Web Content Scanner Add-on.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Live Log Display

Live Log
Clear Display Disable Auto-Scrolling
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log 03-23-11 10:34:39: SNMP TRAP: Time sync expired
Configure Office Log 03-23-11 10:34:49: SNMP TRAP: Time sync expired
03-23-11 10:34:54: C:ETD 01801 EMP - Attempting TCP connection...
Log Archive Size
03-23-11 10:34:59: SNMP TRAP: Time sync expired
03-23-11 10:34:39: SNMP TRAP: Time sync OK
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0720
Figure 6-98, Diagnostics - View Live Log

Note: Certain web browser add-ins for content scanning may prevent information from being properly
displayed. You may need to disable any active web browser add-ins to view this page.

Configure Live Log
The Configure Live Log page allows selection of the specific log information to be displayed on the View
Live Log page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Live Log Configuration

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log Live Log Enable:
System Log
Log Archive Size Data Log
LCP Log
System Logs Controls/Indications Log
System Log
Configuration Log Office Protocol Log
Data Log Code Line Monitor Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms SNMP Comm Log
PTC Comm Log
PTC Logs PTC Event Log
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log PTC Device State Log
Office Log Update Settings

View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-99, Diagnostics - Configure Live Log

The Configure PTC Comm Log page allows the PTC Comm Log messages to be enabled or disabled.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log PTC Comm Log Configuration

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log Memory Log Enable:
PTC Comm Log Enable or disable PTC Comm log
Log Archive Size
System Logs Update Settings

System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-100, Diagnostics – Configure PTC Communications Log

The Configure Office Log page allows selection of the items to log / display in the Office Log.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Office Log Configuration

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log Memory Log Enable:
Controls/Indications Log Enable or disable log
Log Archive Size Office Protocol Log
Code Line Monitor Log
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log Update Settings
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-101, Diagnostics - Configure Office Log

Log Archive Size
The Log Archive Size page lets the user modify the size of all but the System and Configuration logs. The
logs can be adjusted to the nearest percent log file size. Setting a log to 0 disables the log. The system
checks to see that the sum total log file size does not exceed 100%.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Log Size Configuration System and Configuration log

Live Log are not editable
Current Current New
Configure Logs Log Type Percent
New Percent
Maximum Log Maximum Log
Configure Live Log Allocation
Allocation Entries Entries
Configure Office Log System Log 4.2% 4.2% 6721 6721
Log Archive Size Configuration
0.8% 0.8% 1613 1613
Log
System Logs Data Log 44.0% 44.0 % 61719 61719
System Log Office Log 14.3% 14.3 % 1802240 (bytes) 1802240 (bytes)
Configuration Log Setting a log to 0 disables
Data Log Ring Status the log.
0.6% 0.6 % 3150 3150
GDA Data Logs Log
Alarms Train Record
1.3% 1.3 % 6301 6301
Log
PTC Logs Train Data Log 10.8% 10.8 % 15173 15173
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log 7.0% 7.0 % 9237 9237
PTC Event Log
PTC Device State Log PTC Comm Log 7.0% 7.0 % 2747 2747
PTC Device
7.0% 7.0 % 10589 10589
Office Log State Log
View Office Log SNMP Comm
3.0% 3.0 % 3489 3489
Log
System ensures that total log
I/O Slots Total 100.0% 100.0% size doesn’t exceed 100%
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Note: Changing size of any log type will erase all configurable logs.
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
When log sizes are changed, configurable log
5 - VLD-C6S contents are deleted. If necessary, user should Update Settings
6 - VIO-44R save log contents prior to changing sizes.
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S Set Maximum Log Archive Sizes to Defaults
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1 NOTE: Click this button to default all log archive max sizes.
Communications Set Defaults

SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-102, Diagnostics – Configure Log Archive Size

System Log
The System Log page displays the contents of the stored system log. Navigation buttons are provided to
examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of the log.
The System Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons shown.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Navigation buttons allow

Live Log
System Log movement among multiple
Selecting / Confirming the
"Clear Log" function clears
pages in the log.
the contents of the displayed log.
Configure Logs Clear Log
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log Prev Prev Next Next
Selecting "Download" retrieves
Begin End Download the entire log in a text file viewer
Configure Office Log Hour Page Page Hour
Log Archive Size (e.g. Notepad) for capture,
Page 1 of 10 Log page currently being displayed. searching, etc.
System Logs 05-06-11 06:31:48 C:LOGINMAN 00955 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5
System Log 05-06-11 06:31:42 C:LOGINMAN 01095 Web Logout from IP Address 192.168.0.5 (Inactivity
Configuration Log 05-05-11 17:37:37 B:LUPWEB 01158 Web local user presence removed
Data Log 05-05-11 17:37:36 A:LUPWEB 01158 Web local user presence removed
GDA Data Logs 05-05-11 17:07:34 B:LUPWEB 01170 Web local user presence established
Alarms 05-05-11 17:07:34 A:LUPWEB 01170 Web local user presence established
05-05-11 16:37:15 C:LOGINMAN 00955 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5
05-05-11 16:37:08 C:LOGINMAN 01095 Web Logout from IP Address 192.168.0.5 (Inactivity
PTC Logs 05-05-11 14:30:14 B:PTC_TIME 00461 External time update timed out
PTC Comm Log 05-05-11 14:30:14 A:PTC_TIME 00461 External time update timed out
PTC Event Log 05-05-11 14:02:52 B:LUPWEB 01158 Web local user presence removed
PTC Device State Log 05-05-11 14:02:51 A:LUPWEB 01158 Web local user presence removed
05-05-11 13:32:50 B:LUPWEB 01170 Web local user presence established
05-05-11 13:32:50 A:LUPWEB 01170 Web local user presence established
Office Log 05-05-11 13:06:49 C:LOGINMAN 00955 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5
View Office Log 05-05-11 12:50:01 C:LOGINMAN 00955 Web Login Successful from IP Address 192.168.0.5
05-05-11 12:36:15 B:PTC_TIME 00474 The no time sync message period elapsed
05-05-11 12:36:15 A:PTC_TIME 00474 The no time sync message period elapsed
I/O Slots 05-05-11 12:31:03 C:LCPCNTRL 01213 LCP (Port 1) - Link Down
1 - VIO-1010S 05-05-11 12:30:51 B:TWVO 10204 Slot 6 Bank 1 Bank Health Recovered
2 - VIO-86S 05-05-11 12:30:50 A:TWVO 10204 Slot 6 Bank 1 Bank Health Recovered
05-05-11 12:30:44 B:VCOM 07182 Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 AT Timer Expire
3 - VLD-R16S 05-05-11 12:30:44 A:VCOM 07182 Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 AT Timer Expire
4 - VLD-R16S 05-05-11 12:30:43 B:VCOM 08753 Port 4 Device ***** Remote 3 ***** Link Down Timer
5 - VLD-C6S 05-05-11 12:30:43 A:VCOM 08753 Port 4 Device ***** Remote 3 ***** Link Down Timer
05-05-11 12:30:43 B:VCOM 08753 Port 4 Device ***** Remote 2 ***** Link Down Timer
6 - VIO-44R 05-05-11 12:30:43 B:VCOM 08753 Port 4 Device 1 Remote 1 10 Link Down Timer
7 - CAB-16S
Navigation to a specific log
8 - VIO-44S
page is provided in this
9 - VTI-2S Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1
drop-down menu.
GFD-1
Communications Time step to be used by the Log listing can be from

SNMP Comm Log navigation buttons at the newest to oldest or oldest
Ethernet top of the page. to newest.
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-103, Diagnostics - System Log

Configuration Log
The Configuration Log page displays the contents of the stored configuration log. Navigation buttons are
provided to examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of
the log. The Configuration Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons
shown.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Configuration Log

Live Log

Configure Live Log
Begin End Download
Log Archive Size
Page 1 of 3
System Logs 05-05-11 14:21:17 C: SNMP Trap Settings Changed: Battery 2 Voltage.TrapEnable: Enable
System Log 05-05-11 14:18:54 C: SNMP Trap Settings Changed: PTC Mapping File Changed.TrapEnable:
Configuration Log 05-04-11 09:33:06 A: VLD Slot 5 Bank 1 And Bank 2 Voltages Initialized to 10.0V
Data Log 05-04-11 09:33:04 C: NV Timer User Config Defaulted
GDA Data Logs 05-04-11 09:32:37 C: NV Application Changed: #0 CRC=0x521D CHK=0x64E0 To #1 CRC=0x396
Alarms 05-04-11 07:37:47 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
05-04-11 07:37:41 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x0E371581
05-04-11 07:36:28 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
PTC Logs 05-04-11 07:36:23 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x0E371581
PTC Comm Log 05-04-11 07:36:01 C: PTC: RC2 Key File Applied
PTC Event Log 05-04-11 07:35:53 C: PTC: RC2 Key File Uploaded: CRC of 0x42B26D64
PTC Device State Log 05-04-11 07:34:56 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
05-04-11 07:34:46 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1
05-04-11 07:34:25 C: PTC: RC2 Key File Applied
Office Log 05-04-11 07:34:18 C: PTC: RC2 Key File Uploaded: CRC of 0xB804D9FD
View Office Log 05-04-11 07:33:57 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
05-04-11 07:33:53 C: PTC: HMAC Key Defaulted to PTC Config File Value
05-04-11 07:33:53 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0xA3C1CA20
I/O Slots 05-04-11 07:33:38 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
1 - VIO-1010S 05-04-11 07:33:34 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1
2 - VIO-86S 05-04-11 07:33:09 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
05-04-11 07:33:05 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0x887EE5F1
3 - VLD-R16S 05-04-11 07:32:31 C: PTC: HMAC Key Applied
4 - VLD-R16S 05-04-11 07:32:25 C: PTC: HMAC Key Defaulted to PTC Config File Value
5 - VLD-C6S 05-04-11 07:32:25 C: PTC: HMAC Key Uploaded: CRC of 0xA3C1CA20
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
Hour Newest Page 1
Time Step: Order: Page:
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-104, Diagnostics - Configuration Log

Data Log
The Data Log page displays the contents of the stored data log (recorder log). Navigation buttons are
provided to examine the log by page, by month, day, hour, or minute or going to the beginning or ending of
the log. The Data Log can be cleared and downloaded to the connected computer via the buttons shown.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Data Log

Live Log

Configure Live Log
Begin End Download
Log Archive Size
Page 1 of 2
System Logs
System Log 05-05-11 12:30:51 Vital Recorder Entry
Configuration Log
Data Log 2-B1HLTH =T
GDA Data Logs
Alarms 05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry
4-HEALTH =T
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log 05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry
PTC Event Log
PTC Device State Log 3-B1NORM =T 3-B2NORM =T 3-LAMP1OK =T
05-05-11 12:30:50 Vital Recorder Entry

Office Log
View Office Log 2-B2HLTH =T

I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S 2-VIN1 =T
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S 2-VOUT4 =T
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S 2-VIN4 =T 2-VOUT1 =T 3-VSSR1 =T 3-VSSR2 =T
8 - VIO-44S 8-VOUT1 =T
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
2-B1HLTH =F 2-B2HLTH =F 2-VIN1 =F 2-VIN4 =F
Communications 2-VOUT1 =F 2-VOUT4 =F 3-VSSR1 =F 3-VSSR2 =F
3-B1NORM =F 3-B2NORM =F 3-LAMP1OK =F 4-HEALTH =F
SNMP Comm Log 8-VOUT1 =F
Ethernet
Remote 05-05-11 12:30:11 Non-Vital Recorder Entry
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1
2 - Remote
373-0724
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-105, Diagnostics - Data Log

GDA Data Logs
The GDA (Graphical Data Analyzer format) Data Logs page allows the vital and non-vital GDA data log to
be downloaded to the connected computer. The GDA tool is a licensed, proprietary program that is
available through GETSGS (P/N: 838-0038-00-006).
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log GDA Data Logs

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log
Vital GDA Log: Download
Log Archive Size
Non-Vital GDA Log: Download
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0725
Figure 6-106, Diagnostics - GDA Data Logs

Alarms
The Alarms page displays the alarms that are currently active in the system. If an alarm is clearable, a
“Clear” button is displayed next to the alarm entry. Alarms that are not user clearable are displayed without
the button. Selecting the “Clear All Alarms” button clears all user-clearable alarms.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Alarm s

Live Log
Configure Logs Active Alarms:

Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log 1 10-26-07 19:43:31 -- VTI S9: High Battery Clear
2 10-26-07 19:43:41 -- Office Link Fail
Log Archive Size
3 10-26-07 19:44:23 -- LCP Link Down
System Logs 4 10-26-07 19:52:48 -- VTI S9: Cab Failure Clear

System Log 5 10-26-07 19:56:39 -- 1010-1:ModuleFailure Clear
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs Clear All Alarms
Alarms
PTC Logs NOTE: Refresh this page to show updates in alarms.

PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0726
Figure 6-107, Diagnostics - Alarms

PTC Comm Log

The PTC Comm Log page displays the incoming and outgoing PTC messages.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log PTC Comm Log

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log Clear Log
Prev Prev Next Next
Configure Office Log Begin
Hour Page Page Hour
End Download
Log Archive Size
Page 2 of 55
System Logs
06-07-10 17:00:53: EMP TX Message
System Log
02 02 00 00 03 D4 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
Configuration Log 5E 05 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
Data Log 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 05 08 42 7F 71 CB 76 87 57 4B 85 03
GDA Data Logs 06-07-10 17:00:52: EMP TX Message
Alarms 02 02 00 00 03 D3 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5E 04 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 04 08 42 04 71 79 45 BA B4 C1 29 03
PTC Logs 06-07-10 17:00:51: EMP TX Message
PTC Comm Log 02 02 00 00 03 D2 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5E 03 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
PTC Event Log
00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 03 08 42 6D 43 35 D1 87 B2 15 9A 03
PTC Device State Log 06-07-10 17:00:50: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 D1 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5E 02 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
Office Log 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 02 08 42 72 98 50 B5 B4 BF B2 3C 03
View Office Log 06-07-10 17:00:49: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 D0 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5E 01 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
I/O Slots 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 01 08 42 22 EE 06 7B 5D 80 BA 7F 03
1 - VIO-1010S 06-07-10 17:00:48: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 CF 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
2 - VIO-86S 5E 00 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
3 - VLD-R16S 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 00 08 42 F4 33 64 90 53 03 C8 91 03
06-07-10 17:00:47: EMP TX Message
4 - VLD-R16S
02 02 00 00 03 CE 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5 - VLD-C6S 5D FF 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
6 - VIO-44R 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0F 08 42 8E B9 B3 C8 3B CE 0C 46 03
06-07-10 17:00:46: EMP TX Message
7 - CAB-16S 02 02 00 00 03 CC 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
8 - VIO-44S 5D FE 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0E 08 42 EC 66 2E E7 AB F4 88 D0 03
9 - VTI-2S
06-07-10 17:00:45: EMP TX Message
GFD-1 02 02 00 00 03 CB 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5D FD 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0D 08 42 86 BD 9C 0F E4 E2 E5 70 03
Communications 06-07-10 17:00:44: EMP TX Message
SNMP Comm Log 02 02 00 00 03 CA 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5D FC 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
Ethernet 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0C 08 42 84 D2 47 BE 3B 34 3E 35 03
Remote 06-07-10 17:00:43: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 C9 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
Office
5D FB 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
Manual Override 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0B 08 42 46 5E 60 95 8E 4F BB E9 03
Serial Ports 06-07-10 17:00:42: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 C8 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
1 - LCP 5D FA 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
2 - Remote 00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 0A 08 42 69 8F E1 B2 95 39 47 FA 03
06-07-10 17:00:41: EMP TX Message
3 - (empty) 02 02 00 00 03 C7 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
5D F8 17 00 0A 00 0A 75 70 2E 77 2E 34 35 36 37 38 39 30 31 3A 77 69 75 00
00 71 23 45 67 89 01 02 08 08 42 F5 8D 25 9A F1 85 71 43 03
06-07-10 17:00:40: EMP TX Message
02 02 00 00 03 C6 01 02 00 00 00 3A 04 13 EC 00 09 00 00 0E 00 00 00 00 4C 0D
Figure 6-108, Diagnostics – PTC Communications Log

PTC Event Log

The PTC Event Log page displays events in the PTC Event log. These include start and stop of PTC
beaconing, entering/exiting message holds, PTC enabled /disabled and received messages. When PTC
messaging is disabled, this log will indicate the reason(s) for being disabled.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log PTC Event Log

Live Log
Configure Logs
Clear Log
Configure Live Log
Begin End Download
Log Archive Size

Page 1 of 1
System Logs 06-07-10 17:01:02: End PTC Beaconing

06-07-10 16:59:02: Start PTC Beacon End Warning
System Log
06-07-10 16:54:03: Start PTC Beaconing
Configuration Log 06-07-10 16:54:03: Max Beacon Timer Expired
Data Log 06-07-10 16:51:43: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
GDA Data Logs 06-07-10 16:51:42: Entering EMP Msg TX Hold
Alarms 06-07-10 16:46:44: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
06-07-10 16:46:43: Entering EMP Msg TX Hold
06-07-10 16:46:05: End PTC Beaconing
PTC Logs 06-07-10 16:39:06: Start PTC Beaconing
PTC Comm Log 06-07-10 16:39:06: Max Beacon Timer Expired
PTC Event Log 06-07-10 16:36:46: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
PTC Device State Log 06-07-10 16:36:45: Entering EMP Msg TX Hold
06-07-10 16:31:49: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
Office Log 06-07-10
06-07-10
16:26:58:
16:26:50:
Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
Entering EMP Msg TX Hold
View Office Log 06-07-10 16:22:04: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
I/O Slots 06-07-10 16:17:39: Start PTC Beacon End Warning
1 - VIO-1010S
06-07-10 16:12:38: Max Beacon Timer Expired
2 - VIO-86S 06-07-10 16:04:37: End PTC Beaconing
3 - VLD-R16S 06-07-10 16:02:37: Start PTC Beacon End Warning
4 - VLD-R16S 06-07-10 15:57:35: Max Beacon Timer Expired
5 - VLD-C6S 06-07-10 15:49:15: End PTC Beaconing
6 - VIO-44R 06-07-10 15:42:10: Start PTC Beaconing
7 - CAB-16S 06-07-10 15:42:10: Max Beacon Timer Expired
8 - VIO-44S 06-07-10 15:32:11: Start PTC Beacon End Warning
9 - VTI-2S 06-07-10 15:27:12: Start PTC Beaconing
06-07-10 15:27:12: Max Beacon Timer Expired
GFD-1 06-07-10 15:20:03: End PTC Beaconing
Communications 06-07-10 15:13:02: Received EMP msg 0x1450 from BNSF6067
06-07-10 15:01:39: Exiting EMP Msg TX Hold
SNMP Comm Log 06-07-10 15:01:38: Entering EMP Msg TX Hold
Ethernet 06-07-10 14:50:04: End PTC Beaconing
Remote
Office 06-07-10 14:43:03: Received EMP msg 0x1450 from BNSF6067
Manual Override
Serial Ports 06-07-10 14:34:44: PTC Event Log Erased By System
1 - LCP
2 - Remote Hour Newest Page 1
Time Step: Order: Page:
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-109, Diagnostics – PTC Event Log


The PTC Device State Log page displays the PTC Devices and the states (value and associated rule).
An entry is made when the state of a PTC device changes.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log
Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log Clear Log
Log Archive Size Prev Prev Next Next
Begin End Download
Hour Page Page Hour
System Logs
System Log Page 1 of 1
Configuration Log
Data Log 08-18-10 16:28:08 PTC Status Entry
GDA Data Logs signal = 13 - 9.1.13 - RESTRICTING
Alarms 08-18-10 16:27:58 PTC Status Entry
signal = 12 - 9.1.12 - DIV APPR
08-18-10 16:27:48 PTC Status Entry
PTC Logs signal = 11 - 9.1.11 - DIV APPR MED
PTC Comm Log 08-18-10 16:27:37 PTC Status Entry
PTC Event Log signal = 10 - 9.1.10 - DIV APPR DIV
PTC Device State Log 08-18-10 16:26:35 PTC Status Entry
signal = 4 - 9.1.4 - APPR LTD
Office Log 08-18-10 16:25:29 PTC Status Entry
View Office Log signal = 11 - 9.1.11 - DIV APPR MED
signal = 5 - 9.1.5 - ADV APPR
I/O Slots 08-18-10 16:23:21 PTC Status Entry
1 - VIO-1010S signal = 12 - 9.1.12 - DIV APPR
2 - VIO-86S 08-18-10 16:22:18 PTC Status Entry
3 - VLD-R16S signal = 6 - 9.1.6 - APPR MED
4 - VLD-R16S
signal = 13 - 9.1.13 - RESTRICTING
5 - VLD-C6S 08-18-10 16:07:49 A/B Processor Reset
6 - VIO-44R 08-18-10 16:07:43 C Processor Reset
7 - CAB-16S 08-18-10 16:07:43 Log Erased By System
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1 Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Figure 6-110, Diagnostics – PTC Device State Log

View Office Log
The View Office Log page displays the stored contents of the items configured for office logging via the
Configure Office Log page. This log can be cleared and downloaded via the option buttons provided. See
Chapter 7 - Terminal Program for an explanation of the logged information.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
General Configuration Diagnostics Status
Live Log View Office Log

Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log Clear Log Download
Prev Prev Next Next
Log Archive Size Begin
Hour Page Page Hour
End
System Logs Page 1 of 1

System Log
Configuration Log 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS SEND Port M: f1 01 f6
Data Log 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS > Pol l Port M: fb 01 82 f0 f6
GDA Data Logs 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 04 f6 0. 0 ms
Alarms 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 03 00 0. 0 ms
10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 03 f0 0. 0 ms
10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 02 82 0. 0 ms
PTC Logs 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 01 01 0. 0 ms
PTC Comm Log 10-26-07 20:09:56 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 00 fb 329.66 ms
PTC Event Log 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS < No Indication Port M: f1 01 f6
PTC Device State Log 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS SEND Port M: f1 01 f6
10-26-07 20:09:54 Office Link F ail = False

Office Log 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS > ACK & Poll Port M: fa 0 1 83 60 f6
View Office Log 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 04 f 6 0. 0 ms
10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 03 6 0 0. 0 ms
10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 02 8 3 0. 0 ms
I/O Slots 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 01 0 1 0. 0 ms
1 - VIO-1010S 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS LOC/R ECV Port M: 00 f a 88.78 ms
2 - VIO-86S 10-26-07 20:09:54 GENISYS < Ind ication Port M: f2 0 1 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 e0 04 36
10-26-07 20:09:54 Ind 032 0000 0000 00000000 00000000 00000000
3 - VLD-R16S
10-26-07 20:09:54 Memory Log wa s Initialized
4 - VLD-R16S ** End of Queue **
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S Time Step: Hour Order: Newest Page: Page 1
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0727
Figure 6-111, Diagnostics - View Office Log

Communication Diagnostics
Ethernet Vital Comm
The Ethernet – Remote page displays communication statistics for overall activity as well as for each
individual attached remote. The Serial-Remote page displays the same statistics for the remotes attached to
a serial interface.
Site ID:
Chassis ID : 0
[Configuration][Status]
Live Log
Live Log
Configure Logs
Configure Live Log
Log Archive Size
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0729
Figure 6-112, Diagnostics - Remote (Ethernet)

Ethernet Office Comm
The Ethernet-office page displays communication statistics for Ethernet office communications. The
Serial-office page displays the same statistics for a serial office interface.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
Live Log Message Counts

Live Log Current Counts Previous Counts
Date Cleared 10-26-07 20:13:54 10-25-07 16:57:19
Configure Logs Rx Valid 19 0
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log Rx Errors 0 0
Configure Office Log Resent 0 0
Log Archive Size
Link Fails 2 0
Code Fails 0 0
System Logs
System Log
Configuration Log Clear Current Message Counts
Data Log
GDA Data Logs
Alarms
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
PTC Event Log
Office Log
View Office Log
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0730
Figure 6-113, Diagnostics - Office (Ethernet)

Office Manual Control
The office control override page allows the manual override of the office inputs to be enabled or disabled
along with controlling the value (TRUE / FALSE) of the application defined control inputs. The override
selection will be under Ethernet or Serial Ports depending upon the location of the office interface in the
loaded application program.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
General Configuration Status Log Off
Live Log Office Control Override

Live Log
Office Control Override Enabled Manual override of
Manual Override office
of office
control inputs
control inputs is
is enabled
enabled // disabled
disabledhere.
here.
Configure Logs Override Buffer Size (Bytes) 2
Configure Live Log
Configure PTC Comm Log UpdateSettings
Settings
Update
Log Archive Size
System Logs Office Control Override Statuses

System Log
Byte 0 Byte 1
Configuration Log
Data Log Bit # Name Bit Bit # Name Bit
GDA Data Logs 0 CNTRL-1 0 Checking the box next to the status name
Alarms 1 CNTRL-2 1 CNTRL-10 of the control causes the control to be set
2 CNTRL-3 2 CNTRL-11 to TRUE (Logic 1). An unchecked box sets
PTC Logs
PTC Comm Log
3 CNTRL-4 3 CNTRL-12 the control value to FALSE (Logic 0).
PTC Event Log 4 4
PTC Device State Log 5 5 The control values are applied when the
6 6 CNTRL-15 “Execute” box is selected and confirmed.
Office Log 7 7
View Office Log
I/O Slots Execute

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Communications
SNMP Comm Log
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Manual Override
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
373-0731
Figure 6-114, Diagnostics - Office Manual Override (Ethernet)

All Statuses
The All Statuses page displays every status name and value for the loaded application program. The
Statuses are displayed in alphanumeric order of status name. Checking the “watch” box next to a status
name places it on the Watch Statuses page along with other selected statuses.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chass is ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses
All Statuses A specific page may be selected
Page: Page 5 (BATT 1HIGH-LCP HEALTH) from this drop-down menu.
PTC The name of the first and last
PTC Statuses
status on that page is shown in the list
PTC Device State
Pa e 5/7
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S Battery 1 High Alarm BATT 1HIGH TRUE
3 - VLD-R16S Cab Enable 1 Status CAB1E B TRUE
4 - VLD-R16S
Link Up EREMOTE2UP FALSE
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R Non-Vital Timer Complete GRANT TRUE
7 - CAB-16S Non-Vital Timer Enable GRANTEN TRUE
8 - VIO-44S Temporary IND-1 FALSE
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Temporary IND-2 FALSE Check the box next to the status
Temporary IND-5 FALSE name to show the status value in
Comm I/O Temporary IND-6 FALSE the “Watch Statuses” page.
Ethernet Temporary IND-7 FALSE
Remote
Office
Temporary IND-8 FALSE
Serial Ports Vital Setting LAMP1-1F FALSE
1 - LCP Vital Setting LAMP1-1ON FALSE
2 - Remote
Vital Setting LAMP1-2F FALSE
3 - (empty)
Vital Setting LAMP1-2ON FALSE
Internal Vital Setting LAMP1-3F FALSE
Vital Timers Vital Setting LAMP1-3ON FALSE
Non-Vital Timers
Vital Setting LAMP2-1F FALSE
Vital Setting LAMP2-1ON FALSE
Module Health LCPHEALTH TRUE
373-0732
Figure 6-115, Status - All Statuses

Watch Statuses
The Watch Statuses page displays the statuses selected for this page. An individual status may be removed
by selecting the check-box of that status or by clearing all selected statuses with the button provided. Up to
100 statuses may be shown on the Watch Statuses page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses
Watch Statuses
PTC
PTC Statuses Lamp Steady On 1 3-LAMP1ON FALSE
PTC Device State Module Health 4-HEALTH TRUE Individual statuses may be
removed from the Watch
Temporary IND-5 FALSE
I/O Slots Statuses page by deselecting
1 - VIO-1010S Temporary IND-8 FALSE the Watch check box.
2 - VIO-86S Clear All
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S Selecting "Clear All" removes all
8 - VIO-44S statuses from the Watch Statuses page.
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0733
Figure 6-116, Status - Watch Statuses

PTC Statuses
The PTC Statuses page allows viewing the values of the statuses used in the PTC mapping file.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses [Conf

Watch Statuses
PTC Statuses
Page: Page 1 (AGE-CRE)
PTC
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State
Page 1/1
I/O Slots Description Status Name Value Watch
1 - VIO-1010S
PTC Status AGE FALSE
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
PTC Status AFYE FALSE
4 - VLD-R16S PTC Status AYE FALSE
5 - VLD-C6S PTC Status AFRE FALSE
6 - VIO-44R PTC Status ARE TRUE
7 - CAB-16S
PTC Status BFGE FALSE
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S PTC Status BGE FALSE
GFD-1 PTC Status BFYE FALSE
PTC Status BYE FALSE
Comm I/O PTC Status BLE FALSE
Ethernet
PTC Status BFRE FALSE
Remote
Office PTC Status BRE TRUE
Serial Ports PTC Status CGE FALSE
1 - LCP PTC Status CYE FALSE
2 - Remote PTC Status CLE FALSE
3 - (empty)
PTC Status CFRE FALSE
Internal PTC Status CRE FALSE
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Figure 6-117, Status PTC Statuses

PTC Device State
The PTC Device State pages depicts each defined Device and its current state (PTC Value, Rule
Number, and Rule Name).
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses [Co

Watch Statuses
PTC Device State
Device Name PTC Value Rule Number Rule Name
PTC
signal 9 9.1.9 DIV CLEAR
PTC Statuses
e
PTC Device State
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Figure 6-118, Status PTC Device State

Remote Statuses
Input and Output statuses to attached vital remotes are displayed on this page. The specific interface type
(Ethernet or Serial) is selected via the Side Menu. The upper left drop-down menu selects the remote of
interest by remote number.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Watch Statuses Ethernet Vital Comm - Status
Remote
: 1 Page: Page 1 (RPENETUP-RPOUT4)
PTC
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State
Select the Remote of interest
I/O Slots Pa e 1/1
using this drop-down box.
1 - VIO-1010S Description Status Name Value The statuses for that remote
2 - VIO-86S Link Up RPENETUP FALSE are then displayed.
3 - VLD-R16S
Remote Input RPIN1 FALSE
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S Remote Input RPIN2 FALSE
6 - VIO-44R Remote Output RPOUT1 FALSE
7 - CAB-16S
Remote Output RPOUT2 FALSE
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S Remote Output RPOUT3 FALSE
GFD-1 Remote Output RPOUT4 TRUE
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0734
Figure 6-119, Status - Remote (Ethernet)

Office Statuses
Input and Output (controls and indications) for the office interface are displayed on this page. The specific
Interface Type (Ethernet or Serial) is selected via the Side Menu.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses Office Protocol Status [Configuration][Diagnostics]
PTC Page: Page1 (1VPM1DLVRY-1VPM1CTRL16)

PTC Statuses
PTC Device State
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S Page 1/13
2 - VIO-86S Description Status Name Value Watch
3 - VLD-R16S
Non-Vital Delivery 1VPM1DLVRY FALSE
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S Non-Vital Office Code Fail 1VPM1CF FALSE
6 - VIO-44R Non-Vital Office Link Fail 1VPM1LF TRUE
7 - CAB-16S
Non-Vital Override OfficeInput Enable 1VPM1OVREN TRUE
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL1 FALSE
GFD-1 Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL2 TRUE
Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL3 FALSE
Comm I/O
Ethernet Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL4 FALSE
Remote Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL5 FALSE
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL7 FALSE
2 - Remote Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL8 FALSE
3 - (empty)
Internal Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL10 FALSE
Vital Timers Non-Vital Control 1VPM1CTRL11 FALSE
Non-Vital Timers
Figure 6-120, Status - Office (Ethernet)

Local Control Statuses
The input and output statuses for the Local Control Panel are displayed on this page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0

Watch Statuses LCP Status
Page: Page 1 (LCPHEALTH-LCPOUT1)
PTC
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page
I/O Slots Pa e 1/1

1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S Non-Vital LCP Health LCPHEALTH FALSE
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
Non-Vital LCP Input LCP_IN1 FALSE
6 - VIO-44R Non-Vital LCP Output LCPOUT1 FALSE
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Figure 6-121, LCP Status

Vital and Non-Vital Timers
The Vital Timers page and Non-vital Timers page each display the state of the Timer Enable status and the
remaining time of the Timer Complete for each defined timer. Both the Timer Enable and the Timer
Complete may be selected for viewing on the Watch Statuses page.
Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses Timer Statuses
PTC Enable Watch Complete Remaining Watch
Description Status Name Value Enable Status Name Time Complete
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State Timer 1 5-B1L1EN FALSE 5-B1L1 0:6
Timer 2 5-B1L2EN FALSE 5-B1L2 0:10
I/O Slots
1 - VIO-1010S
Timer 3 5-SETUPEN FALSE 5-SETUPGRANT 0:0
2 - VIO-86S
3 - VLD-R16S
4 - VLD-R16S
5 - VLD-C6S
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
8 - VIO-44S
9 - VTI-2S
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
373-0737
Figure 6-122, Status - Vital Timers

Site ID: GETS-GS

Chassis ID: 0
All Statuses
Watch Statuses
Non-Vital Timer Statuses
Page: Page 1 (5-NVOUT11-_NVEQN)
PTC
PTC Statuses
PTC Device State First Page Prev Page Next Page Last Page
Enable Watch Complete Remaining Watch

I/O Slots Status Name Value Enable Status Name Time Complete
1 - VIO-1010S
2 - VIO-86S
5-NVOUT11EN FALSE 5-NVOUT11 00:20.0
3 - VLD-R16S ANVEQNT FALSE A_NV_EQN 00:00.0

4 - VLD-R16S GRANTEN FALSE GRANT 00:20.0
5 - VLD-C6S IND3-T FALSE IND-3 00:00.0
6 - VIO-44R
7 - CAB-16S
ZR_NVEQMT FALSE R_NVEQM 00:00.2
8 - VIO-44S R_NVEQNT FALSE R_NVEQN 00:00.2

9 - VTI-2S _NVEQNT FALSE _NVEQN 00:00.2
GFD-1
Comm I/O
Ethernet
Remote
Office
Serial Ports
1 - LCP
2 - Remote
3 - (empty)
Internal
Vital Timers
Non-Vital Timers
Figure 6-123, Status - Non-Vital Timers


Terminal Program
Chapter 7 – Terminal Program
Contents
Diagnostic Terminal and Telnet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
EC5 – Configured with VPM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
EC5 – Configured with VPM-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Diagnostic Terminal Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Diagnostic Terminal Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Telnet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Telnet Interface Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Checksum/CRC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Print Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Print (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Print Alarm Messages (PA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Print Mnemonics (PM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Print Condensed Data Dump (PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Print Error Log (PE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Print Configuration Log (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Print Recorder Range (PR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Display Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Set New Site ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Display VPM-3A Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Display VPM-3B Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Display VPM-3C Processor EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Display VTI-2S D - DSP EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Display VTI-2S E - DSP EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Display Application EPROM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Real Time Error Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15

View Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Enable Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Disable Real Time Error Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

View Live Data Log Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Enable Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Disable Live Data Log Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

View Live Mnemonics Display Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Enable Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Disable Live Mnemonics Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Set Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Communications Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Logging Options Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Communications Logging Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

ATCS Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
LCP Logging Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Displaying Stored Communications Memory Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Displaying Communication Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Clearing Communication Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Enabling Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Setting the Number of Office Control Override Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Modifying the Office Control Override Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Executing the Office Override Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Disabling Office Control Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Remote Config MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

MAC Key Vault Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Zap (Erase) Logs/Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

ZA - Erase Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
ZD - Erase Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
ZE - Erase Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Set Application Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

SE - Default Ethernet Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Terminal Program
Chapter 7 – Terminal Program
Diagnostic Terminal and Telnet Interface
Connecting a diagnostic terminal or a PC (Personal Computer) to the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA

(Communication Input/Output) Module diagnostic port, the VPM-2/VPM-2+ diagnostic port, or a VPM-3
Ethernet port’s Telnet Interface allows local control, memory dumps, and more extensive diagnostics than
does the CDU (Control Display Unit). Diagnostic terminal commands typed on the keyboard perform various
functions, such as examining data or controlling diagnostic terminal logging. Logging to the screen is more
convenient than directly to a printer, and, when using a PC, most communications programs allow simultaneous
screen and printer logging.
ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-2
PC to CIO-1A or CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port
Figure 7-1, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for ElectroLogIXS

ElectroLogIXS - Configured with VPM-3
Serial Diagnostic Port
Figure 7-2, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for ElectroLogIXS
EC5 – Configured with VPM-2
Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection
Figure 7-3, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for EC5

Terminal Program
EC5 – Configured with VPM-3
Attach diagnostic terminal or PC

to CIO-1 or CIO-CLA Diagnostic Port
VPM-3 Ethernet Ports
Figure 7-4, Serial Diagnostic Terminal Connection for EC5

Diagnostic Terminal Connection
WARNING The VPM-2 Diagnostic Port does not provide isolation protection
against Ground Faults. This port is intended for short-term use by
on-site personnel who are trained to observe any operational
anomalies. If the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 is powered from Signal or
Equipment battery, Ground Faults in external equipment attached to
the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port may be passed through to the powering
battery. Undetected Ground Faults to Signal or Equipment battery
may result in hazardous rail operation.
If a connection to the VPM-2 Diagnostic Port is left unattended, the

connected equipment must provide any required Ground Fault
protection. Ground Fault testing must be performed after the
connection is established, and at FRA mandated intervals thereafter.
or CIO-CLA
or CIO-CLA
or CIO-CLA
Figure 7-5, Diagnostic Cable with Connectors.
To use the diagnostic features, connect a diagnostic terminal or PC to the CIO-1/CIO-1A or CIO-CLA Diagnostic
Port. The port is a DTE port, with a DB-9 female connector. The connector on your terminal may be a DB-9 or
DB-25 female or male. The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 to diagnostic terminal cable can be made as shown above
or using the table below.
Printer or
CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA PC with DB-9 PC with DB-25 Modem Terminal
Diagnostic Port Comm Port Comm Port DB-25 DB-25
(DTE) (DTE) (DTE) (DCE) (DTE)
2 (RxD) 3 2 3 2
3 (TxD) 2 3 2 3
5 (COMM) 5 7 7 7
* The remaining pins in the connector are not used.

Terminal Program
Diagnostic Terminal Setup

Make sure the diagnostic port and the diagnostic terminal are using the same baud rate, stop bits, parity, and
data word length. These settings can be verified using the CDU-1.
When using a PC, a communications programs must be used to communicate with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
diagnostic port. Make sure the diagnostic port and the communication program are using the same baud
rate, flow control, stop bits, parity, and data word length.
Telnet Interface Connection

To use the Telnet Interface for diagnostic purposes, connect a PC to an Ethernet port of the VPM-3 using an
Ethernet cable.
Telnet Interface Setup

Ensure the Telnet Interface for the Ethernet port is enabled through the CDU-1 or Web GUI. Using a
terminal program, such as HyperTerminal, connect to the IP address that is set for the port on the VPM-3
module that you are connecting to. Once connected, a login prompt will be displayed. The username and
password for the Telnet Interface may be set through the Web GUI or viewed through either the CDU-1 or
the Web GUI. After a definable period of inactivity, the Telnet Interface will be closed. The inactivity
timeout may be set through the CDU-1 or Web GUI.
Commands
In addition to the commands listed on the main menu, several additional functions are available.
Z Use the backspace key to correct a keystroke when entering a command.
ENTER Press ENTER to execute a command
H Press H then ENTER to display the main (Help) menu.
[] Items shown in brackets indicate possible options for the command; you may enter some of
these letters or choose to omit them. Do not type in the brackets.
<option> For help on a specific option, type the option letter and a question mark and press the ENTER
key.

Menu Options
To display the Menu Options Help screen press ? or H and press the Enter key.
Menu Options
? - Help
H - Help
C - Checksum/CRC data
P [A/C/D/E/M] - Print Logs
E [Site ID] - Edit Site ID
I [A/B/C/D/E/X/R/T] - Information
L [E/D] - Live Error Output
R [E/D] - Live Data Output
M [E/D] - Live Mnemonic Status
T [YYMMDDhhmmss] - Time and Date
D [C/R/P/M/L/Z] - Communications Diagnostics
V [N/D/C/T/X/S/F] - Office Control Override
G [V/S/D/A/B/C/L] - Remote Config MAC
Z [A/D/E] - Zap Alarms/Logs
S [E] - Set Defaults
Menu Options.

Terminal Program
Checksum/CRC Data
Use the Checksum/CRC Data Commands to display the Application EPROM Checksum and CRC. To
display the Application EPROM Checksum and CRC, type C and press the ENTER key.
Application CRC = xxxx Checksum = xxxx
Application EPROM Checksum and CRC Options.
Print Commands
Use the Print Commands to retrieve recorded data. The data may be displayed on a PC, saved as a file, or
printed on a printer. To send data directly to a printer, a communications program must be used. To
display the Print Commands Screen, type P? and press the ENTER key.
Print commands
P Print 216DL recorder log
PA Print alarm messages
PM Print mnemonics
PD Print condensed data dump
PE Print errorlog
PC Print configuration log
PR Print recorder range
Print Commands Screen.
This procedure may be used to print Data Logs to a printer, if a printer is connected to you terminal device,
or to save the Data Logs to a file if not printer is available. For saving the Data Log to a file, make sure you
communication program is set to receive a text file.

Print (P)
The Print function prints the recorded data information in a 216DL Style Recorder Log. The data is printed
to an attached printer or displayed on an attached PC or terminal.
1. Type ? to display the Menu Options screen.
2. Type P and press the ENTER key. The 216DL Style Recorder Logs will be printed.
--------- LEFT (1) -------- --------- RIGHT (2) -------

DATE TIME PO ST WP ULO LLO ASP IN OUT WP ULO LLO ASP IN OUT
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
01-12 10:15:55 PO WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12
01-12 10:15:41 P0 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12 WP GYR GYR Y/ Y 12 12
Recorder Log Sample Print Out.
The log reads as follows:
1. Date: 01/12 Time: 10:15:55 the left aspect is yellow over yellow. Left codes in are 1 and 2 and the left
codes out are 1 and 2. The Right aspect is yellow over yellow. Right codes in are 1 and 2 and right
codes out are 1 and 2.

Terminal Program
Print Alarm Messages (PA)
The Print Alarm Message function allows you to print system alarm messages. To Print Alarm Messages,
type PA and press the Enter key. The Alarm Messages will be printed.
PA
System Alarm(s):
01: VTI:Module Failure
Print Alarm Messages Sample.
If no alarms are present, the screen display will be as shown below:
PA
No active alarm(s):
No Alarms Present Sample.

Print Mnemonics (PM)
The Print Mnemonics function allows you to print application mnemonics. The status name of the
mnemonic is printed as well status condition (True or False). To Print Mnemonics, type PM and press the
Enter key. The Mnemonics will be printed.
PM
LUGREENI =F LLGREENI =F RUGREENI =F RLGREENI =F

DLV_STATUS =F LOBAT =F HIBAT =F VTIHEALTH =T
T13RDPULSE =F T1BR =F T1NALT =F T1XMIT =T
T1RECV =T T1QS =T T1RC_1 =T T1RC_2 =F
T1RC_3 =F T1RC_4 =T T1RC_5 =T T1RC_6 =F
T1RC_7 =F T1RC_8 =F T1RC_9 =F T1RC_M =F
T1TC_1 =F T1TC_2 =F T1TC_3 =F T1TC_4 =F
T1TC_9 =F T1TC_M =F T1STICK =F T23RDPULSE =F
T2BR =T T2NALT =F T2XMIT =T T2RECV =T
T2QS =F T2RC_1 =F T2RC_2 =F T2RC_3 =F
T2RC_4 =F T2RC_5 =F T2RC_6 =F T2RC_7 =F
T2RC_8 =F T2RC_9 =F T2RC_M =F T2TC_1 =T
T2TC_2 =F T2TC_3 =F T2TC_4 =T T2TC_5 =T
T2TC_M =F T2STICK =F VI01 =F VI02 =F
VLD1HEALTH =T LUGREEN =F LUFGREEN =F LUGREENOUT =T
LUYELLOW =T LUFYELLOW =T LUYELLOWOUT =T LURED =F
LUFRED =F LUREDOUT =T LLGREEN =F LLFGREEN =F
LLGREENOUT =T LLYELLOW =T LLFYELLOW =T LLYELLOWOUT =T
LLRED =F LLFRED =F LLREDOUT =T NVI_1 =F
NVO_1 =F NVI_2 =F NVO_2 =F NVI_3 =F
NVO_3 =F NVI_4 =F NVO_4 =F VLD1_LSG =F
VLD1_LNM =T VLD2HEALTH =T RUGREEN =F RUFGREEN =F
RUGREENOUT =T RUYELLOW =F RUFYELLOW =F RUYELLOWOUT =T
RURED =T RUFRED =F RUREDOUT =T RLGREEN =F
RLFGREEN =F RLGREENOUT =T RLYELLOW =F RLFYELLOW =F
RLYELLOWOUT =T RLRED =T RLFRED =F RLREDOUT =T
NVI_5 =F NVO_5 =F NVI_6 =F NVO_6 =F
NVI_7 =F NVO_7 =F NVI_8 =F NVO_8 =F
VLD2_LSG =F VLD2_LNM =T
Print Mnemonics Sample.
Print Condensed Data Dump (PD)
This function prints the recorded data to be printed on compressed data format. To analyze this type of data
you must use the GDA (Graphic Data Analyzer). The Print Condensed Data Dump is the preferred data
download mode when troubleshooting assistance is requested from GETSGS. The data is printed to an
attached printer or displayed on an attached computer. The GDA is a licensed, proprietary program that is
available through GETSGS (P/N: 838-003800-006). To print a condensed data dump, type PD and press
the ENTER key.

Terminal Program
Print Error Log (PE)
The Error Log provides the user with system error messages. Error Log messages contain information such
as track setup, lamp setup, and other I/O problems in the system. Up to 1,000 Error Logs may be stored. To
print the Error Log, type PE (Print Error Log), and press the ENTER key.
PE
02-08 12:18:45 C:DIAGPORT 00752 Errorlog Erased (User Request)

02-08 12:22:54 A:VLDTEST 05519 Slot 3 Bank 1 Lamp 3 Voltage Drifted Value = 11077
02-08 12:34:45 B:VLDTEST 06374 Slot 2 Bank 1 Lamp 3 Light Out
02-08 12:35:42 B:TICGMAIN 17712 SLOT 1 VTI Reference Designators Do Not Match
02-08 12:51:39 A:TICGMAIN 17744 SLOT 1 VTI Transmit Correspondence Error on Track 1
02-08 12:51:46 A:TICGMAIN 23854 SLOT 1 VTI Open Track Circuit Detected on Track 1
Print Error Log Sample.
Print Configuration Log (PC)
The Configuration Log contains changes made to the configuration information. Examples of
configurations are track settings, lamp settings, and vital configuration settings, and vital timer settings. To
print the Configuration Log, type PC and press the ENTER key.
PC
08-19-98 19:10:08 VLD Slot 2 Bank 1 Voltage Changed From 10.0V To 12.0V
08-19-98 19:13:50 Track 2 Non-Alternating Selection Now = ALT
08-19-98 19:14:12 Track 2 Non-Alternating Selection Now = NON-ALT
08-20-98 16:54:38 Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 2.50 V
08-20-98 16:59:48 Track 1 Track Input Current Ration Now = 1.11
08-20-98 17:24:42 Track 1 Track Output Voltage Now = 0 V
09-03-98 09:59:19 Track 1 Track Input Current Ration Now = 0.85
09-03-98 10:00:16 Track 2 Track Input Current Reference Now = 0.85
09-03-98 10:04:31 Vital Timer Change: LUGRNT Changed From 10 To 2
09-03-98 13:46:18 Vital Configuration Setting Change
Print Configuration Log Sample.

Print Recorder Range (PR)
The Print Recorder Range function displays the dates (from beginning to end) of the Recorded Data. In the
example below, data started being recorded at 11:58:32 on 01-22 and was recorded until 15:03:32 on 02-08.
In addition, the Print Recorder Range function displays the number of recorded entries. In the example
below, 4216 entries have been recorded.
To print the Recorder Range, type PR and press the ENTER key.
PR
Recorded Data Range: 01-22 11:58:32 to 02-08 15:03:32 (4216 entries)
Print Configuration Log Sample.
Site ID
The Site ID is a descriptive identifier, up to 80 characters, for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. For
example, it could say "Signal at 5th and Main" or "Signal at mile marker 143". To display the Site ID
Help screen press E? and press the ENTER key.
E Display Site ID
E[id] Sets new site ID
Site ID Help.
Display Site ID
Use of this function displays the Site ID for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 location. To display the Site ID type E
and press the ENTER key.
Site ID: Signal at 5th and Main
Site ID Sample.
Set New Site ID
The Set New Site ID function allows you to enter a new identifier for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 site. The
Site ID may be up to 80 characters. To set a new Site ID, type E, the new Site ID, and press the ENTER
key.
Note: There is no space between the command and the new Site ID being set.
ESignal at 6th and Main

Set New Site ID Sample.

Terminal Program
Information Commands
To display the Information Commands help screen press I? and press the Enter key.
Information Commands
IA - VPM-A Processor
IB - VPM-B Processor
IC - VPM-C Processor
ID - VTI DSP-D Processor
IE VTI DSP-E Processor
IT Application EPROM
Information Commands.
Display VPM-3 A Processor EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for processor A on the VPM-3 Module. To display the
EPROM information for processor A, type IA and press the ENTER key.
IA
PN: PTC IT4 B13

Ver: FULL Bld0064F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: A
Copyright: GETS Global Signaling, LLC © 2010
CRC: AB5585E4
Sample Display of Processor A EPROM Information.
Display VPM-3 B Processor EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for processor B on the VPM-3 Module. To display the
EPROM information for processor B, type IB and press the ENTER key.
IB
PN: PTC IT4 B13

Ver: FULL Bld0064F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: B
CRC: C338B666
Sample Display of Processor B EPROM Information.

Display VPM-3 C Processor EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for processor C on the VPM-3 Module. To display the
EPROM information for processor C, type IC and press the ENTER key.
IC
PN: PTC IT4 B13

Ver: FULL Bld0064F
Module: VPM-3
Processor: C
CRC: 38AE3A1
Sample Display of Processor C EPROM Information.
Display VTI-2S D - DSP EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for DSP (Digital Signal Processor) - D on the VTI-2S
Module. To display the EPROM information for DSP - D, type ID and press the ENTER key.
ID
PN:202550-000
Ver:2.1
Module:VTI
Processor:D
Ref: U76
Copyright:Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 2000
Sample Display of D - DSP EPROM Information.
Display VTI-2S E - DSP EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for DSP - E on the VTI-2S Module. To display the EPROM
information for DSP - E, type IE and press the ENTER key.
IE
PN:202550-000
Ver:2.1
Module:VTI
Processor:E
Ref: U86
Copyright:Harmon Industries Inc. (C) 2000
Sample Display of E - DSP EPROM Information.

Terminal Program
Display Application EPROM Information
This function displays the EPROM information for the Application EPROM installed in the CI Module. To
display the Application EPROM information, type IT and press the ENTER key.
IT
ACE Version: 3.0.0

EC5/ElectroLogIXS Compiler Version: 1.0.0
Railroad: GETS GS
Designed by: Bob Chaney
Subdivision: Grain Valley
Location Number: 0
Flashrate (flash/per sec): 45
Chassis ID: 0
Comments: This application was for GETS GS Railroad
Date: 2/28/03
Sample Display of Processor E EPROM Information.
Real Time Error Output

The Real Time Error Output logging function allows you to enable or disable real time error logging to the
PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Real Time Error Output logging is enabled. To
display the Real Time Error Output Help screen press L? and press the ENTER key.
Real Time Error Output Commands

L - Current output status
LE - Enable output
LD - Disable output
Real Time Error Output Commands.
View Real Time Error Output Status
To view the Real Time Error Output Status (Enabled or Disabled), type L and press the ENTER key.
Live errorlog display ENABLED

View Real Time Error Output Status.
Enable Real Time Error Output Status
To enable the Real Time Error Output Status, type LE and press the ENTER key.
LE
Live errorlog display ENABLED

Enable Real Time Error Output Status.

Disable Real Time Error Output Status
To disable the Real Time Error Output Status, type LD and press the ENTER key.
LD
Live errorlog display DISABLED

Disable Real Time Error Output Status.
Live Data Log Display

The Live Data Log Display logging function allows you to enable or disable real time Data Log logging to
the PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Live Data Log Display logging is enabled.
To display the Live Data Log Display Help screen press R? and press the ENTER key.
Live datalog display commands

R - Show current status
RE - Enable output
RD - Disable output
Live Data Log Display.
View Live Data Log Status
To view the Live Data Log Status (Enabled or Disabled), type R and press the ENTER key.
Live datalog display ENABLED

Live Data Log Display Status.
Enable Live Data Log Display
To enable the Live Data Log Display, type RE and press the ENTER key.
RE
Live datalog display ENABLED

Enable Live Data Log Display.
Disable Live Data Log Display
To disable the Live Data Log Display, type RD and press the ENTER key.
RD
Live datalog display DISABLED

Disable Live Data Log Display.

Terminal Program
Live Mnemonics Display

The Live Mnemonics Display logging function allows you to enable or disable real time Mnemonics
logging to the PC, diagnostic terminal, or printer. The default setting for Live Mnemonics Display logging
is enabled. To display the Live Mnemonics Help screen press M? and press the ENTER key.
M?
Live mnemonic display commands

M - Show current status
ME - Enable output
MD - Disable output
Live Mnemonics Display Help Screen.
View Live Mnemonics Display Status
To view the Live Mnemonics Display Status (Enabled or Disabled), type M and press the ENTER key.
Live mnemonic display DISABLED

Live Mnemonics Display Status.
Enable Live Mnemonics Display
To enable the Live Mnemonics Display, type ME and press the ENTER key.
ME
Live mnemonic display ENABLED

Enable Live Mnemonics Display.
Disable Live Mnemonics Display
To disable the Live Mnemonics Display, type MD and press the ENTER key.
MD
Live mnemonic display DISABLED

Disable Live Mnemonic Display.

Time and Date

To display the Time and Date Commands screen press T? and press the Enter key.
Time and date commands

T - Display current time and date
T YYMMDDhhmmss - Set the time and date
Time and Date Commands
Display Time and Date
The Time and Date are displayed in MMDDYYhhmmss format. The date is displayed according to the 24
hour clock (i.e 3:00 PM is 1500). To display Time and Date:
1. Type T and press the ENTER key. The time and Date will be displayed. Display will be similar to the
message shown below.
Current time of day: 07-30-10 12:22:26
Set Time and Date
The Time and Date are set to the YYMMDDhhmmss format. To set the Time and Date to July 30, 2010 at
45 seconds after 1:00 PM
1. Type T100730130045 and press the ENTER key.
Communications Diagnostics
Use the Communications Diagnostics Commands to selectively enable logging of changes in either Office
Controls and Indications, inbound and outbound Office Protocol (GENISYS® ,BCS) or LCP messages, and
the raw message data received on the Office port to either the DT console or a stored memory log. Other
features available in the Communications Diagnostics Commands include full or partial stored memory log
display, display of locally maintained communications counters, and clearing of the locally maintained
communications counters. To display the Communications Diagnostics Commands Help screen, type D and
Communications diagnostics commands
D - Show current status
DMx- Dump Memory Log (F = Forward, B = Backward)
DMF- Forward, All DMB- Backward, All
DMF- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00 DMB- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00
DCC- Enable/Disable Ctrl/Ind output DCM- Enable/Disable Ctrl/Ind to Memory
DPC- Enable/Disable Protocol output DPM- Enable/Disable Protocol to Memory
DRC- Enable/Disable Raw Data output DRM- Enable/Disable Raw Data to Memory
DZ - Display Port Message Counts DZC- Clear Message Counts
DL - Enable/Disable LCP diag output DD - Disable All Logging
Control/Indication Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED

Protocol Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED
Raw CodeLine Data Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED
LCP Logging, Console= DISABLED
.
Communications Diagnostics Command Help Screen

Terminal Program
Logging Options Modification

Several Communications Diagnostics Commands enable or disable DT console or stored memory logging
of various types of communications information. Each logging option is individually enabled and any
combination of logging options can be concurrently enabled. The following logging options are supported:
• Changes to Office Controls and Indications (DCC, DCM)

• GENISYS®, BCS Office Protocol messages (DPC, DPM)
• GENISYS®, BCS Office port (CodeLine) raw message data (DRC, DRM)
• LCP messages (DL)
Except for LCP message logging, logging information can be displayed on the DT console (DCC, DPC, and
DRC) or stored in a memory log for future retrieval (DCM, DPM, and DRM). LCP messages can only be
logged to the DT console.
Prior to setting any logging option, display the current log option settings by typing D and press the ENTER
key. Check the current state of the logging option and if it is disabled, type the desired option (e.g., DCC to
enable DT console logging of Office Controls and Indications) and press the ENTER key. The DT console
will display the updated logging options states.
To disable a logging option, verify the logging option is enabled and if it is, type the desired option (e.g.,
DCC to disable DT console logging of Office Controls and Indications) and press the ENTER key. While
each logging option must be individually enabled, all logging options may be collectively disabled. The DT
console will display the updated logging options states.
To disable all logging options, type DD and press the ENTER key. The DT console will display the updated
logging options states.
Logging option enabling, disabling, and clearing are illustrated in the following example:


DMF- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00 DMB- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00
DPC- Enable/Disable Protocol output DPM- Enable/Disable Protocol to Memory
DRC- Enable/Disable Raw Data output DRM- Enable/Disable Raw Data to Memory

Raw CodeLine Data Logging, Console= ENABLED Memory= DISABLED
DCC
Control/Indication Logging, Console= ENABLED Memory= DISABLED

DPM

Protocol Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= ENABLED
DRC

Protocol Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= ENABLED
DD

Communications Logging Options

Terminal Program
Communications Logging Options

ATCS Logging Outputs
Several ATCS logging options are available for displaying ATCS protocol activity. These options can be
enabled in any combination and include:
• ATCS Protocol Error Logging (DEC)

• ATCS Protocol Informational Logging (DIC)
• ATCS Protocol Layer 2 (data link (HDLC)) Logging (D2C)
• ATCS Protocol Layer 3 (network) Logging (D3C)
• ATCS Protocol Layer 4 (transport) Logging (D4C)
• ATCS Protocol Layer 6 (presentation) Logging (D6C)
As shown in the following examples, each ATCS logging entry contains a time stamp and informational
text. Additionally, some error logging and all layer logging messages contain raw message data displayed
in hexadecimal format.
D?

DMF- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00 DMB- 5/1/05 17:30 - 5/1/05 18:00
DEC- Enable/Disable ATCS Err output DEM- Enable/Disable ATCS Err to Memory
DIC- Enable/Disable ATCS Info output DIM- Enable/Disable ATCS Info to Memory
D2C- Enable/Disable ATCS L2 output D2M- Enable/Disable ATCS L2 to Memory
DEC

ATCS Error Logging, Console= ENABLED Memory= DISABLED
ATCS Info Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED
ATCS L2 Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED
05-22-06 05:57:31 Err L6 Unknown Message Received 9.2.1
05-22-06 05:57:43 Err L4 Unmatched Service Signal

Message Num 68 Part 1 Delivery Confirmation
05-22-06 05:57:43 Err L4 Unrecognized Status Packet

03 94 E4 00 0A 00 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 88 02 31 00
ATCS Protocol Error Log Example

DIC

ATCS Error Logging, Console= DISABLED Memory= DISABLED
ATCS Info Logging, Console= ENABLED Memory= DISABLED
05-22-06 05:58:28 Info L2 Received Message
05-22-06 05:58:28 Info L2 Transmitting Message
05-22-06 05:58:29 Info L6 Indication
05-22-06 05:58:29 Info L6 Control
05-22-06 05:58:30 Info L6 Indication
05-22-06 05:58:30 Info L4 D Bit Acknowledge Received
05-22-06 05:58:30 Info L6 Service Signal Received
ATCS Protocol Informational Log Example

Terminal Program
D2C

ATCS L2 Logging, Console= ENABLED Memory= DISABLED
05-22-06 05:58:43 L2 Data from MCP

03 D1
05-22-06 05:58:43 L2 Data to MCP

03 D1
05-22-06 05:58:48 L2 Data from MCP

03 D1
05-22-06 05:58:48 L2 Data to MCP

03 D1
05-22-06 05:58:51 L2 Data from MCP

03 DC 64 00 0E 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 0E 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EC AB
05-22-06 05:58:51 L2 Data to L3

03 DC 64 00 0E 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 0E 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EC AB
05-22-06 05:58:51 L2 Data to MCP

03 F1
05-22-06 05:58:52 L2 Data from L3

23 00 68 00 0C 0C EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 8E 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D5 37
05-22-06 05:58:52 L2 Data to MCP

23 FC 68 00 0C 0C EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 8E 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D5 37
05-22-06 05:58:52 L2 Data from MCP

23 F1
05-22-06 05:58:53 L2 Data from MCP

03 FE A8 00 0C 0E AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 8E 02 31 00
05-22-06 05:58:53 L2 Data to L3

03 FE A8 00 0C 0E AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 8E 02 31 00
05-22-06 05:58:53 L2 Data to MCP

03 11
05-22-06 05:58:58 L2 Data from MCP

03 F1
05-22-06 05:58:58 L2 Data to MCP

03 11
ATCS Protocol Layer 2 Log Example

D3C

05-22-06 06:00:52 L3 Data to L2

23 00 68 00 10 10 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 92 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 D5 37
05-22-06 06:00:53 L3 Data to L4

03 32 A8 00 10 12 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 92 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:01:44 L3 Data to L4

03 34 64 00 10 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 10 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EC AA
05-22-06 06:01:44 L3 Data to L2

23 00 68 00 12 12 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 94 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 37
05-22-06 06:01:45 L3 Data to L4

03 56 A8 00 12 14 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 94 02 31 00
D4C

05-22-06 06:01:59 L4 Data from L3

03 58 64 00 12 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 12 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EB AA
05-22-06 06:01:59 L4 Data to L6

03 58 64 00 12 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 12 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EB AA
05-22-06 06:02:00 L4 Data from L6

23 00 28 00 00 01 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 00 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 D7
05-22-06 06:02:00 L4 Data to L3 Normal Mode

23 00 68 00 00 00 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 96 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 55 D7

Terminal Program
D6C

05-22-06 06:02:15 L6 Data from L4

03 7C 64 00 14 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 14 02 02 12 01 00 00 02
08 EB A8
05-22-06 06:02:15 L6 Data to L4

23 00 28 00 00 01 EA 26 2A 1A 5A 1A 76 2A 1A 1A
A1 A2 A2 00 00 02 02 12 8B 03 00 10 08 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 D7
05-22-06 06:02:16 L6 Data from L4

03 9E A8 00 16 18 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 98 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:40 L6 Data from L4

03 90 2F 00 02 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 16 02 02 12 47 04 01 1B
02 0B 16 04 D6 07 1C 02 0B 16 05 D6 07 31 3D 30
20 32 3D 30
05-22-06 06:02:41 L6 Data from L4

03 B2 AE 00 02 04 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 9A 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:42 L6 Data from L4

03 D4 AE 00 04 06 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 9C 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:43 L6 Data from L4

03 F6 AE 00 06 08 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 9E 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:45 L6 Data from L4

03 18 AE 00 08 0A AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A A0 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:47 L6 Data from L4

03 3A AE 00 0A 0C AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A A2 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:47 L6 Data from L4

03 5C 2F 00 04 00 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A2 26 2A
1A 5A 1A 04 00 00 01 00 18 02 02 12 47 04 00 1B
02 0B 16 04 D6 07 1C 02 0B 16 05 D6 07 31 3D 30
20 32 3D 30
05-22-06 06:02:48 L6 Data from L4

03 5E AE 00 0C 0E AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A A4 02 31 00
05-22-06 06:02:49 L6 Data from L4

03 70 AE 00 0E 10 AE 76 2A 1A 1A A1 A2 A3 26 2A
1A 5A 1A A6 02 31 00

Logging Outputs
The following is an example of the outputs generated when control and indication logging is enabled. In
this example, 32 controls and indications are active and are sequentially displayed in groups of eight
starting with the first control / indication. The timestamps show when each entry occurred.
01-19-06 02:54:55 ConL 032 00000000 00000000 00000000

00000000
01-19-06 02:54:55 Ind 032 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
01-19-06 02:55:21 ConL 032 11111111 11111111 11111111
11111111
01-19-06 02:55:22 Ind 032 11000000 00000000 00000000
00000011
01-19-06 02:55:51 ConL 032 00000000 11111111 00000000
11111111
01-19-06 02:55:51 Ind 032 00000000 00000000 00000000
00000011
Control/Indications Log Example
The following is an example of the outputs generated when Office protocol logging is enabled. The
“>”symbol denotes received on the office port (port B) while the “<” symbol denotes responses transmitted
to the office. The message type follows these symbols while the log entry terminates with a hexadecimal
representation of the message’s contents. The timestamps show when each entry occurred.
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS >Control Port B: fc 01 00 00 01 00 02 00 03 00 e0 01

1f 87 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS <Indication Port B: f2 01 e0 01 eb 78 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS >ACK & Poll Port B: fa 01 83 60 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS <No Indication Port B: f1 01 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS >Poll Port B: fb 01 82 f0 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS <Indication Port B: f2 01 00 00 03 00 28 22 f6
01-19-06 02:55:21 GENISYS >Control Port B: fc 01 00 ff 01 ff 02 ff 03 ff e0 01
71 58 f6
01-19-06 02:55:21 GENISYS <Indication Port B: f2 01 e0 01 eb 78 f6
01-19-06 02:55:21 GENISYS >ACK & Poll Port B: fa 01 83 60 f6
01-19-06 02:55:22 GENISYS <Indication Port B: f2 01 00 03 03 c0 d8 72 f6
01-19-06 02:55:51 GENISYS >Control Port B: fc 01 00 00 01 ff 02 00 03 ff 9c a1
f6
01-19-06 02:55:51 GENISYS <Indication Port B: f2 01 00 00 63 78 f6
Genisys Protocol Log Example

Terminal Program
08-11-08 13:06:41 BCS < ACK Port N: 03 ff 01 d0

08-11-08 13:06:41 BCS > First Poll Port N: 03 ff 02 a8
08-11-08 13:06:41 BCS < Indication Port N: 03 01 00 e0 03 02 00 e8 03 03 0
0 08 03 04 aa 38
08-11-08 13:06:41 BCS > Control Port N: 03 01 55 80 fc fe aa 7f
08-11-08 13:06:41 ConUP 0032 10101010 00000000 00000000 00000000
08-11-08 13:06:41 BCS < ACK Port N: 03 ff 01 d0

08-11-08 13:06:42 BCS > Poll Port N: 03 ff 02 a8
08-11-08 13:06:42 BCS < No Indication Port N: 03 ff 02 a8
08-11-08 13:06:42 ConUP 0032 10101010 00000000 00000000 00000000
08-11-08 13:06:42 BCS < ACK Port N: 03 ff 01 d0

08-11-08 13:06:42 BCS > Poll Port N: 03 ff 02 a8
08-11-08 13:06:42 BCS < No Indication Port N: 03 ff 02 a8
08-11-08 13:06:43 ConUP 0032 10101010 00000000 00000000 00000000
08-11-08 13:06:43 BCS < ACK Port N: 03 ff 01 d0

08-11-08 13:06:53 Office Link Fail = True
BCS Indication/Control and Protocol Logging Example

The Genisys® log entry message types are shown in the following table.
Message Text Description

> Control Received Control Message
< Resend Ind Retransmitted Indication Data message
> Poll Received Poll message
> Recall Received Recall Indications message
< No Indication Transmitted Acknowledge Master message
< Indication Transmitted Indication Data message
< Control Verify Transmitted Control Check-Back
> ACK & Poll Received Acknowledge & Poll message
> Execute Command Received Execute Controls message
> Unknown Msg Received a message directed to another station (different unit address)
> Incomplete Msg Received incomplete message
> Bad CRC Received a message is with invalid CRC
> Execute Unexptd Received Execute Controls message without a preceding Control message
> Invalid Message Received a message with an undefined header
> Control Too Long Received a Control message with too many control bits
> Date/Time Received a Date/Time Update message
The BCS log entry message types are shown in the following table.
Message Text Description

>Control Valid control request
> Poll Valid poll request
< Indication Indication data for a recall or poll request
> Unknown Msg This message is addressed to another field unit
> Invalid BCH The transmitted BCH does not equal the calculated BCH
> Test Request Valid diagnostic request
< Test Indication Response to diagnostic request (echo)
> Invalid Ctrl Control with an invalid port or invalid complement.
> Disconnect Valid disconnect modem request
< ACK Acknowledgment of a valid control
< NAK Acknowledgment of an invalid control
< No Indication No Changes for a poll request
> Recall Valid recall request
> First Poll First poll request following a modem connect.
> Invalid Message An incomplete or invalid message was received

Terminal Program
The following is an example of the outputs generated when raw CodeLine data logging is enabled. Each
entry contains a timestamp of when the event occurred, the port involved, the protocol associated with the
port, the data’s transmission direction (LOC/RECV for inbound data and SEND for outbound), and the raw
data in hexadecimal format. Received data is displayed a byte at a time with a byte counter (reset with each
inbound message) while a complete transmitted message is displayed in each entry.
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 00 fc 107.12 ms

01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 01 01 1. 3 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 07 00 1.40 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 08 03 0.67 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 0a e0 1.18 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 0b 01 0.89 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 0c 1f 1. 6 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 0d 87 1. 2 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 0e f6 1. 4 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS SEND Port B: f2 01 e0 01 eb 78 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 00 fa 99.47 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 04 f6 1. 4 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS SEND Port B: f1 01 f6
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS LOC/RECV Port B: 00 fb 395.30 ms
01-19-06 02:54:55 GENISYS SEND Port B: f2 01 00 00 03 00 28 22 f6
Genisys Raw Data Log Example
08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS LOC/RECV Port N: 00 03 303.3 ms

08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS LOC/RECV Port N: 04 fc 25.0 ms
08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS LOC/RECV Port N: 05 fe 10.1 ms
08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS LOC/RECV Port N: 06 aa 9.8 ms
08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS LOC/RECV Port N: 07 7f 9.9 ms
08-11-08 13:15:53 BCS SEND Port N: 03 ff 01 d0
BCS Raw Data Logging

LCP Logging Outputs
The following is an example of the outputs generated when LCP logging is enabled. Each entry contains a
timestamp of when the event occurred, the port involved, and the protocol associated with the port (LCP),
and the direction of the transaction (In for inbound and Out for Outbound). Inbound log entries show which
switch changed settings and its new setting. Outbound log entries sequentially display all LCP controls in
blocks of eight starting with the first LCP control.
10:11:10 07/14/05 LCP Port 2 In Update Unit 1 Position 5 is set to 1

10:11:10 07/14/05 LCP Port 2 Out Refresh 00000000 00000000 00001000 00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
00000000 00000000 00000000
00000000
LCP Log Example

Terminal Program
Displaying Stored Communications Memory Logs
Stored communications memory logs can be displayed on the DT console using the DMx commands.
These commands display communications log entries stored in memory regardless of log entry type
(controls / indications, protocol, or raw data) or current logging option settings. Available display options
include displaying entries oldest to newest (forward), entries newest to oldest (backward), all entries, or a
subset of the entries filtered by start and end times. To display the entire stored memory communications
log starting with the oldest entry, type DMF and press the ENTER key. To restrict the log display to a
specific time range, enter start and times separated by dash after typing DMF. Start and end times must be
entered in MM/DD/YY HH:MM format. For example,
DMF 06/29/06 19:30 – 06/30/06 02:00
will retrieve all stored memory communications log entries that occurred between 7:30 pm on June 29,
2006 and 2:00 am on June 20, 2006. To display the stored memory logs in reverse sequence (backward),
simply replace DMF with DMB in the above descriptions. Log displays can be interrupted at any time by
pressing the <Esc> key or Ctrl – C. Sample outputs of the stored memory logs are shown in the
Communications Logging Outputs section.

Displaying Communication Counters
The DZ command displays the current and previous day counts for Office and Remote ports. The following
is an example of the DZ command’s output. This example produces an output with three sections, one for
the office port and one for each vital remote. The first column contains the counter’s label, the next contains
the present value in the current day’s counts, and the last contains the previous day’s final counts.
Overflow is displayed when the number of countable events exceeds the capacity of the counter.
DZ
Saved Message Counts

Office 01-16-06 00:00:01 01-15-06 21:29:13
Rx Valid 1441 0
Rx Errors *Overflow* 0
Resent 960 0
Link Fails *Overflow* *Overflow*
Code Fails 0 0
Rem1s 01-16-06 00:00:01 01-15-06 21:29:13

Rx Valid 0 0
Rx Errors 0 0
Code Fails 0 0
CtoA Mbox 0 0
SCC Abort 0 0
Rx OverWr 0 0
AtoC Msgs 226664 4073
Rem2s 01-16-06 00:00:01 01-15-06 21:29:13

Rx Valid 0 0
Rx Errors 0 0
Code Fails 0 0
CtoA Mbox 0 0
SCC Abort 0 0
Rx OverWr 0 0
AtoC Msgs 226664 *Overflow*

Counter Display Example

Terminal Program
Clearing Communication Counters
The DZC command resets all current day counters to zero. The resulting output is follows the same format
as the DZ with all current day counters displaying zero.
DZC
Saved Message Counts

Office 01-18-06 00:00:02 01-17-06 00:00:00
Rx Valid 0 0
Rx Errors 0 0
Resent 0 0
Link Fails 0 0
Code Fails 0 0
Rem1s 01-18-06 00:00:02 01-17-06 00:00:00

Rx Valid 0 0
Rx Errors 0 0
Code Fails 0 0
CtoA Mbox 0 0
SCC Abort 0 0
Rx OverWr 0 0
AtoC Msgs 0 245156
Rem2s 01-18-06 00:00:02 01-17-06 00:00:00

Rx Valid 0 0
Rx Errors 0 0
Code Fails 0 0
CtoA Mbox 0 0
SCC Abort 0 0
Rx OverWr 0 0
AtoC Msgs 0 245156

Clear Counter Example

Office Control Override

Use the Office Control Commands to override office controls from the diagnostics terminal. Overriding
controls is multiple step process involving:
1. Enabling the override feature (VN)

2. Setting the number of control bytes to override (VS)
3. Modifying the override controls buffer (VC, VD, VT)
4. Executing the override controls buffer when control modifications are complete (VX)
5. Disabling the override feature when use of the override feature is complete (VF)
To display the Office Control Override Commands Help screen, type V and press the ENTER key.
Office Control Override commands

VN - Turn ON Office Control Override
VD - Display the Office Control Override Buffer
VC - Clear the Office Control Override Buffer
VT - Toggle Office Control Override Statuses
VX - Execute the Office Control Override Buffer
VS - Set the Office Control Override Buffer Size
VF - Turn OFF Office Control Override
Office Control Override = OFF
Office Control Override Command Help Screen
Enabling Office Control Override

To enable the Office Control Override feature, type VN and press the ENTER key.
VN
Office Control Override = ON
Office Control Override Enable Command.
Note: when the Office Control Override feature is on, controls received through the office port are ignored
and the following message is displayed on the DT console:
Control from Office Not Executed; In Local Mode

Terminal Program
Setting the Number of Office Control Override Bytes

The VS command sets the size of the office control override buffer. The value entered in this command sets
the number of bytes of controls (8 controls per byte). In the following examples, 56 bytes (448 local
controls (LC)) and 8 bytes (64 local controls (LC)) are enabled. After each command, the DT console
displays the current state of the control override buffer sequentially in groups of eight starting with the first
control. Following this, the mnemonics (NM) of the controls currently set in the buffer are listed.
VS 56
LC 448 0 00000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000 4 00000000 5 00000000

6 00000000 7 00000000 8 00000000 9 00000000 10 00000000 11 00000000
12 00000000 13 00000000 14 00000000 15 00000000 16 00000000 17 00000000
18 00000000 19 00000000 20 00000000 21 00000000 22 00000000 23 00000000
24 00000000 25 00000000 26 00000000 27 00000000 28 00000000 29 00000000
30 00000000 31 00000000 32 00000000 33 00000000 34 00000000 35 00000000
36 00000000 37 00000000 38 00000000 39 00000000 40 00000000 41 00000000
42 00000000 43 00000000 44 00000000 45 00000000 46 00000000 47 00000000
48 00000000 49 00000000 50 00000000 51 00000000 52 00000000 53 00000000
54 00000000 55 00000000
NM *none*
VS 8
LC 64 0 00000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000 4 00000000 5 00000000

6 00000000 7 00000000
NM *none*
Modifying the Office Control Override Buffer

The contents of the office control override buffer can be displayed and modified before they are executed
by the locally selected application. The office control override buffer is displayed using the VD command
and cleared with the VC command. The VT command sets or resets the supplied mnemonic. In the
following example, 32 controls are displayed, cleared, and modified. The present state of the office control
override buffer is first displayed using the VD command and only the second control (given the mnemonic
CON2 for this example) is set. This control is then cleared with the VC command and the first control
(CON1) is set and then cleared through the VT command.
VD
LC 32 0 01000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000

NM CON2
VC
LC 32 0 00000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000

NM *none*
VT CON1
LC 32 0 10000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000

NM CON1
VT CON1
LC 32 0 00000000 1 00000000 2 00000000 3 00000000

NM *none*
Office Control Override Buffer Modification Commands

Executing the Office Override Buffer
Once the override control buffer is properly configured, the controls are executed using the VX command.
The following example shows an example of the DT console’s display resulting from the VX command.
VX

01-18-06 20:12:44 Loc Con 032 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000
Office Control Override Buffer Execution Command Example
Disabling Office Control Override

To disable the Office Control Override feature, type VF and press the ENTER key.
VF
Office Control Override = OFF
Office Control Override Disable Command.
Remote Config MAC
Use this to access the MAC related commands. To display the Remote Config MAC related Help screen,
type G and press the ENTER key.
Remote Config MAC Commands

GV - Upload MAC Key Vault file [Usage: GV <MAC-Key-Vault-filename>
<-iIpAddress>]
GSS - SwitchOver - Initiate/Restart [Switchover Enable, Switchover Restart]
GSC - SwitchOver - Cancel [Switchover Cancel]
GD - Delete Uploaded MAC Key Vault
GA - Toggle - Rmt - Send Msgs With MAC In layer3 [MAC=ENABLED/DISABLED]
[Usage: GA <Rmt# ..>]
GB - Toggle - Rmt - Send Msgs With New MAC Link Key [Use New Key=YES/NO]
[Usage: GB <Rmt# ..>]
GC - Display Current Values
GL - Enable/Disable MAC Related Debug Logging [Usage: GL <mask>]
Remote Config MAC Commands
MAC Key Vault Load
To load the MAC Key Vault file from a local computer, the computer must have TFTP (Trivial File
Transfer Protocol) server software installed.
1. Confirm the Ethernet settings on the local computer, and the ElectroLogIXS or EC5 / VPM-3 system
including the IP Address, Subnet Mask and the Default Gateway via the CDU interface (Figure 5-47,
Ethernet Config Menu) or the Web GUI interface (Figure 6-52, Configuration - General Ethernet).
visibility to the directory with the MAC Key Vault file.
Terminal Program
3. On the VPM-3 diagnostic terminal, enter command to load the MAC Key Vault file.
GV application.mvlt –i192.168.1.12
4. After the transfer has completed successfully, text similar to the following will be displayed on the
diagnostic terminal:
09-08-09 12:15:19 VOFD: Tftp from 192.168.1.12 done;

file:APPLICATION.MVLT, msg: Transferred 772 bytes (60890617 blocks) in 0.0
seconds, status:ok(0)
09-08-09 12:15:19 VOFM: Verifying uploaded Mac Vault file .. ok,
vaultCrc=0x17401D81
09-08-09 12:15:19 VOFD: New MAC Key Vault APPLICATION.MVLT Has Been
Successfully Uploaded
Note: If the above is not seen, confirm the Ethernet settings on the local computer and the
ElectroLogIXS or EC5 / VPM-3 system. If all are correct it may be necessary to determine if
the computer firewall is not allowing TFTP access. Contact the network administrator to
confirm.
Zap (Erase) Logs/Alarms

Use the Zap Commands to erase recorded data. To display the Zap Commands Help screen, type Z and
Zap Commands
ZA - Erase Alarms
ZD - Erase Data Log
ZE - Erase Error Log
Zap Commands Help Screen.
ZA - Erase Alarms
This command erases the alarms. To erase the Alarms, type ZA and press the ENTER key.
ZA
Alarm history erased
Erase Alarms Screen.
ZD - Erase Data Log
This command erases all the data in the Data Log. To erase the Data Log, type ZD and press the ENTER
key.
ZD
Recorder/Data logs erased
Erase Recorder/Data Log Screen.
ZE - Erase Error Log
This command erases all the data in the Error Log. To erase the Error Log, type ZE and press the ENTER
key.
ZE
Error Log User Request (log erased)

Erase Error Log Screen.

SE - Default Ethernet Parameters
This command sets Ethernet parameters to their Defaults. To set Ethernet Defaults, type SE and press the
ENTER key.
SE
Ethernet Parameters set to Application Defaults.

Active IP connections may get reset.

SECURE SHELL PROGRAM (SSH)
Section 8 – SECURE SHELL PROGRAM (SSH)
Contents
Secure Shell Remote Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Secure Shell Interface Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Apply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Get . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Validate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5


Section 8 – SECURE SHELL PROGRAM (SSH)
Secure Shell Remote Connection

The VPM-3 provides a secure shell (SSH) remote connection to either of the Ethernet ports. This
connection allows remote configuration and upload of configuration files, connection keys, applications,
executive software, and boot software. To use the SSH interface, connect a remote computer to an Ethernet
port on the VPM-3 using an Ethernet cable. Files are transferred to and from the VPM-3 using the Secure
File Transfer Protocol (SFTP).
Secure Shell Interface Setup

Ensure the SSH interface for the Ethernet port is enabled and proper SSH authorized key files are uploaded
through the Web GUI. Using a terminal program such as HyperTerminal, connect to the IP address that is
set for the port on the VPM-3 module you are connecting to. Once connected, a login prompt will be
displayed. The username and password for the SSH Interface is set through the Web GUI. After a definable
period of inactivity, the SSH interface will be closed. The inactivity timeout is set through the Web GUI.
Commands
In addition to the commands listed on the main menu, several additional functions are available.
<= Use the backspace key to correct a keystroke when entering a command
ENTER Press ENTER to execute a command
Help Type Help then ENTER to display the main menu
[] Items shown in brackets indicate possible options for the command; you may enter some of these
letters or choose to omit them. Do not type in the brackets.
<option> For help on a specific option, type help, then the option and press ENTER.
Menu Options
To display the Menu Options Help screen enter Help and press the Enter key.
SSH> help
apply [ nvcf | snmpcf | snmpbin | boot
| exec | rc2 | hmac | authkey
| selective | list | help ]
check[v,nv,snmp] [ list | help ]
delete [ all | vcf | nvcf | snmpcf
| boot | exec | ptcconfig | ptcmap
| app | rc2 | hmac | authkey
| selective | <filename> | confirmed | list | help ]
exit [ help ]
get [ vcf | nvcf | snmpcf | help ] [<filename>]
show [ <major id>.<minor id> | [V,N,S]<index>

| all | nvapp | vapp | ptcapp
| ptckey | exec | boot | general
| comm | vcf | nvcf | snmpcf
| files | wiu | authkey | selective | staged | help ]
stage[v,nv,snmp][ <major id>.<minor id> <new value>
| [V,N,S]<index> <new value>
| list | <filename> | help ]
validate [ vcf | nvcf | snmpcf | snmpbin
| selective | list | help ] <filename>
[apply date/time][expire date/time]
verbose [ help ]
help [ <command> | help ]
up arrow - brings up old command lines
down arrow - brings up newer command lines
right arrow - moves cursor to the right
left arrow - moves cursor to the left
insert - inserts a space at the cursor
delete - deletes character at the cursor
Apply
Use the apply command to apply a non-vital file that has been previously copied via SFTP and validated
with the validate command; or to apply a set of individual parameters that have been staged and checked.
The file or parameters are active on completion of the apply command. For help on the apply command
enter “help apply”.
Apply commands
SSH> help apply

apply [ nvcf | snmpcf | snmpbin | boot
| exec | rc2 | hmac | authkey
| selective | list | help ]
This command takes an uploaded file that has been created
after doing a check on staged data or by validating an
external file and applying the its content to the system.
- An option is required to indicate which uploaded file to apply
- The list option shows the uploaded file(s) available.

Check
The check command performs a parameter value check on vital, non-vital, and SNMP staged parameters
that have been entered using the stage command. If the configuration parameters are valid and
self-consistent, a file that contains the list of valid configuration items are written to local storage. The
non-vital and SNMP configuration files can be made active using the apply command. The vital
configuration file can only be applied using the Web GUI after Local Presence has been established. For
help on the check command enter “help check”
SSH> help check

check[v,nv,snmp] [ list | help ]
1)Takes the staged data and checks to make sure
that it mets the parameter's criteria.
2)A check is also made to make sure all staged data
fits together and with the current system settings.
3)If all checkout, the staged data is written out
to a file that can be later be applied.
Delete
The delete command deletes configuration files that have been copied to the system using SFTP,
configuration files that have been uploaded using the Web GUI, and configuration files that have been
created using the validate and check commands. For help on the delete command enter “help delete”.
SSH> help delete

delete [ all | vcf | nvcf | snmpcf
| selective | <filename> | confirmed | list | help ]
Removes a default file(s) based on command given that
has been created by running check on staged data
or by validating an external file.
Exit
To exit the current SSH session, type exit then press Enter. For help on the exit command enter “help exit”
SSH> help exit

exit [ help ]
Exit tells the client to disconnect and then
breaks the connection.

Get
To create text based configuration files enter the get command followed by a directive. Vital, Non-vital, and
SNMP text based configuration files can be created. These files can subsequently be copied from the
system using SFTP. If no filename is entered, the following default filenames are used:
vcf – config_vcf.txt
nvcf – config_nvcf.txt
snmpcf – config_snmpcf.txt
For help on the get command enter “help get”.
SSH> help get

get [ vcf | nvcf | snmpcf | help ] [<filename>]
Takes the current configuration and outputs it to a file.
The file will contain the parameters ids and their values
grouped by the option specified.
Show
To show a parameter value or group of parameters, enter the show command followed by the parameter
name or the group name. Show all displays all the active system parameters on the screen. For help on the
show command enter “help show”.
SSH> help show

show [ <major id>.<minor id> | [V,N,S]<index>
| all | nvapp | vapp | ptcapp
| ptckey | exec | boot | general
| comm | vcf | nvcf | snmpcf
| files | wiu | authkey | selective | staged | help ]
Shows information based on the group option selected.
The all option will output all the groups.
The staged option will output all staged data.

Stage
Stage sets an individual parameter to a value. More than one parameter can be staged consecutively. When
entries are complete, enter the check command to validate the parameter spelling and the value. If either is
incorrect, a message is displayed. The parameter names are case sensitive. For help on the stage command
enter “help stage”.
SSH> help stage
stage[v,nv,snmp][ <major id>.<minor id> <new value>

| [V,N,S]<index> <new value>
| list | <filename> | help ]
To interactively select a parameter and assign a
proposed value to it. This in turn will create a
list of pairs that will need to be checked and.
applied.
Validate
The validate command validates the specified file that has been copied using SFTP. Once the file is
validated, it is moved to the uploaded directory. For help on the validate command enter “help validate”.
SSH> help validate

validate [ vcf | nvcf | snmpcf | snmpbin
| selective | list | help ] <filename>
[apply date/time][expire date/time]
Based on the submenu option given, an validation
is done on the file given.
If all is valid, the given file is moved into the
upload directory so it can be applied later.


Retest Guide
Section 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide
Contents
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Application Software Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Application Software Changes Within a Multiple Application EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..9-3
PTC Mapping File Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
PTC Configuration File Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Executive Software Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
CAB-16S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Control Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
CI/UCI-3 (Chassis Information) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA (Communications Input/Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
CIO-PCA (Communications Input/Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA (Vital Serial Communications) Module . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 9-7

Multi-Drop Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
CPS (Central Power Supply) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
GFD-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Personality Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
TIP-2 (Track Interface Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
VIO-1010S (Vital 10 Input/10 Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
VIO-44S (Vital 4 Input / 4 Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . .9-10
VLD-C16S (Vital Lamp Drive) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Drive) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
VIO-44R (Vital 4 Input / 4 Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
VIO-86S (Vital 8 Input / 6 Output) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...9-13

Replicating Existing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Upgrading the application software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Selecting a different application program within the existing software EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Upgrading the Executive Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Installation of New Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Retest Guide
Section 9 – Retest Guide

General
WARNING Retest procedures should be performed before the unit is placed into
service and in accordance with standard railroad, FRA, and/or other
regulatory agency rules. This should include visual inspection of vital
parameter values.The tests should be performed by qualified
personnel that have the knowledge to correctly and safely discharge
the tests. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 unit after
the initial setup could result in death or serious injury.

serious injury.
No information in this section supersedes or replaces your railroad’s
instruction.
These procedures may interfere with the operation of the signal
system. Before interfering with the signal system, obtain permission
from the dispatcher or other authority (per the operating rules of your
railroad).
This chapter provides a guideline of the minimum retesting that GETSGS recommends be performed to an
in-service ElectroLogIXS/EC5 that has been modified. These recommendations are based on system safety
requirements, as well as practices to ensure proper system operation and reliability. These recommendations
do not supersede FRA or railroad testing requirements, and do not represent the policy of any railroad
signal department, unless adopted as such. Refer to your railroad’s signal department policy for guidance.
When multiple modules are changed within the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system, the retesting should include
the combined total recommendations for each of the modules changed.
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 was designed with diagnostics as an integral part of its design. Before performing any
testing to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system, verify that each of the module health LEDs are lit, that the CDU-
1 displays the “ GETSGS HOME MENU” message, and that there are no alarm messages displayed on the
CDU-1. If any error conditions exist, complete troubleshooting of the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 before
performing this retest procedure.

Note: You should turn the power switch on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system to OFF before changing any
system modules. An exception to this rule is that you do not need to remove power when changing
the CDU-1 Module, a CIO-1/CIO-1A Module that is not using its “Office” port, a CIO-CLA Module
that is not using its “LCP” port, or any module that explicitly allows replacement with power on.
This information can be found in the description of each module.
Application Software Changes

Note: When replacing the Application EPROM, the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 System will automatically delete
the existing data logs due to changes in application recorder information. Print or download all
data log information prior to removing the existing application EPROM or CI/UCI-3 Module.
Changing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application EPROM with an identically-programmed application

EPROM or the identical application loaded into flash memory only requires testing to prove that the system
is functional once it comes out of power-up reset. The application program must be verified to be identical
to the original application by obtaining the new ATK CRC and Checksum values through the CDU-1 menu,
Terminal Program or WebGUI, and verifying that they exactly match the ATK CRC and Checksum values
of the previously tested program. This information should be recorded in the location plans or other
applications EPROM documentation.
1. When changing the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application equations, the values associated with the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 configuration data (such as vital configuration settings, timer values, etc.) may be
inappropriate for the new application. Using the CDU, Terminal Program or WebGUI, verify and enter
as required, all configuration information including:
• Track Transmit Voltages

• Track Receive Current Levels
• Lamp Voltages
• Vital Configuration Settings
• Timer Values
• Office, Diagnostic and Vital Communication Port settings
• Ground Fault Detector Settings
• PTC Mapping File
• WIU Address
• WIU Enabled
• PTC Non-Vital Configuration Settings
• PTC Applicability Settings
• Debounce Times
2. After Application Logic changes have been made, a complete system and functional retest is
recommended. An allowable exception to a complete retest is as follows:
• If you are upgrading only the application software at existing properly functioning, in-service sites,
the first site should be tested with a full cut-in test. Additional sites that have the identical
executive software, identical application software, identical application and PTC mapping file may
be candidates for minimized retesting. Refer to Replicating Existing Sites in this section for
more information.
3. If the vital application is changed, PTC messaging behavior must be retested to confirm the updated
application logic produces the correct device state values for each PTC Device in each state. Retesting
may be performed at the fielded site or in a lab environment using an identically configured system
with the same application and PTC mapping files.

Retest Guide
Application Software Changes Within a Multiple Application EPROM

The ElectroLogIXS/EC5 allows an application engineer to provide multiple application programs within
one application EPROM. Installation personnel may select the appropriate program for a specific site via
the Chassis ID Straps and the first 8 Vital Configuration Switches.
After selecting a different program within an installed Application EPROM, a complete system and
functional retest is recommended. An allowable exception to a complete retest is as follows:
1. Select the desired application program and verify the CRC and checksum information displayed is as
expected.
2. Verify that all module health LEDs are illuminated and that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.
3. Verify and enter, as required, all configuration information including:

• Vital Timer Values
• Diagnostic and Vital Communication Port settings
• WIU Address
• WIU Enabled
• Debounce Times
4. If you are only changing the program selection with an Application EPROM at existing properly
functioning, in-service sites, the first site should be tested with a full cut-in test.
5. Additional sites that have the identical executive software, identical application software, identical
application and PTC mapping file may be candidates for minimized retesting. Refer to Replicating
Existing Sites in this section for more information.
6. Retest PTC messaging behavior to confirm the updated application logic produces the correct device
state values for each PTC Device in each state. Retesting may be performed at the fielded site or in a
lab environment using an identically configured system with the same application and PTC mapping
files.
PTC Mapping File Changes

Note: PTC Mapping files can only be installed on systems equipped with a VPM-3, CI-2/UCI-3 module
and PTC compatible Executive and Boot Software.
Reloading a PTC Mapping file with an identical one only requires confirming that the CRC's are identical
before and after the file is loaded, Debounce times are set and Applicability Settings are configured. The
PTC Applicability Settings, Debounce times, and WIU Address must be verified to be identical . View the
Mapping file CRC, PTC Applicability Settings, Debounce times, and WIU Address through the WebGUI
and verifying they exactly match the values of the previously tested PTC Mapping file. This information
should be recorded in the location plans or other PTC documentation.

If a PTC Mapping file is loaded at a site that previously was not PTC configured, or a new PTC mapping is
loaded, the following checks and tests are recommended:
1. Set WIU Address as defined in the location plans.

2. Set Applicability Settings as defined in the location plans for the site.
3. Set PTC Debounce times.
4. Retest PTC messaging behavior to confirm the application logic and updated PTC mapping file
produces the correct device state values for each PTC Device in each state. Retesting may be
performed at the fielded site or in a lab environment using an identically configured system with
the same application and PTC mapping files.
PTC Configuration File Changes

Note: PTC Configuration files can only be installed on systems equipped with a VPM-3, CI-2/UCI-3
module and PTC compatible Executive and Boot Software.
Loading a PTC Configuration file requires:
1. Checking the CRC is correct according to the site information.

2. Confirming the WIU Address is set according to the site information if Set Defaults are used.
Executive Software Changes

Note: Prior to changing the VPM Executive Software, print or download the system log files (data log,
configuration log, error log, PTC device state log, and PTC event log) that are stored in
non-volatile memory inside the VPM Module.
1. Restart the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 system by turning the Power Switch OFF and ON again. Verify the
system comes out of reset without error. Verify all health LEDs are illuminated. Verify that no alarm
messages are displayed on the CDU or Web GUI.
2. Using the CDU or Web GUI, verify the executive software revisions of the A, B and C processors are
the same or greater revisions than those that are being replaced. Update the site documentation with the
latest information.
3. Using the CDU or Web GUI, verify and enter, as required, all configuration information including:

• Lamp Voltages
• Timer Values
• WIU Address
• WIU Enabled
• Debounce Times

Retest Guide
4. Additional tests should also be performed to verify that the vital configuration switches (and Chassis
ID straps if applicable) are set correctly.
Backplane
Note: All system configuration data other than the application equations is stored on the backplane. Re-
entry of this data will be necessary after replacing the backplane.
1. Start with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power Switch in the OFF position. Turn the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
ON and verify the system restarts without error. Verify all health LEDs are illuminated. Verify that no
alarm messages are displayed on the CDU-1.
2. Verify the replacement module is the same type of module, and carries the same or greater
modification level as the module being replaced. Update the site documentation with the latest
information.
3. Using the CDU or WebGUI, verify and enter as required, all configuration information including:

• Lamp Voltages
• Timer Values
• WIU Address
• WIU Enabled
• Debounce Times
4. Perform a full cut-in test of the location.
CAB-16S
1. Start with the ElectroLogIXS power switch in the OFF position. Turn the ElectroLogIXS ON and
verify:
• the system restarts without error

• that all health LEDs are illuminated and
• that no alarm messages are displayed on the CDU-1.
2. Verify the replacement module is the same type of module and it carries the same or greater
information.
3. Exercise each cab output used in the installation. Verify that the CABOUT LED illuminates and the
proper cab signal rate can be properly applied to the track.

Control Display Unit

The CDU-1 can be exchanged while the system is running without affecting the proper operation of the
system.
information.
2. Verify the CDU-1 health LED is illuminated.
3. Verify the CDU-1 display and pushbuttons are functioning.
CI/UCI-3 (Chassis Information) Module

information.
3. The CI Module houses the application logic stored in EPROM or flash. When changing the CI Module,
it is necessary to either verify that the application logic did not change, or perform appropriate checks
if the application logic changes. Refer to Application Logic Changes in this section for the appropriate
tests of the application logic EPROM. It is also necessary to verify that the PTC Mapping and
configuration settings are correct for this application and site. Refer to PTC Mapping File Changes and
PTC Configuration File Changes in this section for the appropriate tests of the PTC mapping file.
4. The CI Module is used to store the SNMP configuration settings. If SNMP is being used, the
configuration values must be verified to ensure desired operation.
CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA (Communications Input/Output) Module

ON and verify the system restarts without error. Verify that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.
information.
3. If a laptop computer is available, verify that the diagnostic data port is properly functioning.
4. If the office communications port of the CIO-1/CIO-1A/CIO-CLA is used, verify that at least one
control and one indication can be properly communicated with the dispatching office.

Retest Guide
CIO-PCA (Communications Input/Output) Module

1. Start with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Power Switch in the OFF position. Turn the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 ON
and verify the system restarts without error. Verify that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.
information.
3. If a laptop computer is available, verify that the diagnostic data port is properly functioning.
4. If the diagnostic communications port of the CIO-PCA is used, verify that at least one control and
one indication can be properly communicated utilizing ATCS through the ARES network.
CIO-2/CIO-2A, CIO-3, CIO-MD/CIO-MDA (Vital Serial Communications) Module

information.
3. Verify that messages can be successfully communicated each direction between the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 and the device on the other end of the serial communications link. For example,
make sure the vital remote link status is true or that controls and indications can be communicated over
an ATCS link.

Multi-Drop Errors
If the CIO-MD/CIO-MDA is used for Multi-Drop operation, the following errors may be observed if the
network is not configured properly.
• If the network IDs are not correct either because the equations are incorrect or the network addresses
are swapped, the system will show “chassis ID” errors.
• If the network addresses are not correct, the link will not come up and no error messages will be
generated because each device only responds to its own message or poll.
• If a link goes down, the logging on the unit with the earliest time stamp is the reason. Once the link is
down, the device quits sending messages which causes the other link to go down with “receive time”
errors. If the earliest time stamp does not display error messages other than “link down”, then that unit
quit receiving messages.
CPS (Central Power Supply) Module

information.
3. Verify the “5V PWR” LED on the CDU-1 is illuminated. Check the voltage at the “5V” test point with
respect to the “COM” test point. The voltage should be between +4.94 and +5.46 VDC.
GFD-1
verify:
• the system starts without error

• all health LEDs are illuminated
information.
3. Using the CDU-1, verify the GFD fault threshold and fault time values are set properly.
4. Using a test resistor of the correct value, verify that a fault is detected on each battery input pole.

Retest Guide
Personality Module
verify:
• the system starts without error

• all health LEDs are illuminated
information.
3. Depending on the type of personality module changed repeat the applicable retest for the respective I/O
Module as described in other sections of this chapter.
TIP-2 (Track Interface Panel)

information.
3. Verify the proper termination of the track wiring and verify the track polarity.
4. Verify the track transmit voltage and receive reference current are set properly.
Note: The track circuit adjustment data is stored on the back plane, and should retain the previously set
levels for the location when the TIP-2 is replaced.
5. Verify the receive current at each end of the track circuit is within the range specified in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Track Adjustment Tables in Volume One, Chapter 2 - Installation.
6. Shunt-test the track in accordance with the policies of your railroad signal department.
7. Verify that a track code can be properly received and transmitted on each track.
VIO-1010S (Vital 10 Input/10 Output) Module

information.
3. Exercise the code select inputs on the module being replaced as follows: Verify that each code rate
used in this application can be selected and transmitted. Verify that each code used in this application
can be deselected and therefore not transmitted.

4. Exercise at least one code decoder output on the module being replaced as follows: Verify that the
code decoder output can be made True by receiving the appropriate code rate. Verify that all the code
decoder outputs are False when the track is shunted.
VIO-44S (Vital 4 Input / 4 Output) Module

information.
3. Exercise each vital input on the module being replaced as follows: Energize the vital input, and verify
that the appropriate actions take place. De-energize the vital input, and verify the appropriate actions
take place.
4. Exercise each vital output on the module being replaced as follows: Set up a condition that should
energize the vital output, and verify that it energizes properly. Remove the condition that energizes the
vital output, and verify that the vital output de-energizes.
VLD-R16S (Vital Lamp Drive) Module

modification level as the module being replaced. Update the site documentation with the
latest information.
3. If the lamps are in approach lighting mode, turn the lamps on. Verify the proper aspects are displayed
for the state of the system. Verify that a stop aspect is displayed each direction when shunting the track
ahead of the signal.
4. Verify on the Quick Status Menu that all light out statuses that are intended to be True are True.
VLD-C6S (Vital Lamp Drive) Module

information.
3. Using the CDU-1, verify the lamp adjustment voltages are set properly.
Note: The lamp voltage adjustment data is stored on the back plane, and should retain the previously set
levels for the location when the VLD-C6S is replaced.

Retest Guide
4. If the lamps are in approach lighting mode, turn the lamps on. Verify the proper aspects are displayed
for the state of the system. Verify that a stop aspect is displayed each direction when shunting the track
ahead of the signal.
5. Verify on the Quick Status Menu that all light out statuses that are intended to be True are True. The
Quick Status Menu are the items directly below the GETSGS Home Menu. See Figure 5.3 for an
example. The items shown in the Quick Status Menu are dependent upon the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
application.
6. Test the POR input and each of the non-vital inputs that are used on VLD-C6S Module.
VPM (Vital Peripheral Master) Module

Note: System logs (data log, configuration log, error log) are stored in non-volatile memory inside the
VPM Module. Prior to removing the VPM, print or download the system log files.
alarm messages are displayed on the CDU. Verify correct application program and PTC mapping file
are loaded.
information.
3. Using the CDU-1, verify the executive software revisions of the A, B and C processors are the same or
greater revisions than those that are being replaced. Update the site documentation with the latest
information.
4. Using the CDU or WebGUI, verify and enter, as required, all configuration information including:
• Lamp Voltages
• Timer Values
• PTC Confiuration Settings
• Debounce Times
• WIU Address
5. Verify the “LOW MEMORY BATTERY” LED is not illuminated.

6. If a laptop computer is available, check the recorder data log to ensure it is functioning properly.
7. For each of the following I/O, exercise one of each I/O type in the system to verify the system will
properly respond with the I/O in its most permissive state (energized), and in its most restrictive state
(de-energized):
• For lamp outputs, verify the application program correctly controls (turns on / off) a lamp output.
If the unit contains both VLD-R16S and VLD-C6S modules, one output for each module must be
verified.
• Track inputs (For instance, verify that the system properly reacts to a vital code received and a
shunt.)
• Track outputs (For instance, verify that the system can properly transmit a vital code and a
tumbledown.)
• Cab signal outputs (For instance, verify that the system can properly transmit a cab rate and no cab
rate.)
• Vital inputs (Verify the system responds to a vital input in its energized state, and in its de-
energized state.)
• Vital outputs (Verify that the system can properly energize and de-energize a vital output used.)
• Non-vital I/O (Verify that a non-vital I/O properly responds in the energized and de-energized
states.)
• Vital Communication Links are up.
VTI-2S (Vital Track Interface) Module

information
3. Verify that the track transmit voltage and the track receive reference current are properly set.
Note: Track circuit adjustment data is stored on the back plane, and should retain the previously set
levels for the location when the VTI-2S Module is replaced.
4. Verify the receive current at each end of the track circuit is within the range specified in the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Track Adjustment Tables in Volume One, Section 2 - Installation.
5. Shunt-test the track in accordance with the policies of your railroad signal department.
6. Verify that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can run in its most permissive and most restrictive states. (Verify
that a vital code rate received causes an aspect less restrictive than stop to be displayed with a
corresponding vital code rate and cab rate transmitted to the rear. Then, verify that shunting the track
puts the system back to its most restrictive state.)
7. Verify the vital inputs on the VTI-2S, if used, are functioning properly. Verify the system responds to
each vital input in its energized state, and in its de-energized state.
8. If cab signals are used, verify that at least one cab signal rate can be properly applied to each track.

Retest Guide
VIO-44R (Vital 4 Input / 4 Output) Module

1. Start with the ElectroLogIXS Power Switch in the OFF position. Turn the ElectroLogIXS ON and
verify the system restarts without error. Verify all health LEDs are illuminated. Verify that no alarm
messages are displayed on the CDU-1.
information.
take place.
VIO-86S (Vital 8 Input / 6 Output) Module

1. The VIO-86S Module may be removed or installed with power applied. Verify all health LEDs are
illuminated. Verify that no alarm messages are displayed on the CDU-1.
information.
take place.
Replicating Existing Sites

Most of the typical cut-in testing of an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 site involves verification testing of the
application software. Therefore, once the application software and associated PTC Mapping file is tested
for a given application, re-verification of the software is no longer required, and testing can be reduced
accordingly.
WARNING The guideline for replicating existing sites is based on the installed
software being identical to software that was already tested. The identity
of the software must be determined by using the ElectroLogIXS/EC5
system to read the EPROM, and not just by reading the label on the
EPROM. Software identity should be determined by reading the following
data from the Web GUI or CDU display; For the application software,
record the ATK EPROM CRC and checksum from the CDU or Web GUI
along with the values of any vital configuration settings (vital soft
switches). For the executive software, record the executive software
version displayed by the CDU or Web GUI. For PTC installations, record
the PTC Mapping file CRC and applicability settings as displayed on the
Web GUI. If a unit has different CRC values or different vital configuration
settings or PTC applicability settings then it cannot be considered a
replicated site. Failure to adequately test the ElectroLogIXS / EC5 unit

Upgrading the application software
At existing properly functioning in-service sites, the following is recommended:
expected.
2. Verify that all the health LEDs are illuminated and that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.

• Debounce Times
• WIU Address
4. Test the first site with a full cut-in test.
5. Test additional sites that have:

• Identical executive software
• Identical application software
• Identical PTC Mapping file
• Identical PTC Configuration file
• Identical applications (same aspects used, same code rates used, same I/O, same vital
configuration settings, etc.)
• Identical PTC configurations (applicability settings, debounce times, except WIU and source
address)
6. The retest should include a verification that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can run its most permissive and
restrictive states. (For example, verify that the system properly functions with an aspect less restrictive
than stop displayed in each direction, and verify that the system properly responds to a shunt in each
direction.)
8. If the application is different than that which was already tested (for instance, a different aspect is
displayed), then a full cut-in test is required.
9. If the PTC Mapping file and application program pair are different than that which was already tested,
then a complete test of PTC Devices and device states is required.

Retest Guide
Selecting a different application program within the existing software EPROM
At existing properly functioning in-service sites, the following recommended:
expected.
2. Verify that all the health LEDs are illuminated and that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.

• Debounce Times
• WIU Address
4. The first site should be tested with a full cut-in test.
5. Additional sites that have:
• Identical application software EPROM

• The identical application program selected within the EPROM
• Identical PTC Mapping file
• Identical applications (same aspects used, same code rates used, same I/O, same vital configuration
settings, etc.)
• Identical PTC configurations (applicability settings, debounce settings, except WIU and source
address)
6. The retest should include a verification that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 can run its most permissive and
restrictive states. (For example, verify that the system properly functions with an aspect less restrictive
than stop displayed in each direction, and verify that the system properly responds to a shunt in each
direction.)
ID straps if applicable) are set correctly. If the application is different than that which was already
tested (for instance, a different aspect is displayed), then a full cut-in test is required.
8. If the PTC Mapping file is different than that which was already tested, then a test of the mapped PTC
statuses is required.
Upgrading the Executive Software
At existing in-service sites, follow the retesting guidelines listed for the VPM Module in this section.

Installation of New Sites

Installation of a new site requires checking the system wiring, vital and non-vital inputs and outputs, the
applications, vital configuration parameters and PTC Settings.
1. Confirm that all wiring and connections are correct per the site drawings.
2. Select the desired application program and verify the CRC and checksum information displayed is
as expected.
3. Load the PTC Mapping file and verify the mapping file CRC is as expected
4. Verify that all module health LEDs are illuminated and that no alarm messages are displayed on the
CDU-1.
5. Using the CDU and WebGUI, verify and enter as required, all configuration information including
but not limited to:

• Lamp Voltages
• Timer Values
• Debounce Times
• WIU Address
• WIU Enabled
6. Test the site with a complete system and functional cut-in test.
7. Additional sites that have the identical executive software, identical application software, identical
application and PTC mapping file may be candidates for minimized retesting. Refer to Replicating
Existing Sites in this section for more information.
8. Retest PTC messaging behavior to confirm the updated application logic produces the correct
device state values for each PTC Device in each state. Retesting may be performed at the fielded
site or in a lab environment using an identically configured system with the same application and
PTC mapping files.

Specifications
Section 10 – Specifications
Contents
ElectroLogIXS VLC/EC5 System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
EC5 System Specifications ....................................................... 10-4

Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Lamp Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Power Detection Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Auxiliary Inputs (Vital) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Non-Vital Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Directional Stick Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Track Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Cab Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
60 Hz Rail Rejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Audio Frequency Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Operating Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
ElectroLogIXS VLC/EC5 Module Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7

Control Display Unit (CDU-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Central Power Supply (CPS-2) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
Central Power Supply (CPS-3) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Communications Input/Output (CIO-1) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Communications Input/Output (CIO-1A, CIO-2AB) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Communications Input/Output (CIO-CLA) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Communications Input/Output (CIO-2A) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Communications Input/Output (CIO-MD) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Communications Input/Output (CIO-MDA) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Communications Input/Output (CIO-PCA) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Chassis Information (CI) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Chassis Information (CI-2) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Chassis Information (UCI-3) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Ground Fault Detector (GFD-1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vital Input/Output (VIO-44S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vital Input/Output (VIO-44R) Redundant Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Vital Input/Output (VIO-86S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Normal/Standby (NSM-1) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-R16S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
CAB Signal (CAB-16S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Vital Input / Output (VIO-1010S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15


Specifications
Section 10 – Specifications
ElectroLogIXS VLC/EC5 System Specifications
A
B
C D
323-002G
Figure 10-1, 9-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions.
Dimensions
Maximum Overall Height A 24 ½" (622mm)
Distance Between Mounting Holes B 7" (178mm)
Depth C 11 ¼" (286mm)
Width D 19 1/16" (484mm)

Environmental
Operating Temperature -40E to +70E C
Storage Temperature -55E to +85E C
Relative Humidity 20-95% (non-condensing)
Power Requirements
Battery Input Voltage 9.5 to 16.5 VDC
Allowable ripple Up to 2Vac peak to peak
Current Draw Maximum current draw can be calculated per ElectroLogIXS VLC/EC5
system by adding the total maximum Power Consumption for each
module, in Watts, installed in the system (with the exception of the
CPS) per the specifications for each module. Dividing the total
number of watts by 12 VDC gives the maximum current draw for the
ElectroLogIXS VLC/EC5 system as configured.
Figure 10-1a, 4-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions.

Specifications
Dimensions
Depth C 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm)
Width D 16.04" (~16 1/16" or 407.42mm)
Figure 10-1b, 1-Slot Chassis Installation Dimensions.

Depth C 11.10" (~11 1/8" or 281.9mm)
Width D 8.25” (~ 8 ¼” or 209.6 mm)

EC5 System Specifications
Figure 10-2, EC5 Chassis Dimensions
Dimensions
Height A 13"
Depth B 11"
Width C 19.06"
Weight (approximately) 26 lbs

Specifications
Environmental
Operating Temperature -40 to +70 C

Storage Temperature -40 to +85 C
Relative Humidity 20-90% (non-condensing)
Lamp Outputs
2 Lamp output groups per VLD-C6S Module

3 Lamp outputs per group
Power Detection Input
1 per unit may be used with POR relay or AC power adapter
Auxiliary Inputs (Vital)
4 two-wire inputs per VIO-44S Module

2 two wire inputs per VTI-2S Module
10 one-wire inputs per VIO-1010S Module
Each input is 2000 VAC isolated
10 mA ±20% @ 10 VDC
Non-Vital Inputs/Outputs
4 non-vital inputs
4 per VLD-C6S Module
Directional Stick Logic
Available for any unit as part of applications software.
Track Circuits
2 Track circuits per VTI-2S Module

Track filtering of 15 Vrms for 40 Hz and higher (without external filter).
Code Rates
Standard Cab Rates: EC II, EC III, EC 4

Transit Rates: Cab signal applications
PDF Rates: New code rates for transit
Electrified Rates: For use with electrified applications
Cab Signals
2 two-wire cab signal outputs per VTI-2S Module

16 one-wire cab signal outputs per CAB-16S
Each cab signal output is 2000 VAC isolated
Cab Rates: Standard, Ultra Cab, Custom

Relay Outputs
4 two-wire outputs per VIO-44S Module

10 one-wire outputs per VIO-1010S Module
Each two-wire output is 2000 VAC isolated
One-wire outputs are not isolated from each other, but are 2000 VAC isolated from the rest of the
system.
Relay impedance: 150 ohm minimum
60 Hz Rail Rejection
Direct Rail 10 Vrms (without external filter)

Electrified Rail Interface 100 V peak, up to 8 cycles
70 V peak, continuous
Audio Frequency Compatibility
156 Hz and above
Operating Voltage
Battery Input Voltage 9.5 to 16.5 VDC

Specifications
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Module Specifications

Control Display Unit (CDU-1)
Input Voltage: +5 Vdc ±10%
Power Consumption: 2 Watts Maximum
Connection: EIA-232-E
Width: 5 ¾" (146mm)
Height: 5 ½" (140mm)
Depth: 1" (25mm)
Display: 2 line x 20-character
User Interface: 4 x 4 keypad
Central Power Supply (CPS-1) Module
Input Voltage: +9.5 to +16.5 VDC
Output Voltage: +5.2 VDC ±5%
AC Ripple Voltage: Up to 2 Vp-p bounded by the minimum and maximum system power
Maximum Power Output: 25 Watts
Width: 1 c " (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)

Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-2) Module
Power Consumption: # 4Watts

Input Voltage: +5 VDC +10/-4%
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Vital Peripheral Master (VPM-3) Module
Power Consumption: 8 Watts maximum (no USB connected device)

10.5 Watts maximum with USB 2.0 device attached.
Input Voltage: +5 VDC +10/-4%
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)

Specifications
Communications Input/Output (CIO-1) Module
Input Voltage: +5 VDC ±10%
Power Consumption: 1.5 Watts Maximum
Width: 1 c” (29mm)
Height: 5 ½” (140mm)
Depth: 7 7/16” (189mm)
Isolation: 2000 Vrms
Interface: RS-232 (EIA-232-E Asynchronous)
Communication Range: Up to 50 feet for communications that do not extend beyond the
instrument housing

Depth: 7 7/16” (189mm)
Interface: RS-232 (EIA-232-E Asynchronous or Synchronous)
Communication Range: Up to 50 feet for communications that do not extend beyond the
instrument housing

Depth: 7 7/16” (189mm)
Interface: RS-422 (EIA-530 Asynchronous or Synchronous)
Communication Range: Up to 4,000 feet for communications that extend beyond the
instrument housing with appropriate surge protection

Communications Input/Output (CIO-1A, CIO-2AB) Module
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Interface: EIA-232-E (Asynchronous)
Communication Range: Up to 50 feet (15m) for communications that do not extend beyond the
instrument housing
Communications Input/Output (CIO-CLA) Module
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Interface: EIA-232-E (Asynchronous), Diagnostic Port (Asynchronous), or LCP (Current Loop)
instrument housing
Communications Input/Output (CIO-2A) Module
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Interface: EIA-232-E (Asynchronous or Synchronous)
instrument housing

Specifications
Communications Input/Output (CIO-MD) Module
Depth: 7 7/16” (189mm)
Communication Range: Up to 4,000 feet (1219m) for communications that extend beyond the
Communications Input/Output (CIO-MDA) Module
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Communication Range: Up to 4,000 feet (1219m) for communications that extend beyond the
Communications Input/Output (CIO-PCA) Module
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Interface: Ethernet or EIA-232-E (Asynchronous or Synchronous)
instrument housing

Chassis Information (CI) Module
Power Consumption: < 0.5 Watts

Width: 2 ¾" (70mm)
Height: 2 c" (54mm)
Depth: 1 d" (35mm)
Application EPROM:
Size: 1 MBit 4 MBit (for multiple application files on one EPROM)
Type: 27C010-12 27C040-12
P/N: 003662-000 003662-020
Chassis Information (CI-2) Module

Width: 2 ¾" (70mm)
Height: 2 c" (54mm)
Depth: 1 d" (35mm)
Application EPROM:
Size: 1 MBit 2 MBit 4 MBit (for multiple application

files on one EPROM)
Type: 27C010-12 27C0120-120/100/12 27C040
P/N: 003662-000 003662-005/006/010 003662-020
Chassis Information Module (UCI-3) Module

Width: 2 ¾" (70mm)
Height: 2 c" (54mm)
Depth: 1 d" (35mm)
Application EPROM:
Size: 1 MBit 2 MBit 4 MBit (for multiple application

files on one EPROM)
Type: 29F010-12 28F020-12 27C040-12
P/N: 003632-100 003632-005 003662-020

Specifications
Ground Fault Detector (GFD-1)
Power Consumption: 3 Watts maximum
System Input Voltage: +5.0 VDC ±10%, 8.0 to 16.5 VDC
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Vital Input/Output (VIO-44S) Module
Vital Input/Output Pairs 4
Power Consumption: 1.0 Watt maximum (no outputs)

10 Watts maximum (all outputs at max. load)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)
Vital Input/Output (VIO-44R) Redundant Module
Vital Inputs 4 (voltage range of 9.0-16.5 VDC)
Vital Outputs 4 (the vital output connectors accepts up to 12 AWG wire with PVC
insulation rated at 1KV or 14 AWG wire with PVC insulation rated at 3KV)
Power Consumption: 1.0 Watt maximum (no outputs on)

31 Watts maximum (all outputs at max 50 ohm load)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)
Vital Input/Output (VIO-86S) Module
Vital Inputs 8 (voltage range of 9.0-16.5 VDC)
Vital Outputs 6 (the vital output connectors accepts up to 16 AWG wire with PVC
insulation rated at 3KV)
Power Consumption: 1.0 Watt maximum (no outputs)

37 Watts maximum (all outputs at max. load)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)

Normal/Standby (NSM-1) Module
Power Consumption: 13 Watts maximum

System Input Voltage: +5.0 VDC ±10%
Width: 1 c" (29mm)
Depth: 8 f" (225mm)
Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-C6S) Module
Power Consumption: 2.1 Watts maximum (no outputs energized)

6 (two banks of three lamp drivers)
2.5 Watts maximum 1 lamp on each bank and all inputs / outputs energized
(Equipment Battery)
75 Watts maximum (Lamp Battery)
Non-Vital Input 4
System Input Voltage: +5.0 VDC ±10%,
9.5 to 16.5 VDC (Lamp Battery)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)
Vital Lamp Driver (VLD-R16S) Module
Power Consumption: 2.1 Watts maximum (no outputs energized)

16 (two banks of eight lamp drivers)
2.5 Watts maximum 1 lamp on each bank and all inputs / outputs energized
(Equipment Battery)
640 Watts maximum (External Lamp Battery)
9.5 to 16.5 VDC (Lamp Battery)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)
CAB Signal (CAB-16S) Module
Power Consumption: 2.5 Watts maximum

16 (cab signal outputs)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)

Specifications
Vital Input / Output (VIO-1010S) Module
Power Consumption: 1.8 Watts (all inputs / outputs energized)

10 track inputs and 10 track outputs per track)
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)
Vital Track Interface (VTI-2S) Module
Power Consumption: 2 track interfaces, 2 vital inputs, and 2 cab signal outputs 4.3 Watts
(transmitting and receiving codes on both tracks cab outputs
operating, inputs energized.
Width: 1 f" (48mm)
Height: 11 ¼" (286mm)
Depth: 9 f" (251mm)


Appendix A - Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines
Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines
Contents
Direct Computer to ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Appendix A-i

Appendix A-ii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines
Direct Computer to ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP Connection

Establishing the IP address and subnet mask are necessary before a device (e.g. laptop computer, PDA, etc.)
can communicate with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. If ElectroLogIXS/EC5 access is to be accomplished
across a network, consult the network administrator for the proper settings. If Web GUI access is being
done via a directly connected computer, it may be necessary to set the computer’s IP address manually. To
do so;
1. Find the connection to be used under the Network Connections dialog (Start -> Settings -> Network
Connections).
2. Highlight the connection, right-click and select properties. The Local Area Connection properties
dialog box will appear.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Appendix A-1
Scroll down to the Internet

Protocol (TCP/IP) item.
373-0742
3. Scroll to the bottom of the properties window and highlight “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Select the
Properties button.
Select "Use the following

IP address:"
Enter the IP Address
Enter the Subnet mask
373-0743

Appendix A-2 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
4. Select “Use the following IP address” and enter the IP address for the computer. If directly connecting
to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 use an IP address that matches the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP address in all but
the last number for the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Ethernet port to be used for the connection. Use the same
Subnet mask value as the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. Click ‘OK.’ Note: The current value of the
ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses are available on the CDU under the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION /
Ethernet Config menu.
5. Connect the computer to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Ethernet port via an Ethernet cable. Confirm that the
Ethernet connection LED(s) are lit on the ElectroLogIXS/EC5. If so, the computer should now be able
to communicate with the ElectroLogIXS/EC5.
Note: Some configuration settings / configuration scripting in Internet Explorer may keep the browser
from directly connecting to the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 IP addresses. Contact the network
administrator if issues are encountered.
6. After the Web GUI session has completed, follow the above steps to return the computer IP settings to
their original values.

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Appendix A-3

Appendix A-4 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Appendix B - Field Settable IDs
Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines
Contents
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1
Selection of Network IDs for ElectroLogIXS/EC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-2

Network ID Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-3
Railroad Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-6
Application/Site Designer Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-6
Installer/Maintainer Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-8

100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Appendix B-i

Appendix B-ii All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines

• Multi-drop serial communications

• Local Area Networks (LANs)
• Wide Area Networks (WANs)
• Fiber-Optic backbones
• Radio communications
injury.
WARNING An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical


ElectroLogIXS/EC5 use only the value supplied on the application
Definitions
Remote Link – A vital communications link between two specific safety critical devices, using a specific
transmission media. Two devices may have multiple remote links between them.
Network IDs – 16-bit parameters identifying the devices at each end of a remote link for the transmission of
safety critical information. They ensure that the device receiving a vital message is the intended recipient
and that the originating device is the expected sender.
Local Network ID – The Network ID parameter that identifies the local device for a particular remote link.
Remote Network ID – The Network ID parameter that identifies the remote device for a particular remote
link.
Source Network ID – The field of a RP1992/RP2000/RP2009 message that identifies the sending device.
100373-010 AR0 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. Appendix B-1
Destination Network ID – The field of a RP1992/RP2000/RP2009 message that identifies the intended
recipient device.
Selection of Network IDs for ElectroLogIXS/EC5

For each remote link in an ElectroLogIXS/EC5 application, there must be two Network IDs selected:
• The Local Network ID is the Network ID that the system uses for the Source Network ID field of
outgoing messages. It identifies the message as originating from this system. It is also the Network ID
that the system requires for the Destination Network ID field of incoming messages on that remote
link. It identifies this system as the intended recipient.
• The Remote Network ID is the Network ID that the system uses for the Destination Network ID field
of outgoing messages. It identifies the system that is the intended recipient of the message. It is also
the Network ID that the system requires for the Source Network ID field of incoming messages on that
remote link. It confirms that the expected system originated the message.
For a particular remote link, the Local and Remote Network IDs must be complementary on the two
devices. For example, two devices System A and System B have a remote link. The Local Network ID for
that remote link on System A must be the same as the Remote Network ID on System B for that remote
link. The Remote Network ID for that remote link on System A must be the same as the Local Network ID
on System B for that remote link.
A device may have multiple Local Network IDs and Remote Network IDs, up to one for each remote link.
The requirement is that on a given physical network (Ethernet LAN, WAN, radio net, etc.) no two systems
have the same Local Network ID and that no one ElectroLogIXS/EC5 has identical Local/Remote Network
ID pairs for different vital remote links.
Simple Network ID Example
EIXS/EC5-A_ID=4, EIXS/EC5-B_ID=5
EIXS/EC5-A EIXS/EC5_ID-A=1, EIXS/EC5-B_ID=2

EIXS/EC5-B
EIXS/EC5-A_ID=4 EIXS/EC5-B_ID=2
EIXS/EC5-C_ID=3 EIXS/EC5-C_ID=3
EIXS/EC5-C
• EIXS/EC5-A communicating on the hardwire network to EIXS/EC5-B uses Local Network ID of 1.

That will be the Source Network ID when sending to EIXS/EC5-B and the Destination Network ID
when receiving from EIXS/EC5-B. On this remote link, EIXS/EC5-B will use a Local Network ID of
2. That will be the Source Network ID when sending to EIXS/EC5-A and the Destination Network ID
when receiving from EIXS/EC5-A.

Appendix B-2 All rights reserved. Subject to restrictions on the cover or first page. 100373-010 AR0
• EIXS/EC5-A communicating on the radio network to EIXS/EC5-B uses a Local Network ID of 4 and a
Remote Network ID of 5. On this remote link, EIXS/EC5-B uses a Local Network ID of 5 and a
Remote Network ID of 4.
• EIXS/EC5-A communicating on the hardwire network to EIXS/EC5-C uses a Local Network ID of 4

and a Remote Network ID of 3. On this remote link, EIXS/EC5-C uses a Local Network ID of 3 and a
Remote Network ID of 4.
Note that on the hardwire network, EIXS/EC5-A has two different Local Network IDs. For the remote link
to EIXS/EC5-B, it has a Local Network ID of 1. For the remote link to EIXS/EC5-C, it has a Local
Network ID of 4. No other device on the hardwire network can have a Local Network ID of 1 or 4. They
must be unique to EIXS/EC5-A.
On the radio network, EIXS/EC5-B has a Local Network ID of 5. No other device on this radio network can
have a Local Network ID of 5. It must be unique to EIXS/EC5-B.
Network ID Conflicts
Network ID Conflict - Example 1

EIXS/EC5-B
EIXS/EC5-C
Fiber Optic
Backbone ~
~
EIXS/EC5-D EIXS/EC5_ID-A=1, EIXS/EC5-B_ID=2

EIXS/EC5-E
EIXS/EC5-F

Two crossings belong to the same railway and have identical applications and Local/Remote Network IDs.
Crossing A and Crossing B may be many miles apart, but if they have a physical connection, there is the
potential for conflict. Messages from EIXS/EC5-B intended for EIXS/EC5-A may also be received and
acted upon by EIXS/EC5-D.
EIXS/EC5_ID-A=1, EIXS/EC5-B_ID=2
EIXS/EC5-D EIXS/EC5-E
EIXS/EC5-F
EIXS/EC5_ID-A=1, EIXS/EC5-B_ID=2
EIXS/EC5-A EIXS/EC5-B
EIXS/EC5-C
Two crossings belong to different railways, but have identical applications and Local/Remote Network IDs.
(They might be ‘canned’ applications furnished by a 3rd party application developer). If they are in
proximity to each other, there is potential for conflict.
For instance, EIXS/EC5-A and EIXS/EC5-E may not be within radio range of each other, but EIXS/EC5-B
and EIXS/EC5-D may be. Messages from EIXS/EC5-B intended for EIXS/EC5-A are also received and
acted upon by EIXS/EC5-D. The radio conflict can be subtle. Crossing B might not have existed when
Crossing A was set up. On the day Crossing B was installed and tested, radio communications might have
been poor and the conflict not detected. On a day with better radio conditions, the conflict manifests itself.


EIXS/EC5-B
EIXS/EC5-C
EIXS/EC5-A is configured to communicate with EIXS/EC5-B over a radio link using a Local Network ID
of 4 and a Remote Network ID of 3. EIXS/EC5-A is also configured to communicate with EIXS/EC5-C
over an Ethernet link using a Local Network ID of 4 and a Remote Network ID of 3. Once messages are
received in EIXS/EC5-A, it cannot vitally distinguish which remote link, and consequently which remote
EIXS/EC5, originated the message. Messages from EIXS/EC5-B intended for EIXS/EC5-A may be acted
upon as though they originated in EIXS/EC5-C.
An ElectroLogIXS/EC5 must not be configured with identical Local/Remote Network ID pairs for different
vital remote links, even if those vital remote links are on different communications nets. If duplicate
Local/Remote Network ID pairs are used for redundancy, the application/installation must ensure that only
one of the duplicate pairs is active/operational at a given time.

Railroad Responsibilities
The railroad is responsible for:
• Providing configuration management tools for Application/Site designers’ use.

• Supporting Application/Site designers with sufficient resources (manpower and time) to adequately
survey sites for potential Network ID conflicts.
• Communicating/negotiating with other railway agencies when the potential for Network ID conflict
exists.
Application/Site Designer Responsibilities

For Generic Application Development
Field settable Network IDs allow for the generation of Generic Applications that can be tailored to specific
sites without recompiling the application.
The Local Network ID and Remote Network ID for each remote link in the application may be set to a
range. This is accomplished by selecting Minimum and Maximum Network IDs (both Local and Remote)
for that remote link in the application development tool.
If a Minimum and Maximum Network ID are identical, the Network ID is fixed and cannot be set in the
field. The only way to change the Network ID is to re-compile the application.
The Designer of a Generic Application is responsible for:
• Identifying the remote links for the Application.

• Utilizing configuration management techniques, identify potential for conflict with other applications
and nets (including those of other railroads).
• Assigning and setting a Local Network ID range (Minimum/Maximum) for every remote link in the
Application.
• Assigning and setting a Remote Network ID range (Minimum/Maximum) for every remote link in the
Application.
• Compiling, validating and documenting (including configuration management activities) the Generic
Application.

For Site-Specific Tailoring of Generic Applications
To use a Generic Application at a specific site, the particular Local and Remote Network IDs within the
pre-defined ranges for that application at that location must be defined and documented.
The Designer performing Site-Specific tailoring of Generic Applications is responsible for:
• Identifying the remote links and associated communications nets for the site.
• Identifying and surveying all devices communicating on the physical layer of each net to ensure that
the Local Network IDs assigned to each device on those nets are unique. If there is the possibility of
inter-railroad conflict (e.g., radio links), the railroad must coordinate with the potentially conflicting
railroad(s) to ensure that the conflict is avoided.
• Assigning a unique (on each communications net) Local Network ID from within the pre-defined range
for every remote link in the Application.
• Assigning a Remote Network ID from within the pre-defined range for every remote link in the
Application.
• Verifying that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 contains no duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs.
• Documenting (including configuration management activities) the Local and Remote Network IDs for
all remote links for that location, ensuring that they are recorded in the application circuit plans.
• Supporting installation and maintenance staff when potential field Network ID conflicts are reported.
For Site-Specific Application Development
Site-specific applications are to be used in one chassis only. They are unique and not intended to be re-used
except as a starting point for another Site-Specific or a Generic Application.
The Site-Specific Application Designer is responsible for:
• Identifying the remote links and associated communications nets for the Site-Specific Application.
• Identifying and surveying all devices communicating on the physical layer of each net to ensure that
the Local Network IDs assigned to each device on those nets are unique. If there is the possibility of
inter-railroad conflict (e.g., radio links), the railroad must coordinate with the potentially conflicting
railroad(s) to ensure that the conflict is avoided.
• Assigning and setting a unique (on each communications net) Local Network ID
(Minimum/Maximum) for every remote link in the Application. For a Site-Specific Application,
Minimum and Maximum Local Network IDs should be the same to prevent changes in the field.
• Assigning and setting a Remote Network ID (Minimum/Maximum) for every remote link in the
Application. For a Site-Specific Application, Minimum and Maximum Remote Network IDs should be
the same to prevent changes in the field.
• Verifying that the ElectroLogIXS/EC5 contains no duplicate Local/Remote Network ID pairs.
• Compiling, validating and documenting (including configuration management activities) the
Site-Specific Application.
• Ensuring Local and Remote Network IDs for each remote link are recorded in the application circuit
plans.
• Supporting installation and maintenance staff when potential field Network ID conflicts are reported.

Installer/Maintainer Responsibilities
For New Installations and Changes of Application
The Installer / Maintainer is responsible for:
• Entering the Local and Remote Network IDs (if configurable) for each remote link exactly as
designated on the application circuit plans.
• If no Network ID is designated, contacting the Application/Site Designer to correct the oversight

before proceeding with installation.
• Confirming that the Local and Remote Network IDs for each remote link have been set as designated
on the application circuit plans.
• Examining the system in operation for erratic behavior (Alternating Aspects, pumping gates on a
highway grade crossing, etc.) that might indicate a communications addressing conflict.
• Contacting support personnel (i.e., the Site Application Designer) and requesting an analysis of
Network ID addresses if such behavior is observed and cannot be corrected by investigation of other
possible causes (e.g., wiring error, other parameter setup errors, faulty hardware).
• Repeating the above actions if Network ID conflict resolutions result in updated application circuit
plans containing different Local or Remote Network IDs for any remote link.
DO NOT leave an erratically behaving unit in service.
DO NOT select Local or Remote Network IDs for a remote link other than the ones designated on the
application circuit plans for any remote link in an attempt to diagnose or resolve possible Network ID
conflicts. Authority of field personnel is limited to setting the Local and Remote Network IDs to the values
designated on the application circuit plans.
For Upgrades/ Repairs
When ElectroLogIXS/EC5 maintenance operations occur that might result in loss or inadvertent change of
system parameters (e.g., certain Executive Software upgrades, chassis or backplane replacement, etc.) the
Local and Remote Network IDs must be confirmed before the system is put back into service.
The Installer / Maintainer is responsible for:
• Confirming that the Local and Remote Network IDs for each remote link are set as designated on the
application circuit plans.
• Performing the actions listed under ‘New Installations and Changes of Application’ for any Local or
Remote Network ID that does not conform to the application circuit plans.


Manual - ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 - 100373-010 Rev AR0

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Manual - ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5 - 100373-010 Rev AR0

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GE Transportation Systems

ElectroLogIXS VLC and EC5

AA0 02/28/03 Initial Release

AC0 02/01/06 Added new modules (VLD-R16S, VIO-44R, and VIO-86S)

AD0 01/16/07 Minor typographical errors fixed

AG0 04/16/08 Added CI-2 Flash Memory application download.

AH0 06/16/08 Incorporated 4-Slot Chassis.

AI0 09/08/08 Added BCS Protocol and description of CIO-2AB module.

AK0 12/15/08 Incorporated Connector Probing and 4-Slot Chassis.

AL0 06/01/09 Update for EDVP release of ElectroLogIXS.

AM0 08/26/09 Update for EDVP 2 release of ElectroLogIXS.

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

1. Prior to uploading the new VPM-3 Executive

2. Place the VPM-3 in Update (Boot) Mode as follows:

3. Connect the computer Ethernet RJ45 port to one of

Note: The default VPM-3 IP addresses are

4. Using a Web Browser, navigate to the IP address of the

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

Software Activation -- Activate Executive and PTC Mapping files

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

775$&.&85,17 ;0,79 9 , $ 5(&(,9(, $ 75$160,77(6702'( $/7(51$7,1*&2'(

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

Safety Alert Symbols

WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could

CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may

Static Sensitive Symbols for Equipment Handling Instructions

Module To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

Component To protect against ESD damage to electronic equipment containing

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

General Safety Instructions

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

CAUTION Modifications or changes not expressly approved by GE

How to Order an Additional Copy or a Revised Printing

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

Chapter 1 – Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2 – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3 – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4 – Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5 – CDU Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6 – Web Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7 – Terminal Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8 – Secure Shell Program (SSH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9 – ElectroLogIXS/EC5 Retest Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10 – Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Appendix A – Ethernet / IP Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix A-1

Appendix B – Network ID Usage Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B-1

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

ElectroLogIXS/EC5 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

ElectroLogIXS Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

EC5 Physical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

EC5 Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

ElectroLogIXS General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

EC5 General Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Track Circuit Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Track Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Freight Code Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Vital Remote Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Positive Train Control EMP Class D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

VPM-2/VPM-2+ Vital Peripheral Master Module P/N: 251395-000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

© 2012 GE Transportation Systems Global Signaling, LLC.

775$&.&85,17 ;0,79 9 , $ 5(&(,9(, $ 75$160,77(6702'( $/7(51$7,1*&2'(